EP1116-0 ControlUnits Relays 060217

Control Units &
Relays Catalog
(06/02/17)
∏On November 1, 2005,
changed its name to .
New Company Logo
In November 2005, IDEC celebrated its 60th anniversary.

Marking this important occasion, we decided to change our name
to IDEC CORPORATION along with a new corporate logo.
Since the establishment in November 1945, we have committed
ourselves to create the Optimum Human Machine Interface.
We have served the market by providing high quality products
which we developed with progressive and proactive attitude.
The IDEC Group is presently made up of 21 companies, 8 in
Japan and 13 overseas. With the new company name and logo
which symbolizes the IDEC group identity, we will further
strengthen the relationships between the companies and harness
the collective strengths of the group to contribute to the future of
Automation. Our accumulated skill, know-how, and human
resource will be leveraged to achieve our goal: To become your
best partner.
(06/02/17)
2
The message in the new corporate logo:
“Good human relationships at every stage
and a change in thinking”
The white “I” in combination with the neighboring IDEC red “I” symbolizes close human relationships.
The contrast between the colors represents:
(1) support behind the scenes and
(2) a change in thinking throughout the company.
IDEC will be one step ahead in the expansion of our business and growth toward the future.
The basic color IDEC red represents new dynamic energy and power, with passion, commitment,
spontaneity, and aggressiveness for the future.
The wide expanse in IDEC gray to the left represents:
(1) new possibilities with creation of added values,
(2) expansion of business areas
(3) growth toward the future brought forth through a wide range of collaboration and partnerships, and
(4) the IDEC attitude of running one step ahead in the new age (21st century).
The corporate shoulder phrase:
The IDEC Group, together with customers, will choose the best solution to
your needs. We will develop and provide the progressive products, systems,
and solutions to create the future of automation and beyond.
We will reinforce our cooperative

relationships inside the IDEC
Group to serve your needs better.
(06/02/17)
3
A wide variety of Control Units and Relays
LW Series Flush Silhouette Control Units ø22mm HW Series
Dual Pushbutton Switches
Page 87
ø22mm LW Series Control Units

Page 17
ø22mm HW Series Control Units
Page 99
ø22mm YW Series Control Units

Page 35
ø22mm HW Series
Jumbo Dome Pilot Lights
Page 123
ø22mm TW Series Control Units
Page 85
Page 137
(06/02/17)
4
for your automation and beyond...
ø25mm TWS Series Control Units HE1B/2B/3B/5B Enabling Switches
HE1G Grip Switch
Page 177 Page 319
ø30mm Series Control Units RJ Series Slim Power Relays

SJ Series Relay Sockets
Page 337
Page 217
ø16mm XA Series / ø22mm XW Series RU/RR/RH/RM/RY Relays

Emergency Stop Switches Sockets
Page 301
Page 347
(06/02/17)
5
LW Series Flush Silhouette Control Units
See page 17.
Add Style to Your Panel
LW Series Flush Silhouette Control Units

Bezel Panel Lens Pilot Illuminated
Shape Pushbutton
Size Material Cut-out Type Light Pushbutton
˙ Flush
ø28 Metal ø25.3
Extended
Flush
ø28 Plastic ø25.3
Extended
˙ Flush
28 Plastic 24.5
Extended
(06/02/17)
6
Slimmer than Ever
2 mm
(Metal)
(Plastic)
L6/A6 Series Flush Silhouette Bezels

Bezel Panel Pilot Illuminated Key Illuminated Others
Shape Series Pushbutton Light
Size Material Cut-out Pushbutton Selector Selector Selector
˙ L6
(Separate Type)
ø24 Metal ø20.2 (Lever)
A6
(Unibody Type)
L6
(Separate Type)
ø24 Plastic ø20.2 (Lever)
A6
(Unibody Type)
L6
(Separate Type)
24 Plastic 20.2
A6
(Unibody Type)
L6
24 20.2 (Separate Type)
× Plastic × (Buzzer)
30 26.2 A6
(Unibody Type)
Note: For the L6 and A6 series, flush silhouette bezels are ordered separately to be combined with control units.
(06/02/17)
7
Innovative Design in Control Units
Enables Space-Savings and Safety
With Reliable Self-Cleaning
Rolling-Action Contacts
Save The new contact block design greatly

New Contact Blocks reduces the depth of the pushbuttons, illumi-
YW series nated pushbuttons, and selector switches
behind the panel. The new contact blocks
are 10 mm thick, so three contact blocks can
mount in one deck on a pushbutton or
selector switch. The full-voltage adapter for
illuminated pushbuttons is also 10 mm thick,
and can mount with two contact blocks in
one deck.
FA CB CBFACB
CB: Contact block
FA: Full-voltage adapter
10 10 10
CB
30
15 15
30
Self-Retained Locking Lever

Lock Unlock
➀
➁ ➀
The innovative plastic locking lever is self-

retained and eliminates the need for a sepa-
rate lever lock from pushbuttons, illuminated
pushbuttons, and selector switches.
To lock the locking lever with an operator
installed, simply turn the locking lever to the
right as viewed from the back. The latch
inside the locking lever firmly retains the
locking lever and withstands vibrations.
To unlock the locking lever, pull out the latch
inside the locking lever and turn the locking
lever to the left, then the operator can be
removed from the contact blocks.
(06/02/17)
8
ø22mm YW Series Control Units
Save Safety
See page 123. YW
series
Reliable
Safety
Integrated Finger-safe
Terminal Cover
Degree of Protection: IP20
The new YW contact blocks, full-voltage
adapter, and pilot light terminals feature
integrated finger-safe terminal covers to
prevent electrical shocks and ensure a
high degree of safety during wiring and
maintenance.
Reliable
Heavy-Duty Rugged Construction
The YW series control units are designed to
withstand harsh operating conditions in factory
automation environments. The rugged mechanical
design provides reliability in critical switching
applications.
Self-Cleaning Rolling-Action
Contacts
with Raked Contact Surface
The YW contact blocks feature a rolling action on the
movable contact and raked contact surfaces for
higher contact reliability. The contacts can switch a
wide range of loads from 5 mA at 3V DC up to 10A at
120V AC.
Raked Surface Rolling Action

After touching the stationary contact, the movable
contact starts to roll and cleans the contact surfaces.
Spring
Movable
Contact
Stationary
Contact
(1) Normal State (2) Rolling (3) Fully Depressed
(06/02/17)
9
Push-to-Lock, Pull/Turn-to-Reset
New Global Standard for Safety!
See page 301.
ø16mm XA and ø22mm XW Series
Emergency Stop Switches
Safe Break Action

ø22 XW Series
ø16 XA Series
Compact Size
48.7 mm
Same
dimensions for
any number 27.9 mm
of contacts
(Actual Size)
Up to 4 Poles of Contacts
New Safety Products

10
Safety World’s
Compact Size
New
First
Safe Break Action ø16 XA Series
When the contact block is detached from the operator, the cam Illuminated type available with the depth behind the panel 27.9 mm.
directly opens the NC main contacts (contacts are off). Up to 4 contacts!
Detaching the Contact Block
Operator
Contact Block
Closed
(ON)
Open
(OFF)
27.9
mm
Safety Features
Conventional Emergency Stop Switches XA/XW Series Emergency Stop Switches
Normal Status Latched Normal Status Latched
World's
ø22 XW Series Shortest
NC contacts: NC contacts:
The depth behind the panel:
NC contacts: NC contacts:
OFF (machine
ON (machine
can operate)
cannot
ON (machine
can operate)
OFF (machine
cannot Solder terminal: 37.1 mm
operate) operate)
Screw terminal: 48.7 mm
Up to 4 contacts save space.
High
High
Same dimensions
for any number of
Conventional contacts!
Energy
Energy
Emergency Stop Switch

NC contacts are always on
standby to turn on NC contacts are always on
Low
Low
(hazardous) standby to turn off (safe)
Normal Operator Stroke Latched Normal Operator Stroke Latched
With the XA and XW emergency stop switches, the energy level of the “on”
(closed) NC contacts is higher than that of the “off” (open) contacts. If the
contact block falls off due to excessive shocks, the NC contacts are always
inclined to turn off, thus ensuring safety by stopping the machine.
48.7
Direct Opening Action mm
IEC60947-5-5, 5.2, IEC60947-5-1, Annex K
Space Saving!
Safety Lock Mechanism
IEC60947-5-5, 6.2
Easy Operation Variety

Four terminal styles New
Push-to-lock, Pull/Turn-to-unlatch
The XA and XW emergency stop switches can be unlatched by
either pulling or turning the operator.
Unlatching by pulling Unlatching by turning

Screw Terminal Solder Terminal PC Board Terminal Connector Type
Two Button Colors
Bright Red Dark Red

Munsell 7.5R4.5/14 Munsell 5R4/12
11
AS-Interface Components
HE1B/2B/3B/5B Enabling Switches
HE1G Grip Switch See page 319.
What is an enabling switch?

Because operators use teach pendants in hazard- switch is lightly pressed and held in the mid posi-
ous environments performing teaching, system tion (position 2). Because it disables machine
changeover, and maintenance of robots, they must operation when released (position 1) or further
have protection against unpredictable motion of depressed (position 3) by a panicked operator, the
robots, and therefore teach pendants are equipped safety of operators using teach pendants or grip
with 3-position enabling switches. switches in hazardous environments is ensured.
An enabling switch is a 3-position (OFF-ON-OFF)
switch to allow a machine operation only when the
HG2S CC Pendant HE1G Grip Switch
Two HE1B Enabling

Switches inside
HE9Z-GSH51 Grip Switch Housing

HG1T Small Pendant + HE5B Enabling Switch
Held in
Left Hand HE3B Enabling
Held in Switch inside
Right Hand
(06/02/17)
12
Operation of enabling switches
The requirement for operation of 3-position enabling
switches (according to IEC 60204-1; 9.2.5.8):
When an enabling device is provided as a part of a sys- Position 1 OFF
tem, it shall be designed to allow motion when actuated
in one position only. In any other position motion shall be 1. Press lightly
stopped. 2. Release
– for a three-position type:
Position 2 ON
• position 1: off-function of the switch 4. Release
(actuator is not operated)
• position 2: enabling function 3. Press tightly
(actuator is operated in its mid position)
• position 3: off-function
(actuator is operated past its mid position) Position 3 OFF
When returning from position 3 to position 2, the function
shall be ended.
Terminal Contact Movable Contact
Disparity detection of two contacts

• A high level of safety—safety category 3 or higher (ISO 13849-1)—is Disparity Detection Circuit
required when an operator works near a hazard inside a safety for Dual Contacts
Both ON Machine can
guard. operate (normal)
Agree
When released to position 1, the contacts are opened (turned off) by 2-circuit Machine cannot
Both OFF
the force of a released spring. The 3-position enabling switches must input operate (normal)
be prepared for failures such as contact welding and short-circuits, Disagree
and a dual circuit is provided. Even if one contact fails, the remaining One ON, the Machine cannot
contact can disable machine operation. Furthermore, a disparity other OFF operate (failure of
enabling switch,
detection circuit is provided so that machine operation is disabled machine cannot
when a disparity between the two circuits is detected using a safety restart)
relay module.
Enabling
Device
International standards on enabling switches
• IEC 60204-1: 1997
9.2.4 Where it is necessary to suspend safeguarding, (e.g. for set- L (+)
ting or maintenance purposes), a mode selection device or means 24V DC
capable of being secured (e.g. locked) in the desired mode shall be
provided so as to prevent automatic operation. In addition, one or
more of the following means shall be provided: F1 ESC
- a portable control station (e.g. pendant) with an emergency stop External
Start Condition
device and, where appropriate, an enabling device. Where a porta-
ble station is in use, motion may be initiated only from that station. A1 S33 S34 13 23 33
• ISO 12100-2: 2003 Control mode for setting, teaching, pro- HR1S-AF
cess changeover, fault-finding, cleaning or maintenance Safety Relay Module
4.11.9 Where, for setting, teaching, process changeover, fault-find-
ing, cleaning or maintenance of machinery, a guard has to be dis- A2 S11 S12 S21 S22 14 24 34
placed or removed and/or a protective device has to be disabled, and
where it is necessary for the purpose of these operations for the Safety Output
machinery or part of the machinery to be put in operation, safety of S1
the operator shall be achieved using a specific control mode which Enabling
simultaneously: Switch
N (–)
- permits operation of the hazardous elements only by continuous
actuation of an enabling device, a hold-to-run control device or a
two-hand control device.
A method of changing an operation mode (auto/
• ANSI/RIA R15.06 manual) using the HS5B safety switch and grip
The pendant or teaching control device shall have an enabling style enabling switch (HE1G)
device using a three position switch which, when continuously held in
a detented position, permits motion. Release of or compression past
the midpoint detent of the device shall stop robot motion using cir-
cuitry consistent with 4.5.
Note: Tests have shown that human reaction to an emergency may be to
release an object, or hold on tighter, thus compressing an enabling device.
Design and installation of the enabling device should consider the ergonom-
ics issues of sustained activation.
• ANSI B11.19, 12.3.1.3

Enabling devices shall be designed and constructed to permit limited
and supervised machine motion while personnel are inside a hazard
area. Enabling switch is attached Enabling switch is
to the safety switch— detached from the safety
machine operates auto- switch—machine can be
matically. operated only manually.
(06/02/17)
13
See page 337.
RJ Series Slim Power Relays

Compact housing, large switching capacity.
Plug-in terminal relays suitable for control panels,
machine tools, and a wide variety of applications. Two Bobbin Colors
Large Switching
Capacity
Excellent
Durability
• Large Switching Capacity Black:

AC Coil
White:
DC Coil
Highly conductive materials
ensure stable electric
conduction of current.
• Excellent Durability
Our unique return spring
structure provides improved
durability and reliability of all
REG.-Nr. B312
mechanical parts.
Large Switching Capacity vs. Competitors Long Mechanical Life vs. Competitors
(maximum allowable switching current) AC Coil DC Coil
30 million 50 million
12A 8A operations minimum operations minimum
10A
imes
5A es
3 tim e! 2.5 t re!
mor mo
10 million 20 million
operations operations
RJ1 Competitors (Note) RJ2 Competitors (Note) RJ Competitors (Note) RJ Competitors (Note)
Note: According to published specifications in other manufacturers’ catalogs. Note: According to published specifications in other manufacturers’ catalogs.
ith a
o g n i tion w a!
High Visibility rec n are
Easy m inatio
i l l u
LED Indicator large
• IDEC’s Unique Light Guide Structure

An RJ relay can be easily identified with Light
the illuminating LED. Guide
• IEC-compliant Green Indication
(06/02/17)
14
Slim sockets save space.
RJ series relays can be mounted on DIN rails or panels using
SJ series relay sockets.
15.5 mm
71 mm
Release Lever
Relays can be easily removed
using release levers.
Easy Wiring!
• Standard Screw Terminal Type
SJ Socket
RJ Series Relays RU Series Relays
Versions Similar Dimensions
• Finger-safe Screw Terminal Type (IP20)
By combining with the RU series relays, the

contact capacity increases and more contact
configuration types become available.
Because the screw terminal size is M3 on both
sockets, wiring can be completed easily and
efficiently.
RoHS directive compliant (2002/95/EC)
The RJ series relays and the SJ series sockets do not contain
lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, PBB, or PBDE.
(06/02/17)
15
16 (06/02/17)
Flush Silhouette
LW Series Control Units
L6/A6 Series Accessories
(06/02/17) 17
Flush Silhouette LW Series Control Units
Flush bezel projects only 2 mm from front of panel
ø28 round and 28-mm square black plastic bezels. Round metallic bezels are also available.
• ø25.3-mm round panel cut-out, 24.5-mm square panel cut-out.
• Collective mounting is possible.
• Separate type control units with a locking lever enable easy
installation even when mounted collectively.
• Gold (gold-clad silver) or silver contacts.
• Degree of protection: IP65 (IEC 60529)
• UL recognized and CSA certified. EN compliant.
Safety Standards File No. or Organization
UL Recognition
UL
File No. E55996
CSA 166730 (LR21451)
TÜV Rheinland
EN60947-1
EN
EN60947-5-1
EC Low Voltage Directive
Specifications and Ratings
Contact Ratings Specifications

• Gold Contact Operating Temperature
–25 to +60°C (no freezing)
Illuminated units: –25 to +50°C
Maximum Voltage 250V AC/DC
Storage Temperature –40 to +80°
Thermal Current 3A
Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
Operating Voltage 30V DC 125V AC
Contact Resistance 50 mΩ maximum (initial value)
Operating Current
0.1A 0.1A Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
(resistive load)
Between live part and ground:
Contact Material Gold-clad silver 2,500V AC, 1 minute
Minimum applicable load (reference value): 5V AC/DC, 1mA Between terminals of different poles:
Switch Unit
Dielectric 2,500V AC, 1 minute
(Applicable range is subject to the operating condition and load.)
Strength Between terminals of the same poles:
• Silver Contact 1,000V AC, 1 minute
Operating Voltage 30V 125V 250V Illumination Between live part and ground:
Unit 2,500V AC, 1 minute
AC Resistive Load – 3A 2A
Operating extremes:
Operating 50/60Hz Inductive Load – 2A 1.5A Vibration Resistance
5 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm
Current Resistive Load 2A 0.4A – Damage limits: 1,000 m/s2
DC Shock Resistance
Operating extremes: 100 m/s2
Inductive Load 1A 0.2A –
Thermal Current 5A Mechanical Life Momentary: 1,000,000
(minimum operations) Maintained: 500,000
Contact Material Silver
Momentary: 100,000 (∗1)
AC inductive load: PF = 0.6 to 0.7 Electrical Life Maintained: 100,000 (∗2)
DC inductive load: L/R = 7 msec max. (minimum operations) ∗1 Switching frequency 1,800 operations/h
∗2 Switching frequency 900 operations/h
Degree of Protection IP65 (IEC 60529)
Solder/tab terminal no. 110
Terminal Style PC board terminal
Screw terminal
18 (06/02/17)
Flush Silhouette LW Series Control Units
LED Lamp Ratings (LSTD Type)
Type No. LSTD-6➁ LSTD-1➁ LSTD-2➁
Lamp Base BA9S/13
Rated Voltage 6V AC/DC 12V AC/DC 24V AC/DC
Voltage Range 6V AC/DC ±10% 12V AC/DC ±10% 24V AC/DC ±10%
AC A, R, W, Y: 17 mA 11 mA 11 mA
G, S: 8 mA
Current Draw
A, R, W, Y: 14 mA
DC G, S: 5.5 mA 10 mA 10 mA
Color Code ➁ A (amber), G (green), R (red), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
Lamp Base Color Same as illumination color
Voltage Marking Die stamped on the base
Life (reference value) Approx. 50,000 hours (The luminance is reduced to 50% the initial intensity when used on complete DC.)
A, R, W, Y
Internal Circuit
G, S
LED Chip
Protection Diode
Zener Diode
Mounting Hole Layout Ordering Information

• Round Type Standard Units
+0.2
ø25.3 -0.1
• Specify a button or lens color code in the Type No.
• All illuminated units are supplied with an LED lamp.
• All standard units are UL recognized, CSA certified, and
EN compliant (TÜV Rheinland).
28∗
28∗
• Square Type
+0.2
24.5 -0.1
28∗
28∗
Note: Mounting centers should be determined to ensure easy

operation.
∗ Screw terminal type: Vertical 40 mm, Horizontal 26 mm minimum
(06/02/17) 19
Flush Silhouette LW Series Pushbuttons
Flush Bezel (Round Metal Bezel) – Non-Illuminated
Type No.
Operation Contact ➀ Button Color
Shape Contact Solder/Tab PC Board
Type Material Screw Terminal Code
Terminal Terminal
Round Flush SPDT LW6MB-M1C1➀ LW6MB-M1C1V➀ –
with Metal Bezel Gold DPDT LW6MB-M1C2➀ LW6MB-M1C2V➀ LW6MB-M1C2M➀
LW6MB-M1 3PDT LW6MB-M1C3➀ LW6MB-M1C3V➀ –
LW6MB-A1 Momentary
SPDT LW6MB-M1C5➀ – –
Silver DPDT LW6MB-M1C6➀ – LW6MB-M1C6M➀
3PDT LW6MB-M1C7➀ – –
SPDT LW6MB-A1C1➀ LW6MB-A1C1V➀ –
Gold DPDT LW6MB-A1C2➀ LW6MB-A1C2V➀ LW6MB-A1C2M➀ Specify a button
3PDT LW6MB-A1C3➀ LW6MB-A1C3V➀ – color code in
Maintained place of ➀ in the
SPDT LW6MB-A1C5➀ – –
Type No.
Silver DPDT LW6MB-A1C6➀ – LW6MB-A1C6M➀
3PDT LW6MB-A1C7➀ – – LA: amber
Round Extended SPDT LW6MB-M2C1➀ LW6MB-M2C1V➀ – LB: black
with Metal Bezel Gold DPDT LW6MB-M2C2➀ LW6MB-M2C2V➀ LW6MB-M2C2M➀ LG: green
LW6MB-M2 LR: red
3PDT LW6MB-M2C3➀ LW6MB-M2C3V➀ – LS: blue
LW6MB-A2 Momentary
SPDT LW6MB-M2C5➀ – – LW: white
Silver DPDT LW6MB-M2C6➀ – LW6MB-M2C6M➀ LY: yellow
3PDT LW6MB-M2C7➀ – –
SPDT LW6MB-A2C1➀ LW6MB-A2C1V➀ –
Gold DPDT LW6MB-A2C2➀ LW6MB-A2C2V➀ LW6MB-A2C2M➀
3PDT LW6MB-A2C3➀ LW6MB-A2C3V➀ –
Maintained
SPDT LW6MB-A2C5➀ – –
Silver DPDT LW6MB-A2C6➀ – LW6MB-A2C6M➀
3PDT LW6MB-A2C7➀ – –
• Lenses for illuminated pushbuttons are used for flush silhouette pushbuttons.
Dimensions
Panel Thickness
0.8 to 3.2
All dimensions in mm.
M3 Terminal Screw Terminal Cover Mounting Bracket
Terminal Cover LW-VL2
Locking Ring 1.0 2.6
4.85
4.85
LW-VL2M
6.8
6.8
6.2
TOP
LOCK
1.2
2-R0.6
6.8
8.2
∗Tab Terminal
6.8
2.0
Rubber Washer
61.9
54
PC Board Terminal Tab Terminal

0.8W × 0.5t 2.8W × 0.5t Round Square
1.2
1.2
5
6 6
Flush
5
8
ø2
∗ 8.5 18.7 28
60.5 5.4 43 9 43 2
Screw Terminal PC Board Terminal Solder/Tab Terminal
Terminal Arrangement
Extended (Bottom View)
TOP
3 2 1
2.0
NC
NC
NC
5.6
Bottom View
R18
R18
R18
NO
NO
NO
LO
LO
LO
C
C
K
C
X1
NC
NC
16.2
23.2
18.2
16.2
NO
NO
X2
X2
Note: SPDT has C, NO, and NC only in the

25 25
center. DPDT has C, NO, and NC
25.4 26.5 only on the right and left.
Screw terminal type has only DPDT.
• For PC board dimensions, see page 21.
20 (06/02/17)
Flush Silhouette LW Series Pushbuttons
Flush Bezel (Round / Square Black Plastic Bezel) – Non-Illuminated
Type No.
Terminal Terminal
Round Flush SPDT LW6B-M1C1➀ LW6B-M1C1V➀ –
with Black Plastic Bezel Gold DPDT LW6B-M1C2➀ LW6B-M1C2V➀ LW6B-M1C2M➀
LW6B-M1 3PDT LW6B-M1C3➀ LW6B-M1C3V➀ –
LW6B-A1 Momentary
SPDT LW6B-M1C5➀ – –
Silver DPDT LW6B-M1C6➀ – LW6B-M1C6M➀
3PDT LW6B-M1C7➀ – –
SPDT LW6B-A1C1➀ LW6B-A1C1V➀ –
Gold DPDT LW6B-A1C2➀ LW6B-A1C2V➀ LW6B-A1C2M➀
3PDT LW6B-A1C3➀ LW6B-A1C3V➀ –
Maintained
SPDT LW6B-A1C5➀ – –
Silver DPDT LW6B-A1C6➀ – LW6B-A1C6M➀
3PDT LW6B-A1C7➀ – –
Round Extended SPDT LW6B-M2C1➀ LW6B-M2C1V➀ –
with Black Plastic Bezel Gold DPDT LW6B-M2C2➀ LW6B-M2C2V➀ LW6B-M2C2M➀ Specify a button
LW6B-M2 3PDT LW6B-M2C3➀ LW6B-M2C3V➀ – color code in
LW6B-A2 Momentary place of ➀ in the
Type No.
3PDT LW6B-M2C7➀ – – LA: amber
SPDT LW6B-A2C1➀ LW6B-A2C1V➀ – LB: black
Gold DPDT LW6B-A2C2➀ LW6B-A2C2V➀ LW6B-A2C2M➀ LG: green
LR: red
3PDT LW6B-A2C3➀ LW6B-A2C3V➀ – LS: blue
Maintained
SPDT LW6B-A2C5➀ – – LW: white
Silver DPDT LW6B-A2C6➀ – LW6B-A2C6M➀ LY: yellow
Square Flush SPDT LW7B-M1C1➀ LW7B-M1C1V➀ –
with Black Plastic Bezel Gold DPDT LW7B-M1C2➀ LW7B-M1C2V➀ LW7B-M1C2M➀
LW7B-M1 3PDT LW7B-M1C3➀ LW7B-M1C3V➀ –
LW7B-A1 Momentary
3PDT LW7B-M1C7➀ – –
SPDT LW7B-A1C1➀ LW7B-A1C1V➀ –
3PDT LW7B-A1C3➀ LW7B-A1C3V➀ –
Maintained
SPDT LW7B-A1C5➀ – –
Silver DPDT LW7B-A1C6➀ – LW7B-A1C6M➀
• Lenses for illuminated pushbuttons are used for flush silhouette pushbuttons.
For dimensions, see page 20.
PC Board Drilling Layout

(Bottom View)
6.8±0.05
6.8±0.05 1.6 (PC Board)
9-ø 4.85 (0.5)
1.2 +0 (0.5) (0.5)
.
0 1
(0.8)
2.4
2.8
NC Terminal
2.8
5
NO Terminal
2.8
5
COM Terminal
2.4
(0.8)
(0.8)
Switch Switch Switch

Terminal Terminal Terminal
3C 2C 1C Soldered Mounting All dimensions in mm.
Side Side
Pay attention to the pattern of the PC board as the

terminals on the mounting surface are 2.8 mm wide.
(06/02/17) 21
Flush Silhouette LW Series Pilot Lights
Flush Bezel (Round Metal / Plastic and Square Black Plastic Bezel) – LED Illuminated
Type No
Solder/Tab PC Board ➁ Lens Color
Shape Lamp Input Type Screw Terminal
Terminal Terminal Code
(Unibody Type)
(Unibody Type) (Separate Type)
Round Flush
with Metal Bezel 6V AC/DC ±10% LW6MP-12➁ LW6MP-1C02V➁ LW6MP-12M➁
LW6MP-1
LED 12V AC/DC ±10% LW6MP-13➁ LW6MP-1C03V➁ LW6MP-13M➁
24V AC/DC ±10% LW6MP-14➁ LW6MP-1C04V➁ LW6MP-14M➁
Round Extended
with Metal Bezel 6V AC/DC ±10% LW6MP-22➁ LW6MP-2C02V➁ LW6MP-22M➁
LW6MP-2
LED 12V AC/DC ±10% LW6MP-23➁ LW6MP-2C03V➁ LW6MP-23M➁
24V AC/DC ±10% LW6MP-24➁ LW6MP-2C04V➁ LW6MP-24M➁
Round Flush
with Black Plastic Bezel 6V AC/DC ±10% LW6P-12➁ LW6P-1C02V➁ LW6P-12M➁
LW6P-1
LED 12V AC/DC ±10% LW6P-13➁ LW6P-1C03V➁ LW6P-13M➁

Specify a lens
color code in
place of ➁ in the
24V AC/DC ±10% LW6P-14➁ LW6P-1C04V➁ LW6P-14M➁ Type No.
A: amber
Round Extended G: green
with Black Plastic Bezel 6V AC/DC ±10% LW6P-22➁ LW6P-2C02V➁ LW6P-22M➁ R: red
LW6P-2 S: blue
W: white
Y: yellow
24V AC/DC ±10% LW6P-24➁ LW6P-2C04V➁ LW6P-24M➁
Square Flush
LW7P-1
Square Extended
LW7P-2
• Every pilot light contains an LED lamp (LSTD) of the specified color and voltage.
22 (06/02/17)
Flush Silhouette LW Series Pilot Lights
Dimensions
• Unibody Type • Separate Type
Rubber Washer Mounting Bracket
Mounting Bracket Panel Thickness Locking Ring Panel Thickness
Locking Ring 0.8 to 3.2
0.8 to 3.2
M3 Terminal Screw
Terminal Cover
Terminal Cover
LW-PVL
LW-PVLM
TOP
LOCK
5.95
11.35
43
41.8 ∗ Rubber Washer
Tab Terminal
2.8W × 0.5t PC Board Terminal
7.2 0.8W × 0.5t
6.75
1.2
6.0
Flush
5 5
Flush
4.5
∗ 26 2 8.5 18.7 2
0
8.
33.3
ø2
7.7 7.5 34 2 5.5 43 2 4
Screw Terminal Solder/Tab Terminal PC Board Terminal Round (Extended) Round
1.0 2.6
1.2
2-R0.6
1.5
∗Tab Terminal 3.5 28
Square (Extended) Square
Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View)

Screw Terminal Solder/Tab Terminal PC Board Terminal

TOP TOP TOP
Lamp Terminal Lamp Terminal
Lamp Terminal X1
X1
X2 X2 X1
Lamp Terminal X2
Lamp Terminal (interconnected) X2 Lamp Terminal
(interconnected) X2
• Lamp terminals do not have any polarity. • Lamp terminals do not have any polarity.

(Bottom View)
1.6 (PC Board)

(0.5)
3-ø
(0.8)
2.4
1.2 +0.1
2.8
Lamp Terminal X1
2.8
5
Lamp Terminal X2
2.8
5
Lamp Terminal X2
2.4
(0.8)
(0.8)
Lamp
Terminal
Soldered Mounting
Side Side All dimensions in mm.

(06/02/17) 23
Flush Silhouette LW Series Illuminated Pushbuttons
Flush Bezel (Round Metal Bezel) – LED Illuminated
Contact Type No.

Shape Lamp Operation Contact
Material Solder/Tab Terminal PC Board Terminal Screw Terminal
Round Flush SPDT LW6ML-M1C1➂➁ LW6ML-M1C1➂V➁ –
with Metal Bezel Gold DPDT LW6ML-M1C2➂➁ LW6ML-M1C2➂V➁ LW6ML-M1C2➂M➁
LW6ML-M1 3PDT LW6ML-M1C3➂➁ LW6ML-M1C3➂V➁ –
LW6ML-A1 Momentary
SPDT LW6ML-M1C5➂➁ – –
Silver DPDT LW6ML-M1C6➂➁ – LW6ML-M1C6➂M➁
3PDT LW6ML-M1C7➂➁ – –
LED
SPDT LW6ML-A1C1➂➁ LW6ML-A1C1➂V➁ –
Gold DPDT LW6ML-A1C2➂➁ LW6ML-A1C2➂V➁ LW6ML-A1C2➂M➁
3PDT LW6ML-A1C3➂➁ LW6ML-A1C3➂V➁ –
Maintained
SPDT LW6ML-A1C5➂➁ – –
Silver DPDT LW6ML-A1C6➂➁ – LW6ML-A1C6➂M➁
3PDT LW6ML-A1C7➂➁ – –
Round Extended SPDT LW6ML-M2C1➂➁ LW6ML-M2C1➂V➁ –
with Metal Bezel Gold DPDT LW6ML-M2C2➂➁ LW6ML-M2C2➂V➁ LW6ML-M2C2➂M➁
LW6ML-M2 3PDT LW6ML-M2C3➂➁ LW6ML-M2C3➂V➁ –
LW6ML-A2 Momentary
SPDT LW6ML-M2C5➂➁ – –
Silver DPDT LW6ML-M2C6➂➁ – LW6ML-M2C6➂M➁
3PDT LW6ML-M2C7➂➁ – –
LED
SPDT LW6ML-A2C1➂➁ LW6ML-A2C1➂V➁ –
Gold DPDT LW6ML-A2C2➂➁ LW6ML-A2C2➂V➁ LW6ML-A2C2➂M➁
3PDT LW6ML-A2C3➂➁ LW6ML-A2C3➂V➁ –
Maintained
SPDT LW6ML-A2C5➂➁ – –
Silver DPDT LW6ML-A2C6➂➁ – LW6ML-A2C6➂M➁
3PDT LW6ML-A2C7➂➁ – –
• Color Code and Voltage Code

➁ Lens/LED Color Code ➂ Operating Voltage Code
Specify a Lens/LED color code in place of ➁ in Specify an operating voltage code in place
the Type No. of ➂ in the Type No.
A: amber 2: 6V AC/DC
G: green 3: 12V AC/DC
R: red 4: 24V AC/DC
S: blue
W white
Y: yellow
• Every illuminated pushbutton contains an LED lamp (LSTD) of the specified color and voltage.
24 (06/02/17)
Flush Bezel (Round / Square Black Plastic Bezel) – LED Illuminated
Contact Type No.

Shape Lamp Operation Contact
Material Solder/Tab Terminal PC Board Terminal Screw Terminal
Round Flush SPDT LW6L-M1C1➂➁ LW6L-M1C1➂V➁ –
with Black Plastic Bezel Gold DPDT LW6L-M1C2➂➁ LW6L-M1C2➂V➁ LW6L-M1C2➂M➁
LW6L-M1 3PDT LW6L-M1C3➂➁ LW6L-M1C3➂V➁ –
LW6L-A1 Momentary
SPDT LW6L-M1C5➂➁ – –
Silver DPDT LW6L-M1C6➂➁ – LW6L-M1C6➂M➁
3PDT LW6L-M1C7➂➁ – –
LED
SPDT LW6L-A1C1➂➁ LW6L-A1C1➂V➁ –
Gold DPDT LW6L-A1C2➂➁ LW6L-A1C2➂V➁ LW6L-A1C2➂M➁
3PDT LW6L-A1C3➂➁ LW6L-A1C3➂V➁ –
Maintained
SPDT LW6L-A1C5➂➁ – –
Silver DPDT LW6L-A1C6➂➁ – LW6L-A1C6➂M➁
3PDT LW6L-A1C7➂➁ – –
Round Extended SPDT LW6L-M2C1➂➁ LW6L-M2C1➂V➁ –
LW6L-A2 Momentary
LED
Maintained
Round Flush SPDT LW7L-M1C1➂➁ LW7L-M1C1➂V➁ –
LW7L-A1 Momentary
LED
Maintained
• Color Code and Voltage Code

Specify a Lens/LED color code in place of ➁ in Specify an operating voltage code in place
the Type No. of ➂ in the Type No.
R: red 4: 24V AC/DC
S: blue
W white
Y: yellow
(06/02/17) 25
Dimensions
Panel Thickness
0.8 to 3.2
Terminal Cover Mounting Bracket
M3 Terminal Screw LW-VL2
Locking Ring 1.0 2.6
Terminal Cover
6.5
6.5
LW-VL2M
6.8
6.8
6.2
TOP
LOCK
1.2
2-R0.6
8.2
4.85
6.8
∗Tab Terminal
6.8
2.0
4.85
Rubber Washer
54
61.9

1.2
1.2
5
6 6
Flush
5
∗ 8.5 18.7
8
28
ø2
60.5 5.4 43 9 43 2
Extended
2.0
5.6
• Bottom View
R18
R18
R18
LO
LO
LO
C
C
C
K
K
K
X1
NC
NC
23.2
16.2
18.2
16.2
NO
NO
X2
X2
25.4 25 25
26.5
(Bottom View)
• Solder/Tab Terminal • Screw Terminal
TOP TOP
3 2 1
NC
NC
X1
Lamp Terminal
NC
NC
NC
X1
Lamp Terminal
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
X2
Lamp Terminal
(interconnected)
X2
Lamp Terminal
C
C
X2
Note: SPDT has C, NO, and NC only in the

center. DPDT has C, NO, and NC only on
the right and left.
Lamp terminals do not have any polarity.

(Bottom View)
6.8±0.05
6.5±0.05 1.6 (PC Board)
6.8±0.05
(0.5) 4.85 (0.5)
12 (0.5) (0.5)
(0.8)
-ø1
2.4
2.8
.2 +0.1
0
Lamp Terminal X1 NC Terminal

2.8
5
Lamp Terminal X2 NO Terminal

2.8
5
Lamp Terminal X2 COM Terminal

2.4
(0.8)
(0.8)
Lamp Switch Switch Switch

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
Soldered Mounting
3C 2C 1C
Side
Side

26 (06/02/17)
Flush Silhouette LW Series Accessories
Accessories
Type No.
Package
Shape Material (Ordering Dimensions (mm)
Quantity
Type No.)
Locking Ring Wrench • Used to tighten the round
ø2
60
5.4
bezel when installing the
Metal control unit onto a panel.
LW9Z-T1 1
(nickel-plated brass) • Tightening Torque: 1.2
N·m
Lamp Holder Tool • Used to install and remove
¿11.6
LED/incandescent lamps.
Rubber OR-55 1 OR-55
14
59
Lens Removal Tool • Used for removing the lens.

Rubber
MT-S01 1
(Ring: metal)
Switch Guard with Lens • Switch guard can be used by replacing with standard lens.
(for Square Flush Lens) • Cannot be used with maintained types.
Spring Return Type • Specify a lens color code in place of ➁ in the Type No.
A: amber, C: clear, G: green, R: red, S: blue, Y: yellow
• Use a clear lens for white illumination or for white (LW) or
black (LB) buttons.
Panel Thickness Mounting Hole Layout
0.8 to 3.2 26.8
Guard
Plastic
31.7
LW9Z-KS7➁ 1
(Guard: transparent)
48
9 43 6
24.5
12.5
Lens 28
25
Note: Determine mounting centers to ensure easy operation.

Round Mounting Hole Plug • Degree of protection: IP65
• Panel thickness: 0.8 to 3.2 mm 0.8 to 3.2
ø2
8
Plastic • See page 19 for mounting hole

LW9Z-BS6 1 layout.
(black)
26 2 28
Square Mounting Hole Plug • Degree of protection: IP65

0.8 to 3.2
• Panel thickness: 0.8 to 3.2 mm
Plastic • See page 19 for mounting hole
LW9Z-BS7 1 layout.
(black)
26 2 28
Terminal Cover • For separate type con-

14.8
For Solder/Tab Terminal trol unit only.
32
22
12
Plastic
X1
NC
18.2
LW-VL2 1
34
24
14
X2
(translucent) NO
31
21
11
X2
26.2
Terminal Cover • For separate type con-

12.9
For Screw Terminal trol unit only. 23.2 5.4
Plastic
LW-VL2M 1
(black)
25.4
Terminal Cover • For unibody type pilot

19.2
For Solder/Tab Terminal lights only.
7.5
Plastic
LW-PVL 1
(translucent) X1
ø20.6
TOP
X2
Terminal Cover • For unibody type pilot

For Screw Terminal lights only. TOP
X1
20.6
Plastic
LW-PVLM 1 X2
(translucent) 4
14
(06/02/17) 27
Flush Silhouette LW Series Accessories
Replacement Parts
Ordering Package
Shape Material Type No. Color Code
Type No. Quantity
Lens (Round Flush)
Polyarylate LW9Z-L1➁ LW9Z-L1➁PN05 5
Lens (Round Extended)

Specify a lens color code in place of ➁ in the
Ordering Type No.
Lens (Square Flush)
A: amber
Polyarylate LW9Z-L2➁ LW9Z-L2➁PN05 5 C: clear
G: green
R: red
Lens for Pilot Lights S: blue
(Round Extended) Y: yellow
Polyarylate LW9Z-L15➁ LW9Z-L15➁PN05 5 Note: Use a clear lens for white illumination
or for white (LW) or black (LB) buttons.
Lens for Pilot Lights

(Square Extended)
Marking Plate (Round) White LW9Z-P1W LW9Z-P1WPN05 • For round flush pushbuttons, round flush
Acrylic 5 illuminated pushbuttons, and round
Black LW9Z-P1B LW9Z-P1BPN05 extended pilot lights.
Marking Plate (Square) White LW9Z-P2W LW9Z-P2WPN05 • For square flush pushbuttons, square flush
Acrylic 5 illuminated pushbuttons, and square
Black LW9Z-P2B LW9Z-P2BPN05 extended pilot lights.
Marking Plate
White LW9Z-P12W LW9Z-P12WPN05
(Round Extended) • For round extended pushbuttons and
Acrylic 5 round extended illuminated pushbuttons.
Black LW9Z-P12B LW9Z-P12BPN05
Locking Ring
Plastic LW9Z-LN LW9Z-LNPN05 5 • Black
LED Lamps
Current Draw Ordering Illumination Color Package
Operating Voltage Type No. Base
AC DC Type No. Code Quantity
17 mA (A, R, W, Y) 14 mA (A, R, W, Y) LSTD-6➁ Specify a color code 1

6V AC/DC±10%
8 mA (G, S) 5.5 mA (G, S)
LSTD-6➁ in place of ➁ in the
LSTD-6➁PN10 Ordering Type No. 10
LSTD-1➁ A: amber 1
12V AC/DC±10% 11 mA 10 mA LSTD-1➁ G: green BA9S/13
LSTD-1➁PN10 10
R: red
LSTD-2➁ S: blue 1
24V AC/DC±10% 11 mA 10 mA LSTD-2➁ W: white
LSTD-2➁PN10 Y: yellow 10
Transformer
Separate Mounting Type Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Type No. Applicable LED
For 6V 100/110V AC TWR516
200/220V AC 1W/5.5V AC TWR526 LSTD-6➁
400/440V AC TWR546
For 24V 100/110V AC TWR512
200/220V AC 0.5W/24V AC TWR522 LSTD-2➁
400/440V AC TWR542
• Terminal covers are included with separate mounting type transformers.

• Connect only one LSTD LED to separate mounting type transformers.
28 (06/02/17)
Flush Silhouette LW Series Instructions
Safety Precautions
• Turn off the power to the flush silhouette LW series control • For wiring, use wires of a proper size to meet the voltage
units before starting installation, removal, wiring, mainte- and current requirements. Solder correctly according to the
nance, and inspection of the products. Failure to turn instructions in “Wiring” and “Notes on Terminal Cover.”
power off may cause electrical shocks or fire hazard. Tighten the M3.5 terminal screws to a torque of 0.6 to 1.0
• To avoid burning your hand, use the lamp holder tool when N·m. Failure to tighten terminal screws may cause over-
replacing lamps. heating and fire.
Instructions
Panel Mounting Replacement of the Lens Marking Plate and Films
Remove the contact block from the and Marking Plate For LW series illuminated pushbuttons
operator. Insert the operator into the • Removing and pilot lights, legends and symbols
panel cut-out from the front, then install 1. To remove the lens unit, press the can be engraved on the marking
the contact block. sucker of the optional lens removal plates, or printed film can be inserted
• Removing the Contact Block tool (MT-S01) onto the lens and pull under the lens for labelling purposes.
Turn the locking lever on the contact the lens unit. • Marking Plate and Marking Film
block in the direction opposite to the [Removing the Lens Unit] Size
arrow on the housing. Then the contact Lens Round Lens Square Lens
can be removed.
• Installing the Contact Block Engraving Engraving
Built-in Marking Plate

Area Area
Insert the contact block, with the TOP
markings on the contact block and the ø17.8 17.5
operator placed in the same direction.
0.85
2. Remove the marking plate by push-
0.6
0.85
Then lock the units, turning the locking
ing the lens from the rear to disen-
lever in the direction of the arrow.
gage the latches between the lens • Engraving must be made on the
and the lens holder, using the engraving area within 0.5mm deep.
TOP side
• The marking plate is made of acrylic
Locking lever screwdriver as shown below. resin.
[Removing the lens]
TOP marking
Applicable Marking Film
19.8
19.8
17.7
Operator
Note: The translucent filter in the lens holder
• Two 0.1mm-thick films or one 0.2mm-
Contact block Locked position cannot be removed because the filter
thick film can be installed in the lens.
is sealed to make the unit waterproof
• Marking film is not included.
• Notes on Mounting and oiltight.
• Recommended marking film: Polyester
Use the optional ring wrench (LW9Z- • Installing
T1) to mount the operator onto the 1. For round lens types, place the • Insertion Order of Marking Plate
panel. Tightening torque should not marking plate on the lens holder and Film
exceed 1.2 N·m. Do not use pliers. with the anti-rotation projection • Round Lens Type
Top Marking Side
Excessive tightening will damage the engaged and press the lens onto
locking ring. the lens holder to engage the
• Collective Mounting latches. For square lens types,
As the locking lever can be turned eas- insert the marking plate into the
ily from the rear of the units using a lens, and press the lens onto the Lens Film Marking Lens Housing
Holder
screwdriver, the contact blocks can be holder to engage the latches. Plate
removed even when mounted collec- 2. Make sure of correct orientation of Note: Film is not included.
tively. the marking plate. • Square Lens Type
• Round Lens Type Top Marking Side
Lens Marking Plate Lens Holder

Lens Film Marking Lens Housing
• Square Lens Type Plate Holder
Note: Film is not included.

Make sure of correct orientation of the
marking plate.
(06/02/17) 29
Flush Silhouette LW Series Instructions
Instructions
Replacement of Lamps Wiring Single Board Mounting
Lamps can be replaced using the 1. Solder the terminals within 20W/5
lamp holder tool (OR-55) from the sec or 260°C/3 sec without exert-
front of the panel, or by removing the ing external force to the terminals.
contact block from the operator. While soldering, do not touch the
• How to Remove soldering iron to the housing. While
To remove, slip the lamp holder tool wiring, prevent tension from being
onto the lamp head. Then push applied to the terminals. Do not
slightly, and turn the lamp holder tool bend or raise the terminals, nor
counterclockwise. exert excessive force to terminals. Mounting the control units on a single
2. Use non-corrosive liquid flux. PC board offers the following features.
3. Positive-lock connector and easy- 1. Reduced installation labor, easy
lock connectors are applicable to wiring, space saving, and stan-
tab terminals. dardiztion.
4. Tighten the terminal screw of the 2. Since the contact blocks on the PC
screw terminal type to a torque of board can be removed easily using
0.6 to 1.0 N·m. a locking lever, control units are
Lamp Removal Tool
OR-55 easy to maintain.
Notes on Terminal Cover 3. Because the control units require
• How to Install [Solder/Tab Terminal] no studs for fastening the control
1. To install, insert the lamp head into Insert the terminal cover into the con- unit to a PC board, special prepa-
the lamp holder tool, and hold the tact block with the TOP markings on ration of operation panel is not
lamp as shown in the figure below. the contact block and the terminal needed.
Lamp Lamp Holder Tool cover in the same direction. 4. For details on single board mount-
Note: When wiring, insert the lead wires ing, contact IDEC.
into the terminal cover holes before
soldering.
2. Insert the pins on the lamp base

into the grooves in the lamp socket.
Insert the lamp and turn it clock-
wise.
Lamp Socket in • Notes on Wiring
the Operator Unit
When installing a terminal cover onto
the solder/tab terminal contact block,
solder the inside of lamp terminal
(toward the switch terminals) and
wire.
Lamp
Terminal
Switch Terminals
Terminal
Inside Cover
[Screw Terminal]
Terminal cover must be installed on
the control unit before wiring.
Note 1: After wiring, terminal covers can-
not be installed.
Note 2: When terminal covers are
installed, do not use round crimp-
ing terminals.
(Wire the terminals by using fork
terminals or lead wires directly.
30 (06/02/17)
Flush Silhouette L6/A6 Series Accessories
New flush silhouette bezels for L6/A6 series ø16mm miniature control units
• Accessories for L6/A6 control units.
• Bezel Size
Round: ø24 mm (Panel Cut-out: ø20.2 mm)
Square: 24 mm (Panel Cut-out: 20.2 mm)
Rectangular: 24×30 mm (Panel Cut-out: 20.2×26.2 mm)
• Applicable models
L6 Series A6 Series
Illuminated Pushbutton Illuminated Pushbutton
Pilot Light Pilot Light
Pushbutton Pushbutton
Selector Switch Selector Switch
Key Selector Switch Key Selector Switch
Illuminated Selector Switch Illuminated Selector Switch
Lever Switch
Buzzer
Note: Flush silhouette bezels cannot be used for mushroom buttons or lenses.
Flush Bezel
Shape Material Type Package Remarks
Quantity
Round
Metal
LA9Z-SM61 1
(aluminium color)
Round
Plastic
LA9Z-S61B 1
(black)
• Degree of Protection: IP65

Flush Bezel
Square (only when used with IP65 control units)
Plastic
LA9Z-S71B 1
(black)
Rectangular
Plastic
LA9Z-S81B 1
(black)
Switch Guard with Flush Bezel

(Spring Return) • Used for L6/A6 rectangular pushbuttons and
Rectangular illuminated pushbuttons. Cannot be used for
selector switches, illuminated selector switches,
Plastic LA9Z-KS8 1 and lever switches.
(only when used with IP65 control units)
Round
Plastic
LA9Z-BS6 1
(black)
Square
Mounting Plastic
LA9Z-BS7 1 • Degree of protection: IP65
Hole Plug (black)
Rectangular
Plastic
LA9Z-BS8 1
(black)
Note: Terminal covers and maintenance parts for L6/A6 other than those shown above can also be used, except dust-proof covers.
(06/02/17) 31
Ordering Information Specifications
• Control units are not supplied with flush bezels. Order flush bezels • Based on L6/A6 series control unit specifications.
together with control units.
Dimensions [Flush Bezel with Control Units]

• Flush Bezel • L6 Series • A6 Series
Mounting Flash
Bracket Gasket Bezel Metal Plastic Panel Thickness 0.5 to 5 Panel Thickness 0.5 to 5
• Round
ø21.4
22.6
14.8
ø 20
8 8
ø1 ø1
4
4
0.9 1
ø2
ø2
0.8
9 43 2
9.8 8.5 2 8 29 2
4-
R1
• Square
Selector Switch
21.4
24
18
20
Key Selector
Illuminated Selector
Switch Lever Switch
Switch
• Rectangular
21.4
20
24
18
2 2
2
A B
1 24 17
R
4- 30
Unit A (mm) Unit B (mm)
27.4
L6 selector switch 10.0 L6 key selector 18.1

23
26
L6 illuminated selector 10.0 A6 key selector 18.1

A6 selector switch 8.5
[Mounting Hole Layout]

• Round • Square • Rectangular
26.2 +0.2 Mounting hole layout for the
– 0 0.2
+0.2
20.2
.1
– 0.1
+
– 0.1
L6 series is the same for both

2
0.
ø2
straight-lever contact type

20.2 -0.1
+0.2
and L-lever contact type.

24
24
24
30
24 24
• Flush Bezel with Switch Guard

[L6 Series] [A6 Series] [Mounting Hole Layout]
Panel Thickness 0.5 to 5 26.4 Panel Thickness 0.5 to 5 26.4
47.5
33.1
33.1
30
24
Mounting holes are the

1 same size as rectangular
9 43 5.4 8 29 5.4 30 flush bezels.
• Mounting Hole Plug

Gasket Panel Thickness 0.5 to 5 • Round • Square • Rectangular
Mounting Bracket
Locking Ring 4
ø2
24
24
Mounting holes are the

same size as flush bezels.
30.3 2 30
32 (06/02/17)
Safety Precautions
• Turn off the power to the control units before starting instal- • For wiring, use wires of a proper size to meet the voltage
lation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of the and current requirements and solder correctly. Improper
products. Failure to turn power off may cause electrical soldering may cause overheating and fire. Also, when
shocks or fire hazard. using tab terminals, use appropriate quick connect recep-
• To avoid burning your hand, use the lamp holder tool when tacles.
replacing lamps.
Instructions
Panel Mounting of Flush Bezels Panel Mounting of Flush Bezels with

• L6 series Switch Guard
1. Remove the contact block from the operator. Remove the For installation, see Panel Mounting of Flush Bezels.
locking ring and anti-rotation ring. To remove the operator
from the contact block, turn the locking lever in the direc-
tion opposite to the arrow on the housing.
Replacing the Lens
• Removing
2. Attach the flush bezel to the operator. Then insert the
Remove the operator (lens, marking plate, and lens holder)
assembly into the panel. Attach the mounting bracket and
from the operator by holding the lens removal tool (MT-101)
tighten the locking ring. (Do not use the anti-rotation ring
and pull out.
supplied with the operator.)
For round flush bezels, place the projection on the bezel
to the groove on the TOP side of the operator and mount
onto the panel.
3. Insert the contact block, with the TOP markings on the
contact block and the operator placed in the same direc-
tion. Then lock the units, turning the locking lever in the
direction of the arrow.
Anti-rotation ring supplied
with the operator
Panel
• Installing
Mounting bracket supplied
with the flush bezel Insert the operator in the correct direction.
Remove Locking ring
Flush Bezel/
L6/A6 Operator Flush Bezel with Switch Guard
• A6 series
1. Remove the locking ring and anti-rotation ring from the
operator.
2. Attach the flush bezel to the operator. Then insert the
assembly into the panel. Attach the mounting bracket and
tighten the locking ring. (Do not use the anti-rotation ring
supplied with the operator.)
For round flush bezels, place the projection on the bezel
to the groove on the TOP side of the operator and mount
onto the panel.
• For other instructions, refer to L6 and A6 series catalogs.
(06/02/17) 33
34 (06/02/17)
ø22mm HW Series
Control Units
(06/02/17) 35
ø22 HW Series Control Units (Selection Guide)
Function Emergency Stop Switch (Unibody Type) Emergency Stop Switch (Separate Type)
Pushlock Turn Reset
Category
ø40mm Mushroom ø40mm Mushroom ø29mm Mushroom ø40mm Mushroom ø60mm Mushroom
Shape
Type HW1E-BV4 HW1E-LV4 HW1B-V3 HW1B-V4 HW1B-V5

Page 43 44 45 45 45
Function Emergency Stop Switch Pushbutton

Pushlock Key Reset Push Pull Pushlock Turn Reset Flush Extended
Category
ø40mm Mushroom ø40mm Mushroom ø40mm EMO Momentary/Maintained
Shape
HW1B-M1 HW1B-M2
Type HW1B-X4 HW1B-Y2 HW1B-V∗∗R-EMO
HW1B-A1 HW1B-A2
Page 46 46 48 49 49
Function Pushbutton
ø29mm Mushroom ø40/60mm Mushroom Square Flush Square Extended Flush
Category
Momentary/Maintained
Shape
HW1B-M4
HW1B-M3 HW2B-M1 HW2B-M2 HW3B-M1
Type HW1B-A4
HW1B-A3 HW2B-A1 HW2B-A2 HW3B-A1
HW1B-M5
Page 49 49 50 50 51
Function Pushbutton Pilot Light (LED/Incandescent)

Round Extended ø29mm Mushroom
Category w/Square Bezel w/Square Bezel Flush (Marking) Extended (Dome) Square Flush (Marking)
Shape
HW3B-M2 HW3B-M3
Type HW1P-1 HW1P-2 HW2P-1
HW3B-A2 HW3B-A3
Page 51 51 52 52 52
Function Illuminated Pushbutton (LED/Incandescent)

Category Flush Extended Extended w/Full Shroud Square Flush (Marking) Flush w/Square Bezel
Shape
HW1L-M1 HW1L-M2 HW1L-MF2 HW2L-M1 HW3L-M1

Type
HW1L-A1 HW1L-A2 HW1L-AF2 HW2L-A1 HW3L-A1
Page 53 54 55 56 57
36 (06/02/17)
HW Series Control Units (Selection Guide) ø22
Function Illuminated Pushbutton Switch (LED/Incandescent) Illuminated Selector

ø29mm Mushroom Switch
Category ø29mm Mushroom ø40mm Mushroom (LED/Incandescent)
w/Square Bezel
Shape
HW1L-M3 HW3L-M3 HW1L-M4

Type HW1F
HW1L-A3 HW3L-A3 HW1L-A4
Page 58 59 60 64
Function Selector Switch Mono-Lever Switch

Pushbutton Selector
Category Selector Key Standard Interlocking
Shape
Type HW1S HW1K HW1R HW1M HW1M-L

Page 62 63 71 72 72
Function Control Box Emergency Stop Control Box

w/Pushlock Turn w/Pushlock Key
Category w/Pushbutton w/Selector Switch
Reset Switch Reset Switch
Shape
Type HW1X-BM HW1X-S HW1X-BV HW1X-BX

Page 82 82 82 82
Function Pilot Light (LED/Incandescent)

Category Extended (Jumbo Dome)
Shape
Type HW1P-5
Page 85
Dual Pushbuttons
Function
w/o Pilot Light w/Pilot Light (LED/Incandescent)
Flush (top) Flush (top) Flush (top) Flush (top)
Category
Flush (bottom) Extended (bottom) Flush (bottom) Extended (bottom)
Shape
Type HW7D-B11 HW7D-B12 HW7D-L11 HW7D-L21

HW7D-B21 HW7D-B22 HW7D-L12 HW7D-L22
Page 90 90 91 91
Safety Lever Lock HW9Z-LS

Every HW series control unit, except for pilot lights and unibody type emergency stop switches, is supplied with the
HW9Z-LS safety lever lock. IDEC strongly recommends using the safety lever lock to prevent heavy vibration or
maintenance personnel from unlocking contacts.
(06/02/17) 37
ø22 HW Series Control Units
Complete with IP20 finger-safe contact blocks
Ensure safety and save wiring time
• The locking lever removable contact block features spring-up
screw terminals.
• Self-cleaning rolling action contacts have a raked contact sur-
face.
• Degree of protection: IP65
• A wide range of operating voltages for worldwide application
• UL, CSA approved, and EN compliant
UL Listing
UL
File No. E68961
CSA File No. LR92374
EN60947-1
EN TÜV Rheinland R9551089
EN60947-5-1
Contact Ratings
Pushbuttons Contact Block Type HW-G (HW series)
Illuminated Pushbuttons Rated Insulation Voltage 600V
Selector Switches Rated Continuous Current 10A
Illuminated Selector Switches Contact Ratings by Utilization Category AC-15 (A600)
Pushbutton Selectors IEC 60947-5-1 DC-13 (P600)
Characteristics
• Contact Ratings by Utilization Category
Operational Voltage 24V 48V 50V 110V 220V 440V
AC AC-12 Control of resistive loads and solid state loads 10A — 10A 10A 6A 2A
Operational 50/60 Hz AC-15 Control of electromagnetic loads (> 72 VA) 10A — 7A 5A 3A 1A
Current DC-12 Control of resistive loads and solid state loads 8A 4A — 2.2A 1.1A —
DC
DC-13 Control of electromagnets 4A 2A — 1.1A 0.6A —
Note: The operational current represents the classification by making and breaking currents (IEC 60947-5-1).
Minimum applicable load: 3V AC/DC, 5 mA (applicable range may vary with operating conditions and load types)
For the control units listed below, the rated current (load switching current) is reduced to a half of the rated operational current of the con-
tact block. The rated insulation voltage (600V) and the rated thermal current (10A) remain unchanged.
• 3-position selector switches which contain J or S following 3 in the Type No. and which have cam code J or S. Example: HW1S-3JT21N1
• All 4-position and 5-position selector switches
• All mono-lever switches
• All pushbutton selectors
HW-G Contact Block Transformer Unit

• Finger-safe terminal
Compliant to VDE 0106 Part 100
• Double-break rolling action silver
• Snap-fit latch contacts with raked surface
• Housing in different colors

for NO and NC contact.
• Insertion from two directions

• Ring or fork connectors can
also be used.
• Spring-up terminal is ready for wiring.

Screw is held captive. • Finger-safe spring-up terminal
• Push rod • Wires can be inserted from
Color-coded for different contacts three directions.
• Contact Block Types

Type No. HW-G10 HW-G01 HW-G10R HW-G01R
Contact NO NC NO (early make) NC (late break)
Housing Blue Purple red Blue Purple red
Push Rod Green Red Black White
38 (06/02/17)
HW Series Control Units ø22
LED Illuminated Unit Specifications
LED Lamp
Unit Color Code ➁ Input Type Operating Voltage
Lamp Base Type No. Voltage
6V AC/DC LSTD-6➁ 6V AC/DC ±10%
Full Voltage 12V AC/DC LSTD-1➁ 12V AC/DC ±10%
A: amber
G: green 100/110V AC/DC
Pilot Light PW: pure white 115/120V AC/DC
Illuminated Pushbutton R: red 200/220V AC/DC BA9S/13
Illuminated Selector Switch S: blue 230/240V AC/DC
Transformer LSTD-6➁ 6V AC/DC ±10%
W: white 380V AC/DC
Y: yellow 400/440V AC/DC
480V AC/DC
(50/60 Hz)
DC-DC Converter 110V DC LSTD-6➁ 6V AC/DC ±10%
Incandescent Illuminated Unit Specifications

Incandescent Lamp
Lamp Base Type No. Rating
6V AC/DC LS-6 1W (6.3V)
Full Voltage 12V AC/DC LS-8 1W (18V)
24V AC/DC LS-3 1W (30V)
A: amber 100/110V AC/DC
Pilot Light G: green 115/120V AC/DC
W: white Transformer LS-6 1W (6.3V)
380V AC/DC
400/440V AC/DC
480V AC/DC
(50/60 Hz)

Lamp Base BA9S/13
A, R, W, Y: 17 mA
AC 11 mA 11 mA
Current G, PW, S: 8 mA
Draw A, R, W, Y: 14 mA
DC 10 mA 10 mA
G, PW, S: 5.5 mA
Color Code A (amber), G (green), PW (pure white), R (red), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
Approx. 50,000 hours
Life (reference value)
(The luminance reduces to 50% the initial intensity when used on complete DC.)
A, R, W, Y A, R, W, Y
Internal Circuit
G, PW, S
LED Chip
Protection Diode
Zener Diode
Incandescent Lamp Ratings (LS Type)

Type No. LS-6 LS-8 LS-2 LS-3
Lamp Base BA9S/13
Rated Voltage 6V AC/DC 12V AC/DC 18V AC/DC 24V AC/DC
Wattage 1W (6.3V) 1W (18V) 1W (24V) 1W (30V)
Approx. 1,000 hours minimum
(mean value when used on the rated voltage)
(06/02/17) 39
ø22 HW Series Control Units
Specifications
Operating Temperature
Illuminated units: –25 to +50°C
Storage Temperature –40 to +80°C
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
Between live and dead metal parts: 2,500V AC, 1 minute
Dielectric Strength
(Full voltage type illuminated units: 2,000V AC, 1 minute)
Vibration Resistance Operating extremes: 5 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm
Damage limits: 1,000 m/s2
Shock Resistance
Pushbuttons, Illuminated pushbuttons
Momentary: 5,000,000
Maintained: 500,000
Mechanical Life Selector switches: 500,000
(minimum operations) Key selector switches: 500,000
Illuminated selector switches: 500,000
Pushbutton selectors: 250,000
Mono-lever switches: 250,000
Pushbuttons, Illuminated pushbuttons:
500,000 ∗1
Selector switches: 500,000 ∗2
Key selector switches: 500,000 ∗2
Electrical Life Illuminated selector switches: 500,000 ∗2
(minimum operations) Pushbutton selectors: 250,000 ∗2
Mono-lever switches: 250,000 ∗3
∗1 Switching frequency 1,800 operations/h, duty ratio 40%
∗3 Switching frequency 900 operations/h, duty ratio 40%
Degree of Protection
Unit NEMA ICS 6-110 IEC 60529
Type
All units IP65
1, 2, 3, 3R, (3S), 4, 5, 12,13
Mounting Hole Layout

The minimum mounting centers are applicable to switches with one
R0.8 max.
layer of contact blocks (two contact blocks). When two layers of
3.2 +0.2
0 The 3.2 recess is necessary
ø22
.3 +0.4 when the anti-rotation ring is
contact blocks are mounted, determine the minimum mounting cen-
0
ters in consideration of convenience for wiring.
24.1 +0.4
used.
0
• Minimum Mounting Centers

Unit ∗1 ∗2
ø40mm mushroom button 50 mm 40 mm
A B Pilot light 30 mm 30 mm
Pushbutton selector 50 mm 50 mm
Mono-lever switch 72 mm 72 mm
Note: When using the safety lever lock, determine the vertical spacing (*1)
in consideration of convenience for installing and removing the safety
lever lock.
∗ The 3.2 mm recess is for preventing rotation Recommended vertical spacing: 100 mm
and is not necessary when the nameplate
or anti-rotation ring is not used.
40 (06/02/17)
HW Series Control Units (Ordering Information) ø22
Ordering Information
The Type No. development charts shown below can be used to specify control units other than those listed on the following
pages. Gold-plated silver contacts are also available.
Emergency Stop Switches Illuminated Pushbuttons

For emergency stop purposes, these switches must contain
HW1L-M1 11 H 2 R -MAU
at least one NC contact block.
Optional contact
HW1B-V4 11 R -MAU MAU: Gold-plated silver contact
Optional contact Lens color code
MAU: Gold-plated silver contact Lamp code
Button/lens color code 0: Without lamp
Contact arrangement code 2: LED (6V: LSTD)
01: 1NC 11: 1NO-1NC 3: LED (12V: LSTD)
02: 2NC 21: 2NO-1NC 4: LED (24V: LSTD)
12: 1NO-2NC 03: 3NC 5: Incandescent (6V: LS-6)
31: 3NO-1NC 22: 2NO-2NC 6: Incandescent (12V: LS-8)
13: 1NO-3NC 04: 4NC 7: Incandescent (24V: LS-3)
Note: Operating voltage code
Q: Full voltage
Push-pull type HW1B-Y2 can have a maximum of two contact
H: Transformer (100/110V AC)
blocks.
H2: Transformer (115/120V AC)
M: Transformer (200/220V AC)
M4: Transformer (230/240V AC)
Pushbuttons S: Transformer (380V AC)
HW1B-M1 11 R -MAU T: Transformer (400/440V AC)
Optional contact T8: Transformer (480V AC)
MAU: Gold-plated silver contact D: DC-DC converter (110V DC)
Button color code Contact arrangement code
Contact arrangement code 10: 1NO 01: 1NC
10: 1NO 01: 1NC 11: 1NO-1NC 20: 2NO
11: 1NO-1NC 20: 2NO 02: 2NC 21: 2NO-1NC
02: 2NC 21: 2NO-1NC 12: 1NO-2NC 30: 3NO
12: 1NO-2NC 30: 3NO 03: 3NC 31: 3NO-1NC
03: 3NC 31: 3NO-1NC 22: 2NO-2NC 13: 1NO-3NC
22: 2NO-2NC 13: 1NO-3NC 40: 4NO 04: 4NC
40: 4NO 04: 4NC Note:
Full voltage type is not supplied with a lamp.
Transformer and DC-DC converter types contain an LED lamp
Pilot Lights (LSTD-6➁) or incandescent lamp (LS-6).
HW1P-1 H 2 R Transformer and DC-DC converter types can have two or four
Lens color code contact blocks only.
Lamp code
0: Without lamp
2: LED (6V: LSTD) Selector Switches
3: LED (12V: LSTD)
4: LED (24V: LSTD)
HW1S-3 S T 22N9 -MAU
Optional contact
5: Incandescent (6V: LS-6)
MAU: Gold-plated silver contact
7: Incandescent (24V: LS-3) Contact code
Operating voltage code Knob operator
Q: Full voltage Cam code
H: Transformer (100/110V AC) J
H2: Transformer (115/120V AC) S
M: Transformer (200/220V AC) (none)
S: Transformer (380V AC)
T: Transformer (400/440V AC)
T8: Transformer (480V AC)
D: DC-DC converter (110V DC)
Note:
Transformer and DC-DC converter types contain an LED lamp
(LSTD-6➁) or incandescent lamp (LS-6).
(06/02/17) 41
ø22 HW Series Control Units (Ordering Information)
Key Selector Switches
HW1K-2 A 11 - 1H -MAU
Optional contact
Different key number
1H
2H
3H
Key removal position code
2-position
A: Removable in all positions
B: Removable in left only
C: Removable in right only
3-position
A: Removable in all positions
B: Removable in left and center
C: Removable in right and center
D: Removable in center only
E: Removable in right and left
G: Removable in left only
H: Removable in right only
Note:
Key is not removable from spring-return positions.
Illuminated Selector Switches

HW1F-2 11 H 2 R -MAU
Optional contact
Lens color code
Lamp code
0: Without lamp
2: LED (6V: LSTD)
3: LED (12V: LSTD)
4: LED (24V: LSTD)
Operating voltage code
Q: Full voltage
H: Transformer (100/110V AC)
H2: Transformer (115/120V AC)
M: Transformer (200/220V AC)
S: Transformer (380V AC)
T: Transformer (400/440V AC)
T8: Transformer (480V AC)
Note:
Transformer type contains an LED lamp (LSTD-6➁) or incandes-
cent lamp (LS-6).
Pushbutton Selectors
HW1R-2 D 22N1 B -MAU
Optional contact
Button color code
Contact code
Circuit category
Mono-Lever Switches
HW1M - 1111 22N9 -MAU
Optional contact
Contact code
Lever operation mode
42 (06/02/17)
HW Series Emergency Stop Switches ø22
Emergency Stop Switches (Unibody Type) Specifications
Contact Ratings
Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 250V
Rated Thermal Current (Ith) 10A
Rated Operational Voltage (Ue) 24V 110V 220V
AC Resistive Load (AC-12) 6A 3A 3A
Rated 50/60 Hz Inductive Load (AC-15) 6A 3A 3A
Operational
Current Resistive Load (DC-12) 6A 2A 1A
DC
Inductive Load (DC-13) 1.5A 0.3A 0.15A
Minimum applicable load (reference value): 3V AC/DC, 5 mA (Applicable range may vary with operating conditions and load types.)
LED Lamp Ratings Specifications

Unit Rated LED Lamp Operating –25 to +60°C (no freezing)
Operating Rated Temperature Illuminated units: –25 to +55°C
Voltage Type No. Rated Voltage
Current Storage Temperature –40 to +80°C
6V AC/DC LSTD-6R 6V AC/DC ±10% 14 mA Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
12V AC/DC LSTD-1R 12V AC/DC ±10% 10 mA Contact Resistance 50 mΩ maximum (initial value)
24V AC/DC LSTD-2R 24V AC/DC ±10% 10 mA Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
Between live and dead metal parts
Incandescent Lamp Ratings Dielectric Strength Contacts: 2,500V AC, 1 minute
Unit Rated Incandescent Lamp Illuminated parts: 1,000V AC, 1 minute
Operating Damage limits: 60 m/s2
Type No. Wattage Vibration Resistance
Voltage Operating extremes: 5 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm
6V AC/DC LS-6 1W (6.3V) Damage limits: 1,000 m/s2
Shock Resistance
12V AC/DC LS-8 1W (18V) Operating extremes: 100 m/s2
24V AC/DC LS-3 1W (30V) Operating Frequency 900 operations/h
Mechanical: 250,000 operations minimum
Life Electrical: 100,000 operations minimum
(at 900 operations/h, duty ratio 40%)
Degree of Protection IP65
Terminal Style M3.5 screw
Applicable Standards and Approvals

UL508 UL Listing File No. E55996
CSA C22.2 No. 14 c-UL (File No. E55996)
EN60947-5-5 DEMKO approved
Pushlock Turn Reset Switches (Unibody Type)
Shape Contact Type No. Button Color

ø40mm Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset
HW1E-BV4
1NO-1NC HW1E-BV411R
Red only
2NC HW1E-BV402R
• When pressed, the button is held depressed. The button is released by turning clockwise.
• Terminal cover HW-VL7 is supplied with the switch.
(06/02/17) 43
ø22 HW Series Emergency Stop Switches
Illuminated Pushlock Turn Reset Switches (Unibody Type)
Shape Lamp Contact Type No. Lens Color

HW1E-LV4
1NO-1NC HW1E-LV411Q0R
Without Lamp Red only
2NC HW1E-LV402Q0R
• The illuminated pushlock turn reset switch does not contain a lamp. Order LED or incandescent lamps separately. For lamps, see page 77.
Dimensions
• HW1E-BV4 Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
M3.5 Terminal Screw Gasket
Locking Ring
ø40
TOP Marking
11.5 14
Terminal Cover 46 32
48
• HW1E-LV4 Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6

M3.5 Terminal Screw Gasket
Locking Ring
TOP Marking
ø40
M3.5 Terminal Screw

Lamp Terminal 11.5 14
Terminal Cover 61 32
63 All dimensions in mm.
Mounting Hole Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View)

• HW1E-BV4 • HW1E-LV4
R0.8 max.
+0.2
3.2 0 TOP
ø22 TOP
.3 +0
0
.4 X1
24.1 +0.4
0
LAMP
.2 (NC) .3 (NO)
.2 (NC) .3 (NO)
.1 (NC) .4 (NO)
.1 (NC) .4 (NO)
Determine the minimum mounting hole centers
in consideration of convenience for wiring.
(1NO-1NC)
X2
(1NO-1NC)
Replacement Parts
Name Type No. Ordering Type No. Package Quantity Remarks
Used on HW1E emergency stop switches for preventing
Terminal Cover HW-VL7 HW-VL7PN10 10 electrical shocks.
The HW-VL7 terminal cover is supplied with the HW1E.
44 (06/02/17)
Emergency Stop Switches (Separate Type) Specifications

Rated Insulation Voltage 600V Operating Temperature –25 to +60°C (no freezing)
Rated Continuous Current 10A Storage Temperature –40 to +80°C
Contact Block
Contact Ratings by Utilization Category AC-15 (A600) Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
IEC 60947-5-1 DC-13 (P600) Contact Resistance 50 mΩ maximum (initial value)
Characteristics Between live and dead metal parts
• Contact Ratings by Utilization Category Between terminals of different poles
Dielectric Strength
Between terminals of the same pole
Operational Voltage 24V 48V 50V 110V 220V 440V 2,500V AC, 1 minute
AC-12 Control of Operating extremes:
resistive loads and 10A — 10A 10A 6A 2A Vibration Resistance
Operational Current
AC solid state loads

50/60 Hz AC-15 Control of Shock Resistance
electromagnetic 10A — 7A 5A 3A 1A
loads (> 72 VA) Operating
900 operations/h
Frequency
DC-12 Control of
resistive loads and 8A 4A — 2.2A 1.1A — Mechanical:
solid state loads 500,000 operations minimum
DC
(push-pull: 250,000 operations)
DC-13 Control of Life Electrical:
4A 2A — 1.1A 0.6A —
electromagnets 500,000 operations minimum
(push-pull: 250,000 operations)
Applicable Standards and Approvals (at 900 operations/h, duty ratio 40%)
Safety Standards File No. or Organization Degree of Protection IP65
UL Listing Terminal Style M3.5 screw
UL
File No. E68961
CSA C22.2 No. 14 File No. LR92374
EN60947-1
EN TÜV Rheinland R9551089
EN60947-5-1
Pushlock Turn Reset Switches (Separate Type)

HW1B-V3 1NC HW1B-V301➀
1NO-1NC HW1B-V311➀
2NC HW1B-V302➀

Specify a button color code in

1NO-1NC HW1B-V411➀ place of ➀ in the Type No.
2NC HW1B-V402➀ R: red

Y: yellow

2NC HW1B-V502➀
• Yellow buttons cannot be used as emergency stop switches in compliance with EN standards.
• Pushlock turn reset switches with one or three contact blocks contain a dummy block.
• Safety lever lock HW9Z-LS is supplied with the switch.
• Other contact arrangements and gold-plated silver contacts are also available. See page 41.
(06/02/17) 45
Pushlock Key Reset Switches (Separate Type)

ø40mm Mushroom Pushlock Key Reset
HW1B-X4 1NC HW1B-X401R
1NO-1NC HW1B-X411R
Red only
2NC HW1B-X402R
2NO-2NC HW1B-X422R
• When pressed, the button is held depressed. The button is released by turning the key clockwise.
• Pushlock key reset switches with one or three contact blocks contain a dummy block.
• Two identical keys and safety lever lock HW9Z-LS are supplied with the switch.
Push-Pull Switches (Separate Type)

ø40mm Mushroom Push-Pull (2-position)
HW1B-Y2 1NC HW1B-Y201➀
Specify a button color
code in place of ➀ in
1NO-1NC HW1B-Y211➀ the Type No.
R: red
Y: yellow
2NC HW1B-Y202➀
• The button is maintained at either pulled or depressed position.

• Push-pull switches are available with one or two contact blocks.
• Push-pull switches with one contact block contain a dummy block.
• Safety lever lock HW9Z-LS is supplied with the switch.
Accessory
Nameplate
Package
Shape Name Type No. Legend Remarks
Quantity
Background: Yellow
Legend: Black
ø 60 HWAV-0 (blank) Applicable panel thickness:
0.8 to 4.5 mm
Nameplate for Material: Polyamide
ø2
2 1
Emergency Stop Switch Not applicable for ø60mm
1.5 0.9 EMERGENCY mushroom buttons.
HWAV-27 Legend “EMERGENCY STOP”
STOP
is indicated outside a ø44mm
circle.
46 (06/02/17)
Dimensions
• ø29mm Pushlock Turn Reset
HW1B-V3 Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
Gasket
Terminal Screw M3.5 LO
Locking Ring CK
25
41.4
ø29
49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 13 29.4
1 contact block 2 contact blocks
4 contact blocks 69.4 (4 blocks) 32
• ø40mm Pushlock Turn Reset • ø60mm Pushlock Turn Reset

HW1B-V4 HW1B-V5
LO
CK
25
ø60
41.4
ø40
13 29.4
15
32
34.5
• ø40mm Pushlock Key Reset • ø40mm Push-Pull

HW1B-X4 HW1B-Y2
LO LO
CK CK
25
25
41.4
41.4
ø40
ø40
13
29.4 13 29.4
32
32
49.4
Mounting Hole
The minimum mounting centers shown below are applicable to emergency stop
R0.8 max. switches with one layer of contact blocks (two contact blocks). When two layers of
3.2
+0.2
0 contact blocks are mounted, determine the minimum mounting centers in consider-
ø22
.3 +0
0 4
. ation of convenience for wiring.
24.1 +0.4
• Minimum Mounting Centers for Emergency Stop Switches

0
Unit Vertical Spacing Horizontal Spacing

HW1B-V3
HW1B-V4
50 mm 50 mm
HW1B-X4
HW1B-Y2
HW1B-V5 60 mm 60 mm
Note: When using the safety lever lock, determine the vertical spacing in consideration of con-
venience for installing and removing the safety lever lock.
Recommended vertical spacing: 100 mm
For emergency stop control boxes, see page 82.
(06/02/17) 47
EMO Pushbuttons EMO is an abbreviation of Emergency Off. Used for emergency stop according to SEMI standards.

ø40mm EMO Pushbuttons
HW1B-V4∗∗R-EMO 1NC HW1B-V401R-EMO
1NO-1NC HW1B-V411R-EMO
Red only
(Legend: White)
2NC HW1B-V402R-EMO
2NO-2NC HW1B-V422R-EMO
Dimensions
LOC Lock Lever
Locking Ring K
0
ø4
26.5
25
41.4
20
49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 13
29.4
69.4 (4 blocks) 32 All dimensions in mm.
SEMI Standard Compliant Switch Guards (For ø22mm mounting hole)

• SEMI S2-0200 12.5.1 Compliant
• Type No.: HW9Z-KG1 • Dimensions • Installation
TOP Marking
64 38 TOP Marking
• Color: Yellow 48 22 Locking Ring
80
32
Operator
2
ø2 Gasket
Not applicable for ø60mm mushroom buttons. Panel Thickness: 1.2 to 4
• SEMATECH Application Guide for SEMI S2-93, 12.4 Compliant

• Type No.: HW9Z-KG2 • Dimensions • Installation TOP Marking
• Degree of Protection: IP65 36.5
ø2
TOP Marking
• Color: Yellow
2.
Locking Ring
2
ø76.1
Operator
ø90
Panel Thickness: 1.2 to 4
Not applicable for ø60mm mushroom buttons.
• EMO Sticker
• Type No.: HW9Z-EMO-NPP
• Package Quantity: 10
• Color: Yellow with red letter
50
E MO
20
Caution
International industrial standards such as European Union Directive, IEC60204-1, and JIS B9960-1 require that emergency stop switches
must be installed in the manner in which the operator can access and operate the switches easily, and prohibit the use of switch guards.
The HW9Z-KG1 and HW9Z-KG2 switch guards are used for the emergency stop switches installed on semiconductor manufacturing
equipment only. Do not use the switch guards for emergency stop switches installed on machine systems such as machine tool and food
processing systems.
48 (06/02/17)
HW Series Pushbuttons ø22
Flush / Extended / Mushroom Types
Operation ➀ Button
Shape Contact Type No. Dimensions (mm)
Type Color Code
Flush 1NO HW1B-M110➀
HW1B-M1 1NC HW1B-M101➀ M3.5 Terminal
HW1B-A1 1NO-1NC HW1B-M111➀ Screw
Momentary Panel Thickness
2NO HW1B-M120➀ Locking Ring 0.8 to 6 LO
CK
2NC HW1B-M102➀
25
2NO-2NC HW1B-M122➀
41.4
ø29
1NO HW1B-A110➀
1NC HW1B-A101➀ ø2
3.6
1NO-1NC HW1B-A111➀ 49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 13

Maintained 69.4 (4 blocks)
29.4
2NO HW1B-A120➀
2NC HW1B-A102➀
2NO-2NC HW1B-A122➀
Extended 1NO HW1B-M210➀
HW1B-A2 1NO-1NC HW1B-M211➀
Screw
Panel Thickness
Momentary Locking Ring 0.8 to 6 LO
CK
2NO HW1B-M220➀
2NC HW1B-M202➀
25
ø23.6
41.4
ø29
1NO HW1B-A210➀
1NC HW1B-A201➀ Specify a but- 13
1NO-1NC HW1B-A211➀ ton color code 29.4
Maintained 49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 19
2NO HW1B-A220➀ in place of ➀ in 69.4 (4 blocks)
2NC HW1B-A202➀ the Type No.
B: black
ø29mm Mushroom 1NO HW1B-M310➀
G: green
HW1B-M3 1NC HW1B-M301➀ R: red M3.5 Terminal
HW1B-A3 1NO-1NC HW1B-M311➀ S: blue
Screw
Panel Thickness
Momentary Locking Ring 0.8 to 6 LO
2NO HW1B-M320➀ W: white CK
2NC HW1B-M302➀ Y: yellow
25
41.4
ø29
1NO HW1B-A310➀
1NC HW1B-A301➀
13
1NO-1NC HW1B-A311➀ 29.4
Maintained 49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 23.2
2NO HW1B-A320➀ 69.4 (4 blocks)
2NC HW1B-A302➀
HW1B-A4 1NO-1NC HW1B-M411➀ Screw
0.8 to 6 LO
2NO HW1B-M420➀ Locking Ring CK
2NC HW1B-M402➀
25
41.4
ø40
1NO HW1B-A410➀
1NC HW1B-A401➀
1NO-1NC HW1B-A411➀ 13
Maintained 49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 23.2
29.4
2NO HW1B-A420➀
69.4 (4 blocks)
2NC HW1B-A402➀
ø60mm Mushroom 1NO HW1B-M510➀ M3.5 Terminal
Screw
HW1B-M5 Locking Ring Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
1NC HW1B-M501➀ Specify a but-
ton color code
1NO-1NC HW1B-M511➀ in place of ➀ in
the Type No.
ø60
Momentary
2NO HW1B-M520➀ B: black
G: green
2NC HW1B-M502➀ R: red 15
49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 30
2NO-2NC HW1B-M522➀ 69.4 (4 blocks)
• Pushbuttons with one or three contact blocks contain a dummy block.

(06/02/17) 49
ø22 HW Series Pushbuttons
Square Flush / Square Extended Types
Type Color Code
Square Flush 1NO HW2B-M110➀
HW2B-M1 1NC HW2B-M101➀
HW2B-A1 1NO-1NC HW2B-M111➀ M3.5 Terminal
Screw
CK
2NC HW2B-M102➀
25
29.6
41.4
1NO HW2B-A110➀
1NC HW2B-A101➀ Specify a but-
1NO-1NC HW2B-A111➀ ton color code
Maintained 49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 13 24.8
2NO HW2B-A120➀ in place of ➀ in 69.4 (4 blocks)
29.4
2NC HW2B-A102➀ the Type No.
B: black
Square Extended 1NO HW2B-M210➀
G: green
HW2B-M2 1NC HW2B-M201➀ R: red M3.5 Terminal
HW2B-A2 1NO-1NC HW2B-M211➀ S: blue Screw
2NO HW2B-M220➀ W: white Locking Ring 0.8 to 6 LO
CK
2NC HW2B-M202➀ Y: yellow
25
29.6
24.8
41.4
1NO HW2B-A210➀
1NC HW2B-A201➀
1NO-1NC HW2B-A211➀ 13
Maintained 29.4
2NO HW2B-A220➀ 49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 19
69.4 (4 blocks)
2NC HW2B-A202➀
Contact Block (Bottom View) Terminal Wiring

• Arrows indicate access directions for wiring.

4 contact blocks
50 (06/02/17)
HW Series Pushbuttons ø22
Round Button with Square Bezel Type
Type Color Code
Round Flush 1NO HW3B-M110➀
with Square Bezel 1NC HW3B-M101➀
HW3B-M1 1NO-1NC HW3B-M111➀ M3.5 Terminal
Screw
HW3B-A1 Momentary Panel Thickness
CK
2NC HW3B-M102➀
25
1NO HW3B-A110➀
29.6
41.4
1NC HW3B-A101➀ 3.6
ø2
Maintained 49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 13 29.4
2NO HW3B-A120➀
69.4 (4 blocks)
2NC HW3B-A102➀
Round Extended 1NO HW3B-M210➀
with Square Bezel 1NC HW3B-M201➀ Specify a but-
HW3B-M2 1NO-1NC HW3B-M211➀
M3.5 Terminal
Momentary ton color code Screw

HW3B-A2
2NO HW3B-M220➀ in place of ➀ in Locking Ring
Panel Thickness
0.8 to 6 LO
CK
2NC HW3B-M202➀ the Type No.
25
B: black
ø23.6
29.6
1NO HW3B-A210➀
41.4
G: green
1NC HW3B-A201➀ R: red
1NO-1NC HW3B-A211➀ S: blue 13
Maintained
2NO HW3B-A220➀ W: white 49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 19
29.4
2NC HW3B-A202➀ Y: yellow 69.4 (4 blocks)
with Square Bezel 1NC HW3B-M301➀ M3.5 Terminal
HW3B-M3 1NO-1NC HW3B-M311➀ Screw
HW3B-A3 Momentary Panel Thickness
CK
2NC HW3B-M302➀
25
29.6
41.4
ø29
1NO HW3B-A310➀
1NC HW3B-A301➀
1NO-1NC HW3B-A311➀ 13
Maintained 29.4
2NO HW3B-A320➀ 49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 23.2
69.4 (4 blocks)
2NC HW3B-A302➀
Contact Block (Bottom View) Terminal Wiring


4 contact blocks
(06/02/17) 51
ø22 HW Series Pilot Lights
Round Flush / Dome / Square Flush Types
Shape Lamp Input Type Type No. ➁ Lens/LED Color Code ➂ Operating Voltage Code
Round Flush A: amber
Without Lamp Full Voltage HW1P-1Q0➁
HW1P-1 G: green
PW: pure white
Transformer HW1P-1➂2➁ R: red
LED S: blue
W: white
DC-DC Converter∗ HW1P-1D2➁
Y: yellow
A: amber
G: green
(Photo: Full Voltage Type) Incandescent Transformer HW1P-1➂5➁ R: red
S: blue
W: white
Dome A: amber
Without Lamp Full Voltage HW1P-2Q0➁ Specify an operating volt-
HW1P-2 G: green
PW: pure white age code in place of ➂ in
Transformer HW1P-2➂2➁ R: red the Type No.
LED S: blue
H: 100/110V AC
W: white
DC-DC Converter∗ HW1P-2D2➁ H2: 115/120V AC
Y: yellow
M: 200/220V AC
A: amber M4: 230/240V AC
G: green S: 380V AC
(Photo: Full Voltage Type) Incandescent Transformer HW1P-2➂5➁ R: red T: 400/440V AC
S: blue T8: 480V AC
W: white
Square Flush A: amber
Without Lamp Full Voltage HW2P-1Q0➁
HW2P-1 G: green
PW: pure white
Transformer HW2P-1➂2➁ R: red
LED S: blue
W: white
DC-DC Converter∗ HW2P-1D2➁
Y: yellow
A: amber
G: green
(Photo: Transformer Type) Incandescent Transformer HW2P-1➂5➁ R: red
S: blue
W: white
• Specify a lens/LED color code in place of ➁ in the Type No.
• Specify an operating voltage code in place of ➂ in the Type No.
• Full voltage types do not contain a lamp. Order LED or incandescent lamps separately. For lamps, see page 77.
• LED illuminated transformer and DC-DC converter types contain an LED lamp (LSTD-6➁, rated voltage 6V AC/DC).
• Incandescent illuminated transformer types contain an incandescent lamp (LS-6, rated voltage 6V AC/DC).
∗ DC-DC converter types are not approved by UL, CSA, and TÜV, and not CE compliant (operating voltage 90 to 140V DC).
Dimensions Mounting Hole Layout

• Full Voltage Type • Close mounting on 30mm centers
Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6 Degree of protection: IP65
Gasket Flush Dome Roound/Dome Square Flush
M3.5 Terminal Screw
Locking Ring 9 +0.4
ø2 0
.3
ø22
X2
X1
30 min.
0.5 17.5 29.6

43.3 7
• Transformer Type
M3.5 Terminal Screw Flush Dome Round/Dome Square Flush
9 30 min.
ø2
• When mounting transformer or DC-DC

X1
24
X2
converter type units on 30mm centers

29.6 60.8 7 17.5 29.6 vertically and horizontally, keep the
ambient temperature below 40°C.
• DC-DC Converter Type
M3.5 Terminal Screw Flush Dome Round/Dome Square Flush
9
ø2
X1
24
X2
29.6 76.2 7 17.5 29.6 All dimensions in mm.
52 (06/02/17)
HW Series Illuminated Pushbuttons ø22
Round Flush Illuminated Pushbutton
Shape Operation Type Lamp Input Type Contact Type No.

Round Flush 1NO HW1L-M110Q0➁
HW1L-M1 1NC HW1L-M101Q0➁
HW1L-A1
1NO-1NC HW1L-M111Q0➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage
2NO HW1L-M120Q0➁
2NC HW1L-M102Q0➁
1NO-1NC HW1L-M111➂2➁
2NO HW1L-M120➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW1L-M102➂2➁
Momentary
LED
1NO-1NC HW1L-M111D2➁
2NO HW1L-M120D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW1L-M102D2➁
2NO HW1L-M120➂5➁
Incandescent Transformer
2NC HW1L-M102➂5➁
1NO HW1L-A110Q0➁
1NC HW1L-A101Q0➁
1NO-1NC HW1L-A111Q0➁
2NO HW1L-A120Q0➁
2NC HW1L-A102Q0➁
1NO-1NC HW1L-A111➂2➁
2NO HW1L-A120➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW1L-A102➂2➁
Maintained
LED
1NO-1NC HW1L-A111D2➁
2NO HW1L-A120D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW1L-A102D2➁
2NO HW1L-A120➂5➁
2NC HW1L-A102➂5➁
• Color Code and Operating Voltage Code

LED Illuminated Type Incandescent Illuminated Type
➂ Operating Voltage Code
➁ Lens/LED Color Code ➁ Lens Color Code
Specify a lens/LED color code in Specify a lens color code in place of Specify an operating voltage code
place of ➁ in the Type No. ➁ in the Type No. in place of ➂ in the Type No.
A: amber A: amber H: 100/110V AC

G: green G: green H2: 115/120V AC
PW: pure white R: red M: 200/220V AC
R: red S: blue M4: 230/240V AC
S: blue W: white S: 380V AC
W: white T: 400/440V AC
Y: yellow T8: 480V AC
Note: Full voltage types do not contain a lamp. Order LED or incandescent lamps separately. For lamps, see page 77.
LED illuminated transformer and DC-DC converter types contain an LED lamp (LSTD-6➁, rated voltage 6V AC/DC).
Incandescent illuminated transformer types contain an incandescent lamp (LS-6, rated voltage 6V AC/DC).
(06/02/17) 53
ø22 HW Series Illuminated Pushbuttons
Round Extended Illuminated Pushbutton

Round Extended 1NO HW1L-M210Q0➁
HW1L-A2
2NO HW1L-M220Q0➁
2NC HW1L-M202Q0➁
2NO HW1L-M220➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW1L-M202➂2➁
Momentary
LED
2NO HW1L-M220D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW1L-M202D2➁
2NO HW1L-M220➂5➁
2NC HW1L-M202➂5➁
1NO HW1L-A210Q0➁
1NC HW1L-A201Q0➁
2NO HW1L-A220Q0➁
2NC HW1L-A202Q0➁
2NO HW1L-A220➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW1L-A202➂2➁
Maintained
LED
2NO HW1L-A220D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW1L-A202D2➁
2NO HW1L-A220➂5➁
2NC HW1L-A202➂5➁


54 (06/02/17)
Round Extended with Full Shroud Illuminated Pushbutton

Round Extended 1NO HW1L-MF210Q0➁
with Full Shroud 1NC HW1L-MF201Q0➁
HW1L-MF2
1NO-1NC HW1L-MF211Q0➁
HW1L-AF2 Without Lamp Full Voltage
2NO HW1L-MF220Q0➁
2NC HW1L-MF202Q0➁
2NO-2NC HW1L-MF222Q0➁
1NO-1NC HW1L-MF211➂2➁
2NO HW1L-MF220➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW1L-MF202➂2➁
Momentary
LED
1NO-1NC HW1L-MF211D2➁
2NO HW1L-MF220D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW1L-MF202D2➁
2NO-2NC HW1L-MF222D2➁
2NO HW1L-MF220➂5➁
2NC HW1L-MF202➂5➁
1NO HW1L-AF210Q0➁
1NC HW1L-AF201Q0➁
1NO-1NC HW1L-AF211Q0➁
2NO HW1L-AF220Q0➁
2NC HW1L-AF202Q0➁
2NO-2NC HW1L-AF222Q0➁
1NO-1NC HW1L-AF211➂2➁
2NO HW1L-AF220➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW1L-AF202➂2➁
Maintained
LED
1NO-1NC HW1L-AF211D2➁
2NO HW1L-AF220D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW1L-AF202D2➁
2NO-2NC HW1L-AF222D2➁
2NO HW1L-AF220➂5➁
2NC HW1L-AF202➂5➁


(06/02/17) 55
Square Flush Illuminated Pushbutton

Square Flush 1NO HW2L-M110Q0➁
HW2L-A1
2NO HW2L-M120Q0➁
2NC HW2L-M102Q0➁
2NO HW2L-M120➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW2L-M102➂2➁
Momentary
LED
2NO HW2L-M120D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW2L-M102D2➁
2NO HW2L-M120➂5➁
2NC HW2L-M102➂5➁
1NO HW2L-A110Q0➁
1NC HW2L-A101Q0➁
2NO HW2L-A120Q0➁
2NC HW2L-A102Q0➁
2NO HW2L-A120➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW2L-A102➂2➁
Maintained
LED
2NO HW2L-A120D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW2L-A102D2➁
2NO HW2L-A120➂5➁
2NC HW2L-A102➂5➁


56 (06/02/17)
Round Flush with Square Bezel Illuminated Pushbutton

Round Flush 1NO HW3L-M110Q0➁
with Square Bezel 1NC HW3L-M101Q0➁
HW3L-M1
HW3L-A1 Without Lamp Full Voltage
2NO HW3L-M120Q0➁
2NC HW3L-M102Q0➁
2NO HW3L-M120➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW3L-M102➂2➁
Momentary
LED
2NO HW3L-M120D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW3L-M102D2➁
2NO HW3L-M120➂5➁
2NC HW3L-M102➂5➁
1NO HW3L-A110Q0➁
1NC HW3L-A101Q0➁
2NO HW3L-A120Q0➁
2NC HW3L-A102Q0➁
2NO HW3L-A120➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW3L-A102➂2➁
Maintained
LED
2NO HW3L-A120D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW3L-A102D2➁
2NO HW3L-A120➂5➁
2NC HW3L-A102➂5➁


(06/02/17) 57
Mushroom (ø29mm) Illuminated Pushbutton

ø29mm Mushroom 1NO HW1L-M310Q0➁
HW1L-A3
2NO HW1L-M320Q0➁
2NC HW1L-M302Q0➁
2NO HW1L-M320➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW1L-M302➂2➁
Momentary
LED
2NO HW1L-M320D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW1L-M302D2➁
2NO HW1L-M320➂5➁
2NC HW1L-M302➂5➁
1NO HW1L-A310Q0➁
1NC HW1L-A301Q0➁
2NO HW1L-A320Q0➁
2NC HW1L-A302Q0➁
2NO HW1L-A320➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW1L-A302➂2➁
Maintained
LED
2NO HW1L-A320D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW1L-A302D2➁
2NO HW1L-A320➂5➁
2NC HW1L-A302➂5➁


58 (06/02/17)
Mushroom (ø29mm) with Square Bezel Illuminated Pushbutton

with Square Bezel 1NC HW3L-M301Q0➁
HW3L-M3
HW3L-A3 Without Lamp Full Voltage
2NO HW3L-M320Q0➁
2NC HW3L-M302Q0➁
2NO HW3L-M320➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW3L-M302➂2➁
Momentary
LED
2NO HW3L-M320D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW3L-M302D2➁
2NO HW3L-M320➂5➁
2NC HW3L-M302➂5➁
1NO HW3L-A310Q0➁
1NC HW3L-A301Q0➁
2NO HW3L-A320Q0➁
2NC HW3L-A302Q0➁
2NO HW3L-A320➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW3L-A302➂2➁
Maintained
LED
2NO HW3L-A320D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW3L-A302D2➁
2NO HW3L-A320➂5➁
2NC HW3L-A302➂5➁


(06/02/17) 59
Mushroom (ø40mm) Illuminated Pushbutton

HW1L-A4
2NO HW1L-M420Q0➁
2NC HW1L-M402Q0➁
2NO HW1L-M420➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW1L-M402➂2➁
Momentary
LED
2NO HW1L-M420D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW1L-M402D2➁
2NO HW1L-M420➂5➁
2NC HW1L-M402➂5➁
1NO HW1L-A410Q0➁
1NC HW1L-A401Q0➁
2NO HW1L-A420Q0➁
2NC HW1L-A402Q0➁
2NO HW1L-A420➂2➁
Transformer
2NC HW1L-A402➂2➁
Maintained
LED
2NO HW1L-A420D2➁
DC-DC Converter∗
2NC HW1L-A402D2➁
2NO HW1L-A420➂5➁
2NC HW1L-A402➂5➁


60 (06/02/17)
Dimensions
• Full Voltage Type Full Voltage Adapter
• Operator
1 contact block Round with
Round Square Square Bezel
Panel Thickness LO LO LO
0.8 to 6 CK CK CK
M3.5 Terminal Screw
25
25
25
Contact Block
Locking Ring Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
29.6
29.6
41.4
41.4
41.4
3.6 3.6
ø2 ø2
13
24.8
29.4 29.4 29.4
49.4 (1 block) LO
1 contact block CK
25
Full Voltage Adapter
ø23.5
41.4
2 contact blocks Extended
.6
ø 23
13
29.4
M3.5 Terminal Screw 18.5
Contact Block Locking Ring Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6 LO
CK
25
ø29.5
41.4
Extended with Full Shroud
3 .6
2 contact blocks 69.4 (2 blocks) ø2
29.4
18.5
3 contact blocks LO
CK
25
M3.5 Terminal Screw
41.4
ø29
Contact Block Mushroom (ø29)

13
X1
29.4
23.2
LO
CK
X2
3 contact blocks 69.4 (3 blocks)

25
41.4
ø40
Full Voltage Adapter Mushroom (ø40)
4 contact blocks
13 29.4
23.2
M3.5 Terminal Screw
Contact Block
Terminal Wiring
4 contact blocks 89.4 (4 contacts)
4 3
X1 X2
X1 X2
79.5 (2 blocks)
M3.5 Terminal Screws 99.5 (4 blocks) Contact Block Transformer
• DC-DC Converter Type Safety Lever Lock
Locking Ring
X1
X2
89.5 (2 blocks)
M3.5 Terminal Screw 109.5 (4 blocks)
(06/02/17) 61
ø22 HW Series Selector Switches
Selector Switches
Shape HW1S
No. of Positions
Contact Arrangement Chart Dimensions on page 66.

Contact Maintained (90°) Spring Return from
Operator Position
90° 2-position / 60° 2-position
Contact Block Right (60°)

— —
Code Mounting
L R
L R
Position Type L R
10 1 NO
HW1S-2T10 HW1S-21T10
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
HW1S-2T20 HW1S-21T20 — —
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
22 2 NC
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
Contact Maintained Spring Return Spring Return Spring Return
Operator Position from Right from Left Two-way
Contact Block C C C C
Code Mounting
L R L R L R L R
Position Type L C R
20 1 NO
HW1S-3T20 HW1S-31T20 HW1S-32T20 HW1S-33T20
(2NO) 2 NO
02 1 NC
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO
22N1 2 NO
HW1S-3T22N1 HW1S-31T22N1 HW1S-32T22N1 HW1S-33T22N1
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
45° 3-position
22N9 ★ 2 NC
HW1S-3ST22N9 — — —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
40N2 ★ 2 NO HW1S-3ST40N2 — — —
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
04 2 NC
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
21N1 ★ 2 NO
HW1S-3JT21N1 — — —
(2NO-1NC) 3 NC
4 Dummy
Contact Maintained Maintained

Contact Block
Operator Position • Contact Block Mounting Position
2 3
Code 1 3
1
2 4
5
and Contact Arrangement Chart
Mounting
Position Type 1 2 3 4 5 4
4
2
1 NC
13N6 ★ 2 NC
HW1S-4T13N6 —
(1NO-3NC) 3 NC
4 NO
1 NO
3
22N3 ★ 2 NC 1
HW1S-4T22N3 —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC Center
4 NO Left Right
1 NO
12 ★ 2 NC L C R Operator
HW1S-4T12 —
(1NO-2NC) 3 NC Position
1 NO
4 Dummy
1 NO 2 NO
22N3 ★ 2 NC 3 NC
— HW1S-5T22N3
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
4 NO
• On the contact arrangement marked with ★ in the table above, the rated current (load switching current) is reduced to a half of the rated cur-
rent of the contact block. The rated insulation voltage and the rated thermal current remain unchanged.
• Selector switches with one or three contact blocks contain a dummy block. Knob operator: White indicator on black body
• Other contact arrangements are also available. See pages 67 through 70.
62 (06/02/17)
HW Series Key Selector Switches ø22
Shape HW1K
No. of Positions
Contact Arrangement Chart Dimensions on page 66.

Contact Maintained (90°) Spring Return from
Operator Position
Contact Block Right (60°)

— —
Code Mounting
L R
L R
Position Type L R
10 1 NO
HW1K-2A10 HW1K-21B10
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
HW1K-2A20 HW1K-21B20 — —
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
22 2 NC
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
Code Mounting
L R L R L R L R
Position Type L C R
1 NO 20 HW1K-3A20 HW1K-31B20 HW1K-32C20 HW1K-33D20
2 NO (2NO)
02 1 NC
HW1K-3A02 HW1K-31B02 HW1K-32C02 HW1K-33D02
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO
22N1 2 NO
HW1K-3A22N1 HW1K-31B22N1 HW1K-32C22N1 HW1K-33D22N1
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
45° 3-position
22N9 ★ 2 NC
HW1K-3SA22N9 — — —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
40N2 ★ 2 NO HW1K-3SA40N2 — — —
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
04 2 NC
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
21N1 ★ 2 NO
HW1K-3JA21N1 — — —
(2NO-1NC) 3 NC
4 Dummy
• On the spring-returned types, the key can be released only from the maintained position. On the maintained types, the key can be released
from every position. Key retained positions are also available. See page 42.
• Each key selector switch is supplied with two identical keys. Three different keys are also available. See page 42.
• Key selector switches with one or three contact blocks contain a dummy block.
• Cylinder cover: black, Cylinder: metal
• Other contact arrangements are also available. See pages 67 through 70.
• Contact Block Mounting Position and Contact Arrangement Chart
Left Center Right

4
2
L C R Operator
Position
1 NO
2 NO
3 3 NC
1 4 NC
(06/02/17) 63
ø22 HW Series Illuminated Selector Switches

Shape HW1F
Contact Arrangement Chart

Dimensions on page 66.
Contact Operator Maintained (90°) Spring Return from

Contact Block Position Right (60°)
Lamp Input Type
Code Mounting
L R
L R
Position Type L R
1 NO Without Lamp Full Voltage HW1F-211Q0➁ HW1F-2111Q0➁
11
2 NC LED Transformer HW1F-211➂2➁ HW1F-2111➂2➁
(1NO-1NC)
Incandescent Transformer HW1F-211➂5➁ HW1F-2111➂5➁
1 NO Without Lamp Full Voltage HW1F-220Q0➁ HW1F-2120Q0➁
20
2 NO LED Transformer HW1F-220➂2➁ HW1F-2120➂2➁
(2NO)
1 NO
Without Lamp Full Voltage HW1F-222Q0➁ HW1F-2122Q0➁
2 NC
22 3 NO
LED Transformer HW1F-222➂2➁ HW1F-2122➂2➁
(2NO-2NC) 4 NC


R: red R: red M: 200/220V AC
S: blue S: blue M4: 230/240V AC
W: white W: white S: 380V AC
Y: yellow T: 400/440V AC
T8: 480V AC
• LED illuminated transformer types contain an LED lamp (LSTD-6➁, rated voltage 6V AC/DC).
Transformer
4 Full Voltage Adapter
2 Left Right
4
2
L R Operator
Position
1 NO
2 NC
3 3 3 NO
1 1
4 NC
Full Voltage Type Transformer Type
For more contact arrangement chart, see page 67.
64 (06/02/17)
HW Series Illuminated Selector Switches ø22
45° 3-position
Contact Operator Maintained Spring Return Spring Return Spring Return
Contact Block Position Lamp from Right from Left Two-way
C C C C
Code Mounting
Input Type L R L R L R L R
Position Type L C R
Without Lamp
1 NO HW1F-320Q0➁ HW1F-3120Q0➁ HW1F-3220Q0➁ HW1F-3320Q0➁
Full Voltage
20 LED
2 NO HW1F-320➂2➁ HW1F-3120➂2➁ HW1F-3220➂2➁ HW1F-3320➂2➁
(2NO) Transformer
Incandescent
HW1F-320➂5➁ HW1F-3120➂5➁ HW1F-3220➂5➁ HW1F-3320➂5➁
Transformer
Without Lamp
1 NC HW1F-302Q0➁ HW1F-3102Q0➁ HW1F-3202Q0➁ HW1F-3302Q0➁
Full Voltage
02 LED
2 NC HW1F-302➂2➁ HW1F-3102➂2➁ HW1F-3202➂2➁ HW1F-3302➂2➁
(2NC) Transformer
Incandescent
HW1F-302➂5➁ HW1F-3102➂5➁ HW1F-3202➂5➁ HW1F-3302➂5➁
Transformer
1 NO Without Lamp
HW1F-322N1Q0➁ HW1F-3122N1Q0➁ HW1F-3222N1Q0➁ HW1F-3322N1Q0➁
2 NO Full Voltage
22N1 3 NC LED
HW1F-322N1➂2➁ HW1F-3122N1➂2➁ HW1F-3222N1➂2➁ HW1F-3322N1➂2➁
(2NO-2NC) 4 NC Transformer
Incandescent
HW1F-322N1➂5➁ HW1F-3122N1➂5➁ HW1F-3222N1➂5➁ HW1F-3322N1➂5➁
Transformer
1 NO Without Lamp
HW1F-340Q0➁ HW1F-3140Q0➁ HW1F-3240Q0➁ HW1F-3340Q0➁
2 NO Full Voltage
40 3 NO LED
HW1F-340➂2➁ HW1F-3140➂2➁ HW1F-3240➂2➁ HW1F-3340➂2➁
(4NO) 4 NO Transformer
Incandescent
HW1F-340➂5➁ HW1F-3140➂5➁ HW1F-3240➂5➁ HW1F-3340➂5➁
Transformer
1 NC Without Lamp
HW1F-304Q0➁ HW1F-3104Q0➁ HW1F-3204Q0➁ HW1F-3304Q0➁
2 NC Full Voltage
04 3 NC LED
HW1F-304➂2➁ HW1F-3104➂2➁ HW1F-3204➂2➁ HW1F-3304➂2➁
(4NC) 4 NC Transformer
Incandescent
HW1F-304➂5➁ HW1F-3104➂5➁ HW1F-3204➂5➁ HW1F-3304➂5➁
Transformer


R: red R: red M: 200/220V AC
S: blue S: blue M4: 230/240V AC
W: white W: white S: 380V AC
Y: yellow T: 400/440V AC
T8: 480V AC
Transformer
4 Full Voltage Adapter Center
2 Left Right
4
2
L C R Operator
Position
1 NO
2 NO
3 3 3 NC
1 1
4 NC
For more contact arrangement chart, see page 67.
(06/02/17) 65
ø22 HW Series Selector Switches
Dimensions: Selector Switches
• Knob Operator M3.5 Terminal
Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
Screw Gasket
LO
Locking Ring CK
9
ø2
25
ø28.8
41.4
49.4 (1 or 2 blocks) 7 29.4
4 contact blocks 69.4 (3 or 4 blocks) 21
• Key Operator LO
CK 4
9.
ø2
25
41.4
17
13
30.5 29.4
Dimensions: Illuminated Selector Switches

• Full Voltage Type M3.5 Terminal Screw LO
CK
9
ø2
25
69.4 (2 blocks) 7 29.4 41.4

89.4 (4 blocks) 21
• Transformer Type LO
CK
9
ø2
4 3
25
41.4
X1 X2
7
M.3.5 Terminal 79.5 (2 blocks)
Screw 99.5 (4 blocks) 21 29.4
Terminal Wiring
X1 X2
Contact Block Transformer

66 (06/02/17)
HW Series Selector Switch Contact Arrangement Charts ø22
90° 2-position (Maintained) / 60° 2-position (Spring Return)
Operator
Operator Availability
Position L R
Cam Code
L R
Contact
Contact Block Remarks
Code
Illuminated
Illuminated
Knob
Knob
Key
Key
Mounting
Position Type L R
10 1 NO
× × × × × × — Standard
(1NO) 2 Dummy
01 1 NC
× × × × — × —
(1NC) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
× × × × × × — Standard
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
11N1 1 NC
× × × × — × —
(1NO-1NC) 2 NO
20 1 NO
× × × × × × — Standard
(2NO) 2 NO
02 1 NC
× × × × — × —
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO
22 2 NO
× × × × × × — Standard
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
22N2 2 NO
× × × × — × —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
1 NO
22N1 2 NO
× × × × — × —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
22N4 2 NO
× × × × — × —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
1 NC
31N1 2 NO
× × × × — × —
(3NO-1NC) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
40 2 NO
× × × × — × —
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
7S ★ 1 NO
× × × × — × —
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
1 NO
8S ★ 2 NC
× × × × — × —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
1 NC
22N7 ★ 2 NO
× × × × — × —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
• On the contact arrangement marked with ★ in the table above, the

rated current (load switching current) is reduced to a half of the
rated current of the contact block. The rated insulation voltage and
the rated thermal current remain unchanged.
Remarks: When ordering the contact arrangement indicated with
“Standard” in the table above, specify the Type No. shown in
the standard Type No. on preceding pages. For other contact
arrangements, see page 70 to specify the Type No. and con-
tact code.
(06/02/17) 67
ø22 HW Series Selector Switch Contact Arrangement Charts
45° 3-position
Operator Operator Availability
Position L
C
R L
C
R L
C
R L
C
R
Cam Code
Contact
Illuminated
Illuminated
Illuminated
Illuminated
Code
Knob
Knob
Knob
Knob
Key
Key
Key
Key
Mounting
Position Type L C R
11 1 NO
× × × × × × × × × × × × —
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
11N1 1 NC
× × × × × × × × × × × × —
(1NO-1NC) 2 NO
7S ★ 1 NO
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
11N1 ★ 1 NC
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(1NO-1NC) 2 NO
20 1 NO
× × × × × × × × × × × × — Standard
(2NO) 2 NO
1S ★ 1 NO
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(2NO) 2 NO
2S ★ 1 NC
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(2NC) 2 NC
02 1 NC
× × × × × × × × × × × × — Standard
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO
22N1 2 NO
× × × × × × × × × × × × — Standard
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
22N2 2 NO
× × × × × × × × × × × × —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
1 NO
8S ★ 2 NC
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
1 NO
22N8 ★ 2 NC
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
1 NC
22N2 ★ 2 NO
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
1 NO
31 2 NC
× × × × × × × × × × × × —
(3NO-1NC) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
31N1 2 NO
× × × × × × × × × × × × —
(3NO-1NC) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
13 2 NC
× × × × × × × × × × × × —
(1NO-3NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
13N3 ★ 2 NO
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(1NO-3NC) 3 NC
4 NC
Remarks: When ordering the contact arrangement indicated with “Standard” in the table above,
specify the Type No. shown in the standard Type No. on preceding pages. For other
contact arrangements, see page 70 to specify the Type No. and contact code.
68 (06/02/17)
HW Series Selector Switch Contact Arrangement Charts ø22
45° 3-position
Operator Operator Availability
Position L
C
R L
C
R L
C
R L
C
R
Cam Code
Contact
Illuminated
Illuminated
Illuminated
Illuminated
Code
Knob
Knob
Knob
Knob
Key
Key
Key
Key
Mounting
Position Type L C R
1 NO
40 2 NO
× × × × × × × × × × × × — Standard
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
40N1 ★ 2 NO
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
04 2 NC
× × × × × × × × × × × × — Standard
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
04N2 ★ 2 NC
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
22 ★ 2 NC
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
1 NO
21N1 ★ 2 NO
× × × — — — — — — — — — J Standard
(2NO-1NC) 3 NC
4 Dummy
1 NO
40N2 ★ 2 NO
× × × — — — — — — — — — S Standard
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
22N9 ★ 2 NC
× × × — — — — — — — — — S Standard
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
31N4 ★ 2 NC
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(3NO-1NC) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
13N1 ★ 2 NC
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(1NO-3NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
22N5 ★ 2 NO
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
1 NO
31N2 ★ 2 NO
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(3NO-1NC) 3 NC
4 NO
1 NC
13N2 ★ 2 NC
× × × — — — — — — — — — J
(1NO-3NC) 3 NC
4 NO
Remarks: When ordering the contact arrangement indicated with “Standard” in the table above,
specify the Type No. shown in the standard Type No. on preceding pages. For other
contact arrangements, see page 70 to specify the Type No. and contact code.
(06/02/17) 69
ø22 HW Series Selector Switch Contact Arrangement Charts
45° 4-position
Operator
Operator Position
Availability
Cam Code
Contact
Contact Block 2
1 3 Remarks
Code
4
Mounting
Position Type 1 2 3 4 Knob
1 NO
12 ★ 2 NC
× — Standard
(1NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 Dummy
1 NC
04N3 ★ 2 NC
× —
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
13N6 ★ 2 NC
× — Standard
(1NO-3NC) 3 NC
4 NO
1 NO
13N5 ★ 2 NC
× —
(1NO-3NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
22N3 ★ 2 NC
× — Standard
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
30° 5-position
Operator
Operator Position
Availability
Cam Code
Contact
Contact Block 2
3
4
1 5 Remarks
Code
Mounting
Position Type 1 2 3 4 5 Knob
1 NO
22N3 ★ 2 NC
× — Standard
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO

Transformer
4 Full Voltage Adapter Center
4 2 Left Right
4
2 2
L C R Operator
Position
1 NO
2 NO
3 3 3 3 NC
1 1 1
4 NC
Non-illuminated Selector Illuminated Selector Illuminated Selector
Type No. Development

• When cam code is not required • When cam code is required
HW1S - 2 T 11 HW1K - 3 J A 22N2

Contact code (1NO-1NC) Contact code (2NO-2NC)
“T” for knob operator Key removal option code
2-position Cam code (J, S, or none)
3-position
70 (06/02/17)
HW Series Pushbutton Selectors ø22
Pushbutton Selectors
Contact
Circuit Contact Block ➀ Button Color
Shape Type No.
Category Code Code
Mounting Type Normal Depressed Normal Depressed
Position
HW1R 11 1 NO
HW1R-2A11➀
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
HW1R-2A20➀
(2NO) 2 NO
A
1 NO
22 2 NC
HW1R-2A22➀
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
20 1 NO
HW1R-2D20➀
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO Specify a button
D
22N1 2 NO color code in
HW1R-2D22N1➀
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC place of ➀ in the
4 NC Type No.
1 NO
B: black
22N1 ★ 2 NO
G: green
E HW1R-2E22N1➀
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC R: red
4 NC S: blue
1 NO W: white
Y: yellow
22N1 ★ 2 NO
F HW1R-2F22N1➀
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
22N2 ★ 2 NO
N HW1R-2N22N2➀
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
1 NO
22N1 ★ 2 NO
HW1R-2T22N1➀
T Blocked
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
• When operating the pushbutton selector, do not turn the operator ring or the lock lever while the button is depressed. Otherwise the push-
button selector may be damaged.
• Other contact arrangements are also available upon request.
Dimensions • Contact Block Mounting Position and

M3.5 Terminal
Screw Gasket 4
LO 2
Locking Ring CK
25
ø29.4
41.4
ø28
3
1
Ring
Contact Left Right Position
49.4 (2 blocks) 29.4
Block Normal Depressed Normal Depressed
69.4 (4 blocks) 23.5 Button
1 NO
All dimensions in mm. 2 NO
3 NC
4 NC
(06/02/17) 71
ø22 HW Series Mono-Lever Switches
Mono-Lever Switches
Shape Positions Type No.

HW1M HW1M-1010-20
Standard Lever HW1M-2020-20
HW1M-0101-20
2-position
HW1M-0202-20
HW1M-0101-40
HW1M-0202-40
HW1M-1111-22N9
4-position
HW1M-2222-22N9
HW1M-L HW1M-L1010-20
Interlocking Lever HW1M-L2020-20
HW1M-L0101-20
2-position
HW1M-L0202-20
HW1M-L0101-40
HW1M-L0202-40
HW1M-L1111-22N9
4-position
HW1M-L2222-22N9
• On all mono-lever switches, the rated current (load switching current) is reduced to a half of the rated current of the contact block. The rated
insulation voltage and the rated thermal current remain unchanged.

• 2-position (Right/Left) • 2-position (Up/Down) • 4-position
Contact Lever Operator Contact Lever Operator Contact Lever Operator Position
Contact Block Position Contact Block Position Contact Block
Code Mounting Code Mounting Code Mounting
Position Type Left Center Right Position Type Down Center Up Position Type Down Left Center Up Right
1 NO 1 NO 1 NC
20 20
2 NO 2 NO 2 NC
22N9
1 NO 1 NO 3 NO
2 NO 2 NO 4 NO
40 40
3 NO 3 NO
4 NO 4 NO
• Contact Block Mounting Position and
Up R Dn L Lever Operator Position
HW1M-L — 1 1 1 1 — 22N9 4
2
Up
Type Lever Operation Mode Contact Code
HW1M: Standard Order of Entry Select a required contact
HW1M-L: Interlocking Up → Right → Down → Left operation at each lever
1: Maintained operator position from 3
2: Spring returned the contact arrangement Right
Contact Block 1
0: Blocked charts above and specify Mounting Position Lever Operator
the Contact Code. Left
Position
• The lever operator of the interlocking type HW1M-L is locked only in the
center position.
Down
Dimensions M3.5 Terminal Locking Ring Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6

Screw
2
4.
LO
CK
ø3
25
41.4
49.4 (2 blocks) 8
29.4
69.4 (4 blocks) 72
36 max.
24°
36 max.
24°
45.5 All dimensions in mm.
72 (06/02/17)
HW Series Accessories and Replacement Parts ø22
Accessories
Nameplates
• HWAM, HWAQ, HWAS, and HWAV
Ordering Package
Description Legend Material Type No. Dimensions (mm)
Type No. Quantity
Marking Plate
29
HWAM 1 27 2.7
12.1
Order marking plate Plastic (black)
HWAM HWAM
30
separately. 1.5 mm thick
14.5 14.9
R14.9
HWAMPN10 10 2
ø2
1.5 1
Marking Plate
29
HWAQ 1 27 2.7
12.1
Order marking plate Plastic (black)
HWAQ HWAQ
30
separately. 1.5 mm thick
14.5 14.9
R14.9
HWAQPN10 10 ø22
1.9 1
45 1.6 0.9
HWAS-0 1
Plastic (black)
HWAS Blank HWAS-0
1.5 mm thick
HWAS-0PN10 10 ø2
2
ERGENCY 0
EM ø6
Blank HWAV-0 HWAV-0 1
Plastic (yellow)
HWAV ø2
2
1.5 mm thick
STOP
1.6 0.9
EMERGENCY STOP HWAV-27 HWAV-27 1
• Legend “Emergency Stop” is indicated
outside a ø44mm circle.
• Making Plate
Description Material Type No. Ordering Type No. Package Quantity Dimensions (mm)
• White legend on black background.
HWNP-∗ 1
Aluminum (black) 27
HWNP HWNP-∗
1.0 mm thick
12
HWNP-∗PN10 10
• Specify a legend code in place of ∗ in the Ordering Type No.
Legends
Code Legend
0 (blank) • Installing the marking plate • To remove the marking plate, insert the flat screwdriver beween
1 ON on a nameplate the marking plate and nameplate.
2 OFF
3 START Nameplate
Flat Screwdriver
Marking Plate
4 STOP ➁
31 OFF-ON Marking Plate
35 HAND-AUTO When requring no anti-rotation, remove the projection using pliers.

➀
53 HAND-OFF-AUTO
Nameplate
Note: When using an nameplate, the mounting panel thickness is decreased by 1.5 mm.
(06/02/17) 73
ø22 HW Series Accessories and Replacement Parts
Accessories
Ordering Package
Shape Material Type No. Dimensions (mm)
Type No. Quantity
Locking Ring Wrench • Used to tighten the locking ring when installing
the HW switch onto a panel.
• Tighten the locking ring to a torque of 2.0 N·m.
Metal
8
(weight: MW9Z-T1 MW9Z-T1 1 110 ø2
approx. 150g)
Lamp Holder Tool • Used to install and remove the LED/incandes-

cent lamps.
ø14
Rubber OR-55 OR-55 1
ø11.6
59
Contact Block Removal Tool • Used to remove the contact block and trans-
former, and also to install/remove the pilot light
and illuminated pushbutton lens.
23
Metal/Rubber TW-KC1 TW-KC1 1
130
ø19
39
Anti-rotation Ring • Used to prevent the operator from turning.
Generally used when using no nameplates on
selector switches and pushbutton selectors.
1.5 TOP
Plastic HW9Z-RL HW9Z-RLPN10 10 ø2
9
ø22
Rubber Mounting Hole Plug • Used to plug the unused ø22.2mm mounting
holes.
ø29
Rubber (black) OB-31 OB-31PN05 5
3.5
3.5
ø25
Metallic Mounting Hole Plug • Used to plug the unused ø22.2mm mounting
holes.
Diecast Metal • IP66
(locking ring: LW9Z-BM LW9Z-BM 1 • Mounting panel thickness: ø25.8
3
plastic) 0.8 to 6 mm
Gasket
12
Locking Ring
Barrier • Used to prevent con-
tact between adjacent
lead wires when units
45
are mounted closely.

Plastic HW-VG1 HW-VG1PN10 10 Barriers should
always be used in
close mounting.
20 1.5
Switch Guard • Used to prevent inadvertent operation for flush

pushbuttons and illuminated pushbuttons.
Spring • IP65
HW9Z-K1 HW9Z-K1 1 • Maintained type stops at 90° and 180°.
Return
31 min. 49.4
Spring Return
Panel Thickness:
Plastic 0.8 to 5
51.2
.7
68 min.
R33
Maintained HW9Z-K11 HW9Z-K11 1
0.4
17.4 48.3
74 (06/02/17)
Accessories
Ordering Package
Type No. Quantity
Pushbutton • Used to cover and protect
Clear Boot For flush pushbuttons where units are
OC-31 OC-31 1
ø32.6
pushbuttons subject to watersplash. Not
suitable for outdoor use or
Rubber (EPDM) where the units are subject to
oil splash.
For extended
OC-32 OC-32 1
pushbuttons 18 (OC-31)
22 (OC-32)
Padlock cover • Used to protect pushbuttons, illuminated pushbut-
tons, selector switches, and key selector switches.
82.5 Panel Thickness
0.8 to 3.2
R6
Polyarylate
6.
93
5
(gasket: nitryl HW9Z-KL1 HW9Z-KL1 1
rubber)
30
70
24
ø2
0 )
2
ø5 4.4
.2
4
D :ø Key Hole ø8 29.5 Waterproof Rubber
(I Gasket 0.5t
30
Ring Adapter • Used to install the HW/TW units into ø25

mounting holes.
• IP65
HW9Z-A25 HW9Z-A25PN05 5
• Cannot be used with anti-rotation ring and
nameplate.
• Mounting panel thickness: 1.2 to 6.0 mm
Ring Adapter • Used to install the HW units into ø30 mounting
holes (except for HW1E and HW1B-M5/V5).
• IP65
HW9Z-A30 HW9Z-A30PN02 2 • Cannot be used with anti-rotation ring, name-
plate, full-shroud illuminated pushbuttons,
pushbutton selectors, and mono-lever switches.
• Mounting panel thickness:1.6 to 4.0 mm
Ring Adapter • Used to install the HW1E units into ø30 mount-
ing holes.
• IP65
HW9Z-A30E HW9Z-A30EPN02 2
• Cannot be used with anti-rotation ring and
nameplate.
• Mounting panel thickness:1.6 to 3.8 mm
Maintenance Parts
Ordering Package
Shape Specification Type No. Remarks
Type No. Quantity
Contact Block 1NO contact HW-G10 HW-G10 1
1NC contact HW-G01 HW-G01 1
EM (early make) contact HW-G10R HW-G10R 1
LB (late break) contact HW-G01R HW-G01R 1
Dummy Block
TW-DB TW-DBPN10 10
HW-GA1 HW-GA1PN02 2
Transformer
100/110V AC HW-T16 HW-T16 1
• For illuminated pushbuttons and illumi-
nated selector switches.
200/220V AC HW-T26 HW-T26 1
Dome Lens for Pilot Light

• Specify a color code in place of ➁.
AS resin HW1A-P2➁ HW1A-P2➁PN05 5 A (amber), G (green), R (red), S (blue),
W (white), and Y (yellow)
(06/02/17) 75
Maintenance Parts
Package
Shape Specification Type No. Ordering Type No. Color Code
Quantity
Button Round flush with
HW1A-B1➀ HW1A-B1➀PN05 5
round or square bezel
Round extended with
HW1A-B2➀ HW1A-B2➀PN05 5
round or square bezel B (black)
G (green)
Square flush HW2A-B1➀ HW2A-B1➀PN05 5 R (red)
Polyacetal S (blue)
Square extended HW2A-B2➀ HW2A-B2➀PN05 5 W (white)
Y (yellow)
ø29mm mushroom HW1A-B3➀ HW1A-B3➀PN02 2
ø40mm mushroom HW1A-B4➀ HW1A-B4➀PN02 2

Lens (for pilot lights Round flush HW9Z-L11➁ HW9Z-L11➁PN05 5 A (amber), C (clear),
and illuminated G (green), R (red), S (blue),
pushbuttons) Square flush Polyarylate HW9Z-L21➁ HW9Z-L21➁PN05 5 Y (yellow)
Note: Use a clear lens for
Round extended HW9Z-L12➁ HW9Z-L12➁PN05 5 white illumination.
Lens (for illuminated ALW31L-➁ ALW31L-➁PN02 2
C (clear), G (green),
pushbuttons) R (red), S (blue)
ø29mm mushroom
AS, Marking ALW31LD-➁ ALW31LD-➁PN02 2 A (amber), Y (yellow)
type C (clear), G (green),
ALW41L-➁ ALW41L-➁ 1 R (red), S (blue)
ø40mm mushroom
ALW41LD-➁ ALW41LD-➁ 1 A (amber), Y (yellow)
Marking Plate Round flush HW9Z-P11 HW9Z-P11PN05 5
Round extended HW9Z-P12 HW9Z-P12PN05 5
Acrylic • White
Square flush HW9Z-P21 HW9Z-P21PN05 5
ø29/40mm mushroom ALW3B ALW3BPN05 5
Operator Knob for Illuminated Selector Switch A (amber)
G (green)
R (red)
Polyarylate HW9Z-FDY➁ HW9Z-FDY➁ 1 S (blue)
W (white)
Y (yellow)
Replacement key
Key selector switch Metal HW9Z-SK-231 HW9Z-SK-231PN02 2
Locking Ring
Plastic HW9Z-LN HW9Z-LNPN05 5 • Black
Cap for Mono-Lever

Switch
HW9Z-CPM HW9Z-CPM 1
Boot for Mono-Lever Standard Rubber

Switch
HW9Z-BLM HW9Z-BLM 1
Safety Lever Lock

HW9Z-LS
Plastic HW9Z-LSPN10 10 • Yellow
Note: Specify a button color code or lens color code in place of ➀ or ➁ in the Ordering Type No.
76 (06/02/17)
Maintenance Parts
LED Lamps (LSTD Type)

Current Draw Ordering Illumination Package
AC DC Type No. Color Code Quantity
6V AC/DC ±5% Specify a color code
LSTD-6➁ 1
17 mA (A, R, W, Y) 14 mA (A, R, W, Y) in place of ➁ in the
LSTD-6∗ Ordering Type No.
8 mA (G, PW, S) 5.5 mA (G, PW, S)
LSTD-6➁PN10 10
A: amber
12V AC/DC ±10% G: green
LSTD-1➁ 1
11 mA 10 mA LSTD-1∗ PW: pure white BA9S/13
LSTD-1➁PN10 R: red 10
S: blue
24V AC/DC ±10% W: white
LSTD-2➁ 1
11 mA 10 mA LSTD-2∗ Y: yellow
LSTD-2➁PN10 10
Incandescent Lamps (LS Type)

Rated Operating Voltage Lamp Ratings Type No. Package Quantity
6V AC/DC
1W (6.3V) LS-6
12V AC/DC
1W (18V) LS-8
1
18V AC/DC
1W (24V) LS-2
24V AC/DC
1W (30V) LS-3
Transformer
Shape Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Type No. Applicable Load
Separate Mounting Type
100/110V AC TWR516 One full voltage type pilot light
or illuminated switch containing
200/220V AC 5.5V TWR526 LSTD-6 LED lamp (6V AC/DC)
or LS-6 incandescent lamp (6V
400/440V AC TWR546 AC/DC, 1W)
(06/02/17) 77
ø22 HW Series Instructions
Safety Precautions
• Turn off the power to the HW series control units before • For wiring, use wires of a proper size to meet the voltage
starting installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and and current requirements. Tighten the M3.5 terminal
inspection of the products. Failure to turn power off may screws to a tightening torque of 1.0 to 1.3 N·m. Failure to
cause electrical shocks or fire hazard. tighten terminal screws may cause overheat and fire.
• To avoid a burn on your hand, use the lamp holder tool
when replacing lamps.
Instructions
Panel Mounting • Notes for Panel Mounting

Remove the contact block from the operator (for transformer 1. When mounting the operator onto a panel, use the
type pilot lights, remove the transformer from the illumina- optional locking ring wrench (MW9Z-T1) to tighten the
tion unit). Remove the locking ring from the operator. Insert locking ring. Tightening torque must not exceed 2.0 N·m.
the operator into the panel cut-out from the front, tighten the Do not use pliers. Excessive tightening will damage the
locking ring from the back, then install the contact block to locking ring.
the operator. 2. For the contact blocks and transformers housing LED
and incandescent lamps, make sure not to press the
• Removing and Installing the Contact Block
lamps too hard, otherwise the lamp socket may be
1. To remove the operator from the contact block, turn the impaired.
locking lever in the direction of the arrow shown below.
• Notes for Illuminated Pushbuttons
Then the operator can be pulled out.
The full shroud cannot be removed from the extended full
2. To reinstall, place the TOP markings on the operator and
shroud type.
the contact block mounting adapter in the same direction,
and insert the operator into the contact block mounting
adapter. Then turn the locking lever in the opposite direc-
Safety Lever Lock
tion. IDEC strongly recommends using the safety lever lock
(HW9Z-LS, yellow) to prevent heavy vibration or mainte-
nance personnel from unlocking contacts.
1. HW series can be mounted vertically with a minimum
spacing of 50 mm (70 mm for mono-lever switches) but
spacing should be determined to ensure easy operation.
2. Mount the control unit onto the panel, lock the lever, and
strongly push in the safety lever lock to install.
3. When the spacing is narrower than the recommended
value, with the lever unlocked, mount the safety lever lock
and insert the contact unit to the operator. Then, lock the
• Removing and Installing the Transformer Unit on Pilot lever and strongly push in the safety lever lock to install.
Lights 4. To remove the safety lever lock, insert a flat screwdriver
1. Insert a flat screwdriver (5mm wide at the maximum) into into the safety lever lock and push upwards.
the latch hole on the transformer unit as shown in the
photo below, and disengage the latch. Then pull out the
illumination unit.
Install
Safety Lever Lock

2. To reinstall, place the TOP marking on the illumination Lock Lever
LO
unit and the latch in the same direction, and push the illu- CK
mination unit into the transformer unit.
26.5
Safety Lever Lock

Screwdriver Remove
Operator
Contact Block Panel

Mounting Adapter
78 (06/02/17)
HW Series Instructions ø22
Instructions
Replacement of Lens and Marking Plate Marking

• Removing For HW series illuminated pushbuttons and pilot lights, leg-
1. Remove the lens unit (color lens, marking plate, and lens ends and symbols can be engraved on the built-in marking
holder) by inserting a screwdriver into the recess of the plates, or printed film can be inserted under the lens for
lens thorough the bezel. labeling purposes. Films are not supplied with illuminated
[Removing the Lens Unit] pushbuttons, and may be provided by the user.
• Marking Plates and Marking Film Size

Lens Round Lens Type Square Lens Type
Style

Engraving Engraving
Area Area
ø19.6 19.9
1
1
2. Remove the marking plate by pushing the lens from the
• Engraving must be made on the engraving area within
rear to disengage the latches between the lens and the
0.5mm deep.
lens holder, using the screwdriver as shown below.
• The marking plate is made of white acrylic resin.
[Removing the Lens]
ø21.5
22.7
19.4
• Mylar for printing labels is not included and must be pro-

vided and printed by the user.
• Two 0.1mm-thick films or one 0.2mm-thick film can be
installed in the lens.
• Recommended marking film: Mylar
Note: The translucent filter in the lens holder cannot be removed
because this filter is sealed to make the unit waterproof and • Insertion Order of Marking Plate and Film
oiltight.
[Round Lens Type]
• Installing
[For Round Lens Type]

Lens Film Marking Lens Housing
Plate Holder
1. Place the marking plate on the lens holder with the anti-
rotation projection engaged and press the lens onto the Note: Films are not included.
lens holder to engage the latches.
[Square Lens Type]
2. Place the marking plate in the correct orientation.
[For Square Lens Type]
Lens Marking Plate Lens Holder Lens Film Marking Lens Housing
Plate Holder
1. Place the marking plate on the lens holder and press the Note: Films are not included.
lens onto the lens holder to engage the latches. Place the marking plate in the correct orientation.
2. Place the marking plate in the correct orientation.
(06/02/17) 79
Instructions
Replacement of Lamps Close Mounting

Lamps can be replaced by using the lamp holder tool (OR- When mounting the units closely in a horizontal row on
55) from the front of the panel, or by removing the contact 30mm centers, use optional barriers to prevent interconnec-
block from the operator unit. tion between adjoining terminals. The barriers can be
• Removing the Lamps from the Front of the Panel attached simply by pressing them onto the sides of contact
[How to Remove] blocks.
1. To remove, slip the lamp holder tool onto the lamp head
lightly. Then push slightly, and turn the lamp holder tool
counterclockwise.
30 30
[How to Install]
1. To install, insert the lamp head into the lamp holder tool,
and hold the lamp as shown in the figure below.
Lamp Lamp Holder Tool
2. Place the pins on the lamp base to the grooves in the

Barrier
lamp socket. Insert the lamp and turn it clockwise.
Grooves in the
When mounting transformer type illuminated units closely in
Operator Unit a horizontal row on 30mm centers, insert solid wires or
stranded wires into inside of the terminal screw on the trans-
former (see figure below) to prevent short circuit between
adjoining terminals.
Nameplate
When anti-rotation is not required, remove the projection
from the nameplate using pliers.
X1 X2 X1 X2
Projection
Inside Inside
Nameplate When using transformer type pilot lights closely mounted in

horizontal and vertical rows on 30mm centers, keep the
ambient temperature below 40°C.
80 (06/02/17)
Instructions
Tightening Torque for Terminal Screws Anti-rotation Ring and Panel Cut-out
Tighten the M3.5 terminal screws to a torque of 1.0 to 1.3 Align the TOP marking on the operator and the ▲ mark on
N·m. the anti-rotation ring with the recess in the mounting panel.
Panel Thickness
1.2 to 4.5
Installation of LED Illuminated Units
Projection
1. When using full voltage type LED illuminated units, pro-
vide protection against electrical noise, if necessary.
2. Notes for Pure White LED Lamps
• Do not use the pure white LED outdoors, otherwise it will
lead to the degradation of brightness and color. Do not
remove or apply shock to the cap on the pure white LED HW Operator Anti-rotation Locking
Ring Ring
lamp, otherwise it may break or damage the cap.
Mounting
• Use a white lens. The illumination color will be dull if a dif- Panel
ferent color lens is used. • Panel Cut-out
(Complies with IEC947-5-1)
Applicable Wiring x.
ma
The applicable wire size is 2mm2 maximum. (Solid wire ø1.6 3.2
+0.2
0
R0
.8
mm max.) One or two wires can be connected. +0

.4
0
.3
• Applicable Crimping Terminal ø 22
+0.4
0
ø3.6 min.
24.1
7.9 max.
4 max. 5.5 min.

Unibody Pushlock Turn Reset
Be sure to use an insulation tube or cover on the crimping • Removing the lens
part of the crimping terminal to prevent electrical shocks. Remove the lens by inserting a screwdriver into the left or
• Solid Wire right recess of the lens. Be careful that the lens does not
drop off.
ø1.6 max.
• Removing the LED/incandescent lamp

Use a lens removal tool to remove the lamp. See page 80
for more information.
8 max.
• Notes for Wiring
Note: Contact Block and Transformer Ensure that the crimping terminal of each wiring is properly
When connecting wires in the direction shown below, keep insulated.
the insulation stripping length 6.6 mm at the maximum.
Key Selector Switch
• Notes for using a different key
When a different number key is inserted into the key hole, it
will not normally operate. However, if the key is forced to
X1 X2 turn or is not inserted properly, it may be turned.
(06/02/17) 81
ø22 HW Series Control Boxes
Control Boxes
Control Box (Gray Cover)

Mounted Unit
(Operator)
With Pushbutton
HW1X-BM 1NO HW1X-BM110➀ Specify a button color code in
place of ➀ in the Type No.
B: black G: green HW1B-M1
R: red S: blue
1NO-1NC HW1X-BM111➀ W: white Y: yellow
Operator
Contact Block Position Mounted Unit
Shape No. of Positions Contact Code Type No.
Mounting Type L C R (Operator)
Position
With Selector Switch 10 1 NO —
HW1X-S HW1X-S2T10
90° 2-position (1NO) 2 Dummy
HW1S-2T
Maintained 11 1 NO —
HW1X-S2T11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC —
45° 3-position 20 1 NO
HW1X-S3T20 HW1S-3T
Maintained (2NO) 2 NO
Emergency Stop Control Box (Yellow Cover)

Mounted Unit
(Operator)
With Pushlock Turn Reset Switch
HW1X-BV 1NC HW1X-BV401R
1NO-1NC HW1X-BV411R Red only HW1B-V4R
2NC HW1X-BV402R
With Pushlock Key Reset Switch

HW1X-BX 1NC HW1X-BX401R
1NO-1NC HW1X-BX411R Red only HW1B-X4R
2NC HW1X-BX402R
Accessories
NSA-0 1 Black surface, made of aluminum

Nameplate NSA-0
NSA-0PN10 10 0.8 mm thick
Cover Gasket HW9Z-W HW9Z-WPN05 5 Made of rubber

HW9Z-G HW9Z-GPN05 5 Made of white plastic, G1/2 thread
Connector Locking Nut
HW9Z-PG HW9Z-PGPN05 5 Made of black plastic, PG16 thread
• Unless otherwise specified, every control box is supplied with two connector locking nuts (G1/2 thread).
• When using PG16 connectors, specify as described below.
HW1X-BM110➀ - PG
Supplied with two PG16 connector locking nuts
82 (06/02/17)
HW Series Control Boxes ø22
Specifications Contact Ratings
Operating Temperature –25 to +60°C (no freezing) Rated Insulation Voltage 600V
Storage Temperature –40 to +80°C (no freezing) Rated Continuous Current 10A
Operating Humidity 45 to 80% RH (no condensation) Contact Block Contact Ratings by
AC-15 (A600)
Rated Insulation Utilization Category
600V DC-13 (P600)
Voltage IEC 60947-5-1
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger) Applicable Standards and Approvals
Electric Shock Safety Standards File No. or Organization
Class II (IEC 61140)
Protection Class UL508 UL Listing File No. E68961
Between live and dead parts: CSA C22.2 No. 14 c-UL (File No. E68961)
Dielectric Strength
2,500V AC, 1 minute
EN60947-5-1 TÜV PS No. B98 08 13332 398
Operating extremes:
Vibration Resistance
Damage limits: 1,000 m/s2 Attachments
Shock Resistance
Operating extremes: 100 m/s2 Name Type No. Quantity
Pushbuttons, momentary: 5,000,000 Nameplate ∗1 NSA-0 1
Mechanical Life
Selector switches: 500,000 Cover Gasket ∗2 HW9Z-W 1
(minimum operations)
Pushlock turn reset switches: 500,000 Connector Locking Nut HW9Z-G 2
Pushbuttons, momentary: 500,000 ∗1
Selector switches: 500,000 ∗2 For details, see the instruction sheet attached to the control box.
Pushlock turn reset switches: 500,000 ∗3 ∗1: The nameplate is supplied with the pushbutton and selector
Electrical Life switch control boxes, not with the emergency stop control
(Switching frequency)
(minimum operations) box.
∗1 1,800 operations/h, duty ratio 40%
∗2 1,200 operations/h, duty ratio 40% ∗2: The cover gasket is supplied with the emergency stop con-
∗3 900 operations/h, duty ratio 40% trol box, not with the pushbutton and selector switch control
boxes.
Conduit Port ø23mm knockout on top and bottom
Applicable Connector G1/2 or PG16 (plastic fitting)
Solid wire: ø1.6mm maximum
Applicable Wire
Stranded wire: 2.0 mm2 maximum
Two M4 screws
Mounting Screw
Tightening torque 1.4 to 2.0 N·m
Degree of Protection IP65 (IEC 60529)
Characteristics
Operational Voltage 24V 48V 50V 110V 220V 440V Note:
AC-12 Control of resistive loads and solid The operational current represents the
Operational Current
10A — 10A 10A 6A 2A classification by making and breaking

AC state loads
50/60 Hz AC-15 Control of electromagnetic loads currents (IEC 60947-5-1).
10A — 7A 5A 3A 1A Minimum applicable load: 3V AC/DC,
(> 72 VA)
5 mA (Applicable range may vary with
DC-12 Control of resistive loads and solid operating conditions and load types.)
8A 4A — 2.2A 1.1A —
state loads
DC
Dimensions
58 A 58
Control Unit (Operator) Dimension A (mm)
Pushbutton 13.0
Selector Switch 21.0
Pushlock Turn Reset 32.0
70
58
32.0
Pushlock Key Reset
(Key inserted: 49.4)
HW1B-V4R
Box Cover Mouting Screws Box Cover Box Base
(06/02/17) 83
ø22 HW Series Control Boxes
Mounting Hole Layout • Applicable Connector and Installation
1. To install a connector, break open the conduit port on the
top and bottom of the control box. Before opening the
58
conduit port, remove the attached two connector locking
nuts from the control box base. Place the tip of a screw-
driver on the conduit port and strike the screwdriver end.
Make sure that the conduit port is free from burs and
42.4
cracks, which may hamper waterproof characteristics.
Screwdriver
2-ø4.6
Applicable Terminal
ø3.6 min. Tightening torque: 1.0 to 1.3 N·m
A maximum of two pieces can be 2. Use G1/2 or PG16 connectors which can mount on a
7.9 max.
connected to one terminal. panel of 4.0 mm thick minimum. To install the connector
to the control box, use the attached connector locking nut
4 max. 5.5 min.
and tighten the locking nut sufficiently. If the locking nut is
tightened insufficiently, the waterproof characteristics are
Nameplate not ensured.
Type No. NSA-0 Thread Size Locking Nut Color Locking Nut Type No.
34 G1/2 White HW9Z-G
Color: Black, without legend PG16 Black HW9Z-PG
Thickness: 1.2 mm
36
5
(Remove the anti-rotation projection)

5.
ø2
30 max.
Material Aluminum
Locking Nut for
The nameplate is supplied with the pushbutton and selector Installing Connector
(supplied with control box) 4
switch control boxes. When not using the nameplate, use
the cover gasket (HW9Z-W).
3. Only when using a plastic connector, Insulation Class II
HW series nameplates (HWA∗) cannot be used.
(IEC 61140) is satisfied.
4. Install the box cover flat on the box base. When the box
Operating Instructions
cover is installed diagonally, the box cover cannot be
• Panel Mounting
secured correctly, resulting in an operation error.
To mount the control box on a panel, use two M4 screws,
plane washers and spring washers to preventing loosening. • Applicable Cables
Tighten the screws to a torque of 1.4 to 2.0 N·m. Applicable CVV Cable Outside Diameter Core Wires
Determine the screw length in consideration of the panel 1.25 mm2 ø14.5 mm maximum 8 maximum
thickness. 2.0 mm2 ø14.5 mm maximum 8 maximum
3
Hexagonal Nut
• Applicable Conduits
M4 Screw
Plain Washer
Metal Conduit Outside Diameter ø10 mm ø12 mm
ø8.3 mm ø10.6 mm
Conduit Inside Diameter
minimum minimum
1.25 mm2 2 to 3 4 to 6
IV Wire Quantity
2.0 mm2 2 to 3 3 to 4
Wire containment density: 32% to 48%
Spring Washer
Control Box Select a cable appropriate for the connector.
Panel
84 (06/02/17)
ø22 HW Series Jumbo Dome Pilot Lights
Brilliant and prominent pilot light —clear recognition from a distance and from the side.
• Large ø66 mm diameter and 50.5 mm-deep dome provides

clear and distinguished recognition of pilot light.
• Proprietary LED and incandescent lamps for jumbo dome
pilot lights.
• UL listed, CSA approved, EN compliant.
LED Lamp Ratings Incandescent Lamp Ratings

Type No. Operating Voltage Rated Current Operating Power
Type No. Lamp Ratings
Voltage Consumption
LSTDB-2➁ 24V AC/DC ±10% 15 mA
LSB-2 24V AC/DC ±10% 3.6W 28V, 0.17A
• Specify a color code in place of ➁.
A: amber, G: green, R: red, S: blue, Y: yellow
Applicable Standards
UL Listing
UL508
File No. E68961
CSA C22.2 No. 14 File No. LR21451
EN60947-1 TÜV Rheinland

EN60947-5-1 R50051481
Specifications
Operating Temperature –25 to +55°C (no freezing)
Storage Temperature –40 to +80°C (no freezing)
Insulation Resistance 100MΩ maximum
Dielectric Strength 2000V, 1 minute
Damage limits: 1000 m/s2
Shock Resistance
Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude 1.5 mm
Operating extremes: 5 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm
LED lamps: Approx. 20,000 hours (Note 1)
Life
Incandescent lamps: Approx. 1,000 hours minimum (Note 2)
Terminal Style M3.5 screw
• Use incandescent lamp types for displaying the muting status (temporary automatic suspension of a safety function, required by IEC61496-
1) of equipment such as light curtains.
Note 1: The luminance reduces to 50% the initial intensity when used on complete DC.
Note 2: Mean value when used at rated voltage.
Types
Shape Lamp Type Operating Voltage Type No. Lens Color
A: amber
LED HW1P-5Q4➁ G: green
R: red
Jumbo Dome Pilot Light 24V AC /DC
S: blue
Incandescent HW1P-5Q7➁ W: white
Y: yellow
• Specify a lens color code in place of ➁ in the Type No.
(06/02/17) 85
ø22 HW Series Jumbo Dome Pilot Lights
Accessories
Ordering Package
Accessory Specifications Type No. Remarks
Type No. Quantity
100/110V AC TWR512 TWR512 • Used for LED illuminated
pilot lights only.
Separate Mounting Transformer Primary Voltage 200/220V AC TWR522 TWR522
• Supplied with a terminal
400/440V AC TWR542 TWR542 1 cover.
Locking Ring Wrench Metal. Approx. 150g MW9Z-T1 MW9Z-T1
Lamp Holder Tool Rubber OR-55 OR-55 —
Locking Ring Plastic HW9Z-LN HW9Z-LNPN05 5
Replacement Parts
• Lens
Shape Material Type No. Lens Color
• Specify a lens color code in place of ➁.

Jumbo Dome Lens HW1A-P5➁ A: amber, G: green, R: red, S: blue,
W: white, Y: yellow
Polycarbonate
Diffusing Lens HW9Z-PP5C • Diffusing lens is used for LED type only.
• LED Lamps (used for HW Jumbo Dome pilot lights only)

Rated Operating Voltage Type No. Illumination Color Remarks
Specify a color code in place of ➁.
24V AC/DC LSTDB-2➁ A: amber, G: green, R: red, S: blue, • Use amber (A) LED lamps for white (W) lenses.
Y: yellow
• Incandescent Lamps (used for HW Jumbo Dome pilot lights only)

Rated Operating Voltage Type No. Ordering Type No. Package Quantity Remarks
• When replacing lamps, use the lamp holder tool
24V AC/DC LSB-2 LSB-2PN02 2 to prevent the possibility of burning yourself.
Dimensions Mounting Hole Layout

• Jumbo Dome Pilot Lights
+0.2
Panel Thickness 1 to 5 R0.8 max. 3.2 0
+0.4
ø66 ø22.3 0
+0.4
0
M3.5 Terminal Screw

24.1
85
Locking Ring
Rubber Gasket 85
0.5
34.4 50.5
• LED Lamp LSTDB • Incandescent Lamp LSB

Base BA9S/13 Base BA9S/13
Light blue: Illumination Color
ø10 ±1
LSTDB
ø10.6
27 ±2
20.4
86 (06/02/17)
ø22mm HW Series
Dual Pushbutton Switches
(06/02/17) 87
ø22 HW Series Dual Pushbutton Switches
Two pushbuttons and a pilot light are integrated into one space-saving ø22 mm control unit.
• Momentary and interlock types are available for pushbuttons.
Interlock type prevents both buttons from being pressed at the
same time.
• Pilot lights are available in full voltage and transformer types
illuminated with LED or incandescent lamps.
• HW-G contact blocks feature spring-up screw terminals to
ensure safety and save wiring time.
Safety Standards Mark File No. or Organization
UL Listing
UL508
File No. E68961
Applications:
CSA C22.2 No. 14 166730 (LR92374) Ideal for use as power switches and start/stop switches
(available with I/ON and O/OFF markings on the buttons and
a pilot light in the center).
TÜV Rheinland R50054316
EN60947-1 Interlock type prevents two pushbuttons from being pressed
EN60947-5-1 at the same time, providing the best solution for up/down
European Low Voltage Directives switches.
Contact Ratings
Contact Block Type HW-G (HW series)
Rated Insulation Voltage 600V
Rated Continuous Current 10A
Characteristics
DC
• Minimum applicable load: 3V AC/DC, 5 mA (applicable range may vary with operating conditions and load types)
LED Lamp Ratings (LSTD Type) Incandescent Lamp Ratings (LS Type)
Rated Voltage Type No. Operating Voltage Rated Voltage Type No. Operating Voltage Lamp Ratings
6V AC/DC LSTD-6➁ 6V AC/DC ±10% 6V AC/DC LS-6 6V AC/DC ±10% 1W (6.3V)
12V AC/DC LSTD-1➁ 12V AC/DC ±10% 12V AC/DC LS-8 12V AC/DC ±10% 1W (18V)
24V AC/DC LSTD-2➁ 24V AC/DC ±10% 24V AC/DC LS-3 24V AC/DC ±10% 1W (30V)
Note: Specify a color code in place of ➁ in the Type No.
Specifications
Operating Temperature –25 to +60°C (no freezing) (LED illuminated type: –25 to +55°C)
Without pilot light: 2,500V AC, 1 minute (between live and dead metal parts)
With pilot light
Dielectric Strength
Full voltage type: 1,000V AC, 1 minute (between live and dead metal parts)
Transformer and DC-DC converter types: 2,000V AC, 1 minute (between live and dead metal parts)
Shock Resistance
Mechanical Life 500,000 operations minimum
Electrical Life 500,000 operations minimum
Degree of Protection IP40 (IP65 when using HW9Z-D7D rubber boot)
88 (06/02/17)
HW Series Dual Pushbutton Switches ø22
Dimensions
Without Pilot Light
HW
49.4 (2 contacts)
69.4 (3 or 4 contacts)
Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6 Without Button With Button Markings

Safety Lever Lock Locking Ring Markings (I/ON and O/OFF)
ON
41.4
54.8
54.8
OFF
Rubber Gasket
0.5
14.5 29.8 29.8
20
With Pilot Light

• Full Voltage
Ful Voltage Adapter
Note: The depth of 3-contact type depends on the
HW
(Bottom Button) combination of contact blocks at top and bottom

pushbutons.
Top Button 1 contact block 2 contact blocks
(Top Button)
Bottom Button 2 contact blocks 1 contact block
69.4 (2 contacts), 89.4 (4 contacts) Depth 89.4 mm 69.4 mm
(Note)
• Transformer (240V maximum)

Transformer
HW
79.5 (2 contacts), 99.5 (4 contacts)
• Transformer (380V minimum)

• DC-DC Converter
Transformer, DC-DC Converter
HW
89.5 (2 contacts), 109.5 (4 contacts)
R0.8 max.
∗3.2
+0.2
0 ∗ The 3.2 mm recess is for preventing rotation and is not necessary
ø22
.3 +0.4 when a nameplate or anti-rotation ring is not used.
0
∗∗ When using the safety lever lock, determine the vertical spacing in
24.1 +0.4
0
consideration of convenience for installing and removing the safety

lever lock.
Recommended vertical spacing: 100 mm
55 ∗∗
30 • The minimum mounting centers are applicable to switches with one

layer of contact blocks (two contact blocks). When two layers of con-
tact blocks are mounted, determine the minimum mounting centers in
consideration of convenience for wiring.
(06/02/17) 89
Dual Pushbutton Switches without Pilot Light Dual Pushbutton Switches with Pilot Light
HW7D-B 1 1 10 02 GR 1 - MAU HW7D-L 1 1 11 20 H 2 R - GR 1 - MAU

Optional contact Operating type Optional contact
MAU: Gold-plated silver 1: Momentary MAU: Gold-plated silver contact
contact 2: Interlock Button legends
Button legends Button style Blank: Without legend
Blank: Without legend 1: Flush + Flush 1: I/ON + O/OFF
1: I/ON + O/OFF 2: Flush + Extended Button color code
Button color code Contact arrangement GR: Green (top)
GR: Green (top) code (top button) Red (bottom)
Red (bottom) 10: 1NO WB: White (top)
WB: White (top) 01: 1NC Black (bottom)
Black (bottom) 11: 1NO-1NC Lamp color code
Contact arrangement code 20: 2NO A: Amber (LED only)
(bottom button) 02: 2NC G: Green (LED only)
10: 1NO Contact arrangement code R: Red (LED only)
01: 1NC (bottom button) S: Blue (LED only)
11: 1NO-1NC 10: 1NO W: White (LED/incandescent)
20: 2NO 01: 1NC Y: Yellow (LED only)
02: 2NC 11: 1NO-1NC Lamp code
Contact arrangement code 20: 2NO 0: Without lamp
(top button) 02: 2NC 2: LED (6V: LSTD-6)
10: 1NO Operating voltage code 3: LED (12V: LSTD-1)
01: 1NC Q: Full voltage 4: LED (24V: LSTD-2)
11: 1NO-1NC H: Transformer (100/110V AC) 5: Incandescent (6V: LS-6)
20: 2NO H2: Transformer (115/120V AC) 6: Incandescent (12V: LS-8)
02: 2NC M: Transformer (200/220V AC) 7: Incandescent (24V: LS-3)
Button style M4: Transformer (230/240V AC)
1: Flush + Flush S: Transformer (380V AC)
2: Flush + Extended T: Transformer (400/440V AC)
Operating type T8: Transformer (480V AC)
1: Momentary D: DC-DC converter (110V DC)
2: Interlock
Notes:
• Full voltage type is not supplied with a lamp.
• Transformer and DC-DC converter types contain an LED lamp (LSTD-6➂) or incandescent lamp (LS-6).
• Transformer and DC-DC converter types can have two or four contact blocks only.
Types
• Without Pilot Light
Contact Arrangement
Operation ➃ Button
Button Style Top Bottom Type No. ➄ Legend Code
Type Color Code
Button Button
Flush (top) 1NO 1NC HW7D-B111001➃➄
Flush (bottom)
1NO 1NO HW7D-B111010➃➄
1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC HW7D-B111111➃➄
2NO 2NC HW7D-B112002➃➄
2NO 2NO HW7D-B112020➃➄
Momentary
Extended (bottom)
1NO 1NO HW7D-B121010➃➄
GR:
2NO 2NC HW7D-B122002➃➄ Green (top)
Blank: Without legend
2NO 2NO HW7D-B122020➃➄ Red (bottom)
Flush (top) 1NO 1NC HW7D-B211001➃➄ 1: I/ON (top)
WB:
Flush (bottom) O/OFF (bottom)
1NO 1NO HW7D-B211010➃➄ White (top)
Black (bottom)
2NO 2NC HW7D-B212002➃➄
2NO 2NO HW7D-B212020➃➄
Interlock
Extended (bottom)
1NO 1NO HW7D-B221010➃➄
2NO 2NC HW7D-B222002➃➄
2NO 2NO HW7D-B222020➃➄
90 (06/02/17)
• With Pilot Light
Contact Arrangement
Operation Type Lamp Input Type Type No.
Top Button Bottom Button
1NO 1NC HW7D-L1➀1001Q0W➃➄
1NO 1NO HW7D-L1➀1010Q0W➃➄
Without Lamp Full Voltage 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC HW7D-L1➀1111Q0W➃➄
1NO 1NC HW7D-L1➀1001➁2➂➃➄
1NO 1NO HW7D-L1➀1010➁2➂➃➄
Transformer 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC HW7D-L1➀1111➁2➂➃➄
2NO 2NC HW7D-L1➀2002➁2➂➃➄
2NO 2NO HW7D-L1➀2020➁2➂➃➄
Momentary LED
1NO 1NC HW7D-L1➀1001D2➂➃➄
1NO 1NO HW7D-L1➀1010D2➂➃➄
DC-DC Converter 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC HW7D-L1➀1111D2➂➃➄
2NO 2NC HW7D-L1➀2002D2➂➃➄
2NO 2NO HW7D-L1➀2020D2➂➃➄
1NO 1NC HW7D-L1➀1001➁5W➃➄
1NO 1NO HW7D-L1➀1010➁5W➃➄
Incandescent Transformer 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC HW7D-L1➀1111➁5W➃➄
2NO 2NC HW7D-L1➀2002➁5W➃➄
2NO 2NO HW7D-L1➀2020➁5W➃➄
Without Lamp Full Voltage 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC HW7D-L2➀1111Q0W➃➄
1NO 1NC HW7D-L2➀1001➁2➂➃➄
1NO 1NO HW7D-L2➀1010➁2➂➃➄
Transformer 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC HW7D-L2➀1111➁2➂➃➄
2NO 2NC HW7D-L2➀2002➁2➂➃➄
2NO 2NO HW7D-L2➀2020➁2➂➃➄
Interlock LED
1NO 1NC HW7D-L2➀1001D2➂➃➄
1NO 1NO HW7D-L2➀1010D2➂➃➄
DC-DC Converter 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC HW7D-L2➀1111D2➂➃➄
2NO 2NC HW7D-L2➀2002D2➂➃➄
2NO 2NO HW7D-L2➀2020D2➂➃➄
1NO 1NC HW7D-L2➀1001➁5W➃➄
1NO 1NO HW7D-L2➀1010➁5W➃➄
Incandescent Transformer 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC HW7D-L2➀1111➁5W➃➄
2NO 2NC HW7D-L2➀2002➁5W➃➄
2NO 2NO HW7D-L2➀2020➁5W➃➄
• Designation Codes
Specify designation codes ➀ to ➄ in the Type No.
➃ Button Color
➀ Button Style Code ➁ Operating Voltage Code ➂ Lamp Color Code ➄ Legend Code
Code
1: Flush (top)
Flush (bottom) A: amber
H: 100/110V AC
G: green
H2: 115/120V AC GR: Green (top)
R: red Blank: Without legend
M: 200/220V AC Red (bottom)
S: blue
M4: 230/240V AC
W: white 1: I/ON (top)
S: 380V AC WB: White (top)
Y: yellow O/OFF (bottom)
T: 400/440V AC Black (bottom)
2: Flush (top) T8: 480V AC
Extended (bottom) The lens is white only.
LED illuminated transformer and DC-DC converter types contain an LED lamp (LSTD-6➂, rated voltage 6V AC/DC).
(06/02/17) 91
Contact Arrangement Contact Block Top Button Bottom Button
Top Button Bottom Button Contact Code Mounting Position Type Normal Push Normal Push
1 NO
1NO 1NO 1010
2 NO
1 NO
1NO 1NC 1001
2 NC
1 NC
1NC 1NO 0110
2 NO
1 NC
1NC 1NC 0101
2 NC
1 NO
2 NO
1NO 2NO 1020
3 Dummy
4 NO
1 NO
2 NO
1NO 1NO-1NC 1011
3 Dummy
4 NC
1 NO
2 NC
1NO 2NC 1002
3 Dummy
4 NC
1 NC
2 NO
1NC 2NO 0120
3 Dummy
4 NO
1 NC
2 NO
1NC 1NO-1NC 0111
3 Dummy
4 NC
1 NC
2 NC
1NC 2NC 0102
3 Dummy
4 NC
1 NO
2 NO
2NO 1NO 2010
3 NO
4 Dummy
1 NO
2 NC
2NO 1NC 2001
3 NO
4 Dummy
1 NO
2 NO
1NO-1NC 1NO 1110
3 NC
4 Dummy
1 NO
2 NO
1NO-1NC 1NC 1101
3 NC
4 Dummy
• Transformer and DC-DC converter types can have two or four contact blocks only.
• Contact blocks 1 and 3 are actuated by the top button. Contact blocks 2 and 4 are actuated by the bottom button.
4 4 Full Voltage
2 2 Adapter Top Button Bottom Button
Contact Block
Normal Push Normal Push
1 NO
2 NO
3 NC
3 3 4 NC
1 1
• Type No. Development
Without Pilot Light With Pilot Light HW7D - B 12 11 11 GR
With Pilot Light (full voltage type) Contact code (1NO-1NC) of bottom button
(transformer type) Contact code (1NO-1NC) of top button
92 (06/02/17)
Contact Arrangement Contact Block Top Button Bottom Button
Top Button Bottom Button Contact Code Type Normal
Mounting Position Push Normal Push
1 NC
2 NO
2NC 1NO 0210
3 NC
4 Dummy
1 NC
2 NC
2NC 1NC 0201
3 NC
4 Dummy
1 NO
2 NO
2NO 2NO 2020
3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
2 NO
2NO 1NO-1NC 2011
3 NO
4 NC
1 NO
2 NC
2NO 2NC 2002
3 NO
4 NC
1 NO
2 NO
1NO-1NC 2NO 1120
3 NC
4 NO
1 NO
2 NO
1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC 1111
3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
2 NC
1NO-1NC 2NC 1102
3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
2 NO
2NC 2NO 0220
3 NC
4 NO
1 NC
2 NO
2NC 1NO-1NC 0211
3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
2 NC
2NC 2NC 0202
3 NC
4 NC
(06/02/17) 93
Accessories
Ordering Package
Type No. Quantity
Rubber Boot • Degree of protection: IP65
33 22.5
Clear Silicon
HW9Z-D7D HW9Z-D7D 1
Rubber
58
Locking Ring Wrench • Used to tighten the locking ring when installing the
HW switch onto a panel.
Metal
(weight: MW9Z-T1 MW9Z-T1 1 8
110 ø2
approx. 150g)
Lamp Holder Tool • Used to install and remove the LED/incandescent

lamps.
ø11.6
ø14
59
Rubber Mounting • Used to plug unused ø22.2mm mounting holes.

Hole Plug ø29
3.5
ø25
3.5
Metallic Mounting • Used to plug unused ø22.2mm mounting holes.
Hole Plug • Tighten the locking ring to a torque of 1.2 N·m.
• IP66 (when the mounting hole does not have a ø3.2
mm hole for anti-rotation)
Diecast Metal • Mounting panel thickness: 0.8 to 6 mm
(locking ring: LW9Z-BM LW9Z-BM 1
plastic) ø25.8
Gasket 3
12
Locking Ring
Barrier • Used to prevent contact between adjacent lead

wires when units are mounted closely. Barriers
should always be used in close mounting.
Plastic HW-VG1 HW-VG1PN10 10

45
20 1.5
Ring Adapter
• Used to install the HW/TW units into ø25mm
Rubber HW9Z-A25 HW9Z-A25PN05 5 mounting holes.
• Cannot be used with the HW9Z-D7D rubber boot.
Safety Lever Lock
Plastic HW9Z-LS HW9Z-LSPN10 10 • Yellow
94 (06/02/17)
Maintenance Parts
Rated Current Ordering Illumination Package
6V AC/DC ±10%
LSTD-6➂ 1
17 mA (A, R, W, Y) 14 mA (A, R, W, Y)
LSTD-6➂
8 mA (G, S) 5.5 mA (G, S)
LSTD-6➂PN10 Specify a color code 10
in place of ➂ in the
12V AC/DC ±10% Ordering Type No.
LSTD-1➂ 1
A: amber
11 mA 10 mA LSTD-1➂ G: green BA9S/13
LSTD-1➂PN10 R: red 10
S: blue
24V AC/DC ±10% W: white
LSTD-2➂ Y: yellow 1
11 mA 10 mA LSTD-2➂
LSTD-2➂PN10 10

Rated Operating Package
Lamp Ratings Type No.
Voltage Quantity
6V AC/DC
1W (6.3V) LS-6
12V AC/DC
1W (18V) LS-8 1
24V AC/DC
1W (30V) LS-3
Transformer
Secondary
Shape Primary Voltage Type No. Applicable Load
Voltage
Separate Mounting Type 100/110V AC TWR516
One full voltage type containing LSTD-6 LED
200/220V AC 5.5V TWR526 lamp (6V AC/DC) or LS-6 incandescent lamp
(6.3V AC/DC, 1W).
400/440V AC TWR546
(06/02/17) 95
Safety Precautions
• Turn off power to HW series control units before starting • For wiring, use wires of a proper size to meet voltage and
installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection current requirements. Tighten the M3.5 terminal screws to
of the products. Failure to turn power off may cause electri- a tightening torque of 1.0 to 1.3 N·m. Failure to tighten ter-
cal shocks or fire hazard. minal screws may cause overheating and fire.
• To avoid the possibility of burning yourself, use the lamp
holder tool when replacing lamps.
Instructions
Panel Mounting 3. When the spacing is narrower than the recommended

value, with the lever unlocked, mount the safety lever lock
Remove the contact block assembly from the operator (for
and insert the contact unit to the operator. Then, lock the
transformer type pilot lights, remove the transformer from
lever and strongly push in the safety lever lock to install.
the illumination unit). Remove the locking ring from the oper-
ator. Insert the operator into the panel cut-out from the front, 4. To remove the safety lever lock, insert a flat screwdriver
tighten the locking ring from the back, then install the con- into the safety lever and push upwards.
tact block assembly to the operator. Removing and Installing the Safety Lever Lock
• Removing and Installing the Contact Block Assembly Safety Lever Lock ➀ Push
1. To remove the operator from the contact block, turn the Safety Lever Lock
locking lever in the direction of the arrow shown below. Remove Lock Lever
Screwdriver ➁ Install
The operator can now be removed.
Operator ➂ Lock
2. To reinstall, place the TOP markings on the operator and
the contact block mounting adapter in the same direction,
and insert the operator into the contact block mounting
adapter. Then turn the locking lever in the opposite direc-
Contact Block Panel
tion.
Removing Installing
Replacement of Lens
• Removing
Remove the lens by inserting a screwdriver into the recess
of the lens through the bezel.
• Notes for Panel Mounting

1. When mounting the operator onto a panel, use the
optional locking ring wrench (MW9Z-T1) to tighten the
locking ring. Tightening torque must not exceed 2.0 N·m.
Do not use pliers. Excessive tightening will damage the
locking ring.
2. For the contact blocks and transformers housing LED and
incandescent lamps, make sure not to press the lamps
too hard, otherwise the lamp socket may be damaged.
• Installing
Safety Lever Lock Install the lens in the recess between the buttons by press-
ing against the bezel.
IDEC strongly recommends using the safety lever lock
(HW9Z-LS, yellow) to prevent heavy vibration or mainte-
nance personnel from unlocking the contact assembly.
1. HW series can be mounted vertically with a minimum
spacing of 55 mm but spacing should be determined to
ensure easy operation (recommended minimum spacing:
100 mm).
2. Mount the control unit onto the panel, lock the lever, and
push in the safety lever lock to install.
96 (06/02/17)
Instructions
Replacement of Lamps Tightening Torque for Terminal Screws
Lamps can be replaced by using the lamp holder tool (OR- Tighten the M3.5 terminal screws to a torque of 1.0 to 1.3
55) from the front of the panel, or by removing the contact N·m.
block assembly from the operator unit.
• Removing the Lamps from the Front of the Panel Installation of LED Illuminated Units
[How to Remove] When using full voltage type LED illuminated units, provide
1. To remove, slip the lamp protection against electrical noise, if necessary.
holder tool onto the lamp
head lightly. Then push Applicable Wiring
slightly, and turn the lamp The applicable wire size is 2 mm2 maximum. (solid wire ø1.6
holder tool counterclock- mm maximum) One or two wires can be connected.
wise.
• Applicable Crimping Terminal
ø3.6 min.
7.9 max.
[How to Install]
1. To install, insert the lamp head into the lamp holder tool, 4 max. 5.5 min.
and hold the lamp as shown in the figure below.
Lamp Lamp Holder Tool
Be sure to use an insulation tube or cover on the crimping
part of the crimping terminal to prevent electrical shocks.
• Solid Wire
ø1.6 max.
2. Place the pins on the lamp
base to the grooves in the Lamp Base
lamp socket. Insert the 8 max.
lamp and turn it clockwise.
Note: When connecting wires to contact blocks or transformers in
the direction shown below, keep the insulation stripping
length 6.6 mm at the maximum.
About Pushbutton Switches
The pushbuttons cannot
Do not attempt
be removed or replaced! to remove the
pushbuttons!
Do not attempt to remove
using a flat screwdriver or X1 X2
Pushbuttons
pincers, otherwise the
pushbuttons may be dam-
aged. Installing the Rubber Boot
When using the HW7D pushbuttons in places where the
Narrow Mounting pushbuttons are subjected to water splash or an excessive
When mounting the units closely in a horizontal row on amount of dust, make sure to use the HW9Z-D7D rubber
30mm centers, use optional barriers to prevent interconnec- boot (IP65) which is ordered separately.
tion between adjoining terminals. The barriers can be • Notes for Installing the Rubber Boot
attached simply by pressing them onto the sides of contact Remove the gasket from the operator, and install the rubber
blocks. boot on the operator. Pull out the seals of the rubber boot
30 30 and place them around the operator sleeve as shown. Make
sure that the seals are not twisted or tucked inside and that
the gasket does not remain, otherwise the normal water-
proof and dustproof characteristics are not ensured.
➀ Remove the gasket. ➁ Install the rubber boot ➂ Rubber boot is
on the pushbuttons. installed.
Seals
Barrier
Install
Remove
When mounting transformer
type illuminated units closely
in a horizontal row on 30-mm
centers, insert solid wires or
stranded wires into inside of Seals
X1 X2 X1 X2 Gasket
the terminal screw on the
transformer (see figure on the
right) to prevent short circuit
between adjoining terminals. Inside Inside
(06/02/17) 97
98 (06/02/17)
ø22mm LW Series
Control Units
(06/02/17) 99
ø22 LW Series Control Units (Selection Guide)
Function Pushbutton
Round Flush with
Round Flush Square Flush Round Extended Square Extended
Category Square Bezel
Shape
Type LW1B-∗1 LW2B-∗1 LW3B-∗1 LW1B-∗2 LW2B-∗2

Page 103 103 103 104 104
Function Pushbutton Pilot Light (Unibody/Separate Types)

Round Extended with
ø30mm Mushroom Round Flush with
Category Square Bezel Round Flush Square Flush
Square Bezel
Shape
Type LW3B-∗2 LW1B-∗3 LW1P LW2P LW3P

Page 104 104 106 106 106
Function Illuminated Pushbutton

Round Flush with
Round Flush Round Extended Square Flush ø30mm Mushroom
Category Square Bezel
Shape
Type LW1L-∗1 LW1L-∗2 LW2L-∗1 LW3L-∗1 LW1L-∗3

Page 108 108 108 109 109
Function Selector Switch Key Selector Switch

Round with Round with
Category Round Round
Square Bezel Square Bezel
Shape
Type LW1S LW3S LW1K LW3K

Page 111 111 112, 113 112, 114
Function Illuminated Selector Switch Buzzer

Round with Round Square
Category Round
Square Bezel Continuous / Intermittent
Shape
Type LW1F LW3F LW1Z LW2Z

Page 116 116 117 117
100 (06/02/17)
ø22 LW Series Control Units
Light touch mechanism designed to reduce strain injuries
Endures repetitive operation suitable for food processing and packaging industries
• Light touch
• Collective mounting is possible.
• Separate type control unit with locking lever enables easy
installation even when mounted collectively.
• Gold or silver contacts.
(Buzzer: IP40)
• UL recognized and CSA certified. EN compliant.
(except buzzers)

UL Recognition
UL
File No. E55996
TÜV Rheinland
EN60947-1
EN
EN60947-5-1

˙

• Gold Contact Operating Temperature
Maximum Voltage 250V AC/DC Illuminated units: –25 to +50°C
Thermal Current 3A Storage Temperature –40 to +80°C
Operating Voltage 125V AC 30V DC
Operating Current
0.1A 0.1A Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
(resistive load)
Contact Material Gold-clad silver Between live part and ground:
2,500V AC, 1 minute
Minimum applicable load (reference value): 5V AC/DC, 1mA Between terminals of different poles:
Switch Unit
(Applicable range is subject to the operating condition and load.) Dielectric 2,500V AC, 1 minute
Strength Between terminals of the same pole:
• Silver Contact 1,000V AC, 1 minute
Operating Voltage 30V 125V 250V Illumination Between live part and ground:
AC Resistive Load – 3A 2A Unit 2,500V AC, 1 minute
Operating 50/60Hz Inductive Load – 2A 1.5A Operating extremes:
Current Resistive Load 2A 0.4A –
DC Damage limits: 1,000 m/s2
Inductive Load 1A 0.2A – Shock Resistance
Thermal Current 5A Momentary: 1,000,000
Contact Material Silver Maintained: 500,000
Mechanical Life
Selector switches: 250,000
AC inductive load: PF = 0.6 to 0.7 (minimum operations)
Key selector switches: 250,000
DC inductive load: L/R = 7 msec max. Illuminated selector switches: 250,000
Momentary: 100,000 (∗1)
Maintained: 100,000 (∗2)
Electrical Life
Selector switches: 100,000 (∗2)
(minimum operations)
∗1 Switching frequency 1,800 operations/h
∗2 Switching frequency 900 operations/h
IP65 (IEC 60529)
(Buzzer: IP40)
Terminal Style PC board terminal
Screw terminal
(06/02/17) 101
ø22 LW Series Control Units
Lamp Base BA9S/13
AC A, R, W, Y: 17 mA 11 mA 11 mA
G, S: 8 mA
Current Draw
A, R, W, Y: 14 mA
DC G, S: 5.5 mA 10 mA 10 mA
A, R, W, Y
Internal Circuit
G, S
LED Chip
Protection Diode
Zener Diode
Mounting Hole Layout Ordering Information

ø22.3
+0.4
0 Standard Units
• Specify a button or lens color code in the Type No.
• All illuminated units are supplied with an LED lamp.
• All standard units are UL recognized, CSA certified, and
EN compliant (TÜV Rheinland).
26 ∗
26 ∗
Note: Determine the mounting centers to ensure easy operation.
• ø30mm Mushroom: Vertical: 32 mm minimum

Horizontal: 32 mm minimum
• Solder/Tab Terminal
Without terminal cover: Vertical: 26 mm minimum
With terminal cover: Vertical: 26 mm minimum
• Screw terminal: Vertical: 40 mm minimum
• PC board terminal: Vertical: 26 mm minimum
102 (06/02/17)
LW Series Pushbuttons ø22
Flush Types
Type No.
Terminal Terminal
Round Flush SPDT LW1B-M1C1➀ LW1B-M1C1V➀ —
LW1B-M1 Gold DPDT LW1B-M1C2➀ LW1B-M1C2V➀ LW1B-M1C2M➀
LW1B-A1 3PDT LW1B-M1C3➀ LW1B-M1C3V➀ —
Momentary
SPDT LW1B-M1C5➀ — —
Silver DPDT LW1B-M1C6➀ — LW1B-M1C6M➀
3PDT LW1B-M1C7➀ — —
SPDT LW1B-A1C1➀ LW1B-A1C1V➀ —
3PDT LW1B-A1C3➀ LW1B-A1C3V➀ —
Maintained
SPDT LW1B-A1C5➀ — —
Silver DPDT LW1B-A1C6➀ — LW1B-A1C6M➀
3PDT LW1B-A1C7➀ — —
Square Flush SPDT LW2B-M1C1➀ LW2B-M1C1V➀ —
LW2B-M1 Gold DPDT LW2B-M1C2➀ LW2B-M1C2V➀ LW2B-M1C2M➀ Specify a button
LW2B-A1 3PDT LW2B-M1C3➀ LW2B-M1C3V➀ — color code in
Momentary place of ➀ in the
Type No.
3PDT LW2B-M1C7➀ — — B: black
SPDT LW2B-A1C1➀ LW2B-A1C1V➀ — G: green
R: red
S: blue
3PDT LW2B-A1C3➀ LW2B-A1C3V➀ — W: white
Maintained
SPDT LW2B-A1C5➀ — — Y: yellow
Round Flush SPDT LW3B-M1C1➀ LW3B-M1C1V➀ —
with Square Bezel Gold DPDT LW3B-M1C2➀ LW3B-M1C2V➀ LW3B-M1C2M➀
LW3B-M1 3PDT LW3B-M1C3➀ LW3B-M1C3V➀ —
LW3B-A1 Momentary
Maintained
(06/02/17) 103
ø22 LW Series Pushbuttons
Extended / Mushroom Types
Type No.
Terminal Terminal
Round Extended SPDT LW1B-M2C1➀ LW1B-M2C1V➀ —
Momentary
Maintained
Square Extended SPDT LW2B-M2C1➀ LW2B-M2C1V➀ —
Momentary
Specify a button
3PDT LW2B-A2C3➀ LW2B-A2C3V➀ — color code in
Maintained
SPDT LW2B-A2C5➀ — — place of ➀ in the
Silver DPDT LW2B-A2C6➀ — LW2B-A2C6M➀ Type No.
B: black
Round Extended SPDT LW3B-M2C1➀ LW3B-M2C1V➀ — G: green
with Square Bezel Gold DPDT LW3B-M2C2➀ LW3B-M2C2V➀ LW3B-M2C2M➀ R: red
LW3B-M2 3PDT LW3B-M2C3➀ LW3B-M2C3V➀ — S: blue
LW3B-A2 Momentary W: white
Y: yellow
Maintained
ø30mm Mushroom SPDT LW1B-M3C1➀ LW1B-M3C1V➀ —
Momentary
Maintained
104 (06/02/17)
LW Series Pushbuttons ø22
Dimensions
M3 Terminal Screw Terminal Cover Gasket
Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6.0
Terminal Cover LW-VL2 Locking Ring
LW-VL2M
4.85
1.0 2.6
4.85
6.8
6.8
6.2
TOP
LOCK
1.2
2-R0.6
8.2
6.8
6.8
∗Tab Terminal
2.0
54.9 47
PC Board Terminal Tab Terminal Round with

0.8W × 0.5t 2.8W × 0.5t Round Square Square Bezel
1.2
5
1.2
5
2.6 8.5 11.7
8
5.
25.8 25.8
ø2
53.5 5.4 36 9 36 9
∗
Extended
• Bottom View Terminal Arrangement

9
(Bottom View)
R18
R18
R18
12.6
LO
LO
LO
C
C
K
TOP
3 2 1
X1
NC
NC
23.2
16.2
18.2
16.2
NO
NO
X2
NC
NC
NC
X2
NO
NO
NO
25 25
25.4
0
26.5 9
ø3
Mushroom C
C
17
Note: SPDT has C, NO, and NC only
in the center.
DPDT has C, NO, and NC only
on the right and left.
Screw terminal type is DPDT.

(Bottom View)
6.8±0.05
1.6 (PC Board)
6.8±0.05
9-ø 4.85 (0.5)
1.2 +0.1 (0.5) (0.5)
(0.8)
2.4
2.8
NC Terminal
2.8
5
NO Terminal
2.8
5
COM Terminal
2.4
(0.8)
(0.8)
Switch Switch Switch

3C 2C 1C Soldered Mounting
Side Side
Pay attention to the pattern of the PC board as the terminals

on the mounting surface are 2.8 mm wide.
(06/02/17) 105
ø22 LW Series Pilot Lights
Unibody / Separate Types
Type No
Operating Solder/Tab PC Board
Shape Screw Terminal ➁ Lens Color Code
Voltage Terminal Terminal
(Unibody Type)
(Unibody Type) (Separate Type)
Round Flush
LW1P 6V AC/DC±10% LW1P-12➁ LW1P-1C02V➁ LW1P-12M➁
12V AC/DC±10% LW1P-13➁ LW1P-1C03V➁ LW1P-13M➁
Square Flush Specify a lens color

LW2P 6V AC/DC±10% LW2P-12➁ LW2P-1C02V➁ LW2P-12M➁ code in place of ➁ in
the Type No.
A: amber
12V AC/DC±10% LW2P-13➁ LW2P-1C03V➁ LW2P-13M➁ G: green
R: red
S: blue
24V AC/DC±10% LW2P-14➁ LW2P-1C04V➁ LW2P-14M➁ W: white
Y: yellow
Round Flush with Square Bezel
LW3P 6V AC/DC±10% LW3P-12➁ LW3P-1C02V➁ LW3P-12M➁
• Every pilot light is supplied with an LED lamp (LSTD) of the specified color and voltage.
Dimensions
Gasket Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6.0 Panel Thickness

M3 Terminal Screw Terminal Cover 0.8 to 6.0 1.0 2.6
Locking Ring Locking Ring
LW-PVL
Terminal Cover
LW-PVLM
TOP
LOCK
P
O
P
O
T
1.2
5.95
11.35
2-R0.6
∗ Gasket
∗Tab Terminal
34.8 36
Tab Terminal PC Board Terminal

Round with
7.2 2.8W × 0.5t 0.8W × 0.5t
6.75
6.0
5
1.2
4.5
19 2 8.5 11.7
5.8
∗ 25.8 25.8
ø2
7.7 26.3 7.5 27 9 5.5 36 9
Screw Terminal Solder/Tab Terminal PC Board Terminal
106 (06/02/17)
LW Series Pilot Lights ø22
Solder/Tab Terminal Screw Terminal PC Board Terminal

TOP TOP TOP
Lamp Terminal Lamp Terminal
Lamp Terminal X1
X1
X2 X1 X2
Lamp Terminal X2
(interconnected) X2 Lamp Terminal
Lamp Terminal
(interconnected) X2
• Lamp terminals do not have any polarity. • Lamp terminals do not have any polarity.

(Bottom View)
1.6 (PC Board)

11.35±0.05
(0.5)
3-ø
(0.8)
2.4
2.8
1.2 +0.1
0
Lamp Terminal X1
2.8
5
Lamp Terminal X2
2.8
5
Lamp Terminal X2
2.4
(0.8)
(0.8)
Lamp
Terminal
Soldered Mounting
Side Side

(06/02/17) 107
ø22 LW Series Illuminated Pushbuttons
Flush / Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons
Type No.
Operation Contact
Shape Lamp Contact Solder/Tab PC Board
Type Material Screw Terminal
Terminal Terminal
Round Flush SPDT LW1L-M1C1➂➁ LW1L-M1C1➂V➁ —
LW1L-M1 Gold DPDT LW1L-M1C2➂➁ LW1L-M1C2➂V➁ LW1L-M1C2➂M➁
LW1L-A1 3PDT LW1L-M1C3➂➁ LW1L-M1C3➂V➁ —
Momentary
SPDT LW1L-M1C5➂➁ — —
Silver DPDT LW1L-M1C6➂➁ — LW1L-M1C6➂M➁
3PDT LW1L-M1C7➂➁ — —
LED
SPDT LW1L-A1C1➂➁ LW1L-A1C1➂V➁ —
3PDT LW1L-A1C3➂➁ LW1L-A1C3➂V➁ —
Maintained
SPDT LW1L-A1C5➂➁ — —
Silver DPDT LW1L-A1C6➂➁ — LW1L-A1C6➂M➁
3PDT LW1L-A1C7➂➁ — —
Round Extended SPDT LW1L-M2C1➂➁ LW1L-M2C1➂V➁ —
Momentary
LED
Maintained
Square Flush SPDT LW2L-M1C1➂➁ LW2L-M1C1➂V➁ —
Momentary
LED
Maintained

Specify a Lens/LED color code in place of ➁ in Specify an operating voltage code in place of
the Type No. ➂ in the Type No.
R: red 4: 24V AC/DC
S: blue
W: white
Y: yellow
108 (06/02/17)
LW Series Illuminated Pushbuttons ø22
Flush / Mushroom Illuminated Pushbuttons
Type No.
Operation Contact
Terminal Terminal
Round Flush SPDT LW3L-M1C1➂➁ LW3L-M1C1➂V➁ —
with Square Bezel Gold DPDT LW3L-M1C2➂➁ LW3L-M1C2➂V➁ LW3L-M1C2➂M➁
LW3L-M1 3PDT LW3L-M1C3➂➁ LW3L-M1C3➂V➁ —
LW3L-A1 Momentary
LED
Maintained
ø30mm Mushroom SPDT LW1L-M3C1➂➁ LW1L-M3C1➂V➁ —
Momentary
LED
Maintained

R: red 4: 24V AC/DC
S: blue
W: white
Y: yellow
(06/02/17) 109
ø22 LW Series Illuminated Pushbuttons
Dimensions
Terminal Cover Gasket
M3 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6.0
LW-VL2 Locking Screw
Terminal Cover
6.5
6.5
1.0 2.6
LW-VL2M
6.8
6.8
6.2
TOP
LOCK
1.2
2-R0.6
∗Tab Terminal
8.2
4.85
4.85
6.8
6.8
2.0
54.9 47

0.8W × 0.5t 2.8W × 0.5t
Round with
1.2
6
5
1.2
5
8.5 11.7
8
5.
25.8 25.8
ø2
53.5 5.4 36 ∗ 9 36 9
• Bottom View
R18
R18
Extended
R18
LO
LO
LO
C
C
K
9
X1
NC
NC
16.2
18.2
16.2
23.2
NO
NO
X2
12.6
X2
25.4 25 25
26.5
Mushroom
0
9
ø3
Terminal Arrangement 17
(Bottom View)
• Solder/Tab Terminal • Screw Terminal
TOP TOP
3 2 1
NC
NC
X1
Lamp Terminal
NC
NC
NC
X1
Lamp Terminal
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
X2
Lamp Terminal
(interconnected)
X2
Lamp Terminal
C
C
X2
Note: SPDT has C, NO, and NC only in the center.

DPDT has C, NO, and NC only on the right and left.
Lamp terminals do not have any polarities.

(Bottom View)
6.8±0.05
6.5±0.05 1.6 (PC Board)
6.8±0.05
(0.5) 4.85 (0.5)
12 (0.5) (0.5)
(0.8)
2.4
-ø1
2.8
.2 +0.1
0
Lamp Terminal X1 NC Terminal

2.8
5
Lamp Terminal X2 NO Terminal

2.8
5
Lamp Terminal X2 COM Terminal

2.4
(0.8)
(0.8)
Lamp Switch Switch Switch

Terminal Terminal Terminal Terminal
3C 2C 1C Soldered Mounting All dimensions in mm.
Side Side

110 (06/02/17)
LW Series Selector Switches ø22
Selector Switches
Type No.
Operation Contact
Shape Position Contact Solder/Tab PC Board
Terminal Terminal
Round SPDT LW1S-2C1 LW1S-2C1V —
LW1S Gold DPDT LW1S-2C2 LW1S-2C2V LW1S-2C2M
90° L R 3PDT LW1S-2C3 LW1S-2C3V —
2-position
Maintained SPDT LW1S-2C5 — —
Silver DPDT LW1S-2C6 — LW1S-2C6M
3PDT LW1S-2C7 — —
DPDT LW1S-3C2 LW1S-3C2V LW1S-3C2M
45° C Gold
L R 3PDT LW1S-3C3 LW1S-3C3V —
3-position
Maintained DPDT LW1S-3C6 — LW1S-3C6M
Silver
Round with Square Bezel SPDT LW3S-2C1 LW3S-2C1V —
LW3S Gold DPDT LW3S-2C2 LW3S-2C2V LW3S-2C2M
90° L R 3PDT LW3S-2C3 LW3S-2C3V —
2-position
Maintained SPDT LW3S-2C5 — —
Silver DPDT LW3S-2C6 — LW3S-2C6M
DPDT LW3S-3C2 LW3S-3C2V LW3S-3C2M
45° C Gold
L R 3PDT LW3S-3C3 LW3S-3C3V —
3-position
Maintained DPDT LW3S-3C6 — LW3S-3C6M
Silver
Contact Operation
Operator Position and Contact Position
Operation (Top View)
Contact
Type
Left Center Right
NO NC NO NC
SPDT —
C C
L R Left Right Left Right

Contact Contact Contact Contact
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
DPDT —
90°
2-Position C C C C
Maintained
Left Center Right Left Center Right
Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
3PDT —
C C C C C C
Left Right Left Right Left Right

DPDT
C
L R
C C C C C C
Left Center Right Left Center Right Left Center Right
45° Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact
3-position NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
Maintained 3PDT
C C C C C C C C C
(06/02/17) 111
ø22 LW Series Selector Switches
Key Selector Switches (2-Position)
Type No.
Operation Contact
Shape Key retained at ● Contact Solder/Tab PC Board Screw
Type Material
Round SPDT LW1K-2C1A LW1K-2C1VA —
LW1K-2 Gold DPDT LW1K-2C2A LW1K-2C2VA LW1K-2C2MA
L R 3PDT LW1K-2C3A LW1K-2C3VA —
A
SPDT LW1K-2C5A — —
Silver DPDT LW1K-2C6A — LW1K-2C6MA
3PDT LW1K-2C7A — —
SPDT LW1K-2C1B LW1K-2C1VB —
Gold DPDT LW1K-2C2B LW1K-2C2VB LW1K-2C2MB
90° 3PDT LW1K-2C3B LW1K-2C3VB —
L R
2-position B
Maintained SPDT LW1K-2C5B — —
Silver DPDT LW1K-2C6B — LW1K-2C6MB
3PDT LW1K-2C7B — —
SPDT LW1K-2C1C LW1K-2C1VC —
Gold DPDT LW1K-2C2C LW1K-2C2VC LW1K-2C2MC
L R 3PDT LW1K-2C3C LW1K-2C3VC —
C
SPDT LW1K-2C5C — —
Silver DPDT LW1K-2C6C — LW1K-2C6MC
3PDT LW1K-2C7C — —
Round with Square Bezel SPDT LW3K-2C1A LW3K-2C1VA —
LW3K-2 Gold DPDT LW3K-2C2A LW3K-2C2VA LW3K-2C2MA
L R 3PDT LW3K-2C3A LW3K-2C3VA —
A
SPDT LW3K-2C5A — —
Silver DPDT LW3K-2C6A — LW3K-2C6MA
SPDT LW3K-2C1B LW3K-2C1VB —
Gold DPDT LW3K-2C2B LW3K-2C2VB LW3K-2C2MB
90° 3PDT LW3K-2C3B LW3K-2C3VB —
L R
2-position B
Maintained SPDT LW3K-2C5B — —
Silver DPDT LW3K-2C6B — LW3K-2C6MB
SPDT LW3K-2C1C LW3K-2C1VC —
Gold DPDT LW3K-2C2C LW3K-2C2VC LW3K-2C2MC
L R 3PDT LW3K-2C3C LW3K-2C3VC —
C
SPDT LW3K-2C5C — —
Silver DPDT LW3K-2C6C — LW3K-2C6MC
• Key is retained in ● position and removable in position.
• Two keys are supplied.
• Key cylinder face (plastic): Black
Contact Operation
Contact
Type
Left Right
NO NC NO NC
SPDT
C C
L R Left Right Left Right

Contact Contact Contact Contact
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
DPDT
90°
2-Position C C C C
Maintained
Left Center Right Left Center Right
3PDT
C C C C C C
112 (06/02/17)
Type No.
Operation Contact
Shape Key Retained at ● Contact Solder/Tab PC Board Screw
Type Material
Round DPDT LW1K-3C2A LW1K-3C2VA LW1K-3C2MA
Gold
LW1K-3 L C R 3PDT LW1K-3C3A LW1K-3C3VA —
A
DPDT LW1K-3C6A — LW1K-3C6MA
Silver
DPDT LW1K-3C2B LW1K-3C2VB LW1K-3C2MB
Gold
L C
R 3PDT LW1K-3C3B LW1K-3C3VB —
B
DPDT LW1K-3C6B — LW1K-3C6MB
Silver
DPDT LW1K-3C2C LW1K-3C2VC LW1K-3C2MC
Gold
L C
R 3PDT LW1K-3C3C LW1K-3C3VC —
C
DPDT LW1K-3C6C — LW1K-3C6MC
Silver
DPDT LW1K-3C2D LW1K-3C2VD LW1K-3C2MD
45° Gold
L C
R 3PDT LW1K-3C3D LW1K-3C3VD —
3-position D
Maintained DPDT LW1K-3C6D — LW1K-3C6MD
Silver
3PDT LW1K-3C7D — —
DPDT LW1K-3C2E LW1K-3C2VE LW1K-3C2ME
Gold
L
C
R 3PDT LW1K-3C3E LW1K-3C3VE —
E
DPDT LW1K-3C6E — LW1K-3C6ME
Silver
3PDT LW1K-3C7E — —
DPDT LW1K-3C2G LW1K-3C2VG LW1K-3C2MG
Gold
L
C R 3PDT LW1K-3C3G LW1K-3C3VG —
G
DPDT LW1K-3C6G — LW1K-3C6MG
Silver
3PDT LW1K-3C7G — —
DPDT LW1K-3C2H LW1K-3C2VH LW1K-3C2MH
Gold
L C R 3PDT LW1K-3C3H LW1K-3C3VH —
H
DPDT LW1K-3C6H — LW1K-3C6MH
Silver
3PDT LW1K-3C7H — —
Contact Operation
Contact
Type
Left Center Right
C NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
L R
DPDT
C C C C C C
45°
3-position
Maintained Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
3PDT
C C C C C C C C C
(06/02/17) 113
ø22 LW Series Selector Switches
Type No.
Operation Contact
Shape Key Retained at ● Contact Solder/Tab PC Board Screw
Type Material
Round with Square Bezel DPDT LW3K-3C2A LW3K-3C2VA LW3K-3C2MA
Gold
LW3K-3 L C R 3PDT LW3K-3C3A LW3K-3C3VA —
A
DPDT LW3K-3C6A — LW3K-3C6MA
Silver
DPDT LW3K-3C2B LW3K-3C2VB LW3K-3C2MB
Gold
L C
R 3PDT LW3K-3C3B LW3K-3C3VB —
B
DPDT LW3K-3C6B — LW3K-3C6MB
Silver
DPDT LW3K-3C2C LW3K-3C2VC LW3K-3C2MC
Gold
L C
R 3PDT LW3K-3C3C LW3K-3C3VC —
C
DPDT LW3K-3C6C — LW3K-3C6MC
Silver
DPDT LW3K-3C2D LW3K-3C2VD LW3K-3C2MD
45° Gold
L C
R 3PDT LW3K-3C3D LW3K-3C3VD —
3-position D
Maintained DPDT LW3K-3C6D — LW3K-3C6MD
Silver
3PDT LW3K-3C7D — —
DPDT LW3K-3C2E LW3K-3C2VE LW3K-3C2ME
Gold
L
C
R 3PDT LW3K-3C3E LW3K-3C3VE —
E
DPDT LW3K-3C6E — LW3K-3C6ME
Silver
3PDT LW3K-3C7E — —
DPDT LW3K-3C2G LW3K-3C2VG LW3K-3C2MG
Gold
L
C R 3PDT LW3K-3C3G LW3K-3C3VG —
G
DPDT LW3K-3C6G — LW3K-3C6MG
Silver
3PDT LW3K-3C7G — —
DPDT LW3K-3C2H LW3K-3C2VH LW3K-3C2MH
Gold
L C R 3PDT LW3K-3C3H LW3K-3C3VH —
H
DPDT LW3K-3C6H — LW3K-3C6MH
Silver
3PDT LW3K-3C7H — —
Contact Operation
Contact
Type
Left Center Right
C
L R DPDT
C C C C C C
45°
3-position
Maintained Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC
3PDT
C C C C C C C C C
114 (06/02/17)
Dimensions
• Selector Switch
Terminal Cover Gasket Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6.0
LW-VL2 Locking Ring
M3 Terminal Screw 1.0 2.6
Terminal Cover
4.85
4.85
LW-VL2M
6.8
6.8
6.2
T OP
1.2
LOCK
2-R0.6
∗Tab Terminal
2.0
8.2
6.8
6.8
Anti-rotation Ring
54.9 47
2.6
PC Board Terminal Tab Terminal Round with
.8
0.8W × 0.5t 2.8W × 0.5t Round
5
Square Bezel
ø2
1.2
6
1.2
5
5
2 8.5 11.7 9
25.8
53.5 5.4 36
∗ 9 36 17.5
• Bottom View • Key Selector Switch

R18
R18
LW-VL2 Locking Ring

LO
LO
C
C
K
K
4.85
6.8
NC
NC
X1
23.2
16.2
TOP
NO
NO
X2
LOCK
X2
25.4 25
6.8
Anti-rotation Ring 0.5

Screw Terminal PC Board Terminal 47
2.6
R18
Tab Terminal Round with

LO
2.8W × 0.5t Round

C
Square Bezel
K
5.
ø2
1.2
6
16.2
18.2
25
6
26.2 8.5 11.7 10.5 25.8

∗
9 36 37
Solder/Tab Terminal
Solder/Tab Terminal
Terminal Arrangement PC Board Drilling Layout

(Bottom View) (Bottom View)
TOP 6.8±0.05
1.6 (PC Board)
3 2 1 6.8±0.05
9-ø 4.85 (0.5)
NC
NC
NC
1.2 +0.1 (0.5) (0.5)

(0.8)
2.4
2.8
0
NO
NO
NO
NC Terminal
2.8
5
NO Terminal
2.8
C
COM Terminal
Note: SPDT has C, NO, and NC only in the center.
2.4
(0.8)
(0.8)
DPDT has C, NO, and NC only on the right Switch Switch Switch
and left. 3C 2C 1C Soldered Mounting
Side Side
Pay attention to the pattern of the PC

board as the terminals on the mounting
surface are 2.8 mm wide.
(06/02/17) 115
ø22 LW Series Illuminated Selector Switches

Type No.
Operation Contact
Terminal Terminal
Round 90° SPDT LW1F-2C1➂➁ LW1F-2C1➂V➁ —
LW1F-2C 2-position
LW1F-3C Maintained Gold DPDT LW1F-2C2➂➁ LW1F-2C2➂V➁ LW1F-2C2➂M➁
3PDT LW1F-2C3➂➁ LW1F-2C3➂V➁ —
LED
L R SPDT LW1F-2C5➂➁ — —
Silver DPDT LW1F-2C6➂➁ — LW1F-2C6➂M➁
3PDT LW1F-2C7➂➁ — —
45°° DPDT LW1F-3C2➂➁ LW1F-3C2➂V➁ LW1F-3C2➂M➁
3-position Gold
Maintained 3PDT LW1F-3C3➂➁ LW1F-3C3➂V➁ —
LED
L
C
R DPDT LW1F-3C6➂➁ — LW1F-3C6➂M➁
Silver
3PDT LW1F-3C7➂➁ — —
Round with Square Bezel 90° SPDT LW3F-2C1➂➁ LW3F-2C1➂V➁ —
LW3F-2C 2-position
LW3F-3C Maintained Gold DPDT LW3F-2C2➂➁ LW3F-2C2➂V➁ LW3F-2C2➂M➁
3PDT LW3F-2C3➂➁ LW3F-2C3➂V➁ —
LED
L R SPDT LW3F-2C5➂➁ — —
Silver DPDT LW3F-2C6➂➁ — LW3F-2C6➂M➁
3PDT LW3F-2C7➂➁ — —
45° DPDT LW3F-3C2➂➁ LW3F-3C2➂V➁ LW3F-3C2➂M➁
3-position Gold
Maintained 3PDT LW3F-3C3➂➁ LW3F-3C3➂V➁ —
LED
L
C
R DPDT LW3F-3C6➂➁ — LW3F-3C6➂M➁
Silver
3PDT LW3F-3C7➂➁ — —

R: red 4: 24V AC/DC
S: blue
W white
Y: yellow
• Every illuminated selector switch contains an LED lamp (LSTD) of the specified color and voltage.
Dimensions
LW-VL2 Locking Ring Round with
M3 Terminal Screw Round Square Bezel 1.0 2.6
8
5.
6.5
6.5
Terminal Cover
ø2
6.8
6.8
LW-VL2M
TOP
LOCK
1.2
2-R0.6
∗Tab Terminal
8.2
4.85
4.85
6.8
6.8
Anti-rotation Ring 0.5

25.8
54.9
47
• Bottom View
R18
R18
R18
0.8W × 0.5t 2.8W × 0.5t

LO
LO
LO
C
C
K
K
1.2
6
5
1.2
NC
NC
X1
18.2
16.2
16.2
23.2
NO
NO
X2
X2
C
5
2.6 8.5 11.7 9

25.4 25 25
53.5 5.4 36 9 36 17.5
26.2
Screw Terminal PC Board Terminal Solder/Tab Terminal Screw Terminal PC Board Terminal Solder/Tab Terminal
• For terminal arrangement and PC board dimensions, see page 110.
116 (06/02/17)
LW Series Buzzers ø22
Buzzers
Continuous / intermittent (long) / intermit- Specifications
tent (short) sounds can be selected with a Insulation Voltage 60V AC/DC
Operating Voltage 6V, 12 to 24V AC/DC ±10%
built-in slide switch Current Draw DC: 7 mA, AC: 20 mA
• Collective mounting possible. Sound Pressure Steady sound: 80 dB minimum
• Separate type control unit with locking lever, easy installa- (at 0.1m) (at the rated voltage)
tion even when mounted collectively. Sound Frequency 2 kHz ±500Hz
• Round and square types available. Slow intermittent sound:
55 cycles per minute ±10%
• Solder/tab and PC board terminal types available. Flickering Cycle
Quick intermittent sound:
• Single board mounting possible. 600 cycles per minute ±10%
• Equipped with an LED indicator which lights (steady)/ Operating Temperature –20 to +55°C (no freezing)
flashes with the buzzer sound. Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
Between live and metal parts:
Dielectric Strength
1,000V AC, 1 minute
Operating extremes:
Shock Resistance Damage limits: 1,000 m/s2
Life 1,000 hours minimum
Terminal Style
PC board terminal
Type No.
Shape Operating Voltage LED
Solder/Tab Terminal PC Board Terminal
Round Without LW1Z-1X2 LW1Z-1X2V
LW1Z 6V AC/DC ±10%
With LW1Z-1X2D LW1Z-1X2DV
Without LW1Z-1X4 LW1Z-1X4V

12 to 24V AC/DC ±10%
Square Without LW2Z-1X2 LW2Z-1X2V
LW2Z 6V AC/DC ±10%
Without LW2Z-1X4 LW2Z-1X4V

12 to 24V AC/DC ±10%
Dimensions
Panel Thickness
PC Board Terminal Tab Terminal 0.9 to 6
R18

LO
C
K
19
1.4
1.4
X1 X2
5
2.6
2 8.5 11.7
5.9
18.5 25.8
ø2
5.5 9 36 9
PC Board Terminal Solder/Tab Terminal
Terminal Arrangement PC Board Layout Panel Cut-out

(Bottom View) (Bottom View) ø22.3 +0.4
0
Buzzer Sound Switch

TOP TOP
X2
26
1.4
5
Quick Interconnected
Slow Steady
X2
X1
Interconnected
1.4
5
X1
.2
26
ø1
X1 and X2 are input terminals 15.7 Note: Determine mounting centers to

(without polarities)
ensure operation.
(06/02/17) 117
ø22 LW Series Accessories and Replacement Parts
Accessories
Type No. Package
Shape Material Dimensions (mm)
(Ordering Type No.) Quantity
Locking Ring Wrench • Used to tighten the locking
ø2
60
ring when installing the LW
5.4
Nickel-plated control unit onto a panel.
LW9Z-T1 1
brass • Tightening torque: 1.2 N·m
Lamp Holder Tool • Used to install and remove LED
ø11.6
lamps.
Rubber OR-55 1 OR-55
14
59
Switch Guard • Used to protect flush pushbuttons and illuminated pushbut-

tons from inadvertent operation.
Spring • Degree of protection: IP65.
LW9Z-K1 1 41.6
Return
Guard Panel Thickness
(polyarylate) 25.8
0.8 to 4.5
44.4
Base
17.3
(polyacetal) 9.2
31.3
R2
Maintained LW9Z-K11 1
0.4
14.2 43.2
Note: Determine mounting centers to ensure easy operation.
Terminal Cover • For separate type control 14.8
For solder/tab terminal units only.
Plastic
32
22
12
X1
18.2
NC
LW-VL2 1
34
24
14
X2
(translucent) NO
31
21
11
X2
C
26.2
Terminal Cover • For separate type control 12.9

For screw terminal units only. 23.2 5.4
Plastic
LW-VL2M 1
(black)
25.4
Terminal Cover • For unibody type pilot lights 19.2
For solder/tab terminal only. 7.5

Plastic
LW-PVL 1
(translucent) X1
ø20.6
TOP
X2
Terminal Cover • For unibody type pilot lights X1

ø20.6
TOP
For screw terminal only.

Plastic
LW-PVLM 1 X2
(translucent) 4
14
Rubber Mounting Hole Plug • Degree of protection: IP65

3.5
ø29
Nitryl rubber
OB-31PN05 5
(black)
ø25
3.5
Metal Mounting Hole Plug • Degree of protection: IP66 ø25.8

Metal (diecast) • Panel thickness: 0.8 to 6 mm
3
Locking nut LW9Z-BM 1

12
(plastic)
Maintenance Parts
Package
Shape For Use On Material Type No. Ordering Type No. Color Code
Quantity
Lens Round Flush Specify a lens color
Round Flush with Square Bezel code in place of ➁ in
the Ordering Type No.
Lens
Round Extended Polyarylate LW9Z-L12➁ LW9Z-L12➁PN05 5 A: amber
C: clear
G: green
Lens R: red
Square Flush Polyarylate LW9Z-L2➁ LW9Z-L2➁PN05 5 S: blue
Y: yellow
Lens
• Use the clear (C) lens
ø30mm Mushroom AS LW9Z-L13➁ LW9Z-L13➁ 1 for white illumination.
118 (06/02/17)
LW Series Accessories and Replacement Parts ø22
Maintenance Parts
Package
Shape For Use On Material Type No. Ordering Type No. Color Code
Quantity
Button Round Flush
Polyacetal LW1A-B1➀ LW1A-B1➀PN05 5
Round Flush with Square Bezel
Button Extended Specify a button color
Round Extended with Square Polyacetal LW1A-B2➀ LW1A-B2➀PN05 5 code in place of ➀ in
Bezel the Ordering Type No.
Button B: black
Square Flush Polyacetal LW2A-B1➀ LW2A-B1➀PN05 5 G: green
R: red
Button S: blue
W: white
Square Extended Polyacetal LW2A-B2➀ LW2A-B2➀PN05 5
Y: yellow
Button
ø30mm Mushroom AS LW1A-B3➀ LW1A-B3➀ 1
Marking Plate Round

Acryl LW9Z-P1W LW9Z-P1WPN05 5
Round with Square Bezel
Marking Plate
Square Acryl LW9Z-P2W LW9Z-P2WPN05 5
• White
Marking Plate
Round Extended Acryl LW9Z-P12W LW9Z-P12WPN05 5
Marking Plate
Mushroom Acryl ALW3B ALW3BPN05 5
Knob A (amber), G (green),

Illuminated Selector Plastic LW1A-F➁ LW1A-F➁ 1 R (red), S (blue),
W (white), Y (yellow)
Locking Ring
All LW Control Units Plastic LW9Z-LN LW9Z-LNPN05 5 • Black
Anti-rotation Ring
Stainless
Selector Switch LW9Z-L LW9Z-LPN10 10
Steel
Spare Key
Key Selector Switch Metal KG9Z-SK-231 KG9Z-SK-231PN02 2
LED Lamps
Operating Current Draw Ordering Illumination Package
Type No. Base
Voltage AC DC Type No. Color Code Quantity
LSTD-6➁ 1
17 mA (A, R, W, Y) 14 mA (A, R, W, Y) Specify a color code in
6V AC/DC ±10% LSTD-6➁
8 mA (G, S) 5.5 mA (G, S) place of ➁ in the
LSTD-6➁PN10 10
Ordering Type No.
LSTD-1➁ 1
12V AC/DC ±10% 11 mA 10 mA LSTD-1➁ A: amber BA9S/13
G: green
LSTD-1➁PN10 10
R: red
S: blue
LSTD-2➁ W: white 1
24V AC/DC ±10% 11 mA 10 mA LSTD-2➁ Y: yellow
LSTD-2➁PN10 10
Transformer
Separate Mounting Type Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Type No.
For 1W
100/110V AC TWR516
200/220V AC 5.5V AC TWR526
400/440V AC TWR546
(06/02/17) 119
ø22 LW Series Instructions
Safety Precautions
• Turn off the power to the LW series control units before • For wiring, use wires of a proper size to meet the voltage
starting installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and and current requirements. Solder correctly according to the
inspection of the products. Failure to turn power off may instructions on “Wiring” and “Notes on Terminal Cover” on
cause electrical shocks or fire hazard. page 121. Tighten the M3 terminal screws to a torque of
• To avoid burning your hand, use the lamp holder tool when 0.6 to 1.0 N·m. Failure to tighten terminal screws may
replacing lamps. cause overheating and fire.
Instructions
z
Panel Mounting Replacement of Lens and [Round Lens Type]

Remove the contact block from the Marking Plate
operator. Insert the operator into the • Removing
panel cut-out from the front, then install 1. Remove the operator (lens, marking
the contact block. plate, and lens holder) by inserting a
• Removing the Contact Block screwdriver into the recess of the Lens Marking Plate Lens Holder
Turn the locking lever on the contact lens through the bezel.
[Square Lens Type]
block in the direction opposite to the [Removing the Operator]
arrow on the housing. Then the contact
can be removed.
• Installing the Contact Block
Insert the contact block, with the TOP
markings on the contact block and the
operator placed in the same direction.
Then lock the units, turning the locking Marking Plate and Films
lever in the direction of the arrow. For LW series illuminated pushbuttons
2. Remove the marking plate by push- and pilot lights, legends and symbols
TOP side ing the lens from the rear to disen- can be engraved on the marking
Locking lever gage the latches between the lens plates, or printed marking film can be
and the lens holder, using the inserted under the lens for labelling
TOP marking screwdriver as shown below. purposes.
[Removing the lens] • Marking Plate and Marking Film
Size
Lens Round Lens Square Lens
Operator
Locked position
Engraving Engraving
Contact block Area Area
• Notes on Mounting ø17.8 17.5
Use the optional ring wrench (LW9Z-

0.85
0.85
0.6
T1) to mount the operator onto the Note: The translucent filter in the lens holder
panel. Tightening torque should not cannot be removed because the filter • Engraving must be made on the
exceed 1.2 N·m. Do not use pliers. is sealed to make the unit waterproof. engraving area within 0.5mm deep.
• The marking plate is made of white
Excessive tightening will damage the • Installing acrylic resin.
locking ring. For round lens types, place the mark-
• Collective Mounting
19.8
19.8
ing plate on the lens holder with the

As the locking lever can be turned eas- anti-rotation projection engaged and
ily from the rear of the units using a press the lens onto the lens holder to 17.7
screwdriver, the contact blocks can be engage the latches. For square lens
• Two 0.1mm-thick films or one 0.2mm-
removed even when mounted collec- types, insert the marking plate into the thick film can be installed in the lens.
tively. lens, and press the lens onto the holder • Marking film is not included.
• Recommended marking film: Polyester
to engage the latches. film
Note: Make sure of correct orientation of the
marking plate.
120 (06/02/17)
LW Series Instructions ø22
Instructions
• Insertion Order of Marking Plate Wiring Single Board Mounting
and Film
1. Solder the terminals within 20W/5
[Round Lens Type]
Top Marking Side
sec or 260°C/3 sec without exerting
external force to the terminals. While
soldering, do not touch the soldering
iron to the housing. While wiring,
Lens Marking Lens
prevent tension from being applied
Film
Housing
Plate Holder to the terminals. Do not bend or
• Note: Film is not included raise the terminals, nor exert exces-
sive force to terminals. Mounting the control units on a single
[Square Lens Type]
Top Marking Side 2. Use non-corrosive liquid flux. PC board offers the following features.
3. For tab terminals, Positive Lock 1. Reduced installation labor, easy wir-
Connectors and Easy Lock Connec- ing, space saving, and standardiz-
tors can be used. tion.
Lens Film Marking Lens
Housing 4. Tighten the terminal screw of the 2. Since the contact blocks on the PC
Plate Holder
screw terminal type to a torque of board can be removed easily using
• Note: Film is not included
Make sure of correct orientation of the 0.6 to 1.0 N·m. a locking lever, LW series control
marking plate. units are easy to maintain.
3. Because the LW series control units
Replacement of Lamps Notes on Terminal Cover require no studs for fastening the
Lamps can be replaced using the lamp [Solder/Tab Terminal] control unit to a PC board, special
holder tool (OR-55) from the front of preparation of operation panel is not
Insert the terminal cover into the con-
the panel, or by removing the contact needed.
tact block with the TOP markings on
block from the operator. the contact block and the terminal 4. For details on single board mount-
• How to Remove cover in the same direction. ing, contact IDEC.
To remove, slip the lamp holder tool Note: When wiring, insert the lead wires
onto the lamp head. Then push slightly, into the terminal cover holes before
and turn the lamp holder tool counter- soldering.
clockwise.
• Notes on Wiring
When installing a terminal cover onto
the solder/tab terminal contact block,
Lamp Holder Tool solder the inside of lamp terminal
OR-55 (toward the switch terminals) and wire.
Lamp
Terminal
Switch Terminals
• How to Install
1. To install, insert the lamp head into Inside
Terminal
Cover
the lamp holder tool, and hold the
lamp as shown in the figure below.
Lamp Lamp Holder Tool [Screw Terminal Type]
Terminal cover must be installed on the
control unit before wiring.
Note 1: After wiring, terminal covers cannot
2. Insert the pins on the lamp base into be installed.
the grooves in the lamp socket. Note 2: When terminal covers are installed,
Insert the lamp and turn it clockwise. do not use round crimping termi-
nals.
Lamp Socket in
(Wire the terminal by using fork ter-
the Operator Unit minals or lead wires directly.
(06/02/17) 121
122 (06/02/17)
ø22mm YW Series
Control Units
(06/02/17) 123
YW Series Control Units
Space-saving, thin style contact blocks
Separable operator part makes handling easy
• Small & light-weight

• Finger-safe screw terminals of IP20 (IEC
60529) enhance safety.
• Separate contact block makes installing and
removing easy.
• Pilot lights feature a large lens to ensure a
wide viewing angle for increased safety.
• Non-glare matte surfaces on the button, lens,
and bezel reduce reflection of ambient light.
• UL, c-UL listed, EN compliant, and CCC
approved.
• UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14,

EN 60947-1, EN 60947-5-1
Contact Ratings (Contact Block) Specifications

Rated Insulation Voltage 600V Operating temperature: –20 to +55°C (no freezing)
Operating humidity: 45 to 85% RH (no condensa-
Rated Thermal Current 10A Operating
tion)
Conditions
Operating Voltage 24V 120V 240V 380V Storage temperature: –45 to +80°C
Storage humidity: 95% RH maximum
AC Resistive Load (AC-12) 10A 10A 6A 2A
50/60 Hz Degree of From panel front: IP65 (IEC 60529)
Inductive Load (AC-15) 10A 6A 3A 1.9A
Protection Terminal: IP20 (IEC 60529)
Resistive Load (DC-12) 8A 2.2A 1.1A –
DC Insulation
Inductive Load (DC-13) 4A 1.1A 0.55A – 100 MΩ
Resistance
Contact block: 3500V, 1 minute
Dielectric Strength
Pilot light: 2100V, 1 minute
LED Lamp Ratings
Vibration Operating extremes: 5 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm
Type No. Rated Voltage Rated Current Color Code Resistance Damage limits: 30 Hz, amplitude 1.5 mm
10 mA (A, R, Y) Shock Operating extremes: 100 m/s2
LSED-6∗ 6V AC/DC
7 mA (G, PW, S) Resistance Damage limits: 1000 m/s2
A (amber)
13 mA (A, R, Y) G (green) <Pushbutton and illuminated pushbutton>
LSED-1∗ 12V AC/DC
11 mA (G, PW, S) PW (pure white) Momentary: 5,000,000 operations minimum
15 mA (A, R,Y) R (red) Mechanical Life Maintained: 250,000 operations minimum
LSED-2∗ 24V AC/DC
14 mA (G, PW, S) S (blue) <Selector switch>
LSED-H∗ 110V AC/DC 5.5 mA Y (yellow) 250,000 operations minimum
LSED-M3∗ 230/240V AC/DC 2.7 mA Pushbutton: 100,000 operations minimum

Electrical Life
Selector switch: 100,000 operations minimum
Note: Specify a color code in place of ∗ in the Type No.
Yellow LED lamps are used for white illumination of pilot lights and illu-
minated pushbuttons. Mounting Hole Layout
R0.8 max.
Incandescent Lamp Ratings ø22
3.2 +0.2
0 The 3.2 recess is necessary
.3 +0.4 when the anti-rotation ring is
Type No. Rated Voltage Ratings 0
24.1 +0.4
used.
0
LS-T6 6V AC/DC 6.3V 1W

LS-T8 12V AC/DC 18V 1W
LS-T3 24V AC/DC 30V 1W
A B
Unit A (mm) B (mm)

Pushbutton 50 min. 30 min.
Selector Switch
Mushroom Pushbutton 50 min. 40 min.
Pilot Light 30 min.* 30 min.
* Keep a minimum spacing of 50 mm when using a lamp of over 1W.
124 (06/02/17)
YW Series Control Units ø22
Pushbuttons
Button Color Package

Style Operation Contact Type No.
Code Quantity
Flush 1NO YW1B-M1E10➀P
1NC YW1B-M1E01➀P
2NO YW1B-M1E20➀P
2NC YW1B-M1E02➀P
Momentary 1NO-1NC YW1B-M1E11➀P
3NO YW1B-M1E30➀P B (black)

G (green)
3NC YW1B-M1E03➀P R (red)
5
2NO-1NC YW1B-M1E21➀P S (blue)
W (white)
1NO-2NC YW1B-M1E12➀P Y (yellow)
1NO YW1B-A1E10➀P
1NC YW1B-A1E01➀P
Maintained 2NO YW1B-A1E20➀P
2NC YW1B-A1E02➀P
1NO-1NC YW1B-A1E11➀P
Extended 1NO YW1B-M2E10➀P
1NC YW1B-M2E01➀P
Momentary 2NO YW1B-M2E20➀P
2NC YW1B-M2E02➀P B (black)

G (green)
1NO-1NC YW1B-M2E11➀P R (red)
5
1NO YW1B-A2E10➀P S (blue)
W (white)
1NC YW1B-A2E01➀P Y (yellow)
2NC YW1B-A2E02➀P
Mushroom ø40mm 1NO YW1B-M4E10➀P
1NC YW1B-M4E01➀P
Momentary 2NO YW1B-M4E20➀P
2NC YW1B-M4E02➀P B (black)

G (green)
1NO-1NC YW1B-M4E11➀P R (red)
5
1NO YW1B-A4E10➀P S (blue)
W (white)
1NC YW1B-A4E01➀P Y (yellow)
2NC YW1B-A4E02➀P
Note: Specify a button color code in place of ➀ in the Type No.
(06/02/17) 125
ø22 YW Series Control Units
Dimensions (Pushbuttons)
Gasket
10
10
0.5
M3.5 Terminal Screw
Contact Block Lock
Locking Ring
• Flush
(Button Diameter)
28.6
ø23.6
41.4
9
ø2
45.8 11 30
• Extended
(Button Diameter)
28.6
ø23.6
41.4
9
ø2
11
45.8 19 30
• Mushroom
(Button Diameter)
28.6
41.4
ø40
11
45.8 20.5 30
126 (06/02/17)
Pilot Lights
Package
Style Illumination Type Operating Voltage Type No. Lens Color Code
Quantity
Full Voltage A (amber), C (clear),
Without Lamp 250V AC/DC max. YW1P-2EQ0➁P G (green), R (red), S (blue), 5
6V AC/DC YW1P-2EQ2➁P A (amber), G (green),
PW (pure white), R (red),
12V AC/DC YW1P-2EQ3➁P S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
Built-in LED lamp:
LED 24V AC/DC YW1P-2EQ4➁P 5
LSED-➂➁
110V AC/DC YW1P-2EQH➁P
230/240V AC/DC YW1P-2EQM3➁P
6V AC/DC YW1P-2EQ5➁P A (amber), C (clear),

G (green), R (red), S (blue),
Incandescent 12V AC/DC YW1P-2EQ6➁P W (white) 5
Built-in incandescent lamp:
24V AC/DC YW1P-2EQ7➁P LS-T➂
Transformer Type 100/110V AC YW1P-2EH2➁P A (amber), G (green),
PW (pure white), R (red),
200/220V AC YW1P-2EM2➁P S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
LED Built-in LED lamp: 5
115/120V AC YW1P-2EH22➁P LSED-6➁
230/240V AC YW1P-2EM42➁P
100/110V AC YW1P-2EH5➁P A (amber), C (clear),

G (green), R (red), S (blue),
200/220V AC YW1P-2EM5➁P W (white)
Incandescent Built-in incandescent lamp: 5
115/120V AC YW1P-2EH25➁P LS-T6
230/240V AC YW1P-2EM45➁P
Note: Specify a lens color code in place of ➁ in the Type No.
Clear lenses are used for PW (pure white) illumination of pilot lights.
Dimensions (Pilot Lights)

• Full Voltage Panel Thickness: 0.8 to 6
Gasket
9.8
M3.5 Terminal Screw Locking Ring

ø2
ø29.8
24
0.5 29.6
46.2 15.5
Gasket
9.8
M3.5 Terminal Screw Locking Ring

ø2
ø29.8
24
0.5 29.6
63.3 15.5 All dimensions in mm.
(06/02/17) 127
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Illumination Operating Lens Color Package

Style Operation Contacts Type No.
Type Voltage Code Code Quantity
Extended 1NO YW1L-M2E10Q0➁P 0 (without lamp) A (amber)
1NC YW1L-M2E01Q0➁P 250V AC/DC max. G (green)
R (red)
Momentary 2NO YW1L-M2E20Q0➁P
S (blue)
2NC YW1L-M2E02Q0➁P W (white)
1NO-1NC YW1L-M2E11Q0➁P Y (yellow)
Without Lamp 5
1NO YW1L-A2E10Q0➁P
1NC YW1L-A2E01Q0➁P
Maintained 2NO YW1L-A2E20Q0➁P
1NO-1NC YW1L-A2E11Q0➁P
1NO YW1L-M2E10Q➂➁P 2 (6V AC/DC) A (amber)
1NC YW1L-M2E01Q➂➁P 3 (12V AC/DC) G (green)
4 (24V AC/DC) PW (pure white)
Momentary 2NO YW1L-M2E20Q➂➁P
H (110V AC/DC) R (red)
2NC YW1L-M2E02Q➂➁P M3 (230/240V AC/DC) S (blue)
1NO-1NC YW1L-M2E11Q➂➁P W (white)
LED 5
1NO YW1L-A2E10Q➂➁P Y (yellow)
Built-in LED
1NC YW1L-A2E01Q➂➁P
lamp: LSED-➂➁
Maintained 2NO YW1L-A2E20Q➂➁P
1NO-1NC YW1L-A2E11Q➂➁P
7 (24V AC/DC) R (red)
S (blue)
2NC YW1L-M2E02Q➂➁P W (white)
1NO-1NC YW1L-M2E11Q➂➁P Built-in incan-
Incandescent descent lamp: 5
1NO YW1L-A2E10Q➂➁P
LS-T➂
Mushroom ø40mm 1NO YW1L-M4E10Q0➁P 0 (without lamp) A (amber)
1NC YW1L-M4E01Q0➁P 250V AC/DC max. G (green)
R (red)
Momentary 2NO YW1L-M4E20Q0➁P
S (blue)
2NC YW1L-M4E02Q0➁P W (white)
1NO-1NC YW1L-M4E11Q0➁P Y (yellow)
Without Lamp 5
1NO YW1L-A4E10Q0➁P
Maintained 2NO YW1L-A4E20Q0➁P
1NO-1NC YW1L-A4E11Q0➁P
4 (24V AC/DC) PW (pure white)
H (110V AC/DC) R (red)
2NC YW1L-M4E02Q➂➁P M3 (230/240V AC/DC) S (blue)
1NO-1NC YW1L-M4E11Q➂➁P W (white)
LED 5
1NO YW1L-A4E10Q➂➁P Y (yellow)
Built-in LED
lamp: LSED-➂➁
7 (24V AC/DC) R (red)
S (blue)
2NC YW1L-M4E02Q➂➁P W (white)
1NO-1NC YW1L-M4E11Q➂➁P Built-in incan-
Incandescent descent lamp: 5
1NO YW1L-A4E10Q➂➁P
LS-T➂
Note: Specify a lens color code in place of ➁ in the Type No.
Specify an operating voltage code in place of ➂ in the Type No.
128 (06/02/17)
Dimensions (Illuminated Pushbuttons)

M3.5 Terminal Screw
Full-voltage Adapter Gasket
10 10 10
0.5
M3.5 Terminal Screw
Contact Block
• Extended
(Button Diameter)
28.6
ø23.6
41.4
9
ø2
11 30
45.8 19
• Mushroom
(Button Diameter)
28.6
41.4
ø40
11
45.8 20.5 30
(06/02/17) 129
Selector Switches
Knob Type
Style
No. of Contact Contact Block Operator Position Spring Return Package

Configuration Mounting Position
Maintained — — Quantity
Positions L R – from Right
➀ NO
1NO
➁ YW1S-2E10P YW1S-21E10P — — 5
(10)
➂
➀
1NC
➁ YW1S-2E01P YW1S-21E01P — — 5
(01)
➂ NC
➀ NO
2NO
➁ YW1S-2E20P YW1S-21E20P — — 5
(20)
➂ NO
➀ NC
2NC
➁ YW1S-2E02P YW1S-21E02P — — 5
90° (02)
➂ NC
2-Position
➀ NO
1NO-1NC
L R ➁ YW1S-2E11P YW1S-21E11P — — 5
(11)
➂ NC
➀ NO
3NO
➁ NO YW1S-2E30P YW1S-21E30P — — 5
(30)
➂ NO
➀ NC
3NC
➁ NC YW1S-2E03P YW1S-21E03P — — 5
(03)
➂ NC
➀ NO
2NO-1NC
➁ NO YW1S-2E21P YW1S-21E21P — — 5
(21)
➂ NC
➀ NO
1NO-2NC
➁ NC YW1S-2E12P YW1S-21E12P — — 5
(12)
➂ NC
No. of Contact Contact Block Operator Position Spring Return Spring Return Spring Return Package
Maintained
Positions Configuration Mounting Position L C R from Right from Left Two-Way Quantity
➀ NO
2NO
➁ YW1S-3E20P YW1S-31E20P YW1S-32E20P YW1S-33E20P 5
(20)
➂ NO
➀
2NO
➁ NO YW1S-3E20N1P YW1S-31E20N1P YW1S-32E20N1P YW1S-33E20N1P 5
(20N1)
➂ NO
➀ NC
2NC
(02)
➂ NC
➀
2NC
➁ NC YW1S-3E02N1P YW1S-31E02N1P YW1S-32E02N1P YW1S-33E02N1P 5
(02N1)
➂ NC
➀ NO
1NO-1NC
(11)
➂ NC
➀ NC
1NO-1NC
➁ YW1S-3E11N1P YW1S-31E11N1P YW1S-32E11N1P YW1S-33E11N1P 5
45° (11N1)
➂ NO
3-Position
➀ NO
1NO-1NC
C ➁ NC YW1S-3E11N2P YW1S-31E11N2P YW1S-32E11N2P YW1S-33E11N2P 5
L R (11N2)
➂
➀
1NO-1NC
➁ NC YW1S-3E11N3P YW1S-31E11N3P YW1S-32E11N3P YW1S-33E11N3P 5
(11N3)
➂ NO
➀
1NO-1NC
➁ NO YW1S-3E11N4P YW1S-31E11N4P YW1S-32E11N4P YW1S-33E11N4P 5
(11N4)
➂ NC
➀ NO
3NO
➁ NO YW1S-3E30P YW1S-31E30P YW1S-32E30P YW1S-33E30P 5
(30)
➂ NO
➀ NC
3NC
➁ NC YW1S-3E03P YW1S-31E03P YW1S-32E03P YW1S-33E03P 5
(03)
➂ NC
➀ NO
2NO-1NC
➁ NC YW1S-3E21P YW1S-31E21P YW1S-32E21P YW1S-33E21P 5
(21)
➂ NO
➀ NC
1NO-2NC
➁ NO YW1S-3E12P YW1S-31E12P YW1S-32E12P YW1S-33E12P 5
(12)
➂ NC
130 (06/02/17)
Contact Block Mounting Position
Contact Block Mounting Position
➀ ➁ ➂
C
L R
Operator Position
Dimensions (Selector Switch)

Gasket
10
10
0.5
M3.5 Terminal Screw
45°
Contact Block 45°
Locking Ring LOCK
28.6
41.4
3-Position
9
ø2
ø2
11 Kn 7.6
45.8 24 30 Di ob
am
ete
r
90°
2-Position
(06/02/17) 131
Accessories
Package
Name & Shape Type No. Description & Dimensions (mm)
Quantity
Locking Ring Wrench Metallic tool used to tighten the
110
plastic locking ring when installing 8
ø2
the YW series control unit on a
MW9Z-T1 panel. 1
Lamp Holder Tool Made of rubber. Used for replacing lamps

easily.
ø14
OR-55 1
ø11.6
59
Rubber Mounting Hole Plug Used for plugging unused mounting holes in the panel. ø29
Color: Black
OB-31PN05 5
3.5
ø25
3.5
Metallic Mounting Hole Plug Used for plugging unused mounting holes in the ø25.8
panel.
3
LW9Z-BM Weight: Approx. 18g 1
12
Locking Ring
Anti-Rotation Ring Prevents rotation of switches in panel. 1.5 TOP

Mainly used with selector switches when no 9
ø2
nameplate is used.
HW9Z-RLPN10 ø22 10
With waterproof gasket (IP65).
Made of plastic (black).
Applicable panel thickness: 1.2 to 4.5 mm
Padlock Cover Plastic hinged cover to protect pushbuttons, 82.5
illuminated pushbuttons, or selector switches. Panel Thickness 0.8-3.2
Degree of protection: IP65.
Applicable panel thickness: 0.8 to 3.2 mm
R6
6.5
93
HW9Z-KL1 1
30
70
24
0
ø5
ø2
2.
2
Waterproof Gasket
29.5 Thickness 0.5
Pad Lock Hole ø8
30
LED Lamp LSED-6➁ 6V AC/DC Specify a color code in place of ➁ in the Type No.
Base BA9S/14 A (amber), G (green), PW (pure white), R (red),
LSED-1➁ 12V AC/DC S (blue), Y (yellow)
Applicable units:
ø10
LSED-2➁ 24V AC/DC • LED illuminated pilot lights 1

25.3
• LED illuminated pushbuttons
LSED-H➁ 110V AC/DC For the rated current, see page 124.
Note:Yellow LED lamps are used for white illumination of
LSED-M3➁ 230/240V AC/DC pilot lights and illuminated pushbuttons.
Incandescent Lamp One pack contains 100 incandescent lamps.
LS-T6P 6.3V, 1W
Base BA9S/13
LS-T8P 18V, 1W 100

ø11 ±1
23 ±1 LS-T3P 30V, 1W
Single Contact Block

YW-E10P Contact: 1NO
10
YW-E01P Contact: 1NC
132 (06/02/17)
Package
Name Style Type No. Color Code Dimensions (mm) Quantity
Button Extended
(for pushbuttons) B (black)
Extended YW9Z-B12➀PN10 3.
6
G (green) ø2
R (red)
10
S (blue)
Mushroom W (white)
YW9Z-B14➀PN10
ø40mm Y (yellow) 9.3
Lens Mushroom ø40mm

(for illuminated pushbuttons) ø4
0
Extended YW9Z-L12➁PN10 A (amber)
C (clear)
G (green)
ø23.6
10
R (red)
Mushroom S (blue)
YW9Z-L14➁PN10 Y (yellow)
ø40mm 6
10.8
Marking Plate
2
7.
(for illuminated pushbuttons)
ø1
ø16
— YW9Z-P12PN10 — 10
15.2 1.4
5
Lens A (amber) 8
(for pilot lights) C (clear) 9.
ø2
G (green)
Dome YW9Z-PL12➁PN10 R (red) 10
S (blue)
W (white)
14.5
Y (yellow)
Separate DIN Rail Mounting Type Transformer
• Type No. • Dimensions (mm)

Primary
Type No. Applicable Lamp Rating Secondary Terminal Primary Terminal
Voltage Screws M3.5 Screws M3.5
110V AC TWR-516 One full voltage type illuminated
115V AC TWR-5116 unit containing LED lamp LSED-6
(6V AC/DC) or incandescent lamp
120V AC TWR-5126
22
30
LS-T6 (6.3V)
220V AC TWR-526
230V AC TWR-5236
2-ø3.5 40
240V AC TWR-5246 Mounting Holes 48
380V AC TWR-5386
440V AC TWR-546 52
480V AC TWR-5486
Note: A finger-safe terminal cover is supplied with the transformer.
41
40
(06/02/17) 133
Safety Precautions
• Turn off the power to the YW series control units before starting • For wiring, use wires of a proper size to meet the voltage and
installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of current requirements. Tighten the M3.5 terminal screws to a
the products. Failure to turn power off may cause electrical tightening torque of 1.0 to 1.3 N·m. Failure to tighten the termi-
shocks or fire hazard. nal screws may cause overheat and fire.
• To avoid a burn on your hand, use the lamp holder tool when
replacing lamps.
Instructions
Panel Mounting • Removing the Full Voltage Unit

• Remove the contact block from the operator (for pilot lights, re- ➁
move the transformer or full voltage unit from the pilot light).
Remove the locking ring from the operator. Insert the operator
into the panel cut-out from the front, tighten the locking ring ➀
from the back, then install the contact block to the operator.
• Removing and Installing the Contact Block 1. To remove the full voltage unit, squeeze the full voltage unit
➁ from both sides to disengage the latch as shown, and pull it
➀ out. Like the transformer unit, the full voltage unit can also be
pulled out by inserting a flat screwdriver into the latch hole as
shown.
➂ 2. To reinstall, place the TOP markings on the operator and the
latch on the full voltage unit in the same direction, and insert
the operator into the full voltage unit.
➀ Pull up the locking lever. ➂ Pull out the contact block. 1. Use the optional locking ring wrench (MW9Z-T1) to mount the
➁ Turn the lever to the left. operator onto a panel. Tightening torque must not exceed 2.0
1. To remove the operator from the contact block, pull up the lock- N · m. Do not use pliers. Excessive tightening will damage the
ing lever and turn it to the left. Then the operator can be pulled locking ring.
out. 2. For the contact blocks and transformers housing LED and in-
2. To reinstall, place the TOP marking on the operator and the candescent lamps, make sure not to press the lamps too hard,
idec marking on the contact block mounting adapter in the otherwise the lamp socket may be impaired.
same direction, and insert the operator into the contact block
mounting adapter. Then turn the locking lever to the right. Insertion Order of Lens and Marking Plate
• Illuminated Pushbutton
Extended Type Mushroom Type
Marking Plate Marking Plate
Lens Lens
• Removing and Installing the Transformer Unit
1. Insert a flat screwdriver (5 mm wide at maximum) into the latch
hole on the transformer unit as shown in the photo below, and • Pilot Light
disengage the latch. Then pull out the operator.
2. To reinstall, place the TOP marking on the operator and the
latch in the same direction, and push the operator into the
transformer unit.
134 (06/02/17)
Instructions
Marking Removing Contact Blocks
For YW series illuminated pushbuttons, legends and symbols and Full Voltage Adapter
can be engraved on the built-in marking plates, or printed film Insert a flat screwdriver between the latch and contact block
can be inserted under the lens for labeling purposes. Films are mounting adapter, and disengage the latch.
not supplied with illuminated pushbuttons, and may be provided
by the user.
• Built-in Marking Plate and Marking Film Size
5.2
ø1
Built-in marking plate

size and engraving Engraving Area
area 1.2
Engraving depth: 0.5 mm maximum Make sure to remove the lamp and contact blocks before
Marking plate material: White acrylic removing the full voltage adapter.
-0.2
Lamp
0
ø17.2
Applicable marking ➀
0
15.0 -0.2
film size
0.1-mm-thick × 2 sheets
or 0.2-mm-thick × 1 sheet Full Voltage Adapter
Film material: Polyester (recommended)
Note: Marking films are not supplied with the
illuminated pushbutton. Contact Block
• Replacement (LED and incandescent lamps) ➂

Lamps can be replaced using the lamp holder tool (OR-55) from
the front of the panel, or by removing the contact block from the
operator unit. ➁ ➁
• Removing the Lamp from the Front of the Panel
Tightening Torque for Terminal Screws
To remove, slip the lamp holder tool onto the lamp head lightly.
Tightening torque for terminal screws must be between 1.0 and
Then push slightly, and turn the lamp holder tool to the left.
1.3 N·m.
Anti-rotation Ring and Mounting Panel

Turn the TOP marking on the operator and the ▲ mark on the
anti-rotation ring to the recess on the mounting panel.
Projections (▲ mark)
• Installing the Lamp from the Front of the Panel

1. To install, insert the lamp head into the lamp holder tool, and
hold the lamp as shown in the figure below.
Anti-rotation Ring Locking Ring
Lamp Lamp Removal Tool
Panel Thickness 1.2 to 4.5 mm
Mounting Panel Thickness

The mounting panel must be 0.8 to 6.0 mm in thickness. When
2. Place the pins on the lamp base to the grooves in the lamp optional accessories are added, the applicable panel thickness
socket. Insert the lamp and turn it to the right. changes as shown below.
Padlock Cover
HW9Z-KL1P
Pilot Light Illuminated Pushbutton
Panel Thickness Panel Thickness

0.8 to 6 mm 0.8 to 3.2 mm
(06/02/17) 135
Instructions
LED Illumination [Protection Example 1] For AC circuit
LED lamps consist of semiconductors. If the applied voltage
exceeds the rated voltage, LED elements deteriorate due to LED with
transformer
overheat, resulting in significant decrease in luminance, hue
change, or failure of lighting. Also, if an extraneous noise, tran- C C
sient voltage, or transient current is applied to the circuit, similar LED with Relay Ry LED
transformer LED R coil or R
effects will be caused. When using LED lamps, observe the fol- solenoid
lowing instructions.
(Reference values) R: 120Ω
• Rated Voltage C: 0.1 μF
The LED illuminated units are rated at 6V, 12V, 24V, 110V, or
230/240V AC/DC, and can be used within ±10% the rated volt- [Protection Example 2] For DC circuit
age of either AC or DC, except the 230/240V AC/DC types can
+
be used on 250V AC/DC maximum.
• DC Power
1. Switching power supply
Regulated voltage from switching power supply is best suited. Relay Ry LED Diode
Make sure to use within the rated voltage of the LED lamp. coil or
solenoid
2. Rechargeable battery –
Note that the battery voltage may exceed the rated voltage of
the LED lamp while the battery is being charged and immedi- • Countermeasures against Dim Lighting
ately after the charging is complete. Be sure to use the LED 1. Leakage currents through the transistors or a contact protec-
lamp on a voltage of ±10% the rated voltage, except the 230/ tion circuit may cause the LED lamp to illuminate dimly even
240V AC/DC types on 250V AC/DC maximum. when the output is off.
3. Full-wave rectification 2. When the LED lamp is illuminated by a transistor output, take
Since the LED lamp is AC/DC compatible, a diode bridge for the following measure.
rectification is not necessary. If the LED lamp is used on a full-
[Circuit Example]
wave rectification current through a diode bridge, the rectifier
diodes will reduce the voltage, resulting in lower luminance. Connect shunt resistor R in parallel with the LED lamp.
4. Single-phase half-wave rectification

This is not suitable for the power source of LED lamps. Use
constant-voltage DC power. R LED
• Noise
Io
LED elements deteriorate due to extraneous noise, resulting in
significant decrease in luminance, hue change, or failure of Io: Leakage current when the output is off
lighting. When such effects are anticipated, take a protection R: Shunt resistor
measure shown below, such as RC elements or a surge
absorber.
• When ordering, specify the Type No. and quantity.
• Pushbuttons, pilot lights, illuminated pushbuttons, and selector
switches are supplied in a package containing 5 units.
• Replacement contact blocks are supplied in a package con-
taining 10 pieces.
136 (06/02/17)
ø22mm TW Series
Control Units
(06/02/17) 137
ø22 TW Series Control Units (Selection Guides)
Function Pushbutton
Flush Extended Extended w/Full Shroud ø29mm Mushroom ø40mm Mushroom
Category
Shape
ABW1 ABW2 ABFW2 ABW3 ABW4

Type
AOW1 AOW2 AOFW2 AOW3 AOW4
Page 144 144 144 144 145
Function Pushbutton
ø40mm Mushroom
ø29mm Mushroom ø40mm Mushroom ø40mm Mushroom ø29mm Mushroom
Category w/Full Shroud
Momentary Pushlock Turn Reset Pushlock Turn Reset Push Turn Lock Pushlock Key Reset
Shape
Type ABGW4 AVW3 AVW4 AJW4 AXW3

Page 145 145 145 145 145
Function Pushbutton
ø40mm Mushroom ø40mm Mushroom Square Flush Square Extended
Category
Pushlock Key Reset Push Pull Momentary/Maintained
Shape
ABQW1 ABQW2
Type AXW4 AYW4
AOQW1 AOQW2
Page 146 146 146 146
Function Pilot Light

Flush Square Flush
Category Dome
(Non-marking/Marking) (Marking)
Shape
APW1
Type APW2 UPQW1B
APW1B
Page 147 147 147
138 (06/02/17)
TW Series Control Units (Selection Guides) ø22

Extended Extended w/Full Shroud Square Extended ø29mm Mushroom ø40mm Mushroom
Category
(Non-marking/Marking) (Non-marking/Marking) (Marking) Pushlock Turn Reset Pushlock Turn Reset
Shape
ALW2, ALW2B, ALFW2, AOLFW2 ALQW2B AVLW3 AVLW4

Type
AOLW2, AOLW2B ALFW2B, AOLFW2B AOLQW2B AVLW3B AVLW4B
Page 149, 150 151, 152 153 154 155
Function Illuminated Pushbutton (Incandescent)

ø29mm Mushroom
Category ø40mm Push-Pull
(Non-marking/Marking)
Shape
ALW3, ALW3B, AYLW4

Type
AOLW3, AOLW3B AYLW4B
Page 154 155
Illuminated Selector
Function Selector Switch Switch
(LED/Incandescent)
Category Knob Lever Key Knob
Shape
Type ASW ASW∗L ASW∗K ASLW

Page 158 159 160 161, 162
(06/02/17) 139
ø22 TW Series Control Units
General-purpose control units for various applications
Low Voltage Directive
Heavy-duty type for high-level protection against
EMC Directive
harsh environment
• Highly reliable HW contact blocks are used.
• UL and CSA approved, EN compliant
UL Listing
UL
File No. E68961
EN60947-1
EN TÜV Rheinland
EN60947-5-1
Contact Ratings
Contact Block
Contact Ratings by Utilization Category AC-15 (A600)
IEC 60947-5-1 DC-13 (P600)
Characteristics
DC
For the control units listed below, the rated current (load switching current) is reduced to a half of the rated operational current of the
contact block. The rated insulation voltage (600V) and the rated thermal current (10A) remain unchanged.
• Selector switches and illuminated selector switches with contact code 2S, 3S, 4S, 2R, or 4R.
HW-C (Contact Block)

• M3.5 terminal screw
2-way wiring possible
• Double-break rolling
action silver contacts
with raked surface
• Snap-fit groove
• Fitting groove • Alkali-resistant
66 nylon housing

• Push rod
Color-coded for
different contacts • Snap-fit latch
A maximum of four contact
blocks in two layers can
mount on the operator.

Lamp Base BA9S/13
140 (06/02/17)
TW Series Control Units ø22
Lamp Base BA9S/13
AC A, R, W, Y: 17 mA, G, PW, S: 8 mA 11 mA 11 mA
Current Draw
DC A, R, W, Y: 14 mA, G, PW, S: 5.5 mA 10 mA 10 mA
Color Code ➁ A (amber), G (green), PW (pure white), R (red), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
Life (reference value) Approx. 50,000 hours (The luminance reduces to 50% the initial intensity when used on complete DC.)
A, R, W, Y
Internal Circuit
G, PW, S
LED Chip
Protection Diode
Zener Diode
Specifications
Dielectric Strength
Shock Resistance
Mechanical Life (minimum operations) Others: 500,000
Pushbuttons: 500,000 (switching frequency 1,800 operations/h, duty ratio 40%)
Electrical Life (minimum operations) Illuminated pushbuttons: 500,000 (switching frequency 1,800 operations/h, duty ratio 40%)
Selector switches: 500,000 (switching frequency 1,200 operations/h, duty ratio 40%)

R0.8 max. Note 1: The 3.2 mm recess is for preventing rotation and is not necessary when the nameplate or anti-rotation
+0.2
3.2 0 (Note 1) ring is not used.
ø22
.3 +0
.
Note 2: The minimum mounting centers are applicable to switches with one layer of contact blocks (two contact
0 4
24.1 +0.4
blocks). When two layers of contact blocks are mounted, determine the minimum mounting centers in
0
consideration of convenience for wiring.

• ø40mm mushroom: 40 mm minimum
• 2-position, 3-position lever type selector switch: 39 mm minimum
(45 min.)
30 (Note 2) • 4-position, 5-position lever type selector switch: 50 mm minimum

50
Type No. Unit NEMA ICS 6-110 IEC 60529
Pushbuttons, pilot lights, illuminated pushbutons, and selector switches Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, (3S), 4, 5, 12,13 IP65
A∗∗∗∗ Illuminated selector switches, key pushbuttons, key reset pushbuttons, and
Type 1, 2, 3R, 5, 12, 13 IP54
key selector switches
Note: (3S) of NEMA ICS 6-110 applies to the pilot lights with round lens.
(06/02/17) 141
ø22 TW Series Control Units (Ordering Information)
• Specify an operator or lens color code in the Type No. • When a terminal cover is required, order an applicable
• Full voltage type illuminated units are not supplied with a terminal cover referring to page 166.
lamp. Order LED or incandescent lamps separately.
Transformer and DC-DC converter type illuminated units
contain an LED or incandescent lamp.
Rated Voltage LED Lamp Incandescent
100/110V AC LSTD-6➁ LS-6
200/220V AC LSTD-6➁ LS-6
110V DC LSTD-6➁ LS-6
• All standard units are UL, CSA, EN, and TÜV approved.
Pushbuttons Illuminated Pushbuttons

ABW1 11 R - MAU ALFW2 116 13 D R - MAU
Optional contact
Optional contact
Button color code
Lens color code
Contact arrangement code
Lamp type
10: 1NO 01: 1NC
D: LED (Transformer type only)
11: 1NO-1NC 20: 2NO
02: 2NC 21: 2NO-1NC (blank): Incandescent
12: 1NO-2NC 30: 3NO Contact arrangement code
03: 3NC 31: 3NO-1NC 10: 1NO 01: 1NC
22: 2NO-2NC 13: 1NO-3NC 11: 1NO-1NC 20: 2NO
40: 4NO 04: 4NC 02: 2NC 21: 2NO-1NC
Note: 12: 1NO-2NC 30: 3NO
• Push-pull type AYW4 can have a maximum of two contact blocks. 03: 3NC 31: 3NO-1NC
22: 2NO-2NC 13: 1NO-3NC
40: 4NO 04: 4NC
Pilot Lights 99: Full voltage
APW2 116 D R 16: Transformer (100/110V AC)
Lens color code 116: Transformer (115V AC)
126: Transformer (120V AC)
Lamp type
26: Transformer (200/220V AC)
(blank): Incandescent 246: Transformer (240V AC)
Operating voltage code 386: Transformer (380V AC)
99: Full voltage 46: Transformer (400/440V AC)
16: Transformer (100/110V AC) 486: Transformer (480V AC)
116: Transformer (115V AC) 16∗D: DC-DC converter (110V DC)
126: Transformer (120V AC) Note:
• Push-pull type AYLW4 can have a maximum of two contact blocks.
246: Transformer (240V AC) • Transformer type and DC-DC converter type cannot have an odd
386: Transformer (380V AC) number of contact blocks, such as 1NO, 1NC, 3NO, 2NO-1NC,
46: Transformer (400/440V AC) 1NO-2NC, and 3NC.
16D: DC-DC converter (110V DC)
Note:
• Transformer and DC-DC converter types contain an LED lamp
142 (06/02/17)
TW Series Control Units (Ordering Information) ø22
Selector Switch Illuminated Selector Switch
ASW 2 L 11 - MAU ASLW 2 16 22 D R - MAU
Optional contact Optional contact
MAU: Gold-plated silver contact MAU: Gold-plated silver contact
Contact arrangement code Lens color code
Operator type Lamp type
(blank): Knob D: LED (Transformer type only)
L: Lever (blank): Incandescent
Number of positions Contact arrangement code
Note: Operating voltage code
• See pages 162 to 164 for contact arrangement codes. 99: Full voltage
Key Selector Switch 136: Transformer (120V AC)
ASW 2 K 20 B - MAU 26: Transformer (200/220V AC)
Optional contact 236: Transformer (230V AC)
Key removable position code
2-position 486: Transformer (480V AC)
• Maintained
Number of positions
(blank): Removable in all positions
B: Removable in left only Note:
C: Removable in right only • Full voltage type is not supplied with a lamp.
• Spring return from right • Transformer type contains an LED lamp (LSTD-6➁) or incandes-
(blank): Removable in left only cent lamp (LS-6).
• Spring return from left • See pages 163 to 165 for contact arrangement codes.
(blank): Removable in right only
3-position
• Maintained
• Spring return from right
(blank): Removable in left and center
• Spring return from left
(blank): Removable in right and center
• Spring return two-way
(blank): Removable in center only
Number of positions
Note:
• See pages 163 to 165 for contact arrangement codes.
• The key cannot be removed in the return position.
(06/02/17) 143
ø22 TW Series Pushbuttons
Flush / Extended / Extended w/Full Shroud / Mushroom Types
Operation ➀ Button Color

Type Code
Flush 1NO ABW110➀
ABW1 1NC ABW101➀
AOW1 1NO-1NC ABW111➀
Momentary M3.5 Terminal
2NO ABW120➀ Screws
Panel Thickness 1 to 6
2NC ABW102➀
2NO-2NC ABW122➀
ø24
ø29
37
1NO AOW110➀
1NC AOW101➀ 48.5 (1-2 blocks) 13
1NO-1NC AOW111➀ 68.5 (3-4 blocks) 30

Maintained
2NO AOW120➀
2NC AOW102➀
2NO-2NC AOW122➀
Extended 1NO ABW210➀
ABW2 1NC ABW201➀
AOW2 1NO-1NC ABW211➀ M3.5 Terminal
Momentary Screws
2NO ABW220➀ Panel Thickness 1 to 6
2NC ABW202➀
ø24
ø29
2NO-2NC ABW222➀
37
1NO AOW210➀
48.5 (1-2 blocks) 13
1NC AOW201➀ Specify a button
68.5 (3-4 blocks) 19 30
1NO-1NC AOW211➀ color code in
Maintained
2NO AOW220➀ place of ➀ in the
2NC AOW202➀ Type No.
2NO-2NC AOW222➀
B: black
Extended with Full Shroud 1NO ABFW210➀
G: green
ABFW2 1NC ABFW201➀ R: red
AOFW2 1NO-1NC ABFW211➀ S: blue M3.5 Terminal
Momentary
2NO ABFW220➀ W: white Screws Panel Thickness 1 to 6
2NC ABFW202➀ Y: yellow
ø24
ø29
2NO-2NC ABFW222➀
37
1NO AOFW210➀
1NC AOFW201➀ 48.5 (1-2 blocks) 19.5
68.5 (3-4 blocks) 30
1NO-1NC AOFW211➀
Maintained
2NO AOFW220➀
2NC AOFW202➀
2NO-2NC AOFW222➀
ø29mm Mushroom 1NO ABW310➀
ABW3 1NC ABW301➀
2NO ABW320➀ Screws Panel Thickness 1 to 6
2NC ABW302➀
2NO-2NC ABW322➀
ø29
37
1NO AOW310➀
1NC AOW301➀ 48.5 (1-2 block) 13
1NO-1NC AOW311➀ 68.5 (3-4 blocks) 22.5 30

Maintained
2NO AOW320➀
2NC AOW302➀
2NO-2NC AOW322➀
• Specify a button color code in place of ➀ in the Type No.
• Round bezel and shroud (metal): Mat aluminum color
144 (06/02/17)
TW Series Pushbuttons ø22
Mushroom / Pushlock Turn Reset / Push Turn Lock / Pushlock Key Reset Types

Type Code
ø40mm Mushroom 1NO ABW410➀
ABW4 1NC ABW401➀
2NO ABW420➀ Screws Panel Thickness 1 to 6
2NC ABW402➀
2NO-2NC ABW422➀
ø40
37
1NO AOW410➀ Specify a button
1NC AOW401➀ color code in 48.5 (1-2 blocks) 13
1NO-1NC AOW411➀ place of ➀ in the 68.5 (3-4 blocks) 22.5 30

Maintained Type No.
2NO AOW420➀
2NC AOW402➀
B: black
2NO-2NC AOW422➀
G: green
ø40mm Mushroom 1NO ABGW410➀ R: red
w/Full Shroud S: blue M3.5 Terminal
ABGW4 1NC ABGW401➀ W: white Screw Panel Thickness 1 to 6
Y: yellow
1NO-1NC ABGW411➀
ø46
37
Momentary
2NO ABGW420➀
48.5 (1-2 blocks)
68.5 (3-4 blocks) 23 30
2NC ABGW402➀
2NO-2NC ABGW422➀
ø29mm Pushlock Turn Reset 1NO AVW310➀ M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness
AVW3 (Note) Screws 1 to 6 Reset Angle 75°
1NC AVW301➀
1NO-1NC AVW311➀
ø29
37
2NO AVW320➀
2NC AVW302➀ 48.5 (1-2 blocks) 13
68.5 (3-4 blocks) 22.5 30
2NO-2NC AVW322➀ R: red
ø40mm Pushlock Turn Reset 1NO AVW410➀ Y: yellow
M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness
AVW4 (Note) Screws 1 to 6 Reset Angle 75°
1NC AVW401➀
1NO-1NC AVW411➀
ø40
37
2NO AVW420➀
2NC AVW402➀ 48.5 (1-2 blocks) 13
68.5 (3-4 blocks) 22.5 30

2NO-2NC AVW422➀
ø40mm Push Turn Lock 1NO AJW410➀
M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness
AJW4 Screws 1 to 6 Reset Angle 75°
1NC AJW401➀
B: black LO
1NO-1NC AJW411➀ SH
G: green
CK
PU
ø40
37
2NO AJW420➀ R: red

Y: yellow
2NC AJW402➀ 48.5 (1-2 blocks) 13
68.5 (3-4 blocks) 22.5 30
2NO-2NC AJW422➀
ø29mm Pushlock Key Reset 1NO AXW310R
M3.5 Terminal
AXW3 (Note) Screws Panel Thickness Reset 45°
1NC AXW301R 1 to 6 (unlock)
1NO-1NC AXW311R
ø29
Red only
37
2NO AXW320R
13
2NC AXW302R 48.5 (1-2 blocks) 25
68.5 (3-4 blocks) 47 30
2NO-2NC AXW322R

• Round bezel (metal): Mat aluminum color
Note: AVW3, AVW4, and AXW3 pushbuttons cannot be used as emergency stop switches. When emergency stop switches are required, use
XW or HW series pushbuttons (ISO 13850 and IEC 60947-5-5 compliant).
(06/02/17) 145
ø22 TW Series Pushbuttons
Pushlock Key Reset / Push-Pull / Square Flush / Square Extended

Type Code
ø40mm Mushroom Push Lock Key Reset 1NO AXW410R
AXW4
M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness Reset
1NC AXW401R Screws 1 to 6 (unlock) 45°
1NO-1NC AXW411R
ø40
Red only
37
2NO AXW420R
13
48.5 (1-2 blocks) 25
2NC AXW402R
68.5 (3-4 blocks) 47 30
2NO-2NC AXW422R
ø40mm Mushroom Push-Pull 1NO AYW410➀ M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness
AYW4 Screws 1 to 6
1NC AYW401➀
ø40
37
1NO-1NC AYW411➀
13
2NO AYW420➀ 48.5 (1-2 blocks) 25
68.5 (3-4 blocks) 30.5 30
2NC AYW402➀
Square Flush 1NO ABQW110➀
ABQW1 1NC ABQW101➀
AOQW1 1NO-1NC ABQW111➀
2NO ABQW120➀ Screws Panel Thickness
1 to 6
2NC ABQW102➀
2NO-2NC ABQW122➀
30
25
37
B: black
1NO AOQW110➀
G: green
1NC AOQW101➀ R: red 48.5 (1-2 blocks) 13
1NO-1NC AOQW111➀ S: blue 68.5 (3-4 blocks) 30
Maintained W: white
2NO AOQW120➀
2NC AOQW102➀ Y: yellow
2NO-2NC AOQW122➀
Square Extended 1NO ABQW210➀
ABQW2 1NC ABQW201➀
AOQW2 1NO-1NC ABQW211➀
Panel Thickness
2NO ABQW220➀ Screws
1 to 6
2NC ABQW202➀
2NO-2NC ABQW222➀
30
25
37
1NO AOQW210➀
1NC AOQW201➀ 48.5 (1-2 blocks) 13
1NO-1NC AOQW211➀ 68.5 (3-4 blocks) 20 30
Maintained
2NO AOQW220➀
2NC AOQW202➀
2NO-2NC AOQW222➀
• Square bezel (plastic): Black
• Contact Statuses of Push-Pull Switch

ø40mm Mushroom
Contact Push-Pull Switch
Push Pull
1NO
1NC
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
• Note: Push-pull switch can have a maximum of two contact blocks.
146 (06/02/17)
TW Series Pilot Lights ø22
Round Flush / Dome / Square Flush Types
➁ Lens/LED
Shape Lamp Input Type Type No. ➂ Operating Voltage Code
Color Code
Round Flush A: amber
Without Lamp Full Voltage APW199➁
APW1 G: green
PW: pure white
Transformer APW1➂D➁ R: red
LED S: blue
W: white
DC-DC Converter∗ APW11DD➁
Y: yellow
A: amber
G: green
Incandescent Transformer APW1➂➁ R: red
S: blue
W: white
Round Flush (Marking) A: amber
Without Lamp Full Voltage APW1B99➁
APW1B G: green
PW: pure white
Transformer APW1B➂D➁ R: red
LED S: blue
W: white
DC-DC Converter∗ APW1B16DD➁ Specify an operating
Y: yellow
voltage code in place of ➂
A: amber in the Type No.
G: green
Incandescent Transformer APW1B➂➁ R: red 16: 100/110V AC
S: blue 116: 115 AC
W: white 126: 120V AC
Dome A: amber 26: 200/220V AC
Without Lamp Full Voltage APW299➁
APW2 G: green 236: 230V AC
PW: pure white 246: 240V AC
Transformer APW2➂D➁ R: red 386: 380V AC
LED S: blue 46: 400/440V AC
W: white
DC-DC Converter∗ APW216DD➁ 486: 480V AC
Y: yellow
A: amber
G: green
Incandescent Transformer APW2➂➁ R: red
S: blue
W: white
Square Flush (Marking) A: amber
Without Lamp Full Voltage APQW1B99➁
APQW1B G: green
PW: pure white
Transformer APQW1B➂D➁ R: red
LED S: blue
W: white
DC-DC Converter∗ APQW1B16DD➁
Y: yellow
A: amber
G: green
Incandescent Transformer APQW1B➂➁ R: red
S: blue
W: white
• The white (W) lens of APW1B and APQW1B types is a combination of clear lens and white marking plate.
(06/02/17) 147
ø22 TW Series Pilot Lights
Dimensions
• Round Flush APW1 • Round Flush APW1
Full Voltage Transformer, DC-DC Converter
1 to 6 1 to 6
M3.5 Terminal Screw
ø24
ø29
ø24
ø29
37
37
28.5 13 30 28.5 13 30
17 66.5 17
• Round Flush Marking Type APW1B • Round Flush Marking Type APW1B
Panel Thickness M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness
1 to 6 Screw 1 to 6
ø24
ø29
ø24
ø29
37
37
28.5 13 30 28.5 13 30
17 66.5 17
Marking plate: ø15.5 mm Marking plate: ø15.5 mm
• Dome APW2 • Dome APW2

Panel Thickness M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness
1 to 6 Screw 1 to 6
ø23.6
ø29
ø23.6
ø29
37
37
28.5 13 30 28.5 13 30
25 66.5 25
• Square Flush Marking Type APQW1B • Square Flush Marking Type APQW1B
Panel Thickness M3.5 Terminal
1 to 6 Screw Panel Thickness 1 to 6
30
25
30
25
37
37
28.5 13 30 28.5 13 30
16 66.5 16
Marking plate: 22 mm Marking plate: 22 mm
Terminal Wiring (Bottom View)

TOP TOP
M3.5
M3.5
X1
X1
X2
X2

DC-DC Converter Type
148 (06/02/17)
TW Series Illuminated Pushbuttons ø22
.
Round Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons

Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALW29911➁
ALW2 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALW29920➁
AOLW2
2NO-2NC ALW29922➁
1NO-1NC ALW2➂11D➁
Transformer 2NO ALW2➂20D➁
2NO-2NC ALW2➂22D➁
Momentary LED
1NO-1NC ALW21611DD➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO ALW21620DD➁
2NO-2NC ALW21622DD➁
1NO-1NC ALW2➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALW2➂20➁
2NO-2NC ALW2➂22➁
1NO-1NC AOLW29911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLW29920➁
2NO-2NC AOLW29922➁
1NO-1NC AOLW2➂11D➁
Transformer 2NO AOLW2➂20D➁
2NO-2NC AOLW2➂22D➁
Maintained LED
1NO-1NC AOLW21611DD➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO AOLW21620DD➁
2NO-2NC AOLW21622DD➁
1NO-1NC AOLW2➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLW2➂20➁
2NO-2NC AOLW2➂22➁

Specify a lens/LED color code in Specify a lens color code in place of Specify an operating voltage code in place of ➂ in the Type No.
place of ➁ in the Type No. ➁ in the Type No.
A: amber A: amber 116: Transformer (115V AC)
G: green G: green 126: Transformer (120V AC)
PW: pure white R: red 26: Transformer (200/220V AC)
R: red S: blue 236: Transformer (230V AC)
S: blue W: white 246: Transformer (240V AC)
W: white 386: Transformer (380V AC)
Y: yellow 46: Transformer (400/440V AC)
(06/02/17) 149
ø22 TW Series Illuminated Pushbuttons
Round Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons (Marking Type)

Round Extended (Marking) 1NO-1NC ALW2B9911➁
ALW2B Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALW2B9920➁
AOLW2B
2NO-2NC ALW2B9922➁
1NO-1NC ALW2B➂11D➁
Transformer 2NO ALW2B➂20D➁
2NO-2NC ALW2B➂22D➁
Momentary LED
1NO-1NC ALW2B1611DD➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO ALW2B1620DD➁
2NO-2NC ALW2B1622DD➁
1NO-1NC ALW2B➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALW2B➂20➁
2NO-2NC ALW2B➂22➁
1NO-1NC AOLW2B9911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLW2B9920➁
2NO-2NC AOLW2B9922➁
1NO-1NC AOLW2B➂11D➁
Transformer 2NO AOLW2B➂20D➁
2NO-2NC AOLW2B➂22D➁
Maintained LED
1NO-1NC AOLW2B1611DD➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO AOLW2B1620DD➁
2NO-2NC AOLW2B1622DD➁
1NO-1NC AOLW2B➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLW2B➂20➁
2NO-2NC AOLW2B➂22➁

150 (06/02/17)
Round Extended with Full Shroud Illuminated Pushbuttons

Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALFW29911➁
With Full Shroud Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALFW29920➁
ALFW2 2NO-2NC ALFW29922➁
AOLFW2
1NO-1NC ALFW2➂11D➁
Transformer 2NO ALFW2➂20D➁
2NO-2NC ALFW2➂22D➁
Momentary LED
1NO-1NC ALFW21611DD➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO ALFW21620DD➁
2NO-2NC ALFW21622DD➁
1NO-1NC ALFW2➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALFW2➂20➁
2NO-2NC ALFW2➂22➁
1NO-1NC AOLFW29911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLFW29920➁
2NO-2NC AOLFW29922➁
1NO-1NC AOLFW2➂11D➁
Transformer 2NO AOLFW2➂20D➁
2NO-2NC AOLFW2➂22D➁
Maintained LED
1NO-1NC AOLFW21611DD➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO AOLFW21620DD➁
2NO-2NC AOLFW21622DD➁
1NO-1NC AOLFW2➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLFW2➂20➁
2NO-2NC AOLFW2➂22➁

(06/02/17) 151
Round Extended with Full Shroud Illuminated Pushbuttons (Marking Type)

Round Extended (Marking) 1NO-1NC ALFW2B9911➁
With Full Shroud Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALFW2B9920➁
ALFW2B 2NO-2NC ALFW2B9922➁
AOLFW2B
1NO-1NC ALFW2B➂11D➁
Transformer 2NO ALFW2B➂20D➁
2NO-2NC ALFW2B➂22D➁
Momentary LED
1NO-1NC ALFW2B1611DD➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO ALFW2B1620DD➁
2NO-2NC ALFW2B1622DD➁
1NO-1NC ALFW2B➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALFW2B➂20➁
2NO-2NC ALFW2B➂22➁
1NO-1NC AOLFW2B9911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLFW2B9920➁
2NO-2NC AOLFW2B9922➁
1NO-1NC AOLFW2B➂11D➁
Transformer 2NO AOLFW2B➂20D➁
2NO-2NC AOLFW2B➂22D➁
Maintained LED
1NO-1NC AOLFW2B1611DD➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO AOLFW2B1620DD➁
2NO-2NC AOLFW2B1622DD➁
1NO-1NC AOLFW2B➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLFW2B➂20➁
2NO-2NC AOLFW2B➂22➁

152 (06/02/17)
Square Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons (Marking Type)

Square Extended (Marking) 1NO-1NC ALQW2B9911➁
ALQW2B Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALQW2B9920➁
AOLQW2B
2NO-2NC ALQW2B9922➁
1NO-1NC ALQW2B➂11D➁
Transformer 2NO ALQW2B➂20D➁
2NO-2NC ALQW2B➂22D➁
Momentary LED
1NO-1NC ALQW2B1611DD➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO ALQW2B1620DD➁
2NO-2NC ALQW2B1622DD➁
1NO-1NC ALQW2B➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALQW2B➂20➁
2NO-2NC ALQW2B➂22➁
1NO-1NC AOLQW2B9911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLQW2B9920➁
2NO-2NC AOLQW2B9922➁
1NO-1NC AOLQW2B➂11D➁
Transformer 2NO AOLQW2B➂20D➁
2NO-2NC AOLQW2B➂22D➁
Maintained LED
1NO-1NC AOLQW2B1611DD➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO AOLQW2B1620DD➁
2NO-2NC AOLQW2B1622DD➁
1NO-1NC AOLQW2B➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLQW2B➂20➁
2NO-2NC AOLQW2B➂22➁

(06/02/17) 153
Mushroom (ø29) Illuminated Pushbuttons

ø29 Mushroom
Without Lamp Full Voltage ALW39911➁
ALW3
AOLW3 Momentary
Incandescent Transformer ALW3➂11➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage AOLW39911➁

Maintained
Incandescent Transformer AOLW3➂11➁
1NO-1NC
ø29 Mushroom (Marking Type)
Without Lamp Full Voltage ALW3B9911➁
ALW3B
AOLW3B Momentary
Incandescent Transformer ALW3B➂11➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage AOLW3B9911➁

Maintained
Incandescent Transformer AOLW3B➂11➁
ø29 Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset 1NO-1NC AVLW39911R

AVLW3 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AVLW39920R
2NO-2NC AVLW39922R
1NO-1NC AVLW3➂11DR
LED Transformer 2NO AVLW3➂20DR
1NO-1NC AVLW3➂11R
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AVLW3➂20R
2NO-2NC AVLW3➂22R
ø29 Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset (Marking Type) 1NO AVLW3B9911R
AVLW3B Without Lamp Full Voltage 1NC AVLW3B9920R
1NO-1NC AVLW3B9922R
1NO-1NC AVLW3B➂11DR
LED Transformer 2NO AVLW3B➂20DR
1NO-1NC AVLW3B➂11R
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AVLW3B➂20R

Incandescent Illuminated Type
➁ Lens Color Code
Specify a lens color code in place of Specify an operating voltage code in place of ➂ in the Type No.
➁ in the Type No.
A: amber 116: Transformer (115V AC)
G: green 126: Transformer (120V AC)
R: red 26: Transformer (200/220V AC)
S: blue 236: Transformer (230V AC)
154 (06/02/17)
Mushroom (ø40 mm) Illuminated Pushbuttons
Shape Lamp Input Type Contact Type No.

ø40 Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset 1NO-1NC AVLW49911R
AVLW4 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AVLW49920R
2NO-2NC AVLW49922R
LED Transformer 2NO AVLW4➂20DR
1NO-1NC AVLW4➂11R
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AVLW4➂20R
2NO-2NC AVLW4➂22R
ø40 Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset (Marking Type) 1NO AVLW4B9911R
AVLW4B Without Lamp Full Voltage 1NC AVLW4B9920R
1NO-1NC AVLW4B9922R
LED Transformer 2NO AVLW4B➂20DR
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AVLW4B➂20R
ø40 Mushroom Push Pull 1NO-1NC AYLW49911➁
AYLW4
(2-position Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AYLW49920➁
maintained)
2NO-2NC AYLW49922➁
1NO-1NC AYLW4➂11➁
2NO AYLW4➂20➁
ø40 Mushroom Push Pull (Marking Type) 1NO AYLW4B9911➁
AYLW4B
(2-position Without Lamp Full Voltage 1NC AYLW4B9920➁
maintained)
1NO-1NC AYLW4B9922➁
1NO-1NC AYLW4B➂11➁
2NO AYLW4B➂20➁

➁ Lens Color Code
Specify a lens color code in place of Specify an operating voltage code in place of ➂ in the Type No.
➁ in the Type No.
A: amber 116: Transformer (115V AC)
G: green 126: Transformer (120V AC)
R: red 26: Transformer (200/220V AC)
S: blue 236: Transformer (230V AC)
W: white (AYLW4 only) 246: Transformer (240V AC)
• LED illuminated transformer type contains an LED lamp (LSTD-6➁, rated voltage 6V AC/DC).
• Contact Statuses of Push-Pull Switch
ø40mm Mushroom
Contact Push-Pull Switch
Push Pull
1NO
1NC
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
Note: Push-pull switch can have a maximum of two contact blocks.
(06/02/17) 155
Dimensions (Operator)
Round Extended (non-marking/marking) Round Extended with Full Shroud Square Extended (marking)
ALW2 / ALW2B / AOLW2 / AOLW2B (non-marking/marking) ALQW2B / AOLQW2B
Panel Thickness
ALFW2 / ALFW2B / AOLFW2 / AOLFW2B Panel Thickness
1 to 6 1 to 6
Panel Thickness
1 to 6
25
30
ø29
ø24
37
37
ø29
ø24
37
13
13
30
19 30 20
20 30
Marking plate: 21mm
Marking plate: ø15.5mm
ø29 Mushroom (non-marking/marking) ø29 Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset ø40 Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset
ALW3 / ALW3B / AOLW3 / AOLW3B (non-marking/marking) (non-marking/marking)
Panel Thickness
AVLW3 / AVLW3B AVLW4 / AVLW4B
1 to 6 Panel Thickness
Panel Thickness
1 to 6 Reset Angle: 75° 1 to 6 Reset Angle 75°
ø29
37
ø29
37
ø40
37
13
30 13 13
22.5 30
22.5
Marking plate: ø13.9mm 22.5 30
Marking plate: ø13.9mm Marking plate: ø13.9mm
ø40 Mushroom Push Pull

(non-marking/marking)
AYLW4 / AYLW4B
Panel Thickness
1 to 6
ø40
37
13
25 30
30.5
Terminal Arrangement (Lamp Terminal) (Bottom View)

TOP TOP TOP
X1 X1
X1
X2
X2 X2
Full Voltage Type Full Voltage Type Transformer Type

When using TW-DA1B When using HW-DA1B
Full Voltage Adapter for Full Voltage Adapter for
2 or 4 contact blocks 1 or 3 contact blocks
156 (06/02/17)
Dimensions (Behind the Panel)
• Full Voltage Type • Transformer Type
M3.5 Panel Thickness M3.5 Terminal Screws Panel Thickness

Terminal Screws 1 to 6 1 to 6
X1
X1
X2
X2
1 contact 48.5 2 contact 86.5

block blocks
When using HW-DA1B full-voltage adapter
M3.5 Panel Thickness Panel Thickness

Terminal Screws M3.5 Terminal Screws 1 to 6
1 to 6
X1
X2
X1
X2
4 contact 106.5
2 contact 63.5
blocks
blocks
When using TW-DA1B full-voltage adapter
M3.5 Panel Thickness

Terminal Screws 1 to 6
X1
X2
3 contact 68.5
blocks
When using HW-DA1B full-voltage adapter
Panel Thickness
M3.5 Terminal Screws 1 to 6
X1
X2
4 contact 83.5
blocks
When using TW-DA1B full-voltage adapter
Note: For the push-pull type, a maximum of two contact blocks can be used. All dimensions in mm.
• Contact Configuration and Codes

Contact Configuration Code
1NO 10
1 block
1NC 01
1NO-1NC 11
2 blocks 2NO 20
2NC 02
2NO-1NC 21
1NO-2NC 12
3 blocks
3NO 30
3NC 03
3NO-1NC 31
2NO-2NC 22
4 blocks 1NO-3NC 13
4NO 40
4NC 04
(06/02/17) 157
ø22 TW Series Selector Switches
Selector Switches (Knob Operator Type)
Shape ASW M3.5 Terminal

No. of Positions
Screws Panel Thickness 1 to 6
ø24
ø29
37
48.5 (2 blocks) 13
68.5 (4 blocks) 25 30
Contact Maintained Spring Return Spring Return
Operator Position from Right from Left
Contact Block
—
Code Mounting
L R L R L R
Position Type L R
90° 2-position
10 1 NO
ASW210 ASW2110 ASW2210 ∗
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
ASW211 ASW2111 ASW2211 ∗
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
ASW220 ASW2120 ASW2220 ∗ —
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASW222 ASW2122 ASW2222 ∗
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
Code L R L R L R L R
Mounting
Position Type L C R
20 1 NO
ASW320 ASW3120 ASW3220 ASW3320
(2NO) 2 NO
02 1 NC
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO
45° 3-position
22 2 NO
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
04 2 NC
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
3S ★ 2 NO
ASW33S-243 ★ — — —
3 NC
4 Dummy

Contact Block
2 3
Code 1 3
1
2 4
5
Mounting
Position Type 1 2 3 4 5 Center
4 Left Right
1 NC
4S ★ 2 NC
ASW44S-407 ★ —
3 NC L C R Operator
Position
4 NO 1 NO
1 NO 2 NO
4S ★ 2 NC
ASW44S-411 ★ —
3 NC 3 NC
4 NO 4 NC
4 TOP
1 NO 2
3S ★ 2 NC
ASW43S-461 ★ — • For more contact
3 NC arrangement chart,
4 Dummy
see pages 163 to
1 NO 165. 3
4S ★ 2 NC
— ASW54S-501 ★ 1
3 NC
4 NO
• On the 2-position selector switches marked with ∗ above, the contact operation is reversed as follows.
• On the contact arrangement marked with ★ in the table above, the rated current (load switching current) is reduced to a half of the rated
current of the contact block. The rated insulation voltage and the rated thermal current remain unchanged.
• Selector switches with one or three contact blocks contain a dummy block.
• Knob operator: White indicator on black knob
158 (06/02/17)
TW Series Selector Switches ø22
Selector Switches (Lever Operator Type)
Shape ASW∗L M3.5 Terminal

No. of Positions
ø29
37
ø25
48.5 (2 blocks) 13
Contact Arrangement Chart 68.5 (4 blocks) 25 30

Contact Block
—
Code Mounting
L R L R L R
Position Type L R
90° 2-position
10 1 NO
ASW2L10 ASW21L10 ASW22L10 ∗
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
ASW2L20 ASW21L20 ASW22L20 ∗ —
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
22 2 NC
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
Contact Block C
C C C
Code L R
L R L R L R
Mounting
Position Type L C R
20 1 NO
ASW3L20 ASW31L20 ASW32L20 ASW33L20
(2NO) 2 NO
02 1 NC
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO
45° 3-position
22 2 NO
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
04 2 NC
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
3S ★ 2 NO
ASW3L3S-243 ★ — — —
3 NC
4 Dummy

Contact Block
2 3
Code 1 3
1
2 4
5
Mounting
Position Type 1 2 3 4 5 Center
4 Left Right
1 NC
4S ★ 2 NC
ASW4L4S-407 ★ —
3 NC L C R Operator
Position
4 NO 1 NO
1 NO 2 NO
4S ★ 2 NC
ASW4L4S-411 ★ —
3 NC 3 NC
4 NO 4 NC
1 NO 4 TOP
2
2 NC • For more contact
3S ★ ASW4L3S-461 ★ — arrangement chart,
3 NC
4 Dummy see pages 163 to
1 NO 165.
3
4S ★ 2 NC
— ASW5L4S-501 ★ 1
3 NC
4 NO
• Lever operator: White indicator on black lever
(06/02/17) 159
Shape ASW∗K M3.5 Teminal

No. of Positions
ø29
ø24
37
13
48.5 (2 blocks) 19
68.5 (4 blocks) 30
Contact Arrangement Chart 41

Contact Block
—
Code Mounting
L R L R L R
Position Type L R
90° 2-position
10 1 NO
ASW2K10 ASW21K10 ASW22K10 ∗
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
ASW2K20 ASW21K20 ASW22K20 ∗ —
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
22 2 NC
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
Code Mounting
L R L R L R L R
Position Type L C R
1 NO
20 ASW3K20 ASW31K20 ASW32K20 ASW33K20
2 (2NO)
NO
02 1 NC
ASW3K02 ASW31K02 ASW32K02 ASW33K02
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO
45° 3-position
22 2 NO
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
04 2 NC
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
3S ★ 2 NO
ASW3K3S-243 ★ — — —
3 NC
4 Dummy
• Cylinder cover: Black, Cylinder: Metal
Left Center Right

4
2 TOP
L C R Operator
Position
1 NO
3 2 NO
1 3 NC
4 NC
• For more contact arrangement chart, see pages 163 to 165.
160 (06/02/17)
TW Series Selector Switches ø22
90° 2-position
Shape ASLW M3.5 Terminal Screws
Panel Thickness 1 to 6
ø24
ø29
37
13
A: 63.5 (2 blocks)
83.5 (4 blocks) 25 30
B: 86.5 (2 blocks), 106.5 (4 blocks) A: Rated voltage 24V AC/DC

Contact Arrangement Chart B: Rated voltage 100/110V AC, 200/220V AC
Contact Operator Maintained Spring Return Spring Return

Contact Block Position from Right from Left
Lamp Input Type
Code L R L R L R
Mounting
Position Type L R
1 NO Without Lamp Full Voltage ASLW29911➁ ASLW219911➁ ASLW229911➁
11
2 NC LED Transformer ASLW2➂11D➁ ASLW21➂11D➁ ASLW22➂11D➁
(1NO-1NC)
Incandescent Transformer ASLW2➂11➁ ASLW21➂11➁ ASLW22➂11➁
1 NO Without Lamp Full Voltage ASLW29920➁ ASLW219920➁ ASLW229920➁
20
2 NO LED Transformer ASLW2➂20D➁ ASLW21➂20D➁ ASLW22➂20D➁
(2NO)
1 NO
Without Lamp Full Voltage ASLW29922➁ ASLW219922➁ ASLW229922➁
2 NC
22 3 NO
LED Transformer ASLW2➂22D➁ ASLW21➂22D➁ ASLW22➂22D➁
(2NO-2NC) 4 NC


4 Left Right
2 TOP
L R Operator
Position
1 NO
3 2 NC
1
3 NO
4 NC
(06/02/17) 161

45° 3-position
Contact Block Position Lamp from Right from left Two-way
C C C C
Code Mounting Type
Position L C R
Without Lamp
1 NO ASLW39920 ASLW319920 ASLW329920 ASLW339920
Full Voltage
20 LED
2 NO ASLW3➂20D➁ ASLW31➂20D➁ ASLW32➂20D➁ ASLW33➂20D➁
(2NO) Transformer
Incandescent
ASLW3➂20➁ ASLW31➂20➁ ASLW32➂20➁ ASLW33➂20➁
Transformer
Without Lamp
1 NC ASLW39902 ASLW319902 ASLW329902 ASLW339902
Full Voltage
02 LED
2 NC ASLW3➂02D➁ ASLW31➂02D➁ ASLW32➂02D➁ ASLW33➂02D➁
(2NC) Transformer
Incandescent
Transformer
1 NO Without Lamp
ASLW39922 ASLW319922 ASLW329922 ASLW339922
2 NO Full Voltage
22 3 NC LED
ASLW3➂22D➁ ASLW31➂22D➁ ASLW32➂22D➁ ASLW33➂22D➁
Incandescent
Transformer
1 NO Without Lamp
2 NO Full Voltage
40 3 NO LED
Incandescent
Transformer
1 NC Without Lamp
2 NC Full Voltage
04 3 NC LED
Incandescent
Transformer


Left Center Right
4 TOP
2
L C R
Operator
1 NO Position
2 NO
3
1 3 NC
4 NC
162 (06/02/17)
TW Series Selector Switch Contact Arrangement Charts ø22
90° 2-position (Maintained / Spring Return)
Spring
Maintained Return Spring Return from Left
Positions from Right
L R L R L R
Operator Types Knob, Lever, Key, Illuminated

Operator Positions
Contact Circuit Mounting Type
Code No. Position
L R L R
10 1 NO
—
(1NO) 2 Dummy
01 1 NC
—
(1NC) 2 Dummy
1 NO
—
11 2 NC
(1NO-1NC) 1 NC
103
2 NO
20 1 NO
—
(2NO) 2 NO
02 1 NC
—
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO
2 NC
—
3 NO
4 NC
1 NO
2 NC • Contact Block Mounting Position and
109
3 NC Contact Arrangement Chart
4 NO
1 NC
4 TOP
2
22 2 NO
110
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
1 NO 3
2 NO 1
111
3 NC
4 NC
1 NC Left Right
2 NO
117
3 NO L R Operator
4 NC Position
1 NO
1 NC
2 NC
31 2 NO
107 3 NO
(3NO-1NC) 3 NO
4 NO 4 NC
1 NO
40 2 NO
—
(4NO) 3 NO • On the contact arrangement marked with
4 NO ★ in the table, the rated current (load
1 NO switching current) is reduced to a half of
118 ★
2 NC the rated current of the contact block.
1 NO The rated insulation voltage and the rated
168 ★
2 NC thermal current remain unchanged.
2R ★
1 NC
119 ★
2 NO
1 NC
169 ★
2 NO Type No. Development
1 NO
2 NC • When circuit number is not required:
120 ★
3 NO
4 NC ASW 2 11
1 NO Contact Code (1NO-1NC)
2 NC 2-position
170 ★
3 NO
4 NC • When circuit number is required:
4R ★
1 NC
2 NO ASW 2 11 - 103
121 ★
3 NC Circuit No.
4 NO
Contact Code (1NO-1NC)
1 NC
2 NO 2-position
171 ★
3 NC
4 NO
(06/02/17) 163
ø22 TW Series Selector Switch Contact Arrangement Charts
Spring Return Spring Return Spring Return
Maintained from Right from Left Two-way
Positions L
C
R L
C
R L
C
R L
C
R

Operator Positions
Code No. Position
L C R
1 NO
202
2 NC
1 NC
203
2 NO
11
1 NO
302
2 NC
1 NC
303
2 NO
1 NO
—
2 NO
20
1 NO
301
2 NO
1 NC
—
2 NC
02
1 NC
304
2 NC
1 NO
2 NO
—
3 NC
4 NC
1 NC
2 NO
210
3 NC
4 NO
1 NO
22 2 NC
308
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
• Contact Block Mounting Position and
1 NO
2 NC Contact Arrangement Chart
309
3 NC
4 TOP
4 NO 2
1 NC
2 NO
310
3 NC
4 NO 3
1 NO 1
2 NC
206
3 NO
31 4 NO
Left Center Right
(3NO-1NC) 1 NC
2 NO
207
3 NO L C R Operator
4 NO Position
1 NO
1 NO
2 NO
2 NC
212 3 NC
3 NC
4 NC 4 NC
13
1 NC
2 NO
313
3 NC
4 NC Type No. Development
1 NO
2 NO
— • When circuit number is not required:
3 NO
40
4 NO ASW 3 22
2 NO
305 3-position
3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
• When circuit number is required:
2 NC ASW 3 22 - 210
—
3 NC
Circuit No.
4 NC
04 Contact Code (2NO-2NC)
1 NC
2 NC 3-position
314
3 NC
4 NC
164 (06/02/17)
TW Series Selector Switch Contact Arrangement Charts ø22
45° 3-position (Maintained) 45° 4-position (Maintained)
Maintained Maintained
C 2
Positions L R Positions 1 3
Knob, Lever, Key, Operator Types Knob, Lever

Operator Types Illuminated Operator Positions
Operator Positions Contact Circuit Mounting Type
Contact Circuit Mounting Code No. Position
Type
Code No. Position 1 2 3 4
L C R 1 NO
1 NO 2 NC
2S ★ 1361 ★ 3S ★ 461 ★
2 NC 3 NC
1 NO 4 Dummy
2 NO 1 NC
3S ★ 243 ★
3 NC 2 NC
4 Dummy
405 ★
3 NC
1 NO 4 NC
2 NC 1 NC
233 ★
3 NO 2 NC
4 NO 407 ★
3 NC
1 NO 4 NO
2 NC 4S ★
234 ★ 1 NO
3 NC 2 NC
4 NC 409 ★
3 NC
1 NC 4 NC
2 NO 1 NO
4S ★ 235 ★
3 NC 2 NC
4 NO 411 ★
3 NC
1 NO 4 NO
2 NO
237 ★
3 NC
4 NO
1 NC
30° 5-position (Maintained)
2 NC Maintained
240 ★ 3
3 NC Positions 1
2 4
5
4 NO
Operator Types Knob, Lever
Operator Positions
45° 3-position (Maintained) Contact
Code
Circuit
No.
Mounting
Position Type
Maintained 1 2 3 4 5
Positions L
C
R
1 NO
2 NC
4S ★ 501 ★
3 NC
Knob, Lever,
Operator Types 4 NO
Illuminated
Operator Positions
Code No. Position
L C R 4 TOP Left Center Right
1 NO 2
2 NO
1336 ★ L C R Operator
3 NC Position
4 NC 1 NO
3
1 NC 1 2 NC
2 NO 3 NO
1337 ★
3 NC 4 NO
4 NC
1 NO
4S★ 1352 ★
2 NC • On the contact arrangement marked with ★ in the
3 NC table, the rated current (load switching current) is
4 NO reduced to a half of the rated current of the contact
1 NO block. The rated insulation voltage and the rated
2 NC
1355 ★ thermal current remain unchanged.
3 NO
4 NC
1 NC
2 NC
1359 ★
3 NC
4 NC
(06/02/17) 165
ø22 TW Series Accessories and Replacement Parts
Terminal Covers
Terminal Cover HW-VL2 HW-VL3 HW-VL4 HW-VL5 HW-VL6 APS-PVL Use of termi-
nal covers
increases
the depth by
the dimen-
sions below.
Terminal
Cover
Control Unit 39.8H × 14.1W 37.8H × 26W 39.8H × 8.7W 39.1H × 15.5W 40H × 14.8W 36H × 29.4W
• Pilot light
APW Full Voltage X +6mm
APQW
X +3mm
Transformer
DC-DC Converter
X +3mm
• Pushbutton 1 contact block

ABW
AOW X
CB Terminal Cover
AVW
ABQW
ABFW
AJW 2 contact blocks
AOQW
AOFW X
CB 2 pieces
AXW CB
ABGW
AYW +3.5mm
3 contact blocks
• Selector
switch X
CB CB 2 pieces
ASW CB
4 contact blocks
X
CB CB 2 pieces
CB CB
• Illuminated Full Voltage, 1 or 3 contact blocks

pushbutton
ALW X
CB +3.5mm
AOLW FA 2 pieces
ALFW
AOLFW
ALQW Full Voltage, 2 or 4 contact blocks
AOLQW X X
AVLW For con- For full
CB +3mm
AYLW tact blocks voltage
CB
2 pieces adapter
• Illuminated
selector Transformer
switch DC-DC Converter
ASLW X +3mm
CB
CB Tr
• Ordering Terminal Covers

Terminal covers are ordered separately.
When ordering terminal covers, specify the Type No. and required quantity.
166 (06/02/17)
TW Series Accessories and Replacement Parts ø22
Nameplates
NWA, NWAQ, NWAS, NWAR, NWAL, NWAQL, and NWAV

Dimensions Ordering Type Package
Legend Material Type No. Description
(mm) No. Quantity
NWA NWA-0 1
29
Blank NWA-0 Black
Aluminium NWA-0PN10 10
OFF
0.8 mm thick
20
NWA-∗ 1 White letters on

With Legend NWA-∗
black background
NWA-∗PN10 10
NWAQ NWAQ-0 1
29
Blank NWAQ-0 Black
Aluminium NWAQ-0PN10 10
OFF
0.8 mm thick
21
NWAQ-∗ 1 White letters on

With Legend NWAQ-∗
14.5
black background
NWAQ-∗PN10 10
NWAS
45 NWAS-0 1
Aluminium
Blank NWAS-0 Black
0.8 mm thick
45
NWAS-0PN10 10
NWAR NWAR-0 1
RGENC
Blank NWAR-0 Yellow
ME NWAR-0PN10 10
Aluminium
E
Y
ø70
0.8 mm thick NWAR-27 1 Black letters on

EMERGENCY
NWAR-27 yellow back-
STOP STOP
NWAR-27PN10 10 ground
NWAL
29
NWAL-0 1
Aluminium
Blank NWAL-0 Black
0.8 mm thick
25
NWAL-0PN10 10
NWAQL
29 NWAQL-0 1
Aluminium
Blank NWAQL-0 Black
0.8 mm thick
25
NWAQL-0PN10 10
14.5
HWAV
Blank HWAV-0 HWAV-0 1 Yellow
Plastic
ø60
Black letters on
EMERGENCY
HWAV-27 HWAV-27 1 yellow back-
STOP
ground
Legends
Code Legend
0 (blank)
1 ON
2 OFF
3 START
4 STOP
31 OFF-ON
35 HAND-AUTO
53 HAND-OFF-AUTO
(06/02/17) 167
Accessories
Ordering Package
Shape Material Type No. Dimensions
Type No. Quantity
Locking Ring Wrench • Used to tighten the round bezel when installing
the TW control unit onto a panel.
ø46
ø31
ø34
90 16
For ø22/ø25mm units For ø22mm units

(close mounting)
Lamp Holder Tool • Used to install and remove LED/incandescent

lamps.
ø11.6
ø14
59
Contact Block Removal Tool • Used to remove contact blocks, transformers,

lenses and adapters. Can also be used to
determine panel thickness adjustment.
23
Metal/Rubber TW-KC1 TW-KC1 1
130
ø19
39
Nut Locking Wrench • Used to tighten the locking nuts inside of the
square bezel.This tool can be inserted into the
OR-14 locking ring wrench.
20
Metal TW-KQ2 TW-KQ2 1
22.5
25.7
80
Anti-rotation Ring • Used to prevent the operator from rotating.

selector switches.
Metal OGL-31 OGL-31PN10 10

10.2
ø22 ø27.4 0.8
Rubber Mounting Hole Plug • Used to plug unused ø22.2mm mounting holes.
ø29

3.5
3.5
ø25
Metallic Mounting Hole Plug • Used to plug unused ø22.2mm mounting holes.
• Tightening torque: 1.2 N·m
• Degree of protection: IP66 (without the 3.2mm
Diecast Metal recess in the mounting hole)
(locking ring: LW9Z-BM LW9Z-BM 1 ø25.8
3
plastic)
Gasket
12
Locking Ring
Barrier • Used to prevent

contact between
adjacent lead wires
when units are
mounted closely.
45
Plastic HW-VL1 HW-VL1PN10 10 Barriers should be

always used in
close mounting.
20 1.5
168 (06/02/17)
Accessories
Ordering Package
Shape Material Type No. Description
Type No. Quantity
Contact Rubber • Oiltight rubber boot used for pushbuttons and
Boot selector switches.
For 1 layer of • Temperature range: –5 to +60°C
contact blocks • Black
OCW-99 OCW-99 1
(2 contact
blocks)
OCW-99
2.2
48
Rubber
(nitryl) 38 14 45.5
For 2 layers of
contact blocks
OCW-299 OCW-299 1
50
(4 contact OCW-299
blocks)
38 14 65.5
Pushbutton • Used to cover and pro-

Clear Boot For flush tect pushbuttons
pushbuttons OC-31 OC-31 1 where units are sub-
ject to water splash.
ø32.6
(ABW1/AOW1)
Not suitable for out-
Rubber
door use or where the
(EPDM) units are subject to oil
For extended splash.
pushbuttons OC-32 OC-32 1 18 (OC-31)
(ABW2/AOW2) 22 (OC-32)
Button Cover • Metallic bezels covered with rubber boot to

enhance waterproof and oiltight characteristics.
For flush • Button is installed in the cover. Remove the but-
ton from the pushbutton before using the button
pushbuttons OCW-10➀ OCW-10➀ 1 cover.
(ABW1/AOW1) • ➀: B (black), G (green), R (red), Y (yellow)
9 9
Rubber M22 P1.0 M22 P1.0
(nitryl)
ø32
ø31
ø26
ø31
ø32
For extended
pushbuttons OCW-11➀ OCW-11➀ 1 Button Button
18.5 21
(ABW2/AOW2) installed installed
Flush Extended
Padlock Cover • Used to protect momentary and maintained

pushbuttons, illuminated pushbuttons, knobs
selector switches, and key selector switches.
0.8 to 3.2
Polyarylate
R6
(gasket: nitryl HW9Z-KL1 HW9Z-KL1 1

6.5
93
rubber)
30
70
24 (inside)
)
ø2
0 4
ø5 44.
2.
Waterproof Rubber
2
:ø
(ID Key hole ø8 29.5 Gasket 0.5t
30
ø40mm Lens
➁: G (green), R (red)
ALW4L-➁ ALW4L-➁ 1 S (blue)
Non-marking • Applicable unit:
Type ALW3, AOLW3
➁: A (amber),
ALW4LD-➁ ALW4LD-➁ 1 W (white)
Plastic
➁: G (green), R (red),
ALW4BL-➁ ALW4BL-➁ 1 • Applicable unit: S (blue), W (white)
ALW3B, AOLW3B
Marking Type
• Marking plate is
ALW4BLD-➁ ALW4BLD-➁ 1 included ➁: A (amber)
(06/02/17) 169
Accessories
Ordering Package
Shape Material Type No. Dimensions
Type No. Quantity
Plastic Bezel ➀Flush AW-RP1B AW-RP1BPN05 5
➀ ➁ ➀ ➁
➁Extended AW-FP1B AW-FP1B 1
19.8
➂Extended
13
(for illuminated AW-FP2B AW-FP2B 1 ø29 ø29
➂ pushbuttons) Plastic Black
➃Square round ➂ ➃
➃ ➄ (for round AW-H1B AW-H1B 1
19.8
13
pushbuttons)
➄Square AW-Q1B AW-Q1B 1 ø29 30
Aluminium Bezel Aluminium color

AW-R1 AW-R1PN05 5
➀ ➁ ➀Flush (standard) ➄
13
AW-R1B AW-R1B 1 Black 30
➁Extended AW-F1 AW-F1 1

Aluminium
➂ ➅ ➂Extended (for ➅
23
Aluminium color
23
illuminated AW-F2 AW-F2 1
(standard)
pushbuttons) ø46
ø46
➃Mushroom AW-G4 AW-G4 1

Selector Operator ➀Knob ASWHHY-➁ ASWHHY-➁PN02 2 Specify a color code in place of ➁.
➀ ➁ B (black), G (green), R (red)
➁Lever ASWHHL-➁ ASWHHL-➁PN02 2
➂Round ASWHHM-B ASWHHM-BPN02 2 Black only
➂ ➃Color Insert TW-HC1➁ TW-HC1➁PN05 5 B (black), G (green), R (red), S (blue),
Plastic
➄ ASLWDDY-➁ ASLWDDY-➁ 1
➃ ➄Illuminated
A (amber), W (white), Y (yellow)
selector Specify a color code in place of ➁.
ASLWLDY-➁ ASLWLDY-➁ 1 G (green), R (red), S (blue)
Metal Protector • Used to protect flush pushbuttons from
inadvertent operation.
18.6
Mounting Centers
Metal OLW-C OLW-C 1

50 min.
R4
2.5
ø22.5 15 1.6t
Maintenance Parts
Ordering Package Color
Shape Specification Type No. Type No. Quantity Housing Push Rod
Contact Block 1NO contact HW-C10 HW-C10 1 Blue Green
1NC contact HW-C01 HW-C01 1 Purple red Red
EM contact HW-C10R HW-C10R 1 Blue Black

(early make)
LB contact HW-C01R HW-C01R 1 Purple red White
(late break)
Dummy Block • Used for non-illuminated units with
1NO or 1NC contact blocks.
TW-DB TW-DBPN10 10 • Black
Full Voltage Adapter • Adapter with M3.5 screws used for

(for 2 or 4 contact blocks) illuminated pushbutton or illuminated
selector switch. Snaps on to the back
TW-DA1B TW-DA1BPN02 2 of the contact block.
• Used with 2 or 4 contact blocks.
• Black
Full Voltage Adapter • Adapter with M3.5 screws used for
(for 1 or 3 contact blocks) illuminated pushbuttons or illumi-
HW-DA1B HW-DA1BPN02 2 nated selector switch.
• Used with 1 or 3 contact blocks.
• Black
170 (06/02/17)
Maintenance Parts
Package
Shape Material Type No. Ordering Type No. Color Code
Quantity
Lens (for pilot lights) APW1L-➁ APW1L-➁PN05 5 G (green), R (red), S (blue)
AS
APW1LD-➁ APW1LD-➁PN05 5 A (amber), W (white), Y (yellow)
Round flush C (clear), G (green), R (red),
AS, APW11L-➁ APW11L-➁PN05 5 S (blue)
Marking type
APW11LD-➁ APW11LD-➁PN05 5 A (amber), Y (yellow)
APW2L-➁ APW2L-➁PN05 5 G (green), R (red), S (blue)
Round extended AS
APW2LD-➁ APW2LD-➁PN05 5 A (amber), W (white), Y (yellow)
C (clear), G (green), R (red),
AS, APQW11L-➁ APQW11L-➁PN05 5 S (blue)
Square flush Marking type
APQW11LD-➁ APQW11LD-➁PN05 5 A (amber), Y (yellow)
Lens (for illuminated ALW2L-➁ ALW2L-➁PN05 5 G (green), R (red), S (blue)
pushbuttons) AS
ALW2LD-➁ ALW2LD-➁PN05 5 A (amber), W (white), Y (yellow)
Round extended C (clear), G (green), R (red),
AS, ALW21L-➁ ALW21L-➁PN05 5 S (blue)
Marking type
ALW21LD-➁ ALW21LD-➁PN05 5 A (amber), Y (yellow)
ALQW21L-➁ ALQW21L-➁PN05 5 S (blue)
Square extended AS
ALQW21LD-➁ ALQW21LD-➁PN05 5 A (amber), Y (yellow)
ALW3L-➁ ALW3L-➁PN02 2 G (green), R (red), S (blue)
AS
ALW3LD-➁ ALW3LD-➁PN02 2 A (amber), W (white), Y (yellow)
Lens (for pushlock ø29mm mushroom C (clear), G (green), R (red),
turn reset) AS, ALW31L-➁ ALW31L-➁PN02 2 S (blue)
Marking type
ALW31LD-➁ ALW31LD-➁PN02 2 A (amber), Y (yellow)
AS AVLW3L-R AVLW3L-RPN02 2
ø29mm mushroom AS,
Marking type AVLW31L-R AVLW31L-RPN02 2
ø40mm mushroom AS AVLW4L-R AVLW4L-RPN02 2
Button Round flush ABW1B-➀ ABW1B-➀PN05 5

Round extended ABW2B-➀ ABW2B-➀PN05 5 B (black)
G (green)
Square flush ABQW1B-➀ ABQW1B-➀PN05 5 R (red)
Square extended ABQW2B-➀ ABQW2B-➀PN05 5 S (blue)
W (white)
ø29mm mushroom ABW3B-➀ ABW3B-➀PN02 2 Y (yellow)
Polyacetal
ø40mm mushroom ABW4B-➀ ABW4B-➀PN02 2
ø29mm pushlock turn AVW3B-➀ AVW3B-➀PN02 2 R (red), Y (yellow)
reset
ø40mm pushlock turn
AVW4B-➀ AVW4B-➀PN02 2 R (red), Y (yellow)
reset
B (black), G (green), R (red),
ø40mm push pull AYW4B-➀ AYW4B-➀PN02 2 S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
Marking Plate
(for pilot lights) Round flush APW2B APW2BPN05 5
Square flush APQW1B APQW1BPN05 5
Marking Plate
(for illuminated Round extended ALW2B ALW2BPN05 5
pushbuttons) Acrylic • White
Square extended ALQW2B ALQW2BPN05 5
ø29/40mm mushroom ALW3B ALW3BPN05 5
Waterproof Lens
For APQW APW00LN APW00LNPN05 5
Acrylic
For ALQW APW00L APW00LPN05 5
Use a clear lens for white or pure white illumination.
(06/02/17) 171
Maintenance Parts
Shape Material Type No. Ordering Type No. Package Quantity
Spare Key
For Key Selector Switch

Metal TW-SK-0 TW-SK-0PN02 2
For Pushlock Key Reset

LSTD-6➁ in place of ➁ in the 1
17 mA (A, R, W, Y) 14 mA (A, R, W, Y)
LSTD-6➁ Ordering Type No.
8 mA (G, PW, S) 5.5 mA (G, PW, S)
LSTD-6➁PN10 10
A: amber
LSTD-1➁ 1
PW: pure white
11 mA 10 mA LSTD-1➁ R: red BA9S/13
LSTD-1➁PN10 S: blue 10
W: white
24V AC/DC ±10% Y: yellow
LSTD-2➁ 1
11 mA 10 mA LSTD-2➁
LSTD-2➁PN10 10

6V AC/DC
1W (6.3V) LS-6
12V AC/DC
1W (18V) LS-8
1
18V AC/DC
1W (24V) LS-2
24V AC/DC
1W (30V) LS-3
Transformer
Shape Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Type No.
Transformer Unit 100/110V AC TW-T16B
120V AC TW-T126B
5.5V
200/220V AC TW-T26B
240V AC TW-T246B
172 (06/02/17)
TW Series Instructions ø22
Safety Precautions
• Turn off the power to the TW series control units before • Use HW-C type contact blocks for the TW series. Do not
starting installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and replace with or add conventional TW series contact blocks.
inspection of the products. Failure to turn power off may Using a different type of contact block may lead to malfunc-
cause electrical shocks or fire hazard. tion.
HW-C Type TW Type
Contact Block Contact Block
• For wiring, use wires of a proper size to meet the voltage
and current requirements. Tighten the M3.5 terminal
Rectangular
screws to a tightening torque of 1.0 to 1.3 N·m. Failure to Holes
tighten terminal screws may cause overheat and fire.
Instructions
Panel Mounting
Panel thickness adjustment ring is used for the TW series. To attach the TW series to the panel, follow the procedures below.
➁Attaching the Unit to the Panel ➂Attaching the Button, Lens, and
➀Panel Thickness Adjustment
with the Bezel Knob
Bezel
Mounting order
Panel thickness adjustment ring Panel Panel Lens
Installation method
Type Method
Attach the unit with the panel Flush/Extended pushbuttons, Press in

Remarks Square lens, Selector operator
thickness scale facing up.
29mm/40mm mushroom Screw in
button/lens, Dome lens
For tightening or removing round

Locking ring wrench
bezels.
For tightening or removing square

Tools Nut locking wrench
bezels.
For installing or removing water-
Contact block removal For installing or removing round
Panel thickness adjustment proof lenses after the bezel is
tool lenses.
attached.
Adjusting Panel Thickness • Using the Contact Block Removal Tool to Adjust Panel
Thickness
The panel thickness ring provides adjustment from 1 to 6
Panel thickness can easily be adjusted to the values shown
mm in 1-mm increments. Set the panel thickness to line A.
below by inserting the contact block removal tool between
Rotate the ring until the desired thickness indication around
the adjustment ring and base.
the periphery is aligned with line A, as shown below.
Panel Thickness
Scale on Adjustment (in 0.1 mm) 1.6 mm Contact Block
Adjustment Ring
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 0 Removal Tool
2.3 mm
0.1 mm 3.5 mm
1 Panel Thickness Scale
2 1 mm
3 (in 1 mm on the operator)
4
5
6
1 mm
A 2 mm
2
3 3
4 4 3.2 mm
5 5
6 6
Ex. Panel thickness 2 mm Ex. Panel thickness 2.6 mm
Note: When a nameplate or an anti-rotation ring is used, add

0.8mm to the panel thickness.
Total thickness
= Panel thickness + 0.8mm (nameplate or anti-rotation ring thickness)
(06/02/17) 173
ø22 TW Series Instructions
Instructions
Mounting into Panel Cut-out with Bezel • Square Bezel

• Insertion into Panel Cut-out 1. Insert the base plate from Base Plate
Insert the base into the panel the front.
cut-out making sure that the
panel thickness scale is facing
up.
Panel thickness
adjustment ring 2. Insert the lock nut. For
easy installation, use the
nut locking wrench. Lock Nut
• Round Bezel
All round bezels are screw-in
type. Be sure to use the locking Remove
ring wrench to tighten the

bezel. Tighten Nut Locking Wrench
TW-KQ2 (optional)
Locking Ring Wrench
OR-14 (optional)
Side A 3. Mount the square bezel. Square Bezel
The bezel will snap onto
the base plate.
Use side B when
Side B mounting the units
closely.
• Recommended tightening torque is 2.0 N·m.
Installing Buttons, Lenses, and Operators • Marking Plate Engraving Area

• Lens Structure and Marking Plate Square (Illuminated
Round Mushroom Square (Pilot Light) Pushbutton)
All square lens units are marking types. To engrave on the
marking plate, remove the marking plate from the lens. 1.
5
0.
9
21
22
19
21
[Square Pilot Lens]
4 3
1. Removing the Square Lens ø1 ø1
Square Lens
Insert the screwdriver into the

recess of the lens and lightly
Insert
4.4
1.0
push out the lens.
1.2
2.6
Marking Plate Flat screwdriver

(5mm wide at
maximum) Note: The depth of the engraving must be within 0.5 mm.
• Installing Round Lens and Waterproof Lens

When installing or removing round lens of pilot lights and illu-
2. Removing the Marking minated pushbuttons and waterproof lens of square pilot
[Square Illuminated Pushbutton] Plate lights and illuminated pushbuttons, press the rubber part of
• Pilot Light
the contact block removal tool onto the lens or waterproof
Square Lens

recess of the lens. lens for secure tightening and easy removal.
Press in
Marking Plate
Small flat screwdriver
Lens Retainer
Waterproof Lens
• Illuminated Pushbuttons
hook and lightly push out the
lens.
[Round Marking Type] Flat screwdriver
(5mm wide at
Lens maximum)
Marking 3. Other Notes

Plate The square lens of the illumi-
nated pushbutton cannot be
Press in used without waterproof lens.
Always use the waterproof
lens.
Be sure to use the marking
plate even when it is not
engraved.
174 (06/02/17)
TW Series Instructions ø22
Instructions
• Installation of Selector Operators • Removing the Operator
1. The shaft of each selector or illuminated selector switch 1.Removing the Color
has a recess to identify in which direction to install the Insert
Recess
operator. Align the operator with the recess and press in
Insert a flat screwdriver into
the operator.
the recess of the color
2. Press color insert (non-illuminated type) into the opera- insert. Turn the screwdriver
tor. The color insert retains the operator. to push out the insert from
Flat
Color insert the operator
screwdriver
Recess
Press in
2.Removing the Operator

Press in (Non-illuminated)
Push the operator sideways
as shown in the left photo to
Illuminated Selector Switch remove the operator.
Selector Switch (non-illuminated)
2-Position, 90° 3-Position, 45° 4-Position, 45° 5-Position, 30°

L R L C R 1 2 3 2 3 4
1 5
4 3.Removing the Operator
Recess (Illuminated)
the recess of the operator
and turn the screwdriver to
remove the operator.
Flat
screwdriver
[Example]
L
C L
L R C
C
R
R
Standard Position
The non-illuminated operators can be installed in positions

other than the standard position as shown above.
Removing Contact Blocks, Transformers Collective Mounting

and Full Voltage Adapters When mounting the units closely in a horizontal row on 30-
Insert the end of the contact block removal tool into the mm centers, use optional barriers to prevent interconnection
snap-fit latch of the contact block (or transformer, full-volt- between adjoining terminals. The barriers can be attached
age adapter) and pull the tool as shown below. simply by pressing them onto the sides of contact blocks.
30 30
Pull
Barrier (HW-VL1)
Tightening Torque for Terminal Screws

Tighten the M3.5 terminal screws to a torque of 1.0 to 1.3
N·m.
(06/02/17) 175
ø22 TW Series Instructions

1. Note the polarity for wiring when connecting to DC-DC 3. Notes for Pure White LED Lamps
converter unit. • Do not use the pure white LED outdoors, otherwise it will
Terminal No. Polarity lead to the degradation of brightness and color. Do not
X1 Positive remove or apply shock to the cap on the pure white LED
X2 Negative lamp, otherwise it may break or damage the cap.
2. Transformer type units are recommended for use in • For the pure white LED, use a white lens. The illumination
areas subjected to noise. color will be dull if a different color is used.
Notes on LED Illuminated Units

LED lamps consist of semiconductors. If the applied voltage [Protection Example 1] For AC circuit
exceeds the rated voltage, LED elements may deteriorate
due to overheat, resulting in significant decrease in lumi- LED with
nance, hue change, or failure of lighting. Also, if an extrane- transformer
ous noise, transient voltage, or transient current is applied to C C

the circuit, similar effects may occur. When using LED LED with
LED Relay Ry LED
transformer R coil or R
lamps, observe the following instructions. solenoid
• Rated Voltage
The LED lamps are rated at 6V, 12V, or 24V AC/DC, and C: 0.1 μF
can be used within ±10% the rated voltage of either AC or
[Protection Example 2] For DC circuit
DC.
• DC Power +

(Reference values of the diode)
Regulated voltage from switching power supply is best Forward current: More than the Ry coil current
Reverse withstand voltage: Ry coil current × 10
suited. Make sure to use within the rated voltage of the
Relay Ry LED Diode
LED lamp. coil or
solenoid
2. Rechargeable battery –
Note that the battery voltage may exceed the rated volt-
age of the LED lamp while the battery is being charged • Countermeasures against Dim Lighting
and immediately after the charging is complete. Be sure 1. Leakage currents through the transistors or a contact
to use the LED lamp on a voltage of ±10% the rated volt- protection circuit may cause the LED lamp to illuminate
age. dimly even when the output is off.
3. Full-wave rectification 2. When the LED lamp is illuminated by a transistor output,
Since the LED lamp is AC/DC compatible, a diode bridge take the following measure.
for rectification is not necessary. If the LED lamp is used [Circuit Example]
on a full-wave rectification current through a diode bridge, Connect shunt resistor R in parallel with the LED lamp.
the rectifier diodes will reduce the voltage, resulting in
lower luminance.
R LED
This is not suitable for the power source of LED lamps.
Use constant-voltage DC power.
Io
• Noise
Io: Leakage current when the output is off
LED elements deteriorate due to extraneous noise, resulting R: Shunt resistor
in significant decrease in luminance, hue change, or failure
of lighting. When such effects are anticipated, take a protec-
tion measure shown below, such as RC elements or a surge
absorber.
176 (06/02/17)
ø25mm TWS Series
Control Units
(06/02/17) 177
ø25 TWS Series Control Units (Selection Guide)
Function Pushbutton
Extended with Extended with
Flush Extended Mushroom
Category Half Shroud Full Shroud
Shape
ABS1 ABS2 ABGS2 ABFS2 ABS3

Type
AOS1 AOS2 AOGS2 AOFS2 AOS3
Page 185 185 185 185 186
Function Pushbutton
Mushroom with
Full Shroud Mushroom Pushlock Mushroom
Category Mushroom Push-Pull
Turn Reset Push Turn Lock
Shape
ABGS3
Type AVS3 AJS3 AYS3
AOGS3
Page 186 186 186 187
Function Pushbutton
Square Flush Square Extended Square Twin Square Twin
Category
Momentary/Maintained Momentary Maintained
Shape
UBQS1
Type UBQS2 UWQN1 UWQN2
UOQS1
Page 187 187 188 188
Function Pilot Light (LED/Incandescent)

Square (Marking) Square (Marking) Rectangular (Marking) Dome
Category Dome
(Plastic Bezel) (Metal Bezel) (Plastic Bezel) Push-to-Check
Shape
Type APS1 UPQS1B UPQMS1B UPQS4B APS1∗PN

Page 189 189 189 189 189
178 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Control Units (Selection Guide) ø25

Extended ø35mm Mushroom Mushroom Pushlock
Category Half Shroud Full Shroud
(Non-marking) (Non-marking) Turn Reset
(Non-marking) (Non-marking)
Shape
ALS2 ALGS2 ALFS2 ALS3

Type AVLS3
AOLS2 AOLGS2 AOLFS2 AOLS3
Page 191 192 193 194 194
Illuminated Illuminated Selector

Function Pushbutton Selector Switch Switch
(LED/Incandescent) (LED/Incandescent)
Square Flush
Category Knob Lever Key Knob
(Marking)
Shape
ULQS1B
Type ASS ASS∗L ASS∗K ASLS
UOLQS1B
Page 195 197 198 199 200
(06/02/17) 179
ø25 TWS Series Control Units
Highly reliable heavy-duty type control units
Suitable for industrial use
• HW-C contact blocks are used.
• UL and CSA approved, EN compliant
UL Listing
UL
File No. E68961
EN60947-1
EN TÜV Rheinland
EN60947-5-1
Contact Ratings
Contact Block
IEC 60947-5-1 DC-13 (P600)
Characteristics
DC
For the control units listed below, the rated current (load switching current) is reduced to a half of the rated operational current of the con-
tact block. The rated insulation voltage (600V) and the rated thermal current (10A) remain unchanged.
• Selector switches and illuminated selector switches with contact code 2R, 3S, 4S, or 4R.
HW-C (Contact Block)
• M3.5 terminal screw

2-way wiring possible
• Double-break rolling
action silver contacts
with raked surface
• Snap-fit groove
• Alkali-resistant
• Fitting groove 66 nylon housing

• Push rod Push Rod Green Red Black White
Color-coded for
different contacts
• Snap-fit latch
A maximum of four contact
blocks in two layers can
mount on the operator.
Note: BS type contact block is used for square twin pushbuttons UWQN1 and UWQN2.
180 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Control Units ø25
Specifications
Dielectric Strength
Shock Resistance
Others: 500,000
Mechanical Life (minimum operations) Pushlock turn reset: 250,000
Key selector switches: 500,000
Pushbuttons: 500,000 ∗1
Illuminated pushbuttons: 500,000 ∗1
Pushlock turn reset: 250,000 ∗1
Square twin maintained: 500,000 ∗2
Electrical Life (minimum operations) Key selector switches: 500,000 ∗3
Illuminated selector switches: 250,000 ∗3
Others: 500,000 ∗1

LED Lamp
Full Voltage 12V AC/DC LSTD-1➁ 12V AC/DC ±10%
G: green 115V AC/DC
Pilot Light PW: pure white 120V AC/DC
Illuminated Selector Switch S: blue Transformer 230V AC/DC LSTD-6➁ 6V AC/DC ±10%
W: white 240V AC/DC
Y: yellow 380V AC/DC
400/440V AC/DC
(50/60 Hz)
DC-DC Converter 110V DC LSTD-6➁ 6V AC/DC ±10%

Incandescent Lamp
6V AC/DC LS-6 1W (6.3V)
Full Voltage 12V AC/DC BA9S/13 LS-8 1W (18V)
24V AC/DC LS-3 1W (30V)
C: clear 115V AC/DC
Pilot Light
G: green 120V AC/DC
Illuminated Pushbutton 200/220V AC/DC
R: red
Illuminated Selector Switch S: blue 230V AC/DC
Transformer BA9S/13 LS-6 1W (6.3V)
W: white 240V AC/DC
380V AC/DC
400/440V AC/DC
480V AC/DC
(50/60 Hz)
(06/02/17) 181
ø25 TWS Series Control Units
Lamp Base BA9S/13
AC A, R, W, Y: 17 mA, G, PW, S: 8 mA 11 mA 11 mA
Current Draw
DC A, R, W, Y: 14 mA, G, PW, S: 5.5 mA 10 mA 10 mA
A, R, W, Y
Internal Circuit
G, PW, S
LED Chip
Protection Diode
Zener Diode

Lamp Base BA9S/13
ø5 Note: The minimum mounting centers are applicable to switches with one layer of contact
Note:
ø5 recess is for preventing rotation
blocks (two contact blocks). When two layers of contact blocks are mounted, determine
and is not necessary when a the minimum mounting centers in consideration of convenience for wiring.
.5 nameplate or anti-rotation ring is • ø35mm mushroom: 35 mm minimum
+0 0
5 not used.
5. • Mushroom with shroud: 42 mm minimum
ø2
50 (45min.)
Round Type
34 (∗)
45
Square Type
Pushbuttons, pilot lights, illuminated pushbutons, and selector switches Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 5, 12,13 IP65
A∗∗∗∗
Illuminated selector switches and key selector switches Type 1, 2, 3R, 5, 12, 13 IP54
U∗∗∗∗ Square pushbuttons, square pilot lights, and square illuminated pushbuttons Type 1, 2 IP40
182 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Control Units (Ordering Information) ø25
Standard Units Terminal Cover
• Full voltage type illuminated units are not supplied with a terminal cover referring to page 205.
• All standard units are UL, CSA, EN, and TÜV approved
(except DC-DC converter type).
• Terminal covers, nameplates, and accessories are
ordered separately.
pages.
Pushbuttons Illuminated Pushbuttons

ABS1 11 N R ALFS2 126 13 D N R
Button color code
Lens color code
Lamp type
10: 1NO 01: 1NC
11: 1NO-1NC 20: 2NO
03: 3NC 31: 3NO-1NC 11: 1NO-1NC 20: 2NO
22: 2NO-2NC 13: 1NO-3NC 02: 2NC 31: 3NO-1NC
40: 4NO 04: 4NC 22: 2NO-2NC 13: 1NO-3NC
40: 4NO 04: 4NC
Note: 99: Full voltage
• Push-pull type AYS3 can have a maximum of two contact blocks. 16: Transformer (100/110V AC)
Pilot Lights 236: Transformer (230V AC)
APS1 116 D N R 246: Transformer (240V AC)
Lens color code 386: Transformer (380V AC)
Lamp type 486: Transformer (480V AC)
D: LED (Transformer type only) 16∗D: DC-DC converter (110V DC)
(blank): Incandescent
99: Full voltage
Note:
116: Transformer (115V AC) • Full voltage type is not supplied with a lamp.
126: Transformer (120V AC) • Transformer and DC-DC converter types contain an LED lamp
26: Transformer (200/220V AC) (LSTD-6➁) or incandescent lamp (LS-6).
Note:
(06/02/17) 183
ø25 TWS Series Control Units (Ordering Information)
Selector Switch Illuminated Selector Switch
ASS 2 L 11 N ASLS 2 16 22 D N R
99: Full voltage
Note: 16: Transformer (100/110V AC)
• See pages 202 to 204 for contact arrangement codes. 156: Transformer (115V AC)
ASS 2 K 20 N B 386: Transformer (380V AC)
Key removable position code 46: Transformer (400/440V AC)
• Maintained Number of positions
B: Removable in left only Note:
C: Removable in right only • Full voltage type is not supplied with a lamp.
• Spring return from right • Transformer type contains an LED lamp (LSTD-6➁) or incandes-
(blank): Removable in left only cent lamp (LS-6).
• Spring return from left • See pages 202 to 204 for contact arrangement codes.
(blank): Removable in right only
3-position
• Maintained
Number of positions
Note:
• See page 202 to 204 for contact arrangement codes.
184 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Pushbuttons ø25
Flush / Extended Types

Type Code
Flush 1NO ABS110N➀
ABS1 1NC ABS101N➀
M3.5 Terminal
AOS1 1NO-1NC ABS111N➀ Black (B), green Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
Momentary (G), and red (R)
2NO ABS120N➀
buttons are sup-
2NC ABS102N➀
ø20
ø30
plied with each
37
2NO-2NC ABS122N➀ unit as standard.
1NO AOS110N➀ 41.5 (1 or 9 30
2 blocks)
1NC AOS101N➀ Specify S, W, or Y 10.3 ø34
61.5 (3 or 4 blocks)
1NO-1NC AOS111N➀ when a blue,
Maintained white, or yellow
2NO AOS120N➀ button is required. Note: The depth behind the panel of the maintained
2NC AOS102N➀ type is 1.5mm longer than the momentary
type.
2NO-2NC AOS122N➀
Extended 1NO ABS210N➀
ABS2 1NC ABS201N➀
M3.5 Terminal
AOS2 1NO-1NC ABS211N➀ Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
Momentary
2NO ABS220N➀
ø19.5
2NC ABS202N➀
ø30
37
2NO-2NC ABS222N➀
1NO AOS210N➀ 41.5 (1 or 9 30
2 blocks) 16.3 ø34
1NC AOS201N➀
1NO-1NC AOS211N➀
Maintained
2NO AOS220N➀ Note: The depth behind the panel of the maintained
2NC AOS202N➀ type is 1.5mm longer than the momentary
type.
2NO-2NC AOS222N➀
Extended with Half Shroud 1NO ABGS210N➀
ABGS2 1NC ABGS201N➀ Specify a button
AOGS2 1NO-1NC ABGS211N➀ color code in M3.5 Terminal
Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 4
Momentary place of ➀ in the (Maintained type 0.8 to 6)
2NO ABGS220N➀ Type No.
2NC ABGS202N➀
ø19.5
ø22
ø30
37
2NO-2NC ABGS222N➀ B: black
1NO AOGS210N➀ G: green 40 (1 or 30
1NC AOGS201N➀ R: red 2 blocks) ø34

S: blue 60 (3 or 4 blocks)
1NO-1NC AOGS211N➀
Maintained W: white
2NO AOGS220N➀ Y: yellow Note: The depth behind the panel of the maintained
2NC AOGS202N➀ type is 1.5mm longer than the momentary
type.
2NO-2NC AOGS222N➀
Extended with Full Shroud 1NO ABFS210N➀
ABFS2 1NC ABFS201N➀
M3.5 Terminal
AOFS2 1NO-1NC ABFS211N➀ Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
Momentary
2NO ABFS220N➀
2NC ABFS202N➀
ø24
ø30
37
2NO-2NC ABFS222N➀
1NO AOFS210N➀ 42 (1 or 9 30
2 blocks) 17 ø34
1NC AOFS201N➀
62 (3 or 4 blocks)
1NO-1NC AOFS211N➀
Maintained
2NO AOFS220N➀ Note: The depth behind the panel of the maintained
2NC AOFS202N➀ type is 1.5mm longer than the momentary
type.
2NO-2NC AOFS222N➀

• Round bezel and shroud (metal): Chrome-plated
• Other contact arrangements are also available. See page 183.
(06/02/17) 185
ø25 TWS Series Pushbuttons
Mushroom / Pushlock Turn Reset / Push Turn Lock Types

Type Code
Mushroom 1NO ABS310N➀
ABS3 1NC ABS301N➀ M3.5 Terminal
AOS3 1NO-1NC ABS311N➀ Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
Momentary
2NO ABS320N➀
2NC ABS302N➀
ø35
37
2NO-2NC ABS322N➀
1NO AOS310N➀ 41.5 (1 or 9 30
2 blocks) 25
1NC AOS301N➀ Specify a button 61.5 (3 or 4 blocks)
1NO-1NC AOS311N➀ color code in
Maintained
2NO AOS320N➀ place of ➀ in the Note: The depth behind the panel of the maintained
2NC AOS302N➀ Type No. type is 1.5mm longer than the momentary
type.
2NO-2NC AOS322N➀
B: black
Mushroom with Full Shroud 1NO ABGS310N➀
G: green
ABGS3 1NC ABGS301N➀ R: red M3.5 Terminal
AOGS3 1NO-1NC ABGS311N➀ S: blue Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
Momentary
2NO ABGS320N➀ W: white
2NC ABGS302N➀ Y: yellow
ø35
ø42
37
2NO-2NC ABGS322N➀
1NO AOGS310N➀ 41.5 (1 or 18.5
30
2 blocks) 25
1NC AOGS301N➀
1NO-1NC AOGS311N➀
Maintained
2NO AOGS320N➀ Note: The depth behind the panel of the maintained
2NC AOGS302N➀ type is 1.5mm longer than the momentary
type.
2NO-2NC AOGS322N➀
Pushlock Turn Reset 1NO AVS310N➀ M3.5 Terminal
AVS3 Screw
1NC AVS301N➀
1NO-1NC AVS311N➀ R: red
ø35
37
2NO AVS320N➀ Y: yellow
43 (1 or 9 30
2NC AVS302N➀ 2 blocks)
25
2NO-2NC AVS322N➀ 63 (3 or 4 blocks)
Push Turn Lock 1NO AJS310N➀ M3.5 Terminal

AJS3 Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
1NC AJS301N➀
B: black H
L
1NO-1NC AJS311N➀
OC
S
G: green
PU
ø35
37
2NO AJS320N➀ R: red
Y: yellow
2NC AJS302N➀ 43 (1 or 2 9 30
blocks)
25
2NO-2NC AJS322N➀ 63 (3 or 4 blocks)

• Round bezel (metal): Chrome-plated
• Pushlock Turn Reset: Button is maintained when pressed and is reset when turned clockwise.
Note: AVS3 cannot be used as emergency stop switches. When emergency stop switches are required, use XW or HW series emergency
stop switches (ISO 13850 and IEC 60947-5-5 compliant).
• Push Turn Lock: Button is locked when turned clockwise in the depressed position and is reset when turned counterclockwise.
186 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Pushbuttons ø25
Push-Pull / Square Flush / Square Extended Types
Type Color Code
Mushroom Push-Pull
AYS31 1NO AYS3110N➀
M3.5 Terminal
1NC AYS3101N➀
B: black
G: green
ø35
37
Maintained 1NO-1NC AYS3111N➀
R: red
Y: yellow 9
2NO AYS3120N➀ 25 30
43 (1 or 30.5
2 blocks)
2NC AYS3102N➀
Square Flush 1NO UBQS110N➀

UBQS1 1NC UBQS101N➀ M3.5 Terminal
UOQS1 Screw
1NO-1NC UBQS111N➀ (Maintained type: 0.8 to 5)
Momentary
2NO UBQS120N➀
24.8
30
37
53
2NC UBQS102N➀
2NO-2NC UBQS122N➀
1NO UOQS110N➀ 44.5 (1 or 14 30
2 blocks)
1NC UOQS101N➀ 14.3 39.5
1NO-1NC UOQS111N➀
Maintained
2NO UOQS120N➀ B: black Note: The depth behind the panel of the maintained
2NC UOQS102N➀ G: green type is 1.5mm longer than the momentary type.
2NO-2NC UOQS122N➀ R: red
Square Extended S: blue
1NO UBQS210N➀ Y: yellow
UBQS2
M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness 0.8 to 4
1NC UBQS201N➀ Screw
(Maintained type: 0.8 to 5)
1NO-1NC UBQS211N➀
24.5
30
37
53
Momentary
2NO UBQS220N➀
44.5 (1 or 14 30
2 blocks)
2NC UBQS202N➀ 19.8 39.5
2NO-2NC UBQS222N➀

• Push-Pull: Button is maintained in both depressed and reset positions. Up to 2 contact blocks (1 layer) can be mounted on AYS31 push-pull
switches.
• Contact Statuses of Push-Pull Switch • Panel Mounting of Square Types

AYS31 1. Tighten the square bezel to the operator and position the
Contact
Push Pull ring correctly.
1NO 2. Lightly tighten the screw to secure the pushbutton onto
1NC the panel.
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
Tighten the screw lightly so that
• Note: Push-pull switch can have a maximum of two contact this plate does not bend.
blocks.
Recommended tightening torque:
0.15 N·m
(06/02/17) 187
ø25 TWS Series Pushbuttons
Square Twin Types
Shape Contact Type No. Button Color Dimensions (mm)

Square Twin (Momentary) ON OFF
M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 13
UWQN1
1NO 1NO UWQN11010
O N
42
ON: Black OFF
1NO 1NC UWQN11001 OFF: Red 6 23 36
47 (1 or 53
2 blocks) 15.5
2NO 2NC UWQN12002 70 (3 or 4 blocks)
Square Twin (Maintained) 1NO UWQN21000

UWQN2 M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 13
1NC UWQN20100
ON
ON: Black
42
1NO-1NC UWQN21100 OFF
OFF: Red
6 23 36
2NO UWQN22000 47 (1 block) 53
70 (2 blocks) 15.5
2NC UWQN20200
• Square Twin (Momentary): Two independent momentary switches are contained in one unit, each operated by ON or OFF button. With the
ø30 adapter removed from the sleeve, the unit can mount in a ø25.5mm mounting hole for the ø25 series.
• Square Twin (Maintained): The contact operates when ON button is pressed and is maintained in the depressed position. The button is
reset by pressing the OFF button. With the ø30 adapter removed from the sleeve, the unit can mount in a ø25.5mm mounting hole for the
ø25 series.
188 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Pilot Lights ø25
Dome / Square / Rectangular (Marking) Types
➁ Lens/LED
Shape Lamp Input Type Type No. ➂ Operating Voltage Code
Color Code
Dome
Without Lamp Full Voltage APS199N➁ A, C, G, R, S, W, Y
APS1
Transformer APS1➂DN➁
LED A, G, PW, R, S, W, Y
DC-DC Converter∗ APS116DDN➁
Incandescent Transformer APS1N➂➁ A, C, G, R, S, W
Square (Marking)
UPQS1B (Plastic Bezel) Without Lamp Full Voltage UPQS1B99N➁ A, G, R, S, W, Y
LED Transformer UPQS1B➂DN➁ A, G, PW, R, S, W, Y
Incandescent Transformer UPQS1B➂N➁ A, G, R, S, W Specify an operating

voltage code in place of ➂
Square (Marking) in the Type No.
UPQMS1B (Metal Bezel) Without Lamp Full Voltage UPQMS1B99N➁ A, G, R, S, W, Y
16: 100/110V AC
116: 115 AC
LED Transformer UPQMS1B➂DN➁ A, G, PW, R, S, W, Y 126: 120V AC
26: 200/220V AC
236: 230V AC
Incandescent Transformer UPQMS1B➂N➁ A, G, R, S, W 246: 240V AC
386: 380V AC
Rectangular (Marking) 46: 400/440V AC
UPQS4B (Plastic Bezel) 486: 480V AC
Without Lamp Full Voltage UPQS4B99N➁
A, G, R, S, W
Incandescent Transformer UPQS4B➂N➁
Push-to-Check
APS1∗PN
Without Lamp Full Voltage APS199PN➁
A, C, G, R, S, W
Incandescent Transformer APS1➂PN➁
• Color Code
Specify a lens/LED color code in place of ➁ in the Type No.
A: amber, C: clear, G: green, PW: pure white, R: red, S: blue, W: white, Y: yellow
Square bezel (plastic): Black
Square bezel (metal): Chrome-plated
• The lamp of push-to-check pilot light is not connected to the contact terminal. To connect, refer to the circuit diagram example below.
START
STOP OLS
M
M L
Push-to-Check
Pilot Light
(06/02/17) 189
ø25 TWS Series Pilot Lights
Dimensions
• Dome • Square (Marking Type)
APS1 UPQS1B (Plastic Bezel)
M3.5 Terminal
M3.5 Terminal
ø19.6
24.5
29
ø30
37
37
53
A: 22.5 9 31.2
B: 59 22.5 ø34 A: 32.5 8 31.2
B: 69 10 39.5
Marking Plate Size: 21.2×1t mm, 2 plates included
A: Full voltage type A: Full voltage type

B: Transformer type B: Transformer type
• Square (Marking Type) • Rectangular (Marking Type)

UPQMS1B (Metal Bezel) UPQS4B
M3.5 Terminal M3.5 Terminal
Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6 Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
24.5
29
29
24
37
53
37
53
A: 32.5 8 31.2
A: 32.5 6.5 31.2
B: 69 10 35
B: 69 10.5 39.5
39.5
Marking Plate Size: 20×2t mm, 1 plate included Marking Plate Size: 27.2×21.2×1t mm, 2 plates included

• Push-to-Check
APS1∗∗PN
M3.5 Terminal
Screws Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
ø19.6
ø30
37
A: 67 (2 blocks) 9 30 All dimensions in mm.

B: 90 (2 blocks) 22.5 ø34
A: Full voltage type

B: Transformer type
• Terminal Wiring (Bottom View) • Panel Mounting of Square and Rectangular Types
Arrows indicate access directions for wiring. 1. Tighten the square or rectangular bezel to the operator
and position the ring correctly.
2. Lightly tighten the screw to secure the pilot light onto the
panel.
M3.5
M3.5
X1 X1 Tighten the screw lightly so that

this plate does not bend.
X2
X2 Recommended tightening torque:
0.15 N·m
190 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Illuminated Pushbuttons ø25

Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALS29911N➁
ALS2 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALS29920N➁
AOLS2
2NO-2NC ALS29922N➁
1NO-1NC ALS2➂11DN➁
Transformer 2NO ALS2➂20DN➁
2NO-2NC ALS2➂22DN➁
Momentary LED
1NO-1NC ALS21611DDN➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO ALS21620DDN➁
2NO-2NC ALS21622DDN➁
1NO-1NC ALS2➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALS2➂20N➁
1NO-1NC AOLS29911N➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLS29920N➁
1NO-1NC AOLS2➂11DN➁
Transformer 2NO AOLS2➂20DN➁
2NO-2NC AOLS2➂22DN➁
Maintained LED
1NO-1NC AOLS21611DDN➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO AOLS21620DDN➁
2NO-2NC AOLS21622DDN➁
1NO-1NC AOLS2➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLS2➂20N➁

Without Lamp LED Illuminated Type Incandescent Illuminated Type
➁ Lens Color Code ➁ Lens/LED Color Code ➁ Lens Color Code
Specify a lens color code in place Specify a lens/LED color code in Specify a lens color code in place Specify an operating voltage
of ➁ in the Type No. place of ➁ in the Type No. of ➁ in the Type No. code in place of ➂ in the Type No.
A: amber A: amber A: amber 16: 100/110V AC

C: clear G: green C: clear 116: 115V AC
G: green PW: pure white G: green 126: 120V AC
R: red R: red R: red 26: 200/220V AC
S: blue S: blue S: blue 236: 230V AC
W: white W: white W: white 246: 240V AC
Y: yellow Y: yellow 386: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC
(06/02/17) 191
ø25 TWS Series Illuminated Pushbuttons
Round Extended with Half Shroud Illuminated Pushbuttons

Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALGS29911N➁
with Half Shroud Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALGS29920N➁
ALGS2
2NO-2NC ALGS29922N➁
AOLGS2
1NO-1NC ALGS2➂11DN➁
Transformer 2NO ALGS2➂20DN➁
2NO-2NC ALGS2➂22DN➁
Momentary LED
1NO-1NC ALGS21611DDN➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO ALGS21620DDN➁
2NO-2NC ALGS21622DDN➁
1NO-1NC ALGS2➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALGS2➂20N➁
2NO-2NC ALGS2➂22N➁
1NO-1NC AOLGS29911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLGS29920DN➁
2NO-2NC AOLGS29922DN➁
1NO-1NC AOLGS2➂11DN➁
Transformer 2NO AOLGS2➂20DN➁
2NO-2NC AOLGS2➂22DN➁
Maintained LED
1NO-1NC AOLGS21611DDN➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO AOLGS21620DDN➁
2NO-2NC AOLGS21622DDN➁
1NO-1NC AOLGS2➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLGS2➂20N➁
2NO-2NC AOLGS2➂22N➁


46: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC
192 (06/02/17)

Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALFS29911N➁
with Full Shroud Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALFS29920N➁
ALFS2
2NO-2NC ALFS29922N➁
AOLFS2
1NO-1NC ALFS2➂11DN➁
Transformer 2NO ALFS2➂20DN➁
2NO-2NC ALFS2➂22DN➁
Momentary LED
1NO-1NC ALFS21611DDN➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO ALFS21620DDN➁
2NO-2NC ALFS21622DDN➁
1NO-1NC ALFS2➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALFS2➂20N➁
2NO-2NC ALFS2➂22N➁
1NO-1NC AOLFS29911N➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLFS29920N➁
2NO-2NC AOLFS29922N➁
1NO-1NC AOLFS2➂11DN➁
Transformer 2NO AOLFS2➂20DN➁
2NO-2NC AOLFS2➂22DN➁
Maintained LED
1NO-1NC AOLFS21611DDN➁
DC-DC Converter∗ 2NO AOLFS21620DDN➁
2NO-2NC AOLFS21622DDN➁
1NO-1NC AOLFS2➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLFS2➂20N➁
2NO-2NC AOLFS2➂22N➁


46: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC
(06/02/17) 193
Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset Illuminated Pushbuttons

ø35mm Mushroom 1NO-1NC ALS39911N➁
ALS3 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALS39920N➁
AOLS3
2NO-2NC ALS39922N➁
Momentary
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALS3➂20N➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLS39920N➁
Maintained
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLS3➂20N➁
Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset 1NO-1NC AVLS39911NR
AVLS3 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AVLS39920NR
2NO-2NC AVLS39922NR
1NO-1NC AVLS3➂11DNR
LED Transformer 2NO AVLS3➂20DNR
2NO-2NC AVLS3➂22DNR
1NO-1NC AVLS3➂11NR
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AVLS3➂20NR
2NO-2NC AVLS3➂22NR

Without Lamp / LED Illuminated Type Incandescent Illuminated Type
Specify a lens/LED color code in place of ➁ Specify a lens color code in place of ➁ in the Specify an operating voltage code in place of
in the Type No. Type No. ➂ in the Type No.
A: amber A: amber 16: 100/110V AC

G: green G: green 116: 115V AC
R: red R: red 126: 120V AC
S: blue S: blue 26: 200/220V AC
W: white W: white 236: 230V AC
246: 240V AC
386: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC
• Pushlock Turn Reset: Lens is maintained when pressed and is reset when turned clockwise. Red lens only.
Note: AVLS3 pushlock turn reset switches cannot be used as emergency stop switches. When emergency stop switches are required, use
XW or HW series emergency stop switches (ISO 13850 and IEC 60947-5-5 compliant).
194 (06/02/17)
Square Flush Pushbuttons

Square Flush (Marking) 1NO-1NC ULQS1B9911N➁
ULQS1B Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ULQS1B9920N➁
UOLQS1B
2NO-2NC ULQS1B9922N➁
1NO-1NC ULQS1B➂11DN➁
Momentary LED Transformer 2NO ULQS1B➂20DN➁
2NO-2NC ULQS1B➂22DN➁
1NO-1NC ULQS1B➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ULQS1B➂20N➁
2NO-2NC ULQS1B➂22N➁
1NO-1NC UOLQS1B9911N➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO UOLQS1B9920N➁
2NO-2NC UOLQS1B9922N➁
1NO-1NC UOLQS1B➂11DN➁
Maintained LED Transformer 2NO UOLQS1B➂20DN➁
2NO-2NC UOLQS1B➂22DN➁
1NO-1NC UOLQS1B➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO UOLQS1B➂20N➁
2NO-2NC UOLQS1B➂22N➁


G: green G: green G: green 116: 115V AC
R: red PW: pure white R: red 126: 120V AC
S: blue R: red S: blue 26: 200/220V AC
W: white S: blue W: white 236: 230V AC
Y: yellow W: white 246: 240V AC
Y: yellow 386: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC
(06/02/17) 195
Dimensions
• Round Extended • Round Extended with Half Shroud
ALS2 / AOLS2 ALGS2 / AOLGS2

Screws Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6 Screws Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
ø19.5
ø19.5
ø22
ø30
ø30
37
37
A: 67 (2 blocks) A: 65.5 (2 blocks)
87 (4 blocks) 9 30 85.5 (4 blocks) 30
B: 90 (2 blocks), 110 (4 blocks) 19.5 ø34 B: 88.5 (2 blocks), 108.5 (4 blocks) 21 ø34

• Round Extended with Full Shroud • ø35mm Mushroom

ALFS2 / AOLFS2 ALS3 / AOLS3

ø35
ø30
37
25
37
A: 67 (2 blocks) A: 67 (2 blocks)
87 (4 blocks) 30 87 (4 blocks) 9 30
B: 90 (2 blocks), 110 (4 blocks) 19.5 ø34 B: 90 (2 blocks), 110 (4 blocks) 25

• Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset • Square Flush

AVLS3 ULQS1B / UOLQS1B
24.5
ø35
30
37
37
53
A: 67 (2 blocks) A: 70 (2 blocks)
87 (4 blocks) 9 30 90 (4 blocks) 19 30
B: 90 (2 blocks), 110 (4 blocks) 25 B: 93 (2 blocks), 113 (4 blocks) 20.5 39.5
Marking Plate Size: 21.2x1t mm, 2 plates included

B: Transformer type A: Full voltage type
B: Transformer type
196 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Selector Switches ø25
Selector Switches (Knob Operator Type)
Shape ASS M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6

No. of Positions
ø30
37
22
43 (2 blocks) 9 30
63 (4 blocks) 22 ø34
Maintained Spring Return Spring Return
Contact Block Operator Position
Contact from Right from Left
—
Code Mounting L R L R L R
Position Type L R
10 1 NO
ASS210N ASS2110N ASS2210N ∗
(1NO) 2 Dummy
90° 2-position
11 1 NO
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
—
22 2 NC
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
2R ★ 1 NO
ASS22RN-118 ★ ASS212RN-118 ★ —
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
2R ★ 1 NC
— — ASS222RN-169 ★
(1NO-1NC) 2 NO
Contact Block Operator Position Maintained Spring Return Spring Return Spring Return
Contact from Right from Left Two-way
C C C C
Code Mounting L R L R L R L R
Position Type L C R
20 1 NO
ASS320N ASS3120N ASS3220N ASS3320N
(2NO) 2 NO
02 1 NC
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO
45° 3-position
22 2 NO
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
04 2 NC
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
3S ★ 2 NO
ASS33SN-243 ★ — — —
3 NC
4 Dummy
Contact
2 3
• Contact Block Mounting Position
1 3 2 4
Code Mounting 1 5 and Contact Arrangement Chart
Position Type 1 2 3 4 5
4
Left Center Right
1 NC
4S ★ 2 NC
ASS44SN-407 ★ —
3 NC L C R Operator
4 NO Position
1 NO
1 NO
2 NC 2 NO
4S ★ ASS44SN-411 ★ —
3 NC 3 NC
4 NO 4 NC
1 NO 4 TOP
2
3S ★ 2 NC
ASS43SN-461 ★ —
arrangement chart,
4 Dummy
see pages 202 to 204. 3
1 NO
2 NC 1
4S ★ — ASS54SN-501 ★
3 NC
4 NO
• Knob operator: White indicator on black knob
(06/02/17) 197
ø25 TWS Series Selector Switches
Selector Switches (Lever Operator Type)
Shape ASS∗L M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6

No. of Positions
ø30
37
24
43 (2 blocks) 9
Contact Arrangement Chart 63 (4 blocks) 22 30
Maintained Spring Return Spring Return

—
Code Mounting L R L R L R
Position Type L R
10 1 NO
ASS2L10N ASS21L10N ASS22L10N ∗
(1NO) 2 Dummy
90° 2-position
11 1 NO
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
—
22 2 NC
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
2R ★ 1 NO
ASS2L2RN-118 ★ ASS21L2RN-118 ★ —
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
2R ★ 1 NC
— — ASS22L2RN-169 ★
(1NO-1NC) 2 NO
Contact Block Operator Position Maintained Spring Return Spring Return Spring Return
C C C C
Code Mounting L R L R L R L R
Position Type L C R
20 1 NO
ASS3L20N ASS31L20N ASS32L20N ASS33L20N
(2NO) 2 NO
02 1 NC
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO
45° 3-position
22 2 NO
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
04 2 NC
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
3S ★ 2 NO
ASS3L3SN-243 ★ — — —
3 NC
4 Dummy
Contact
2 3
• Contact Block Mounting Position
1 3 2 4
Code Mounting 1 5 and Contact Arrangement Chart
Position Type 1 2 3 4 5
4
Left Center Right
1 NC
4S ★ 2 NC
ASS4L4SN-407 ★ —
3 NC L C R Operator
4 NO Position
1 NO
1 NO
2 NC 2 NO
4S ★ ASS4L4SN-411 ★ —
3 NC 3 NC
4 NO 4 NC
1 NO 4 TOP
2
3S ★ 2 NC
ASS4L3SN-461 ★ —
arrangement chart,
4 Dummy
see pages 202 to 204. 3
1 NO
2 NC 1
4S ★ — ASS5L4SN-501 ★
3 NC
4 NO
• Lever operator: White indicator on black lever
198 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Selector Switches ø25
Shape ASS∗K M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6

No. of Positions
ø30
37
52 (2 blocks) 9 30
Contact Arrangement Chart 72 (4 blocks) 15.3 22

Contact Block
—
Code Mounting
L R L R L R
Position Type L R
10 1 NO
ASS2K10N ASS21K10N ASS22K10N ∗
(1NO) 2 Dummy
90° 2-position
11 1 NO
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
—
22 2 NC
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
2R ★ 1 NO
ASS2K2RN-118 ★ ASS21K2RN-118 ★ —
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
2R ★ 1 NC
— — ASS22K2RN-169 ★
(1NO-1NC) 2 NO
Code Mounting
L R L R L R L R
Position Type L C R
1 NO20 ASS3K20N ASS31K20N ASS32K20N ASS33K20N
2 (2NO)
NO
02 1 NC
ASS3K02N ASS31K02N ASS32K02N ASS33K02N
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO
45° 3-position
22 2 NO
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
04 2 NC
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
3S ★ 2 NO
ASS3K3SN-243 ★ — — —
3 NC
4 Dummy
• Cylinder cover: Black
Round bezel (Metal): Chrome-plated
Left Center Right

4 2 TOP
L C R Operator
Position
1 NO
3 2 NO
1
3 NC
4 NC
(06/02/17) 199
ø25 TWS Series Illuminated Selector Switches
90° 2-position
Shape ASLS M3.5 Terminal
ø20.5
ø30
37
A: 67 (2 blocks)
87 (4 blocks) 9 30 A: Full voltage type
B: 90 (2 blocks), 110 (4 blocks) 22 ø34 B: Transformer type
Lamp Input Type
Code L R L R L R
Mounting
Position Type L R
1 NO Without Lamp Full Voltage ASLS29911N➁ ASLS219911N➁ ASLS229911N➁ ∗
11
2 NC LED Transformer ASLS2➂11DN➁ ASLS21➂11DN➁ ASLS22➂11DN➁ ∗
(1NO-1NC)
Incandescent Transformer ASLS2➂11N➁ ASLS21➂11N➁ ASLS22➂11N➁ ∗
1 NO Without Lamp Full Voltage ASLS29920N➁ ASLS219920N➁ ASLS229920N➁ ∗
20
2 NO LED Transformer ASLS2➂20DN➁ ASLS21➂20DN➁ ASLS22➂20DN➁ ∗
(2NO)
1 NO
Without Lamp Full Voltage ASLS29922N➁ ASLS219922N➁ ASLS229922N➁ ∗
2 NC
22 3 NO
LED Transformer ASLS2➂22DN➁ ASLS21➂22DN➁ ASLS22➂22DN➁ ∗
(2NO-2NC) 4 NC

386: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC
• On the selector switches marked with ∗ above, the contact operation is reversed as follows.
• Round bezel (Metal): Chrome-plated
4 2 TOP Left Right
L R Operator
Position
3 1 NO
1 2 NC
3 NO
4 NC
200 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Illuminated Selector Switches ø25

45° 3-position
C C C C
Code Mounting Type
Position L C R
Without Lamp
1 NO ASLS39920N➁ ASLS319920N➁ ASLS329920N➁ ASLS339920N➁
Full Voltage
20 LED
2 NO ASLS3➂20DN➁ ASLS31➂20DN➁ ASLS32➂20DN➁ ASLS33➂20DN➁
(2NO) Transformer
Incandescent
ASLS3➂20N➁ ASLS31➂20N➁ ASLS32➂20N➁ ASLS33➂20N➁
Transformer
Without Lamp
1 NC ASLS39902N➁ ASLS319902N➁ ASLS329902N➁ ASLS339902N➁
Full Voltage
02 LED
2 NC ASLS3➂02DN➁ ASLS31➂02DN➁ ASLS32➂02DN➁ ASLS33➂02DN➁
(2NC) Transformer
Incandescent
Transformer
1 NO Without Lamp
ASLS39922N➁ ASLS319922N➁ ASLS329922N➁ ASLS339922N➁
2 NO Full Voltage
22 3 NC LED
ASLS3➂22DN➁ ASLS31➂22DN➁ ASLS32➂22DN➁ ASLS33➂22DN➁
Incandescent
Transformer
1 NO Without Lamp
2 NO Full Voltage
40 3 NO LED
Incandescent
Transformer
1 NC Without Lamp
2 NC Full Voltage
04 3 NC LED
Incandescent
Transformer


386: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC
• Round bezel (Metal): Chrome-plated

Left Center Right
4 TOP
2
L C R
Operator
1 NO Position
3 2 NO
1 3 NC
4 NC
(06/02/17) 201
ø25 TWS Series Selector Switch Contact Arrangement Charts
Spring
Maintained Return Spring Return from Left
Positions from Right
L R L R L R

Operator Positions
Code No. Position
L R L R
10 1 NO
—
(1NO) 2 Dummy
01 1 NC
—
(1NC) 2 Dummy
1 NO
—
11 2 NC
(1NO-1NC) 1 NC
103
2 NO
20 1 NO
—
(2NO) 2 NO
02 1 NC
—
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO
2 NC
—
3 NO
4 NC
1 NC • Contact Block Mounting Position and
2 NO
110 Contact Arrangement Chart
3 NC
22 4 NO 4
(2NO-2NC) 1 NO 2 TOP
2 NO
111
3 NC
4 NC 3
1 NC 1
2 NO
117
3 NO Left Right
4 NC
1 NC L R Operator
31 2 NO Position
107 1 NO
(3NO-1NC) 3 NO
4 NO
2 NC
1 NO 3 NO
40 2 NO 4 NC
—
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO • On the contact arrangement marked with
118 ★
2 NC ★ in the table, the rated current (load
1 NO switching current) is reduced to a half of
168 ★
2 NC the rated current of the contact block.
2R ★
1 NC The rated insulation voltage and the rated
119 ★
2 NO thermal current remain unchanged.
1 NC
169 ★
2 NO
1 NO
2 NC Type No. Development
120 ★
3 NO
4 NC • When circuit number is not required:
1 NO
2 NC ASS 2 11 N
170 ★
4 NC 2-position
4R ★
1 NC
2 NO • When circuit number is required:
121 ★
3 NC
4 NO ASS 2 11 N - 103
1 NC Circuit No.
2 NO
171 ★ Contact Code (1NO-1NC)
3 NC
4 NO 2-position
202 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Selector Switch Contact Arrangement Charts ø25
Maintained from Right from Left Two-way
Positions L
C
R L
C
R L
C
R L
C
R
Operator Positions Operator Positions

Contact Circuit Mounting Contact Circuit Mounting
Type Type
Code No. Position Code No. Position
L C R L C R
1 NO 1 NO
202
2 NC 2 NO
1 NC ––
203 3 NO
11 2 NO 4 NO
(1NO-1NC)
40
1 NO (4NO) 1 NO
302
2 NC
2 NO
1 NC 305
303 3 NO
2 NO
4 NO
1 NO
— 1 NC
20 2 NO
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NO ––
301 3 NC
2 NO
04 4 NC
1 NC
— (4NC) 1 NC
02 2 NC
(2NC) 1 NC 2 NC
304 314
2 NC 3 NC
1 NO 4 NC
2 NO
—
3 NC
4 NC • Contact Block Mounting Position and Contact
1 NC Arrangement Chart
2 NO
210
3 NC 4 2
4 NO TOP
1 NO
22 2 NC
308
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
3
4 NC 1
1 NO
2 NC Left Center Right
309
3 NC
4 NO
L C R Operator
1 NC Position
2 NO 1 NO
310 2 NO
3 NC
4 NO 3 NC
1 NO 4 NC
2 NC
206
3 NO
31 4 NO
(3NO-1NC) 1 NC Type No. Development
2 NO
207
3 NO • When circuit number is not required:
4 NO
1 NO ASS 3 22 N
2 NC Contact Code (2NO-2NC)
212
3 NC 3-position
13 4 NC
(1NC-3NC) 1 NC
• When circuit number is required:
2 NO
313
3 NC ASS 3 22 N - 210
4 NC
Circuit No.
Contact Code (2NO-2NC)
3-position
(06/02/17) 203
ø25 TWS Series Selector Switch Contact Arrangement Charts
45° 3-position (Maintained) 45° 4-position (Maintained)
C 2
Positions L R Positions 1 3
Knob, Lever, Operator Types Knob, Lever

Operator Types Illuminated Operator Positions
Operator Positions Contact Circuit Mounting Type
Contact Circuit Mounting Code No. Position
Type
Code No. Position 1 2 3 4
L C R 1 NO
1 NO 2 NC
3S ★ 461 ★
2 NO 3 NC
3S★ 243 ★
3 NC 4 Dummy
4 Dummy 1 NC
1 NO 2 NC
405 ★
2 NC 3 NC
233 ★
3 NO 4 NC
4 NO 1 NC
1 NO 2 NC
407 ★
2 NC 3 NC
234 ★
3 NC 4 NO
4S ★
4 NC 1 NO
1 NC 2 NC
409 ★
2 NO 3 NC
4S★ 235 ★
3 NC 4 NC
4 NO 1 NO
1 NO 2 NC
411 ★
2 NO 3 NC
237 ★
3 NC 4 NO
4 NO
1 NC
2 NC
240 ★
3 NC
4 NO
30° 5-position (Maintained)

Maintained
3
Positions 1
2 4
5
Operator Types Knob, Lever

Operator Positions
Code No. Position
1 2 3 4 5
1 NO
2 NC
4S ★ 501 ★
3 NC
4 NO
• Contact Block Mounting Position and Contact

Arrangement Chart
Center
Type No. Development
TOP Left Right
4 • When circuit number is not required:

2 L C R Operator
Position ASS 3 4S N
1 NO
2 NC Contact Code
3 NO 3-position
3 4 NO
1 • When circuit number is required:
ASS 3 4S N - 233
• On the contact arrangement marked with ★ in the table, the rated
current (load switching current) is reduced to a half of the rated Circuit No.
current of the contact block. The rated insulation voltage and the Contact Code (2NO-2NC)
rated thermal current remain unchanged.
3-position
204 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Accessories and Replacement Parts ø25
Terminal Covers
Terminal Cover TW-VLC HW-VL3 HW-VL5 APS-PVL Use of terminal
covers increases
the depth by the
dimensions
below.
Terminal Cover
Control Unit 44.6H × 14.1W 37.8H × 26W 39.1H × 15.5W 36H × 29.4W
• Pilot light
APS Full Voltage X +6 mm
UPQS
UPQMS
Transformer
X +3 mm
DC-DC Converter
• Pushbutton 1 contact block
ABS
AOS Terminal Cover X
ABGS CB
AOGS
ABFS
AOFS 2 contact blocks
AKS X
AVS CB
CB 2 pieces
AJS
AZS
ATS +3.5 mm
3 contact blocks
UTS
AYS X
CB CB
CB 2 pieces
• Selector switch
ASS
4 contact blocks
X
CB CB
CB CB 2 pieces
• Illuminated pushbutton Full Voltage

ALS AOLFS
AOLS ULOS CB
X +3 mm
CB
ALGS UOLQS
AOLGS AVLS
ALFS ATLS
Transformer
• Illuminated selector DC-DC Converter
switch
ASLS CB Tr X +3 mm
CB
• Push-to-check pilot light
APS

Terminal covers are ordered separately.
When ordering terminal covers, specify the Type No. and required quantity.
(06/02/17) 205
ø25 TWS Series Accessories and Replacement Parts
Nameplates
NSA, NSALO, and NFSO

Dimensions Ordering Type Package
Legend Material Type No. Description
(mm) No. Quantity
NSA
NSA-0 1
Blank NSA-0 • Black
34
NSA-0PN10 10
Aluminium
0.8 mm thick
NSA-∗ 1 • White letters on
36
.5
25
With Legend NSA-∗ black back-

ø
NSA-∗PN10 10 ground
NSALO
NSALO 1
34
Aluminium
Blank NSALO • Black
0.8 mm thick
41
.5
NSALOPN10 10
25
ø
NFSO
NFSO 1
34
Stainless steel • Stainless steel
Blank NFSO
0.8 mm thick ground color
36
.5
25
NFSOPN10 10
ø
Legends
Code Legend
0 (blank)
1 ON
2 OFF
3 START
4 STOP
31 OFF-ON
35 HAND-AUTO
53 HAND-OFF-AUTO
Example of Shape and Engraving Area

Engraving Area Max. No. of No. of Letters
Shape
Height Width Lines on 1 Line
Standard Type (NSA/NFSO)
31
4
4 31 1 17
Mushroom Type (NSALO)

31
8
8 31 2 17
• The above example is when the letter is 3 mm tall.

• Engraving must be made within 1.5 mm from the sides.
206 (06/02/17)
Accessories
Ordering Package
Type No. Quantity
Locking Ring Wrench • Used to tighten the round bezel when installing
the TWS control unit onto a panel.
0
ø2
6
ø3
ø2 29 ø3
4
Rubber OR-12 OR-12 1 ø
ø46
ø45
ø37
ø25 Series 90 ø30 Series
Lamp Holder Tool • Used to install and remove LED/incandescent

lamps.
ø11.6
OR-55
14
59
Contact Block Removal Tool • Used to remove contact blocks, transformers,

lenses and adapters.
23
Metal/
TW-KC1 TW-KC1 1 130
Rubber
ø19
39
Nut Locking Wrench • Used to tighten the locking ring on the square
control units.
20.5
49.5
Metal TWST-T1 TWST-T1 1
52
23.7 77
Locking Ring • Used to attach square pushbuttons and illumi-

nated pushbuttons on to the panel.
(For Square control units)
• Mounting centers are the same as round con-
trol units.
M25 P1.5 5.5
Pushbutton
OG-RT1 OG-RT1PN02 2
Illuminated Pushbutton
ø33
• Used to attach pilot lights on to the panel.

• Mounting centers are the same as round con-
trol units.
8
M25 P1.5
Pilot Light OG-RT2 OG-RT2PN02 2
ø33
Anti-rotation Ring • Used to prevent the operator from rotating.

selector switches.
2.8 0.8

5
5.
ø34
ø2
Rubber Mounting Hole Plug • Used to plug unused ø25.5mm mounting holes.
ø35
Rubber
OBS-13B OBS-13BPN05 5
(black)
10
5
ø29
(06/02/17) 207
Accessories
Ordering Package
Type No. Quantity
Barrier • Used to prevent
contact between
adjacent lead wires
when units are
45
mounted closely.
Plastic HW-VL1 HW-VL1PN10 10 Barriers should be
always used in
close mounting. 20 1.5
Contact Rubber • Dust cover boot used for pushbuttons and selec-
Boot tor switches.
• Temperature range: -5 to +60°C
• Black
For 1 layer of
Rubber
contact blocks
(nitryl) OCS-99 OCS-99 1
(2 contact
Black
2.2
48
blocks)
38 14 45.5

Clear Boot tect pushbuttons
For flush where units are sub-
OC-221 OC-221 1
pushbuttons ject to water splash.
Not suitable for out-
ø32
Rubber
door use or where the
(EPDM) units are subject to oil
For extended splash.
OC-222 OC-222 1 15.5 (OC-221)
pushbuttons 21.8 (OC-222)
Button Cover B (black), G (green), R (red), Y (yellow)

• Metallic bezels covered with rubber boot to
enhance waterproof and oiltight characteristics.
• Button is installed in the cover. Remove the but-
ton from the pushbutton before using the button
cover.
Rubber • Temperature range: –5 to +60°C
OCS-11➀ OCS-11➀ 1
(nitryl)
ø33
ø23
M25P1.5 11
19
Padlock Cover • Used to protect momentary and maintained

pushbuttons, illuminated pushbuttons, knob
selector switches, and key selector switches.
0.8 to 3.2
Polyarylate
R6
(gasket: nitryl OLS-KL1 OLS-KL1 1

6.5
93
rubber)
30
70
24 (inside)
0 4)
ø2
ø5 44.
2.
Waterproof Rubber
2
:ø
I( D Key Hole ø8 29.5 Gasket 0.5t
30
Metal Protector • Used to protect flush buttons from inadvertent

operation.
• Can be easily attached under the round bezel.
16.6
Mounting Centers
Metal OLS-C OLS-C 1

50 min.
2.5
R4
25
13 1.6t
ø25.5
Note: Specify a button cover color code in place of ➀ in the Ordering Type No.
208 (06/02/17)
Maintenance Parts
Package
Shape Material Type No. Ordering Type No. Color Code
Quantity
Bezel Pushbutton B (black), G (green), R (red),
OGP-22➀ OGP-22➀PN02 Y (yellow), W (white)
Pilot Light
Plastic • Cannot be used for control
units with half shroud or full
Selector Switch OGP-33➀ OGP-33➀PN02
shroud.
2
Pushbutton
OG-22 OG-22PN02 • Cannot be used for control
Pilot Light
units with half shroud or full
shroud.
Selector Switch OG-33 OG-33PN02
Pushbutton with Full

ABS2FN ABS2FN
Shroud Metal
Mushroom with Full (chrome-
plated) ABS3GN ABS3GN
Shroud
Pushbutton, Illumi- 1
nated Pushbutton ALS1G ALS1G
with Half Shroud
Illuminated Pushbut-
ALS1F ALS1F
ton with Full Shroud
Button
Flush ABS1BN-➀ ABS1BN-➀PN05
5 B (black), G (green), R (red),
Extended ABS2BN-➀ ABS2BN-➀PN05 S (blue), Y (yellow), W (white)
• Light color
ø35mm Mushroom ABS3BN-➀ ABS3BN-➀PN02 2
Square Flush Plastic UBQS1BN-➀ UBQS1BN-➀PN02 B (black), G (green), R (red),

S (blue), Y (yellow)
Square Extended UBQS2BN-➀ UBQS2BN-➀PN02 • Light color
2
Pushlock Turn Reset AVS3BN-➀ AVS3BN-➀PN02 R (red), Y (yellow)
B (black), G (green), R (red),

Push-Pull AYS3BN-➀ AYS3BN-➀PN02 Y (yellow)
Lens (for illuminated APS106L-➁ APS106L-➁PN05
pushbuttons) Dome S (blue)
APS106LD-➁ APS106LD-➁PN05 A (amber), W (white), Y (yellow)
For Square Metal UPQS306L-➁ UPQS306L-➁PN05 S (blue)
Plastic 5
Bezel Unit
UPQS306LD-➁ UPQS306LD-➁PN05 A (amber), Y (yellow)
A (amber), C (clear), G (green),

Rectangular UPQS406L-➁ UPQS406L-➁PN05 R (red), S (blue)
Lens (for pilot lights

and illuminated C (clear), G (green), R (red),
UPQS106L-➁ UPQS106L-➁PN05 5 S (blue)
pushbuttons)
For Square Type with
Plastic
Plastic Bezel
UPQS106LD-➁ UPQS106LD-➁PN05 5 A (amber), Y (yellow)
Lens C (clear), G (green), R (red),

ALS06L-➁ ALS06L-➁PN05 S (blue)
Extended 5
ALS06LD-➁ ALS06LD-➁PN05 A (amber), Y (yellow), W (white)
Plastic ALS3L-➁ ALS3L-➁PN02 G (green), R (red), S (blue)

Mushroom
ALS3LD-➁ ALS3LD-➁PN02 2 A (amber), W (white)
Pushlock Turn Reset AVLS3L-R AVLS3L-RPN02
Use a clear lens for white or pure white illumination.
(06/02/17) 209
Maintenance Parts
Package
Shape Material Type No. Ordering Type No. Remarks
Quantity
Selector Operator Knob ASSHHY-➀ ASSHHY-➀PN02
B (black), G (green),
2 R (red)
Lever ASSHHL-➀ ASSHHL-➀PN02
Plastic
Color Insert TWS-HC1➀ TWS-HC1➀PN05 5 R (red), S (blue),
Y (yellow), W (white)
G (green), R (red),
ASLSLDY-➁ ASLSLDY-➁
Illuminated S (blue)
Plastic 1
Selector A (amber), W (white),
ASLSDDY-➁ ASLSDDY-➁ Y (yellow),
Cap for Key Selector
Plastic AKS2B-➀ AKS2B-➀PN05 5 B (black), R (red)
Clear Button Cover

Plastic ABS1B-C ASB1B-CPN05 5 R (red), W (white)
Y (yellow)
• Used on flush pushbut-
tons to indicate a mark
Marking Plate or a symbol engraved on
the marking plate. The
Plastic TWS-0➀ TWS-0➀PN10 10 clear button cover holds
the marking plate.
Marking Plate For Square Pilot

Lights and Illumi- UPQS106P-W UPQS106P-WPN02 • 21.2 × 1t mm
nated Pushbuttons
For Square Pilot
Plastic 2
Lights with Metal UPQS306N-W UPQS306N-WPN02 • 20 × 2t mm
Bezel
Rectangular Pilot
UPQS406P-W UPQS406P-WPN02 • 27.2 × 21.2 × 1t mm
Lights
Contact Block • Housing: Blue
1NO HW-C10 HW-C10 Push rod: Green
• Housing: Purple red
1NC HW-C01 HW-C01 Push rod: Red
1
• Housing: Blue
Early Make HW-C10R HW-C10R Push rod: Black
• Housing: Purple red
Late Break HW-C01R HW-C01R Push rod: White
Dummy Block
• Used for non-illumi-
TW-DB TW-DBPN10 10 nated units with 1NO or
1NC contact blocks.
Full Voltage Adapter • Adapter with M3.5

screws used for illumi-
nated pushbutton or illu-
TW-DA1B TW-DA1BPN02 2 minated selector switch.
Snaps on to the back of
the contact block.
Spare Key
For Key Selector
Metal TW-SK-0 TW-SK-0PN02 2
Switch
Rubber Washer
3.0-mm thick OW-22 OW-22PN10
• Outside diameter: ø33.8
Rubber 10 • Inside diameter: ø25.5
1.5-mm thick OW-21 OW-21PN10
210 (06/02/17)
Maintenance Parts

LSTD-6➁ in place of ➁ in the 1
17 mA (A, R, W, Y) 14 mA (A, R, W, Y)
LSTD-6➁ Ordering Type No.
8 mA (G, PW, S) 5.5 mA (G, PW, S)
LSTD-6➁PN10 10
A: amber
LSTD-1➁ 1
PW: pure white
11 mA 10 mA LSTD-1➁ R: red BA9S/13
LSTD-1➁PN10 S: blue 10
W: white
24V AC/DC ±10% Y: yellow
LSTD-2➁ 1
11 mA 10 mA LSTD-2➁
LSTD-2➁PN10 10

6V AC/DC
1W (6.3V) LS-6
12V AC/DC
1W (18V) LS-8
1
18V AC/DC
1W (24V) LS-2
24V AC/DC
1W (30V) LS-3
Transformer
Shape Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Type No.
Transformer Unit 100/110V AC TW-T16B
120V AC TW-T126B
5.5V
200/220V AC TW-T26B
240V AC TW-T246B
(06/02/17) 211
ø25 TWS Series Instructions
Safety Precautions
• Turn off the power to the TWS series control units before • Use HW-C type contact blocks for the TWS series. Do not
starting installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and replace with or add conventional TW series contact blocks.
inspection of the products. Failure to turn power off may Using a different type of contact block may lead to malfunc-
cause electrical shocks or fire hazard. tion.
• To avoid a burn on your hand, use the lamp holder tool HW-C Type TW Type
when replacing lamps. Contact Block Contact Block
• For wiring, use wires of a proper size to meet the voltage

and current requirements. Tighten the M3.5 terminal Rectangular
Holes
screws to a tightening torque of 1.0 to 1.3 N·m. Failure to
tighten terminal screws may cause overheat and fire.
Instructions
• Installation of Selector Operators • Removing the Operator
1. The shaft of each selector or illuminated selector switch 1. Removing the Color
has a recess to identify in which direction to install the Recess Insert
operator. Align the operator with the recess and press in
Flat Insert a flat screwdriver
the operator.
screwdriver (4.5mm wide at maximum)
2. Press color insert (non-illuminated type) into the opera- into the recess of the color
tor. The color insert retains the operator. insert. Turn the screwdriver
Color insert to push out the insert from
Recess the operator.
Press in
2. Removing the Operator

Press in (Non-illuminated)
Push the operator sideways
as shown in the left photo to
Illuminated Selector Switch remove the operator.
Selector Switch (non-illuminated)
• Standard Position
2-Position, 90° 3-Position, 45° 4-Position, 45° 5-Position, 30°
L R L C R 1 2 3 2 3 4 3. Removing the Operator
1 5 Recess
4 (Illuminated)
Flat the recess of the operator
screwdriver
and turn the screwdriver to
remove the operator.
[Example]
L
C L
R C
L
C
R
R
Standard Position
The non-illuminated operators can be installed in positions
other than the standard position as shown above.
Removing Contact Blocks, Transformers,

and Full Voltage Adapters
Insert the end of the contact block removal tool into the
snap-fit latch of the contact block (or transformer, full volt-
age adapter) and pull the tool as shown on the right.
212 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Instructions ø25
Instructions
Installing Lenses Collective Mounting

• Lens Structure and Marking Plate When mounting the units closely in a horizontal row on
All square lens units are marking types. To engrave on the 34mm centers, use optional barriers to prevent interconnec-
marking plate, remove the marking plate from the lens. tion between adjoining terminals. The barriers can be
Square Pilot Lens attached simply by pressing them onto the sides of contact
blocks.
34mm 34mm
Lens
Marking Plate (White)
Marking Plate (Transparent)
Barrier
Tightening Torque
Tighten the M3.5 terminal screws to a torque of 1.0 to 1.3
Square Illuminated Pushbutton
N·m.
Lens
Marking Plate (White)
Marking Plate (Transparent)
Lens Holder
Replacement of Lamps
Lamps can be replaced by using the lamp holder tool (OR-
55) from the front of the panel.
• How to remove
To remove, slip the lamp holder tool onto the lamp head
counterclockwise.
• How to install
To install, insert the lamp head into the lamp holder tool.
Place the pins on the lamp base to the grooves in the lamp
socket. Insert the lamp and turn it clockwise.
OR-55
(06/02/17) 213
ø25 TWS Series Instructions
Instructions
Panel Thickness and Rubber Washer

Adjust the thickness of the rubber washers according to the
Rubber Washer
panel thickness. Also, make sure to include the nameplate
thickness when using a nameplate.
Applicable Models Applicable Models

• Momentary Type Pushbutton (Excluding Extended with Half • Maintained Type Extended Pushbutton with Full Shroud (AOFS2)
Shroud, Extended with Full Shroud, and Square Type) Rubber Washer
• Round Pilot Light (APS1) Panel Thickness (mm)
1.5 mm 3.0 mm
Rubber Washer Supplied 4 pieces 1 piece
Panel Thickness (mm)
1.5 mm 3.0 mm 0.8 to 1.5 4 pieces 1 piece
Supplied 2 pieces 1 piece 1.5 to 3.0 3 pieces 1 piece
0.8 to 2.5 2 pieces 1 piece 3.0 to 4.5 2 pieces 1 piece
2.5 to 4.0 1 piece 1 piece 4.5 to 6.0 1 piece 1 piece
4.0 to 5.5 –– 1 piece
5.5 to 6.0 1 piece –– Applicable Models
• Other Models (Excluding Square Types)
Applicable Models Rubber Washer
• Momentary Type Pushbutton with Half Shroud (ABGS2) 1.5 mm 3.0 mm
Rubber Washer Supplied 3 pieces 1 piece
Panel Thickness (mm) 0.8 to 2.5 3 pieces 1 piece
1.5 mm 3.0 mm
Supplied 1 piece 1 piece 2.5 to 4.0 2 pieces 1 piece
0.8 1 piece 1 piece 4.0 to 5.5 1 piece 1 piece
0.8 to 2.3 –– 1 piece 5.5 to 6.0 –– 1 piece
2.3 to 3.8 1 piece ––
Applicable Models
• Maintained Type Extended Pushbutton with Half Shroud (AOGS2)
• Momentary Type Illuminated Pushbutton with Half Shroud
(ALGS2)
• Maintained Type Illuminated Pushbutton with Half Shroud
(AOLGS2)
Rubber Washer
1.5 mm 3.0 mm
Supplied 2 pieces 1 piece
0.8 2 pieces 1 piece
0.8 to 2.3 1 piece 1 piece
2.3 to 3.8 –– 1 piece
3.8 to 5.3 1 piece ––
Applicable Models
• Momentary Type Extended Pushbutton with Full Shroud (ABFS2)
Rubber Washer
1.5 mm 3.0 mm
Supplied 3 pieces 1 piece
0.8 to 1.5 3 pieces 1 piece
1.5 to 3 2 pieces 1 piece
3.0 to 4.5 1 piece 1 piece
4.5 to 6 –– 1 piece
214 (06/02/17)
TWS Series Instructions ø25
• For the pure white LED, use a white lens. The illumination
2. Transformer type units are recommended for use in areas color will be dull if a different color is used.
subjected to noise.

LED lamps consist of semiconductors. If the applied voltage [Protection Example 1] For AC circuit
exceeds the rated voltage, LED elements may deteriorate
due to overheat, resulting in significant decrease in lumi- LED with
transformer
nance, hue change, or failure of lighting. Also, if an extrane-
ous noise, transient voltage, or transient current is applied to C C
the circuit, similar effects may occur. When using LED LED with Relay Ry LED
transformer LED R coil or R
lamps, observe the following instructions. solenoid
• Rated Voltage (Reference values) R:120Ω

C: 0.1 μF
The LED lamps are rated at 6V, 12V, or 24V AC/DC, and can
be used within ±10% the rated voltage of either AC or DC. [Protection Example 2] For DC circuit
• DC Power +

Regulated voltage from switching power supply is best (Reference values of the diode)
Forward current: More than the Ry coil current
suited. Make sure to use within the rated voltage of the Reverse withstand voltage: Ry coil current × 10
LED lamp. Relay Ry
coil or
LED Diode
solenoid
2. Rechargeable battery
–
Note that the battery voltage may exceed the rated volt-
age of the LED lamp while the battery is being charged • Countermeasures against Dim Lighting
and immediately after the charging is complete. Be sure 1. Leakage currents through the transistors or a contact
to use the LED lamp on a voltage of ±10% the rated volt- protection circuit may cause the LED lamp to illuminate
age. dimly even when the output is off.
3. Full-wave rectification 2. When the LED lamp is illuminated by a transistor output,
Since the LED lamp is AC/DC compatible, a diode bridge take the following measure.
for rectification is not necessary. If the LED lamp is used
[Circuit Example]
on a full-wave rectification current through a diode bridge,
the rectifier diodes will reduce the voltage, resulting in Connect shunt resistor R in parallel with the LED lamp.
lower luminance.
This is not suitable for the power source of LED lamps. R LED
• Noise Io
LED elements deteriorate due to extraneous noise, resulting Io: Leakage current when the output is off
in significant decrease in luminance, hue change, or failure R: Shunt resistor
of lighting. When such effects are anticipated, take a protec-

tion measure shown below, such as RC elements or a surge
absorber.
(06/02/17) 215
216 (06/02/17)
ø30mm Series
Control Units
(06/02/17) 217
ø30 ø30 Series Control Units (Selection Guide)
s
Function Emergency Stop Switch Pushbutton

Flush Extended
Category Pushlock Turn Reset Half Shroud Full Shroud
Shape
(Diecast) (Diecast) (Diecast) (Diecast)

ABN1 ABN2 ABN2G ABN2F
Type HN1E ABD1 ABD2 ABGD2 ABFD2
AON1 AON2 AON2G AON2F
AOD1 AOD2 AOGD2 AOFD2
Page 221 229 285 229 285 229 285 229 285
Function Pushbutton
Mushroom with Jumbo Mushroom with Jumbo Mushroom with
Mushroom Palm Mushroom
Category Full Shroud Shallow Shroud Deep Shroud
Momentary/Maintained Momentary
Shape
(Diecast) (Diecast)
ABN3 (Diecast) (Diecast) (Diecast)
Type ABD3 ABN3G ABGD3 ABN4 ABN4G ABN4F
AON3 ABD4 ABGD4 ABFD4
AOD3 AOGD3
Page 230 286 230 286 230 286 230 286 230 286
Function Pushbutton
Square Flush Square Extended Mushroom Pushlock Mushroom Pushlock Jumbo Mushroom
Category
Momentary Momentary Turn Reset Key Reset Pushlock Key Reset
Shape
(Diecast)
Type UBQN1 UBQN2 AVN3 ABN3K ABN4K
AVD3
Page 230 230 231 287 231 231
Function Pushbutton
Mushroom Push
Category Key ON/OFF Lock Toggle Lever Mushroom Pull Mushroom Push-Pull
Turn Lock
Shape
(Diecast) (Diecast) ATN21 (Diecast)

Type AJN3 ABN5 ATN4 ATN23
AJD3 AZD3 ATN22 AYD3
Page 231 287 231 231 232 287 232 287
218 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Control Units (Selection Guide) ø30
Function Pushbutton Twin Maintained Pushbutton

Square Twin Square Twin
Category Pin Lock Flush Mushroom
Momentary Maintained
Shape
(Diecast)
Type ABN8P UWQN1 UWQN2 ABBN11 ABBN33
ABD8P
Page 232 287 233 233 233 233
Function Pilot Light (LED) Pilot Light (Incandescent)

Category Dome Square Rectangular (Marking) Dome (1W) Dome (2W)
Shape
(Diecast) (Diecast)
APN1 UPQN4 (Diecast) APN1
Type APD1 UPQN3B APN1 APD1
APNE1 UPQNE4 APD1 APNE1
APDE1 APDE1
Page 234 288 235 235 235 288 234 288
Function Pilot Light (Incandescent) Illuminated Pushbutton (LED)

Extended with
Rectangular (Marking) Dome Extended
Category Square Flush (1W) Half Shroud
(1W/2W)
Push-to-Check Momentary/Maintained
Shape
ALN2 ALGN2
(Diecast)
UPQN4 ALNE2 ALGNE2
Type UPQN3B APN1∗P ALD2
UPQNE4 AOLN2 AOLGN2
AOLD2
AOLNE2 AOLGNE2
Page 235 235 237 238 289 240
Function Illuminated Pushbutton (LED) (Incandescent)

Extended with
Mushroom Mushroom Pushlock Mushroom Push Extended
Category Full Shroud
Turn Reset Turn Lock
Momentary/Maintained Momentary/Maintained
Shape
ALFN2 ALN3 ALN

(Diecast) (Diecast) (Diecast) (Diecast)
ALFNE2 ALNE3 AVLN3 ALNE
Type ALFD2 ALD3 AVLD3 AJLN3 ALD2
AOLFN2 AOLN3 AVLNE3 AOLN
AOLFD2 AOLD3 AVLDE3 AOLD2
AOLFNE2 AOLNE3 AOLNE
Page 242 290 244 291 247 292 247 239 289
(06/02/17) 219
ø30 ø30 Series Control Units (Selection Guide)
Function Illuminated Pushbutton (Incandescent)

Square Flush Rectangular
Category Half Shroud Full Shroud Turn Lock
Momentary Momentary/Maintained Momentary/Maintained
Shape
ALN∗F (Diecast)
ALN∗G ALNE3F3 ULQN ULQN∗B
Type ALFD2 ALN∗L
ALNE3G3 AOLN∗F UOLQN UOLQN∗B
AOLFD2
AOLNE3F3
Page 241 243 290 245 245 246
Function Illuminated Pushbutton (Incandescent) Selector Switch

Mushroom Pushlock Mushroom Push
Category Knob Lever Key
Turn Reset Turn Lock
Shape
(Diecast)
AVLN3 ASN (Diecast) ASN∗L (Diecast) ASN∗K (Diecast)
Type AVLD3 AJLN3
AVLNE3 ASTN ASD ASTN∗L ASD∗L ASTN∗K ASD∗K
AVLDE3
Page 248 292 248 249/253 293 250/254 294 251/255 295
Illuminated Selector Illuminated Selector

Function Selector Pushbutton Mono-Lever Switch
Switch (LED) Switch (Incandescent)
Category Knob Knob Ring Lever Standard
Shape
(Diecast) (Diecast) (Diecast) (Diecast) ARN

Type ASLN ASLN ABN ABN∗L
ASLD ASLD ASBD2 ASBD2L ARNS
Page 256 296 256 296 258 298 258 298 260
Function Mono-Lever Switch Cam Switch

Maintained/
Category Interlocking Knob Key Spring Return
Spring Return
Shape
ACSNO ACSNK
Type ARNL UCSQO UCSQM
ACSSO ACSSK
Page 260 263 263 263 263
220 (06/02/17)
ø30 HN Series Emergency Stop Switches
Emergency Stop Switches (Unibody Type) Specifications

Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 250V Operating –25 to +60°C (no freezing)
Rated Thermal Current (Ith) 10A Temperature Illuminated units: –25 to +55°C
Rated Operational Voltage (Ue) 24V 110V 220V Storage Temperature –40 to +80°C
Resistive Load Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
AC 6A 3A 3A
(AC-12) Contact Resistance 50 mΩ maximum (initial value)
50/60
Hz Inductive Load Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
Rated 6A 3A 3A
(AC-15) Between live and dead metal parts
Operational
Current Resistive Load Dielectric Strength Contacts: 2,500V AC, 1 minute
6A 2A 1A
(DC-12) Illuminated parts: 1,000V AC, 1 minute
DC
Inductive Load
1.5A 0.3A 0.15A Damage limits: 60 m/s2
(DC-13) Vibration Resistance Operating extremes: 5 to 55 Hz,
Note: The operational current represents the classification by amplitude 0.5 mm
making and breaking currents (IEC 60947-5-1). Damage limits: 1,000 m/s2
Minimum applicable load (reference value): 3V AC/DC, Shock Resistance
5 mA (Applicable range may vary with operating condi- Operating Frequency 900 operations/h
tions and load types.)
Mechanical: 250,000 operations minimum
Life
Electrical: 100,000 operations minimum
LED Lamp Ratings Degree of Protection IP65
Unit Rated LED Lamp Terminal Style M3.5 screw
Operating Rated
Voltage Type No. Rated Voltage
Current
24V AC/DC LSTD-2R 24V AC/DC ±10% 10 mA
Applicable Standards and Approvals
UL508 UL Listing File No. E55996
Incandescent Lamp Ratings CSA C22.2 No. 14 c-UL (File No. E55996)
Unit Rated Incandescent Lamp
EN60947-5-5 DEMKO approved
Operating
Voltage Type No. Wattage
24V AC/DC LS-3 1W (30V)
Pushlock Turn Reset Switches (Unibody Type)

1NO-1NC HN1E-BV411R
Red only
2NC HN1E-BV402R
Illuminated Pushlock Turn Reset Switches (Unibody Type)

Shape Lamp Contact Type No. Lens Color
1NO-1NC HN1E-LV411Q0R
Without Lamp Red only
2NC HN1E-LV402Q0R
• The illuminated pushlock turn reset switch does not contain a lamp. Order LED or incandescent lamps separately. For lamps, see page 279.
(06/02/17) 221
ø30 HN Series Emergency Stop Switches
Dimensions
• HN1E-BV4
M3.5 Terminal
Screw Gasket Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
Panel Cut-Out
R0
.8 m
ø3 ax. 4.8+0.2
0
0.5 +0.
0 5
0.5
33
Terminal Arrangement Locking Ring
(Bottom View) ø4
TOP Marking Side 0
23.5
61
63 32
• HN1E-LV4
M3.5 Terminal
Screw Gasket Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
M3.5 Terminal
Terminal Arrangement Screw
0.5
(Bottom View) Lamp Terminal
TOP Marking Side Locking Ring
ø4
X1 0
LAMP
X2 23.5
61 All dimensions in mm.
63 32
Replacement Parts
Used on HN1E emergency stop switches for preventing
Terminal Cover HW-VL7 HW-VL7PN10 10 electrical shocks.
The HW-VL7 terminal cover is supplied with the HN1E.
Nameplates
Package
Shape Type No. Legend Remarks
Quantity
Background: Yellow
Legend: Black
HNAV-0 (blank) Applicable panel thickness:
0.8 to 4.5 mm
ø60
Material: Polyamide
1 Legend “EMERGENCY STOP”
is indicated outside a ø44mm ø3
EMERGENCY circle. 0
HNAV-27 1.5 1.0
STOP
Accessory
Package
Shape Material Type No. Remarks
Quantity
• Used for tightening the locking nut.
49.5
20.5
• Tighten the locking nut to a torque

of 2.0 to 2.5 N·m.
Metal TWST-T1 1
52
23.7 77
222 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Control Units
Heavy duty control units offer both variety and reliability
Endures harsh environments
• UL, CSA approved, and EN compliant.

UL Listing
UL
File No. E68961
EN EN60947-5-1

Contact Ratings
Pushbuttons Contact Block Type BS/BST (ø30 series)
Selector Pushbuttons IEC 60947-5-1 DC-13 (P600)
Characteristics
DC
For mono-levers and cam switches, see pages 259 and 262.
BS (BST) Contact Block

Single-pole Contact Block Type
• Interlocking
Groove
Contact
• Mounting
• M3.5 Terminal Screw Screw 1NO 1NC 1NO (early make) 1NC (late break)
BS BS010E BS001E BS010SE BS001SE
Type
BST BST010 BST001 BST010S BST001S
BST contact blocks are used for the following control units and are not
interchangeable with BS contact blocks.
(The BS housing is dark gray and the BST housing is light gray.)
• Pushlock turn reset and push turn lock switches
• LED illuminated pushbuttons
• Inspection
Window • Push Rod • LED/incandescent illuminated selector switches
• All models of diecast zinc housing control units
• Durable nylon 66 housing has a high resistance against alkalis.

• Silver contacts.
• Up to four blocks in two layers can be mounted onto each operator.
(06/02/17) 223
ø30 ø30 Series Control Units
LED Lamp
12V AC/DC BA9S/13 LSTD-1➁ 12V AC/DC ±10%
Full Voltage
6V AC/DC LETD-6➁ 6V AC/DC ±10%
12V AC/DC E12/15 LETD-8➁ 12V AC/DC ±10%
A: amber 24V AC/DC LETD-2➁ 24V AC/DC ±10%
G: green 100/110V AC/DC
Pilot Light PW: pure white 115V AC/DC
Illuminated Pushbutton R: red 120V AC/DC BA9S/13 LSTD-6➁
W: white Transformer 230V AC/DC 6V AC/DC ±10%
Y: yellow 240V AC/DC
380V AC/DC E12/15 LETD-6➁
400/440V AC/DC
(50/60 Hz)
BA9S/13 LSTD-6➁
DC-DC Converter 110V DC 6V AC/DC ±10%
E12/15 LETD-6➁

Incandescent Lamp
6V AC/DC LS-6 1W (6.3V)
12V AC/DC BA9S/13 LS-8 1W (18V)
24V AC/DC LS-3 1W (30V)
Full Voltage
6V AC/DC LE-6 2W (6.3V)
12V AC/DC E12/15 LE-8 2W (18V)
A: amber 24V AC/DC LE-3 12W (30V)
Pilot Light G: green
O: orange 100/110V AC/DC
Illuminated Pushbutton 115V AC/DC
R: red
Illuminated Selector Switch S: blue 120V AC/DC BA9S/13 LS-6 1W (6.3V)
W: white 200/220V AC/DC
230V AC/DC
Transformer
240V AC/DC
380V AC/DC
400/440V AC/DC E12/15 LE-8 2W (18V)
480V AC/DC
(50/60 Hz)

Lamp Base BA9S/13
A, R, W, Y: 17 mA
AC 11 mA 11 mA
Current G, PW, S: 8 mA
DC 10 mA 10 mA
G, PW, S: 5.5 mA
(The luminance is reduced to 50% the initial intensity when used on complete DC.)
A, R, W, Y A, R, W, Y
Internal Circuit
G, PW, S
LED Chip
Protection Diode
Zener Diode
224 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Control Units ø30
LED Lamp Ratings (LETD Type)
Type No. LETD-6➁ LETD-8➁ LETD-2➁
Lamp Base E12/15
A, R, W, Y: 17 mA
AC 7 mA 11 mA
Current G, S: 8 mA
DC 6.5 mA 10 mA
G, S: 5.5 mA
(The luminance is reduced to 50% the initial intensity when used on complete DC.)
A, R, W, Y A, R, W, Y
Internal Circuit
G, S
LED Chip
Protection Diode
Zener Diode

Lamp Base BA9S/13
Incandescent Lamp Ratings (LE Type)

Type No. LE-6 LE-8 LE-2 LE-3
Lamp Base E12/15
(06/02/17) 225
ø30 ø30 Series Control Units
Specifications
Dielectric Strength
(Full voltage type and pilot lights: 2,000V AC, 1 minute)
Shock Resistance
Pushbuttons
Maintained: 500,000
Illuminated pushbuttons
Maintained: 500,000
Mechanical Life Key selector switches: 500,000
(minimum operations) Illuminated selector switches: 500,000
Selector pushbuttons: 250,000
Mono-lever switches: 500,000
(Interlocking type): 250,000
Pushlock turn reset 500,000
Mushroom push-pull switch
Two contact blocks: 500,000
Four contact blocks: 200,000
Pushbuttons: 500,000 ∗1
Illuminated pushbuttons: 500,000 ∗1
Key selector switches: 500,000 ∗2
Illuminated selector switches: 500,000 ∗2
Selector pushbuttons: 250,000 ∗2
Electrical Life Mono-lever switches: 500,000 ∗3
(minimum operations) (Interlocking type): 250,000 ∗3
∗1 Switching frequency 1,800 operations/h, duty ratio 40% ∗4
∗4 Switching frequency 900 operations/h for square twin or twin
maintained types
Pushbuttons, pilot lights, illuminated pushbuttons, selector switches, selector
Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, (3S), 4, 5, 12,13 IP65
pushbuttons, mono-lever switches, and cam switches (ACSNO/ACSSO)
A∗∗∗∗
Illuminated selector switches, key pushbuttons, key reset pushbuttons, key
Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 5, 12, 13 IP54
cam switches, and key selector switches
U∗∗∗∗ Square pushbuttons, square pilot lights, and cam switches (UC) Type 1, 2 IP40
Note: (3S) of NEMA ICS 6-110 applies to the pilot lights with round lens.

(Twin Maintained Type)
∗The minimum mounting centers are applicable to switches with
R0.8 max. R0.8 max. one layer of contact blocks (two contact blocks). When two layers
ø3 4.8 +0.2
0 ✩
ø3 4.8 +0.2
0 ✩ of contact blocks (four contact blocks) are mounted, determine
0.5 0.5
+0
0 5
.
+0
0 5
. the minimum mounting centers in consideration of convenience
for wiring.
33 +0.5
33 +0.5
• Mushroom with shroud:

0
50 mm minimum
0
• Jumbo mushroom: 67 mm minimum

Round Unit: 42∗
Square Unit: 55
• Jumbo mushroom with shroud: 76 mm minimum

• Square twin: 55 mm minimum
50
• Selector switch with lever: 50 mm minimum

✩ The 4.8 mm recess is for preventing rotation and is not neces-
sary when the nameplate or anti-rotation ring is not used.
50∗
Note: For mounting hole layout of pushbuttons, mono-lever switches, and cam switches, see each section.
226 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Control Units (Ordering Information) ø30
• Black, green, and red buttons are included with flush push- terminal cover referring to page 271.
buttons.
• Full voltage type illuminated units are not supplied with a
• Terminal covers, nameplates, and accessories are ordered
separately.
ø30 Series Pushbuttons ø30 Series Illuminated Pushbuttons

ABN2 11 R - MAU ALFN2 116 13 D N R - MAU
Optional contact
Optional contact
Button color code
Lens color code
Lamp type
10: 1NO 01: 1NC
11: 1NO-1NC 20: 2NO
03: 3NC 31: 3NO-1NC 11: 1NO-1NC 20: 2NO
22: 2NO-2NC 13: 1NO-3NC 02: 2NC 31: 3NO-1NC
40: 4NO 04: 4NC 22: 2NO-2NC 13: 1NO-3NC
Note: 40: 4NO 04: 4NC
• Mushroom pull type ATN23 can have a maximum of two contact Operating voltage code
blocks. 99: Full voltage
• Mushroom push-pull return type ATN22 cannot have only NO or 16/18: Transformer (100/110V AC)
only NC contacts. 116/118: Transformer (115V AC)
126/128: Transformer (120V AC)
• No other contact configurations are available for square twin type 26/28: Transformer (200/220V AC)
UWQN1 than those specified in this catalog. 236/238: Transformer (230V AC)
ø30 Series Pilot Lights 46/48: Transformer (400/440V AC)
APN1 116 D R 16∗D: DC-DC converter (110V DC)
Lens color code Note:
Lamp type • Illuminated pushbuttons cannot have an odd number of contact
D: LED (Transformer type only) blocks, such as 1NO, 1NC, 3NO, 2NO-1NC, 1NO-2NC, and 3NC.
(blank): Incandescent • Transformer and DC-DC converter types contain an LED lamp
Operating voltage code (LSTD-6➁ or LETD-6➁) or incandescent lamp (LS-6, 1W or LE-8,
99: Full voltage 2W).
16/18: Transformer (100/110V AC) • LED lamps cannot be used on 480V AC transformers.
• DC-DC converter is available with LED lamps only.
26/28: Transformer (200/220V AC) • Operating voltage codes 18, 118, 128, 28, 238, 248, 388, 48, and
236/238: Transformer (230V AC) 488 are available for incandescent types only.
46/48: Transformer (400/440V AC)
Note:
(LSTD-6➁ or LETD-6➁) or incandescent lamp (LS-6, 1W or LE-8,
2W).
• LED lamps cannot be used on 480V AC transformers.
• DC-DC converter is available with LED lamps only.
• Operating voltage codes 18, 118, 128, 28, 238, 248, 388, 48, and
488 are available for incandescent types only.
(06/02/17) 227
ø30 ø30 Series Control Units (Ordering Information)
ø30 Series Selector Switch ø30 Series Illuminated Selector Switch
ASN 2 L 11 - MAU ASLN 2 16 22 D N R - MAU
Optional contact Optional contact
MAU: Gold-plated silver contact MAU: Gold-plated silver contact
99: Full voltage
ø30 Series Key Selector Switch 16: Transformer (100/110V AC)
ASN 2 K 20 B - MAU 136: Transformer (120V AC)
Optional contact 26: Transformer (200/220V AC)
MAU: Gold-plated silver contact 236: Transformer (230V AC)
Key removable position code 256: Transformer (240V AC)
• Maintained
B: Removable in left only Number of positions
C: Removable in right only Note:
• Spring return from right • Full voltage type is not supplied with a lamp.
(blank): Removable in left only • Transformer type contain an LED lamp (LSTD-6➁) or incandes-
• Spring return from left cent lamp (LS-6, 1W).
(blank): Removable in right only • LED lamps cannot be used on 480VAC transformers.
3-position
• Maintained
Number of positions
Note:
228 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Pushbuttons ø30
Flush / Extended / Extended w/Half Shroud / Extended w/Full Shroud Types

Type Code
Flush 1NO ABN110➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
ABN1 1NC ABN101➀
ø35
36
1NO-1NC ABN111➀ Black (B), green
Momentary
2NO ABN120➀ (G), and red (R) 6 23 40
buttons are sup- 46 (1 or
2NC ABN102➀
plied with each 2 blocks) 9
2NO-2NC ABN122➀ unit. 69 (3 or 4 blocks)
Flush 1NO AON110➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
AON1 Specify Y or W
1NC AON101➀
when a yellow or
ø35
1NO-1NC AON111➀
36
white button is
Maintained required.
2NO AON120➀ 6 23 40
2NC AON102➀ 68 (1 to 2 blocks)
91 (3 to 4 blocks) 9
2NO-2NC AON122➀
Extended 1NO ABN210➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
ABN2 1NC ABN201➀
ø35
ø25
36
1NO-1NC ABN211➀
Momentary
2NO ABN220➀ 6 23 40
46 (1 or 9
2NC ABN202➀ 2 blocks) 15.5
2NO-2NC ABN222➀ 69 (3 or 4 blocks)
Extended 1NO AON210➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
AON2 1NC AON201➀
ø35
ø25
1NO-1NC AON211➀
36
Maintained
2NO AON220➀ 6 23 40
2NC AON202➀ 68 (1 to 2 blocks) 9
91 (3 to 4 blocks) 15.5
2NO-2NC AON222➀
Extended with Half Shroud 1NO ABN2G10➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 4
ABN2G 1NC ABN2G01➀
ø25
ø27
ø35
Specify a button
36
1NO-1NC ABN2G11➀
Momentary color code in
2NO ABN2G20➀ place of ➀ in the 6 23 40
42 (1 or
2NC ABN2G02➀ Type No. 2 blocks) 20.5
2NO-2NC ABN2G22➀ 65 (3 or 4 blocks)
B: black
Extended with Half Shroud 1NO AON2G10➀ G: green M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 4
AON2G R: red
1NC AON2G01➀
W: white
ø25
ø35
ø27
1NO-1NC AON2G11➀
36
Maintained Y: yellow
2NO AON2G20➀ 6 23 40
2NC AON2G02➀ 64 (1 or 2 blocks)
87 (3 or 4 blocks) 20.5
2NO-2NC AON2G22➀
Extended with Full Shroud 1NO ABN2F10➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
ABN2F 1NC ABN2F01➀

ø28.5
ø35
ø25
36
1NO-1NC ABN2F11➀
Momentary
2NO ABN2F20➀ 6 23 40
46 (1 or
2NC ABN2F02➀ 2 blocks) 17
2NO-2NC ABN2F22➀ 69 (3 or 4 blocks)
Extended with Full Shroud 1NO AON2F10➀ Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
M3.5 Terminal Screw
AON2F
1NC AON2F01➀
ø28.5
ø25
ø35
1NO-1NC AON2F11➀
36
Maintained
2NO AON2F20➀ 6 23 40
2NC AON2F02➀ 68 (1 or 2 blocks)
91 (3 or 4 blocks) 17
2NO-2NC AON2F22➀
(06/02/17) 229
ø30 ø30 Series Pushbuttons
Mushroom / Jumbo Mushroom / Square Flush / Square Extended Types

Type Code
Mushroom 1NO ABN310➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
ABN3
1NC ABN301➀
ø40
36
1NO-1NC ABN311➀
Momentary
2NO ABN320➀ 6 23 40
46 (1 or
2NC ABN302➀ 2 blocks) 21
2NO-2NC ABN322➀ 69 (3 or 4 blocks)
Mushroom 1NO AON310➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
AON3
1NC AON301➀ B: black
G: green
ø40
1NO-1NC AON311➀
36
Maintained R: red
2NO AON320➀ W: white 6 23 40
2NC AON302➀ Y: yellow 68 (1 or 2 blocks)
91 (3 or 4 blocks) 21
2NO-2NC AON322➀
Mushroom with Full Shroud 1NO ABN3G10➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6.5
ABN3G 1NC ABN3G01➀
ø48
1NO-1NC ABN3G11➀
Momentary
2NO ABN3G20➀ 6 23
44 (1 or
2NC ABN3G02➀ 2 blocks) 23
2NO-2NC ABN3G22➀ 67 (3 or 4 blocks)
Palm Mushroom 1NO ABN410➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw

ABN4 1NC ABN401➀
ø74
1NO-1NC ABN411➀
Momentary 6 23
2NO ABN420➀
46 (1 or
2NC ABN402➀ 2 blocks) 35
69 (3 or 4 blocks)
2NO-2NC ABN422➀
Jumbo Mushroom with 1NO ABN4G10➀ Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
M3.5 Terminal Screw
Shallow Shroud
1NC ABN4G01➀
ABN4G
ø75
ø65
1NO-1NC ABN4G11➀ B: black
Momentary G: green
2NO ABN4G20➀ 6 23
R: red
46 (1 or
2NC ABN4G02➀ 2 blocks) 28
69 (3 or 4 blocks)
2NO-2NC ABN4G22➀
Jumbo Mushroom with Deep 1NO ABN4F10➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw
Shroud 1NC ABN4F01➀
ABN4F
ø75
1NO-1NC ABN4F11➀
Momentary 6 23
2NO ABN4F20➀
46 (1 or
2NC ABN4F02➀ 2 blocks) 32.5
69 (3 or 4 blocks)
2NO-2NC ABN4F22➀
Square Flush 1NO UBQN110➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 5.5
UBQN1
1NC UBQN101➀
34
52.2
36
1NO-1NC UBQN111➀
Momentary
2NO UBQN120➀ 6 23
47.5 (1 or 40
2NC UBQN102➀ 2 blocks) 14
B: black 44
2NO-2NC UBQN122➀ G: green (3
70.5 or 4 blocks)
Square Extended 1NO UBQN210➀ R: red M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 5.5
UBQN2 Y: yellow
1NC UBQN201➀
52.2
34
36
1NO-1NC UBQN211➀
Momentary
2NO UBQN220➀ 6 23
47.5 (1 or 40
2NC UBQN202➀ 2 blocks) 20 44
2NO-2NC UBQN222➀ 70.5 (3 or 4 blocks)

230 (06/02/17)
Pushlock Turn Reset / Pushlock Key Reset / Push Turn Lock /

Key ON/OFF Lock / Toggle Lever Types
➀ Button Color
Code
Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset 1NO AVN310N➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
AVN3 1NC AVN301N➀
ø40
36
1NO-1NC AVN311N➀ R: red
2NO AVN320N➀ Y: yellow 5.5 23 40
53 (1 or
2NC AVN302N➀ 2 blocks) 24
2NO-2NC AVN322N➀ 76 (3 or 4 blocks)
Mushroom Pushlock Key Reset 1NO ABN3K10➀ Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5 FR
M3.5 Terminal Screw EE
ABN3K
1NC ABN3K01➀
B: black
ø40
1NO-1NC ABN3K11➀
36
G: green
2NO ABN3K20➀ R: red
6 23 40
Y: yellow
2NC ABN3K02➀ 53 (1 or 2
blocks) 24 23.5
2NO-2NC ABN3K22➀ 76 (3 or 4 blocks)
FR
Jumbo Mushroom 1NO ABN4K10➀ Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5 EE
M3.5 Terminal Screw
Pushlock Key Reset
1NC ABN4K01➀
ABN4K
B: black
ø65
1NO-1NC ABN4K11➀
G: green
2NO ABN4K20➀ R: red 6 23
2NC ABN4K02➀ 53 (1 or 2
blocks) 23 23.5
2NO-2NC ABN4K22➀ 76 (3 or 4 blocks)
Mushroom Push Turn Lock 1NO AJN310N➀ Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
M3.5 Terminal Screw
AJN3 1NC AJN301N➀ L
B: black H
OC
PUS
ø40
K
1NO-1NC AJN311N➀
36
G: green
2NO AJN320N➀ R: red 23
5.5 40
Y: yellow
2NC AJN302N➀ 53 (1 or 2
blocks) 24
2NO-2NC AJN322N➀ 76 (3 or 4 blocks)
Key ON/OFF Lock 1NO ABN510 Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5

LOCK
M3.5 Terminal Screw 90°
ABN5 1NC ABN501 ø35
ø25
1NO-1NC ABN511
36
–
2NO ABN520 6 23 40
2NC ABN502 54 (1 or 2
blocks) 23 23.5
2NO-2NC ABN522 77 (3 or 4 blocks)
Toggle Lever 1NO ATN410 M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 5.5
ATN4 1NC ATN401
ø35
36
1NO-1NC ATN411
Lever: black
2NO ATN420 6 23 40
44 (1 or
2NC ATN402 2 blocks) 25
2NO-2NC ATN422 67 (3 or 4 blocks)

• Cylinder (metal): Chrome-plated
• Pushlock Turn Reset: Button is maintained when pressed and is reset when turned clockwise. Red buttons only.
Note: AVN3 pushlock turn reset switches cannot be used as emergency stop switches. When emergency stop switches are required, use the
HN1E series emergency stop switches (ISO 13850 and IEC 60947-5-5 compliant).
• Pushlock Key Reset: Button is maintained when pressed and is reset with a key. Key is removable from both depressed and reset posi-
tions. Two keys are supplied.
• Push Turn Lock: Button is locked when turned clockwise in the depressed position and is reset when turned counterclockwise.
• Key ON/OFF Lock: Button can be locked in both depressed and reset positions.
• Toggle Lever: ON and OFF are indicated on the cap.
(06/02/17) 231
ø30 ø30 Series Pushbuttons
Pull / Push-Pull / Pin Lock Types

➀ Button Color
Code
Mushroom Pull 1NO ATN2310➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
ATN23
1NO-1NC ATN2311➀
ø40
36
2NO ATN2320➀ 6 23 40
38.5
2NC ATN2302➀ 53 (1 or 2 blocks)
Mushroom Push-Pull M3.5 Terminal Screw

1NO-1NC ATN2111➀ Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
ATN21
B: black
2NO ATN2120➀
ø40
36
G: green
R: red
2NC ATN2102➀ Y: yellow 6 23 40
53 (1 or 2
blocks) 38.5
2NO-2NC ATN2122➀ (3
76 or 4 blocks)
Mushroom Push-Pull M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5

(Spring Return) 1NO-1NC ATN2211➀
ATN22
ø40
36
2NO-2N 6 23 40
53 (1 or 2
ATN2222➀ blocks) 38.5
C 76 (3 or 4 blocks)
Pin Lock 1NO ABN8P10 Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5

ABN8P M3.5 Terminal Screw
1NC ABN8P01
ø28
ø35
1NO-1NC ABN8P11
36
51
–
2NO ABN8P20 6 23
2NC ABN8P02 44.5 (1 or 40

2 blocks) 26.5 49
2NO-2NC ABN8P22 67 (3 or 4 blocks)
Pin Lock (ON Lock Type) 1NO ABN8P10-TK231-1 Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
M3.5 Terminal Screw
ABN8P∗∗ 1NC ABN8P01-TK231-1
-TK231-1
ø28
ø35
1NO-1NC ABN8P11-TK231-1
36
51
–
2NO ABN8P20-TK231-1 6 23
2NC ABN8P02-TK231-1 44 (1 or 2 40
blocks) 25.4 49
2NO-2NC ABN8P22-TK231-1 67 (3 or 4 blocks)

• Square bezel (metal): Chrome-plated
• Pull: Pulling the button operates the contacts. Up to 2 contact blocks (1 layer) can be mounted on pull switches.
• Push-Pull: Button is maintained in both depressed and reset positions.
• Push-Pull (Spring Return): Pushing or pulling the button operates the contacts. Button is spring-returned to the center position.
• Pin Lock: Button can be locked in either depressed or reset position by inserting the pin. Pad lock with a ø6mm pin can also be used to lock
the button.
• Pin Lock (ON Lock Type): Button is locked in the depressed position by inserting the pin. Button cannot be locked in the reset position.
• Contact Operation
Pull Switch (Spring Return) Push-Pull Switch (Maintained) Push-Pull (Spring Return) Switch
ATN23 ATN21 ATN22
Contact Contact Contact
Normal Pull Push Pull Push Normal Pull
1NO 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC
1NC 2NO 2NO-2NC
1NO-1NC 2NC
2NO 2NO-2NC
2NC
232 (06/02/17)
Square Twin / Twin Maintained Types

Shape Contact Type No. Button Color Dimensions (mm)
Square Twin (Momentary) ON OFF
UWQN1
1NO 1NO UWQN11010 M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 13
O N
42
ON: Black OFF
1NO 1NC UWQN11001 OFF: Red 6 23 36
47 (1 or 53
2 blocks) 15.5
70 (3 or 4 blocks)
2NO 2NC UWQN12002
Square Twin (Maintained) ON OFF

UWQN2
1NO – UWQN21000
M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 13
1NC – UWQN20100 ON
42
ON: Black OFF
1NO-1NC – UWQN21100 OFF: Red
6 23 36
47 (1 block) 53
70 (2 blocks) 15.5
2NO – UWQN22000
2NC – UWQN20200
Flush Twin Maintained Top Bottom

ABBN11
1NO – ABBN1110 Black (B), green M3.5 Terminal Screw 9
(G), and red (R)
1NC – ABBN1101 buttons are sup-
plied with each
50
86
1NO-1NC – ABBN1111 unit.
ø35
2NO – ABBN1120 Other color buttons
are separately 57 Panel 40
2NC – ABBN1102 ordered. 80 Thickness
0.8 to 7.5
See page 276.
2NO-2NC – ABBN1122
Mushroom Twin Maintained Top Bottom
(Without buttons)
ABBN33 1NO – ABBN3310 M3.5 Terminal Screw 21
1NC – ABBN3301
Order buttons sep-
50
86
1NO-1NC – ABBN3311 arately.
ø40
See page 276.

2NO – ABBN3320
57 Panel 40
2NC – ABBN3302 80 Thickness
0.8 to 7.5
2NO-2NC – ABBN3322

• Square Twin (Momentary): Two independent momentary switches are contained in one unit, each operated by ON or OFF button. With the
ø30 adapter removed form the sleeve, the unit can mount in a ø25.5mm mounting hole for the ø25 series.
• Square Twin (Maintained): The contact operates when ON button is pressed and is maintained in the depressed position. The button is
reset by pressing the OFF button.
• Twin Maintained: The contact operates when the top button is pressed and is maintained in the depressed position. The button is reset by
pressing the bottom button.
Different combinations of flush, extended buttons, and colors are available (ABN1B-∗, ABN2B-∗). See page 277.
Mushroom buttons for the ABBN33 are ordered separately. Specify the color code (ABN3B-∗). See page 277.
(06/02/17) 233
ø30 ø30 Series Pilot Lights
Dome Types
Lamp ➁ Lens/LED Applicable
Shape Lamp Input Type Type No.
Receptacle Color Code Lamp
Dome A: amber
APN1 C: clear LSTD
BA9S APN199➁
APNE1 G: green LS (1W)
O: orange
R: red
S: blue LETD
E12 APNE199➁
W: white LE (2W)
Y: yellow
BA9S APN1➂DN➁ A: amber LSTD-6➁
Transformer G: green
E12 APNE1➂DN➁ PW: pure white∗∗ LETD-6➁
LED R: red
BA9S APN116DDN➁ S: blue LSTD-6➁
DC-DC Converter∗ W: white
E12 APNE116DDN➁ Y: yellow LETD-6➁
C: clear
BA9S APN1➂➁ G: green LS-6 (1W)
O: orange
R: red
E12 APN1➂➁ S: blue LE-8 (2W)
W: white
• Operating Voltage Code

LED Transformer BA9S and E12 Types
Incandescent Transformer E12 Type
Incandescent Transformer BA9S Type
16: 100/110V AC 18: 100/110V AC
116: 115V AC 118: 115V AC
126: 120V AC 128: 120V AC
26: 200/220V AC 28: 200/220V AC
236: 230V AC 238: 230V AC
246: 240V AC 248: 240V AC
386: 380V AC 388: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC 48: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC (incandescent only) 488: 480V AC
• Specify a lens/LED color code in place of ➁ in the Type No. Use the white lens (W) for LED pure white illumination.
• LED illuminated transformer and DC-DC converter types contain an LED lamp: LSTD-6➁ or LETD-6➁ (rated voltage 6V AC/DC).
• Incandescent illuminated transformer types contain an incandescent lamp: LS-6 (1W, 6V AC/DC) or LE-8 (2W, 18V AC/DC).
∗ DC-DC converter types are not approved by UL and CSA, and not CE compliant (operating voltage 90 to 140V DC).
∗∗ Pure white is available for BA9S lamp base types only.
Dimensions
• Full Voltage Type

M3 Terminal Screw
ø35
36
21.5 23.5 40
M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5

ø35
36
58.5 23.5 40
234 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Pilot Lights ø30
Square / Rectangular (Marking) Types

Square A: amber
UPQN3B C: clear
G: green
O: orange LSTD
Without Lamp Full Voltage BA9S UPQN3B99➁
R: red LS (1W)
S: blue
W: white
Y: yellow
A: amber
Transformer BA9S UPQN3B➂D➁ G: green LSTD-6➁
R: red
LED
S: blue
DC-DC Converter∗ BA9S UPQN3B16DD➁ W: white LSTD-6➁
Y: yellow
C: clear
G: green
O: orange
Incandescent Transformer BA9S UPQN3B➂➁ LS-6 (1W)
R: red
S: blue
W: white
Rectangular (Marking Type) A: amber
UPQN4 G: green
O: orange
LSTD
Without Lamp Full Voltage BA9S UPQN499➁ R: red
LS (1W)
S: blue
W: white
Y: yellow
A: amber
Transformer BA9S UPQN4➂D➁ G: green LSTD-6➁
R: red
LED
S: blue
DC-DC Converter∗ BA9S UPQN416DD➁ W: white LSTD-6➁
Y: yellow
G: green
O: orange
Incandescent Transformer BA9S UPQN4➂➁ R: red LS-6 (1W)
S: blue
W: white
Rectangular (Marking Type) A: amber
UPQNE4 G: green
UPQN4 O: orange
LETD
Without Lamp Full Voltage E12 UPQNE499➁ R: red
LE (2W)
S: blue
W: white
Y: yellow
A: amber
Transformer E12 UPQNE4➂D➁ G: green LETD-6➁
R: red
LED
S: blue
DC-DC Converter∗ E12 UPQNE416DD➁ W: white LETD-6➁
Y: yellow
G: green
O: orange
Incandescent Transformer E12 UPQN4➂➁ R: red LE-8 (2W)
S: blue
W: white
(06/02/17) 235
ø30 ø30 Series Pilot Lights
16: 100/110V AC 18: 100/110V AC
116: 115V AC 118: 115V AC
126: 120V AC 128: 120V AC
26: 200/220V AC 28: 200/220V AC
236: 230V AC 238: 230V AC
246: 240V AC 248: 240V AC
386: 380V AC 388: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC 48: 400/440V AC
• On the rectangular marking type, a clear lens and a color marking plate are used for white illumination.
• Marking plate for the rectangular marking type: 24 × 30 mm, 2 mm thick
∗ DC-DC converter types are not approved by UL and CSA, and not CE compliant (operating voltage 90 to 140V DC).
Dimensions
• Square Full Voltage Type • Rectangular Full Voltage Type • Rectangular Full Voltage Type
UPQN3B UPQN4 UPQNE4
Panel Thickness 0.8 to 5.5 Panel Thickness 0.8 to 4.5
M3 Terminal M3 Terminal Panel Thickness 0.8 to 4.5
Screw M3 Terminal
Screw
Screw
34 × 40
34 × 40
34
52.2
52.2
36
36
52.2
36
23 20 40 29.5 10.5 40 36.5 10.5 40
44 44
• Square Transformer Type • Rectangular Transformer Type • Rectangular Transformer Type

• Square DC-DC Converter Type • Rectangular DC-DC Converter Type • Rectangular DC-DC Converter Type
UPQN3B UPQN4 UPQNE4
M3.5 Terminal M3.5 Terminal M3.5 Terminal

Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 5.5 Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 4.5 Panel Thickness 0.8 to 4.5
Screw
34 × 40
30 × 36
30 × 36
34 × 40
52.2
34
25
52.2
52.2
36
36
36
60 20 40 66 10.5 40 74 10.5 40
44 44
• Reflector • Panel Mounting

1. The lamp housing of the square type LED illuminated 1. Tighten the square ring to the operator and position the
pilot lights has a built-in reflector. ring correctly.
2. Make sure that the reflector does not fall off when 2. Lightly tighten the screw to secure the pilot light onto the
removing the lens or marking plate. panel.
3. When replacing the LED lamp of UPQNE4 (rectangular)
Screw
type, use a lamp holder tool (OR-55).
4. To remove the reflector, insert a flat screwdriver inside
the groove of the reflector and lightly push out.
Tighten the screw
Groove lightly so that the panel
does not bend.
Recommended
tightening torque: 0.15 N·m
236 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Pilot Lights ø30
Incandescent Push-to-Check Types (1W)

Push-to-Check
APN1∗P
Without Lamp Full Voltage BA9S APN199P➁ LS (1W)
C: clear
G: green
O: orange
R: red
S: blue
W: white
Incandescent Transformer BA9S APN1➂P➁ LS-6 (1W)

16: 100/110V AC
116: 115V AC
126: 120V AC
26: 200/220V AC
236: 230V AC
246: 240V AC
386: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC
• Specify a lens color code in place of ➁ in the Type No.
• Full voltage types do not contain a lamp. Order incandescent lamps separately. For lamps, see page 279.
• .Transformer types contain an incandescent lamp: LS-6 (1W, 6V AC/DC).
Circuit Example
START
STOP OLS
M Note: The lamp of push-to-check pilot light is not connected to the contact terminal.
To connect, refer to the diagram on the left.
M L
Push-to-Check
Pilot Light
Dimensions
• Push-to-Check
APN1∗∗P
M3 Lamp Terminal Screw
M3.5 Terminal Screw M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5

Screw
ø35
36
6 23 40
A: 62.5
B: 96.5 23.5 A: Full voltage type
B: Transformer type
(06/02/17) 237
ø30 ø30 Series Illuminated Pushbuttons
LED Round Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons

Lamp Operation Applicable
Receptacle Type Lamp
Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALN29911DN➁
ALN2 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALN29920DN➁ LSTD
AOLN2
2NC ALN29902DN➁
ALNE2 Momentary
AOLNE2 1NO-1NC ALN2➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO ALN2➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC ALN2➂02DN➁
BA9S
1NO-1NC AOLN29911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLN29920DN➁ LSTD
2NC AOLN29902DN➁
Maintained
1NO-1NC AOLN2➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO AOLN2➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC AOLN2➂02DN➁
1NO-1NC ALNE29911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALNE29920DN➁ LETD
2NC ALNE29902DN➁
Momentary
1NO-1NC ALNE2➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO ALNE2➂20DN➁ LETD-6➁
2NC ALNE2➂02DN➁
E12
1NO-1NC AOLNE29911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLNE29920DN➁ LETD
2NC AOLNE29902DN➁
Maintained
1NO-1NC AOLNE2➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO AOLNE2➂20DN➁ LETD-6➁
2NC AOLNE2➂02DN➁

LED Illuminated Type LED Transformer BA9S and E12 Types
Specify a lens/LED color code in place of ➁ in the Type No. Specify an operating voltage code in place of ➂ in the Type No.
A: amber 16: 100/110V AC

G: green 116: 115V AC
PW: pure white (BA9S type only) 126: 120V AC
R: red 26: 200/220V AC
S: blue 236: 230V AC
46: 400/440V AC
Use the white lens (W) for LED pure white illumination.
• Full voltage types do not contain a lamp. Order LED lamps separately. For lamps, see page 279.
• LED illuminated transformer types contain an LED lamp: LSTD-6➁ or LETD-6➁ (rated voltage 6V AC/DC).
Dimensions
• ALN2/AOLN2 • ALN2/AOLN2
BA9S/Full Voltage BA9S/Transformer
M3 Terminal M3.5 Terminal
Screw Screw M3.5 Terminal
Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5 Screws Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
ø40
ø35
ø40
ø24
ø35
ø24
5.5 23 9 40 23 40
9
63 (2 blocks) 23.5 23.5
97.5 (2 blocks)
86 (4 blocks) 120.5 (4 blocks)
• ALNE2/AOLNE2 • ALNE2/AOLNE2
E12/Full Voltage E12/Transformer
M3 Terminal M3.5 Terminal
Screw Screw M3.5 Terminal
ø40
ø35
ø40
ø35
ø24
ø24
5.5 23 9 40 23 9 40
77.5 (2 blocks) 20 112 (2 blocks) 20
100.5 (4 blocks) 135 (4 blocks) All dimensions in mm.
238 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Illuminated Pushbuttons ø30
Incandescent Round Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons

Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALN9911➁
ALN Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALN9920➁ LS (1W)
ALNE
2NC ALN9902➁
Momentary
1NO-1NC ALN➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALN➂20➁ LS-6
2NC ALN➂02➁
BA9S
1NO-1NC AOLN9911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLN9920➁ LS (1W)
2NC AOLN9902➁
Maintained
1NO-1NC AOLN➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLN➂20➁ LS-6
2NC AOLN➂02➁
1NO-1NC ALNE9911➁
AOLN
AOLNE Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALNE9920➁ LE (2W)
2NC ALNE9902➁
Momentary
1NO-1NC ALN➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALN➂20➁ LE-8
2NC ALN➂02➁
E12
1NO-1NC AOLNE9911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLNE9920➁ LE (2W)
2NC AOLNE9902➁
Maintained
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLN➂20➁ LE-8
2NC AOLN➂02➁

➁ Lens Color Code ➂ Operating Voltage Code
Incandescent Illuminated Type Incandescent Transformer BA9S Type Incandescent Transformer E12 Type
Specify a lens color code in place of ➁ in the Type No. Specify an operating voltage code in place of ➂ in the Type No.
C: clear 16: 100/110V AC 18: 100/110V AC
G: green 116: 115V AC 118: 115V AC
O: orange 126: 120V AC 128: 120V AC
R: red 26: 200/220V AC 28: 200/220V AC
S: blue 236: 230V AC 238: 230V AC
W: white 246: 240V AC 248: 240V AC
386: 380V AC 388: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC 48: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC 488: 480V AC
Dimensions
• ALN Momentary • ALN Momentary • AOLN Maintained • AOLN Maintained
BA9S/Full Voltage BA9S/Transformer BA9S/Full Voltage BA9S/Transformer
M3 Terminal Screw M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness M3 Terminal Screw M3.5 Terminal
Screw Screws 0.8 to 7.5 Screw Screws Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
0.8 to 7.5 0.8 to 7.5
ø24.6
ø24.6
ø24.6
ø24.6
ø35
ø35
ø35
ø35
36
6 23 23 6 23 23 40
62.5 (2 blocks) 18.5 96.5 (2 blocks) 18.5 84.5 (2 blocks) 18.5 118.5 (2 blocks) 18.5
85.5 (4 blocks) 119.5 (4 blocks) 107.5 (4 blocks) 141.5 (4 blocks)
• ALNE Momentary • ALNE Momentary • AOLNE Maintained • AOLNE Maintained

E12/Full Voltage E12/Transformer E12/Full Voltage E12/Transformer
M3 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness M3 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness
Screw Screws 0.8 to 7.5 Screw M3.5 Terminal Screws Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
0.8 to 7.5 0.8 to 7.5
ø24.6
ø24.6
ø24.6
ø24.6
ø35
ø35
ø35
ø35
36
6 23 23 6 23 23 40
69.5 (2 blocks) 18.5 103.5 (2 blocks) 18.5 91.5 (2 blocks) 18.5 125.5 (2 blocks) 18.5
92.5 (4 blocks) 126.5 (4 blocks) 114.5 (4 blocks) 148.5 (4 blocks)
(06/02/17) 239
LED Round Extended with Half Shroud Illuminated Pushbuttons

Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALGN29911DN➁
ALGN2 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALGN29920DN➁ LSTD
AOLGN2
2NC ALGN29902DN➁
ALGNE2 Momentary
AOLGNE2 1NO-1NC ALGN2➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO ALGN2➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC ALGN2➂02DN➁
BA9S
1NO-1NC AOLGN29911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLGN29920DN➁ LSTD
2NC AOLGN29902DN➁
Maintained
1NO-1NC AOLGN2➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO AOLGN2➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC AOLGN2➂02DN➁
1NO-1NC ALGNE29911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALGNE29920DN➁ LETD
2NC ALGNE29902DN➁
Momentary
1NO-1NC ALGNE2➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO ALGNE2➂20DN➁ LETD-6➁
2NC ALGNE2➂02DN➁
E12
1NO-1NC AOLGNE29911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLGNE29920DN➁ LETD
2NC AOLGNE29902DN➁
Maintained
1NO-1NC AOLGNE2➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO AOLGNE2➂20DN➁ LETD-6➁
2NC AOLGNE2➂02DN➁

A: amber 16: 100/110V AC

R: red 26: 200/220V AC
46: 400/440V AC
Dimensions
• ALGN2/AOLGN2 • ALGN2/AOLGN2
M3.5 Terminal
M3.5 Terminal Screw
Screws Panel Thickness 0.8 to 3.5
ø40
ø40
ø27
ø27
ø35
ø35
ø24
ø24
5.5 23 23
40 40
59.5 (2 blocks) 27.5 94 (2 blocks) 27.5
82.5 (4 blocks) 117 (4 blocks)
• ALGNE2/AOLGNE2 • ALGNE2/AOLGNE2
M3.5 Terminal Screw M3.5 Terminal
M3 Terminal Screw
ø27
ø40
ø40
ø27
ø35
ø35
ø24
ø24
5.5 23 23
23.5 40 40
74 (2 blocks) 108.5 (2 blocks) 23.5
97 (4 blocks) 131.5 (4 blocks) All dimensions in mm.
240 (06/02/17)
Incandescent Round Extended with Half Shroud Illuminated Pushbuttons

Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALN9G911➁
ALN∗G Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALN9G920➁ LS (1W)
ALNE∗G
2NC ALN9G902➁
BA9S Momentary
1NO-1NC ALN➂11➁
2NC ALN➂02➁
1NO-1NC ALNE9G911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALNE9G920➁ LE (2W)
2NC ALNE9G902➁
E12 Momentary
1NO-1NC ALN➂11➁
2NC ALN➂02➁

C: clear 1G6: 100/110V AC 1G8: 100/110V AC
G: green 11G6: 115V AC 11G8: 115V AC
O: orange 12G6: 120V AC 12G8: 120V AC
R: red 2G6: 200/220V AC 2G8: 200/220V AC
S: blue 23G6: 230V AC 23G8: 230V AC
W: white 24G6: 240V AC 24G8: 240V AC
38G6: 380V AC 38G8: 380V AC
4G6: 400/440V AC 4G8: 400/440V AC
48G6: 480V AC 48G8: 480V AC
Dimensions
• ALN∗∗G Momentary • ALN∗∗G Momentary
M3 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 4
ø24.6
ø24.6
ø27
ø27
ø35
ø35
36
36
6 23 23
40 40
58 (2 blocks) 23 92 (2 blocks) 23
81 (4 blocks) 115 (4 blocks)
• ALNE∗∗G Momentary • ALNE∗∗G Momentary

ø24.6
ø24.6
ø27
ø35
ø27
ø35
36
36
6 23 23
40 40
65 (2 blocks) 23 99 (2 blocks) 23
(06/02/17) 241
LED Round Extended with Full Shroud Illuminated Pushbuttons

Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALFN29911DN➁
ALFN2 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALFN29920DN➁ LSTD
AOLFN2
2NC ALFN29902DN➁
ALFNE2 Momentary
AOLFNE2 1NO-1NC ALFN2➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO ALFN2➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC ALFN2➂02DN➁
BA9S
1NO-1NC AOLFN29911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLFN29920DN➁ LSTD
2NC AOLFN29902DN➁
Maintained
1NO-1NC AOLFN2➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO AOLFN2➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC AOLFN2➂02DN➁
1NO-1NC ALFNE29911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALFNE29920DN➁ LETD
2NC ALFNE29902DN➁
Momentary
1NO-1NC ALFNE2➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO ALFNE2➂20DN➁ LETD-6➁
2NC ALFNE2➂02DN➁
E12
1NO-1NC AOLFNE29911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLFNE29920DN➁ LETD
2NC AOLFNE29902DN➁
Maintained
1NO-1NC AOLFNE2➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO AOLFNE2➂20DN➁ LETD-6➁
2NC AOLFNE2➂02DN➁

A: amber 16: 100/110V AC

R: red 26: 200/220V AC
46: 400/440V AC
Dimensions
• ALFN2/AOLFN2 • ALFN2/AOLFN2
M3 Terminal
Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 5.5
ø29.5
ø29.5
ø40
ø40
ø35
ø35
5.5 23 40 23 40
61.5 (2 blocks) 25 96 (2 blocks) 25
• ALFNE2/AOLFNE2 • ALFNE2/AOLFNE2
Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6 Screws Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
M3 Terminal Screw
ø29.5
ø29.5
ø40
ø35
ø35
ø40
5 23 40 23 40
76.5 (2 blocks) 21 111 (2 blocks) 21
242 (06/02/17)
Incandescent Round Extended with Full Shroud Illuminated Pushbuttons

Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALN9F911➁
ALN∗F Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALN9F920➁ LS (1W)
ALNE∗F
2NC ALN9F902➁
Momentary
1NO-1NC ALN➂11➁
2NC ALN➂02➁
BA9S
1NO-1NC AOLN9F911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLN9F920➁ LS (1W)
2NC AOLN9F902➁
Maintained
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLN➂20➁ LS-6
2NC AOLN➂02➁
1NO-1NC ALNE9F911➁
AOLN∗F
AOLNE∗F Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALNE9F920➁ LE (2W)
2NC ALNE9F902➁
Momentary
1NO-1NC ALN➂11➁
2NC ALN➂02➁
E12
1NO-1NC AOLNE9F911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLNE9F920➁ LE (2W)
2NC AOLNE9F902➁
Maintained
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLN➂20➁ LE-8
2NC AOLN➂02➁

C: clear 1F6: 100/110V AC 1F8: 100/110V AC
G: green 11F6: 115V AC 11F8: 115V AC
O: orange 12F6: 120V AC 12F8: 120V AC
R: red 2F6: 200/220V AC 2F8: 200/220V AC
S: blue 23F6: 230V AC 23F8: 230V AC
W: white 24F6: 240V AC 24F8: 240V AC
38F6: 380V AC 38F8: 380V AC
4F6: 400/440V AC 4F8: 400/440V AC
48F6: 480V AC 48F8: 480V AC
Dimensions
• ALN∗∗F Momentary • ALN∗∗F Momentary • AOLN∗∗F Maintained • ALON∗∗F Maintained
M3.5 Terminal
M3.5 Terminal
Screw M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness Screw Panel Thickness M3.5 Terminal
M3 Terminal Panel Thickness Screws 0.8 to 5 M3 Terminal Panel Thickness 0.8 to 5
0.8 to 5 Screws
Screw 0.8 to 5 Screw
ø29.5
ø29.5
ø29.5
ø29.5
ø35
ø35
ø35
ø35
36
6 23 23 6 23 23 40
60 (2 blocks) 21 94 (2 blocks) 21 82 (2 blocks) 21 116 (2 blocks) 21
83 (4 blocks) 117 (4 blocks) 105 (4 blocks) 139 (4 blocks)
• ALNE∗∗F Momentary • ALN∗∗F Momentary • AOLNE∗∗F Maintained • AOLN∗∗F Maintained

E12/Full Voltage E12/Transformer E12/Full Voltage E12/Transformer
M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness Panel Thickness M3.5 Terminal
M3 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness M3 Terminal Screw
Screws 0.8 to 5 0.8 to 5 Screws Panel Thickness 0.8 to 5
Screw 0.8 to 5 Screw
ø29.5
ø29.5
ø29.5
ø29.5
ø35
ø35
ø35
ø35
36
6 23 23 6 23 23 40
67 (2 blocks) 21 101 (2 blocks) 21 89 (2 blocks) 21 123 (2 blocks) 21
(06/02/17) 243
LED Mushroom (ø40) Illuminated Pushbuttons

ø40 Mushroom 1NO-1NC ALN39911DN➁
ALN3 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALN39920DN➁ LSTD
AOLN3
2NC ALN39902DN➁
ALNE3 Momentary
AOLNE3 1NO-1NC ALN3➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO ALN3➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC ALN3➂02DN➁
BA9S
1NO-1NC AOLN39911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLN39920DN➁ LSTD
2NC AOLN39902DN➁
Maintained
1NO-1NC AOLN3➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO AOLN3➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC AOLN3➂02DN➁
1NO-1NC ALNE39911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALNE39920DN➁ LETD
2NC ALNE39902DN➁
Momentary
1NO-1NC ALNE3➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO ALNE3➂20DN➁ LETD-6➁
2NC ALNE3➂02DN➁
E12
1NO-1NC AOLNE39911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLNE39920DN➁ LETD
2NC AOLNE39902DN➁
Maintained
1NO-1NC AOLNE3➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO AOLNE3➂20DN➁ LETD-6➁
2NC AOLNE3➂02DN➁

A: amber 16: 100/110V AC

R: red 126: 120V AC
S: blue 26: 200/220V AC
386: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC
Dimensions
• ALN3/AOLN3 • ALN3/AOLN3
ø40
ø40
36
36
5.5 23 23
40 40
63 (2 blocks) 23.5 97.5 (2 blocks) 23.5
• ALNE3/AOLNE3 • ALNE3/AOLNE3
ø40
ø40
36
36
5.5 23 23
40 40
77.5 (2 blocks) 20 112 (2 blocks) 20
100.5 (4 blocks) 135 (4 blocks)
244 (06/02/17)
Incandescent Square and Rectangular Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons

Square Extended 1NO-1NC ULQN9911➁
ULQN Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ULQN9920➁ LS (1W)
2NC ULQN9902➁
Momentary
1NO-1NC ULQN➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ULQN➂20➁ LS-6
2NC ULQN➂02➁
BA9S
UOLQN 1NO-1NC UOLQN9911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO UOLQN9920➁ LS (1W)
2NC UOLQN9902➁
Maintained
1NO-1NC UOLQN➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO UOLQN➂20➁ LS-6
2NC UOLQN➂02➁
Rectangular (Marking Type) 1NO-1NC ULQN9B911➁
ULQN∗B Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ULQN9B920➁ LS (1W)
2NC ULQN9B902➁
Momentary
1NO-1NC ULQN➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ULQN➂20➁ LS-6
2NC ULQN➂02➁
BA9S
UOLQN∗B 1NO-1NC UOLQN9B911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO UOLQN9B920➁ LS (1W)
2NC UOLQN9B902➁
Maintained
1NO-1NC UOLQN➂11➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO UOLQN➂20➁ LS-6
2NC UOLQN➂02➁

Incandescent Transformer Incandescent Transformer
Square Extended Type Rectangular Marking Type
C: clear (square type only) 16: 100/110V AC 1B6: 100/110V AC
G: green 116: 115V AC 11B6: 115V AC
O: orange 126: 120V AC 12B6: 120V AC
R: red 26: 200/220V AC 2B6: 200/220V AC
S: blue 236: 230V AC 23B6: 230V AC
W: white 246: 240V AC 24B6: 240V AC
Clear lens is not available for the rectangular type. 386: 380V AC 38B6: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC 4B6: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC 48B6: 480V AC
• Incandescent illuminated transformer types contain an incandescent lamp: LS-6 (1W, 6V AC/DC).
Dimensions
• ULQN Momentary • ULQN Momentary • UOLQN Maintained • UOLQN Maintained
Screw Panel Thickness M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness Screws Panel Thickness M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness
M3 Terminal 0.8 to 3.2 M3 Terminal 0.8 to 3.2 0.8 to 3.2
0.8 to 3.2 Screws Screws
Screw Screw
34
34
25
52.2
34
34
25
25
25
36
6 23 14 23 14 6 23 14 23 14
20 20 86 (2 blocks) 20 20 40
64 (2 blocks) 98 (2 blocks) 120 (2 blocks)
87 (4 blocks) 121 (4 blocks) 109 (4 blocks) 143 (4 blocks) 44
• ULQN∗∗B Momentary • ULQN∗∗B Momentary • UOLQN∗∗B Maintained • UOLQN∗∗B Maintained

Screws Panel Thickness Panel Thickness Screw Panel Thickness
M3 Terminal 0.8 to 3.2 M3 Terminal 0.8 to 3.2 Panel Thickness 0.8 to 3.2
0.8 to 3.2 Screws Screws
Screw Screw
36.4×42.4
36.4×42.4
36.4×42.4
36.4×42.4
30×36
30×36
30×36
30×36
52.2
6 23 23 6 23 23
64 (2 blocks) 25 25 25 44
98 (2 blocks) 25 86 (2 blocks) 120 (2 blocks)
(06/02/17) 245
Incandescent Push Turn Lock Switches

ALN∗L 1NO-1NC ALN9L911➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALN9L920➁ LS (1W)
2NC ALN9L902➁
BA9S Push Turn Lock
1NO-1NC ALN➂11➁
2NC ALN➂02➁

G: green 1L6: 100/110V AC
O: orange 11L6: 115V AC
R: red 12L6: 120V AC
S: blue 2L6: 200/220V AC
W: white 23L6: 230V AC
24L6: 240V AC
38L6: 380V AC
4L6: 400/440V AC
48L6: 480V AC
• Incandescent illuminated transformer types contain an incandescent lamp: LS-6 (1W, 6V AC/DC).
• Push Turn Lock: Knob is maintained when turned clockwise in the depressed position and is reset when turned counterclockwise.
Dimensions
• ALN∗∗L • ALN∗∗L

ø35
ø22
ø35
ø22
36
36
6 23 23 40
40
67 (2 blocks) 25 101 (2 blocks) 25
246 (06/02/17)
LED Pushlock Turn Reset / Push Turn Lock Types

ø40 Mushroom 1NO-1NC AVLN39911DNR
Pushlock Turn Reset Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AVLN39920DNR LSTD
AVLN3
Pushlock 2NC AVLN39902DNR
AVLNE3 BA9S
Turn Reset 1NO-1NC AVLN3➂11DNR
LED Transformer 2NO AVLN3➂20DNR LSTD-6➁
2NC AVLN3➂02DNR
1NO-1NC AVLNE39911DNR
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AVLNE39920DNR LETD
Pushlock 2NC AVLNE39902DNR
E12
Turn Reset 1NO-1NC AVLNE3➂11DNR
LED Transformer 2NO AVLNE3➂20DNR LETD-6➁
2NC AVLNE3➂02DNR
ø40 Mushroom 1NO-1NC AJLN39911DN➁
Push Turn Lock
AJLN3 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AJLN39920DN➁ LSTD
2NC AJLN39902DN➁
Push Turn
BA9S
Lock
1NO-1NC AJLN3➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO AJLN3➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC AJLN3➂02DN➁

LED Illuminated Type LED Transformer BA9S Types
A: amber 16: 100/110V AC

R: red 126: 120V AC
W: white 26: 200/220V AC
246: 240V AC
386: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC
Note: AVNL3 and AVNLE3 pushlock turn reset switches cannot be used as emergency stop switches. When emergency stop switches are
required, use the HN1E series emergency stop switches (ISO 13850 and IEC 60947-5-5 compliant).
• Push Turn Lock: Lens is maintained when turned clockwise in the depressed position and is reset when turned counterclockwise.
Dimensions
• AVLN3 • AVLN3 • AVLNE3 • AVLNE3
BA9S/Full Voltage BA9S/Transformer E12/Full Voltage E12/Transformer
M3 Terminal Screw M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness Screw M3.5 Terminal
Panel Thickness M3 Terminal Panel Thickness
Screw Screws 0.8 to 7.5 Screws Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
0.8 to 7.5 Screw 0.8 to 7.5
ø40
ø40
ø40
ø40
36
5.5 23 23 5.5 23 23 40
63 (2 blocks) 23.5 97.5 (2 blocks) 23.5 77.5 (2 blocks) 20 112 (2 blocks) 20
86 (4 blocks) 120.5 (4 blocks) 100.5 (4 blocks) 135 (4 blocks)
• AJLN3 • AJLN3
M3.5 Terminal
M3 Terminal Screw M3.5 Terminal
Screw Panel Thickness
0.8 to 7.5
H L
O
S
PU
CK
ø40
ø40
36
5.5 23 23 40
63 (2 blocks) 23.5 97.5 (2 blocks) 23.5
(06/02/17) 247
Incandescent Pushlock Turn Reset / Push Turn Lock Types

ø40 Mushroom 1NO-1NC AVLN39911NR
Pushlock Turn Reset Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AVLN39920NR LS (1W)
AVLN3
Pushlock 2NC AVLN39902NR
AVLNE3 BA9S
Turn Reset 1NO-1NC AVLN3➂11NR
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AVLN3➂20NR LS-6
2NC AVLN3➂02NR
1NO-1NC AVLNE39911NR
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AVLNE39920NR LE (2W)
Pushlock 2NC AVLNE39902NR
E12
Turn Reset 1NO-1NC AVLNE3➂11NR
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AVLNE3➂20NR LE-8
2NC AVLNE3➂02NR
ø40 Mushroom 1NO-1NC AJLN39911N➁
Push Turn Lock
AJLN3 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AJLN39920N➁ LS (1W)
2NC AJLN39902N➁
Push Turn
BA9S
Lock
1NO-1NC AJLN3➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AJLN3➂20N➁ LS-6
2NC AJLN3➂02N➁

G: green 16: 100/110V AC 18: 100/110V AC
O: orange 116: 115V AC 118: 115V AC
R: red 126: 120V AC 128: 120V AC
26: 200/220V AC 28: 200/220V AC
236: 230V AC 238: 230V AC
246: 240V AC 248: 240V AC
386: 380V AC 388: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC 48: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC 488: 480V AC
Note: AVNL3 and AVNLE3 pushlock turn reset switches cannot be used as emergency stop switches. When emergency stop switches are
• Push Turn Lock: Lens is maintained when turned clockwise in the depressed position and is reset when turned counterclockwise.
Dimensions
• AVLN3 • AVLN3 • AVLNE3 • AVLNE3
BA9S/Full Voltage BA9S/Transformer E12/Full Voltage E12/Transformer
M3 Terminal Screw M3.5 Terminal Panel Thickness Screw M3.5 Terminal
Panel Thickness M3 Terminal Panel Thickness
Screw Screws 0.8 to 7.5 Screws Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
0.8 to 7.5 Screw 0.8 to 7.5
ø40
ø40
ø40
ø40
36
5.5 23 23 5.5 23 23 40
63 (2 blocks) 23.5 97.5 (2 blocks) 23.5 77.5 (2 blocks) 20 112 (2 blocks) 20
86 (4 blocks) 120.5 (4 blocks) 100.5 (4 blocks) 135 (4 blocks)
• AJLN3 • AJLN3
M3.5 Terminal
M3 Terminal Screw M3.5 Terminal
Screw Panel Thickness
0.8 to 7.5
H L
O
S
PU
CK
ø40
ø40
36
5.5 23 23 40
63 (2 blocks) 23.5 97.5 (2 blocks) 23.5
86 (4 blocks) 120.5 (4 blocks) All dimensions in mm.
248 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Selector Switches ø30
ASN Selector Switches (Knob Operator Type)

Shape ASN
No. of Positions
4 • Knob: Black
2
• Units marked with ★ differ in shape.
See page 252 for dimensions.
3
1 • Nameplates are ordered separately.
Spring Return Spring Return
Contact Block Operator Position Maintained Maintained
Code
L R L R L R L R
(ASN) Mounting Type L R
Position
10 1 NO
ASN310 ASN410
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
ASN311 ASN411
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
ASN320 ASN420
(2NO) 2 NO
— —
1 NO
90° 2-position
22 2 NC
ASN322 ASN422
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
7S 1 NO
ASN37S ASN47S
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
10 1 NO
ASN3010 ASN4010
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
ASN3011 ASN4011
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
ASN3020 ASN4020
(2NO) 2 NO
— —
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASN3022 ASN4022
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
7S 1 NO
ASN307S ASN407S
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
Contact from Left from Right
Code C C C C
(ASN) Mounting Type L C R
L R L R L R L R
Position
11 1 NO
ASN111 ASN211
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASN122 ASN222
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
1 NO
5S 2 NO
ASN15S ★ ASN25S ★ — —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
7S 1 NC
ASN17S ★ ASN27S ★
45° 3-position
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NC
8S 2 NC ASN18S ★ ASN28S ★
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
11 1 NO
ASN1011 ASN2011
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASN1022 ASN2022
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
1 NO
5S 2 NC
— — ASN105S ★ ASN205S ★
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
7S 1 NC
ASN107S ★ ASN207S ★
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NC
8S 2 NC ASN108S ★ ASN208S ★
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
(06/02/17) 249
ø30 ø30 Series Selector Switches
ASN Selector Switches (Lever Operator Type)

Shape ASN∗L • Lever: Black
No. of Positions
4 2
• Units marked with ★ differ in shape.
See page 252 for dimensions.
3
1 • Nameplates are ordered separately.
Code
L R L R L R L R
Position
10 1 NO
ASN3L10 ASN4L10
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
ASN3L11 ASN4L11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
ASN3L20 ASN4L20
(2NO) 2 NO
— —
1 NO
90° 2-position
22 2 NC
ASN3L22 ASN4L22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
7S 1 NO
ASN3L7S ASN4L7S
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
10 1 NO
ASN30L10 ASN40L10
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
ASN30L11 ASN40L11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
ASN30L20 ASN40L20
(2NO) 2 NO
— —
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASN30L22 ASN40L22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
7S 1 NO
ASN30L7S ASN40L7S
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
Code C C C C
L R L R L R L R
Position
11 1 NO
ASN1L11 ASN2L11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASN1L22 ASN2L22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
1 NO
5S 2 NO
ASN1L5S ★ ASN2L5S ★ — —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
7S 1 NC
ASN1L7S ★ ASN2L7S ★
45° 3-position
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NC
8S 2 NC ASN1L8S ★ ASN2L8S ★
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
11 1 NO
ASN10L11 ASN20L11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASN10L22 ASN20L22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
1 NO
5S 2 NC
— — ASN10L5S ★ ASN20L5S ★
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
7S 1 NC
ASN10L7S ★ ASN20L7S ★
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NC
8S 2 NC ASN10L8S ★ ASN20L8S ★
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
250 (06/02/17)
ASN Key Selector Switches

Shape ASN∗K • Cylinder: Chrome-plated
No. of Positions
4
2 • On the spring-returned types, the keys can be released
only from the maintained position. On the maintained
3 types, the key can be released from every position. Key
retained positions are also available. See page 228.
1 • Key selector switch is supplied with two standard keys.
Two different keys are available upon request.
Contact Arrangement Chart • Nameplates are ordered separately.
Code
L R L R L R L R
Position
10 1 NO
ASN3K10 ASN4K10
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
ASN3K11 ASN4K11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
ASN3K20 ASN4K20
(2NO) 2 NO
— —
1 NO
90° 2-position
22 2 NC
ASN3K22 ASN4K22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
7S 1 NO
ASN3K7S ASN4K7S
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
10 1 NO
ASN30K10 ASN40K10
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
ASN30K11 ASN40K11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
ASN30K20 ASN40K20
(2NO) 2 NO
— —
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASN30K22 ASN40K22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
7S 1 NO
ASN30K7S ASN40K7S
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
Code C C C C
L R L R L R L R
Position
11 1 NO
ASN1K11 ASN2K11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASN1K22 ASN2K22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
1 NO
5S 2 NC
(1NO-1NC) ASN1K5S ASN2K5S — —
(1NO-1NC) 3 NO
4 NC
7S 1 NO
45° 3-position
ASN1K7S ASN2K7S
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
1 NO
8S 2 NC ASN1K8S ASN2K8S
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
11 1 NO
ASN10K11 ASN20K11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASN10K22 ASN20K22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
1 NO
5S 2 NC
(1NO-1NC) — — ASN10K5S ASN20K5S
(1NO-1NC) 3 NO
4 NC
7S 1 NO
ASN10K7S ASN20K7S
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
1 NO
8S 2 NC ASN10K8S ASN20K8S
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
(06/02/17) 251
Dimensions
• Knob Operator Type
Dimensions of knob operator type marked with ★
Panel Thickness 90°

Panel Thickness
45°
M3.5 Terminal Screw 45° 45°
45°
0.8 to 7.5 M3.5 Terminal Screw 0.8 to 7.5
ø35
ø35
36
36
6 23 40 6 23 40
54 (1 or 2 58 (1 or 2
blocks) 22 blocks) 22
• Lever Operator Type

Dimensions of lever operator type marked with ★
Panel Thickness 90° Panel Thickness
M3.5 Terminal Screw 0.8 to 7.5
45°
45° M3.5 Terminal Screw 0.8 to 7.5 45° 45°
ø35
ø35
36
36
6 23 6 23
25.0
25.0
54 (1 or 2 40 58 (1 or 2 40
blocks) 27 blocks) 26.5
• Key Selector Type
90°
Panel Thickness
45°
M3.5 Terminal Screw 0.8 to 7.5 45°
ø35
36
24.5
6 23
54 (1 or 2 40
blocks) 22 22
77 (4 blocks) All dimensions in mm.
Left Center Right

4
2
L C R Operator
Position
1 NO
2 NO
3 3 NC
1 4 NC
252 (06/02/17)
ASTN Selector Switches (Knob Operator Type)

Shape ASTN • Knob operator: Black
No. of Positions

Spring Return
Contact Block Operator Position Maintained — —
Contact from Right
Code
90° 2-position
L R L R
(ASTN) Mounting Type L R — —
Position
11 1 NO
ASTN3211 ASTN4211
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
1 NO
— —
22 2 NO
ASTN3222 ASTN4222
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
Contact Block Operator Position Maintained
Contact from Left from Right Two-way
Code C C C C
(ASTN) Mounting Type L C R
L R L R L R L R
Position
1 NO
22 2 NO
ASTN1122 ASTN2122 ASTN20122 ASTN5122
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
22 2 NO
ASTN1222 ASTN2222 ASTN20222 ASTN5222
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
40 2 NO
45° 3-position
ASTN1340 — — —
(4NC) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASTN1422 — ASTN20422 —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
20 1 NO
ASTN1520 — ASTN20520 —
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
40 2 NO
ASTN1540 — ASTN20540 —
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
11 1 NC
ASTN1611 — — —
(1NO-1NC) 2 NO
1 NC
22 2 NO
ASTN1622 — — —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
11 1 NO
— — — ASTN5111
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
Notes:
1. The operator of the 2-way spring return unit may slightly deviate from the center position.
2. Turn the operator to each position accurately.
• Contact Block Mounting Position and • Dimensions

0.8 to 7.5
45°
4 Left Center Right
2
ø35
36
L C R Operator
Position 6 23
1 NO
58 (2 blocks) 40
2 NO 81 (4 blocks) 27
3 3 NC
1
4 NC
(06/02/17) 253
ASTN Selector Switches (Lever Operator Type)

Shape • Lever operator: Black
No. of Positions
ASTN∗L

Spring Return
Contact from Right
Code
90° 2-position
L R L R
Position
11 1 NO
ASTN32L11 ASTN42L11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
1 NO
— —
22 2 NO
ASTN32L22 ASTN42L22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
Code C C C C
L R L R L R L R
Position
1 NO
22 2 NO
ASTN11L22 ASTN21L22 ASTN201L22 ASTN51L22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
22 2 NO
ASTN12L22 ASTN22L22 ASTN202L22 ASTN52L22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
40 2 NO
45° 3-position
ASTN13L40 — — —
(4NC) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASTN14L22 — ASTN204L22 —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
20 1 NO
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
11 1 NC
ASTN16L11 — — —
(1NO-1NC) 2 NO
1 NC
22 2 NO
ASTN16L22 — — —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
11 1 NO
— — — ASTN51L11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
Notes:

0.8 to 7.5
45°
Left Center Right
4
2
ø35
36
L C R Operator
Position
1 NO 6 23
25.0
58 (1 or 2 40
2 NO blocks) 29
3 3 NC 81 (4 blocks)
1 4 NC
254 (06/02/17)
ASTN Key Selector Switches

Shape ASTN∗K • Cylinder: Chrome-plated
No. of Positions

• On the spring-returned types, the keys can be
released only from the maintained position.
• On the maintained types, the key can be released
from every position. Key retained positions are
Contact Arrangement Chart also available. See page 228.
Spring Return
Contact from Right
Code
90° 2-position
L R L R
Position
11 1 NO
ASTN32K11 ASTN42K11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
1 NO
— —
22 2 NO
ASTN32K22 ASTN42K22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
Code C C C C
L R L R L R L R
Position
1 NO
22 2 NO
ASTN11K22 ASTN21K22 ASTN201K22 ASTN51K22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
22 2 NO
ASTN12K22 ASTN22K22 ASTN202K22 ASTN52K22
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
40 2 NO
45° 3-position
ASTN13K40 — — —
(4NC) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
22 2 NC
ASTN14K22 — ASTN204K22 —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
20 1 NO
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
11 1 NC
ASTN16K11 — — —
(1NO-1NC) 2 NO
1 NC
22 2 NO
ASTN16K22 — — —
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NO
11 1 NO
— — — ASTN51K11
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
Notes:

Contact Arrangement Chart Panel Thickness
0.8 to 7.5
45°
45°
M3.5 Terminal Screw
Left Center Right
4
2
ø35
40
L C R Operator
Position 6 23
1 NO
57 (1 or 2 16.5 40
2 NO blocks) 38
80 (4 blocks)
3 NC
3
1 4 NC
(06/02/17) 255
ø30 ø30 Series Illuminated Selector Switches

90° 2-position
Shape ASLN (Base BA9S)

Lamp Input Type
Code L R L R L R
Mounting
Position Type L R
1 NO Without Lamp Full Voltage ASLN29911N➁ ASLN219911N➁ ASLN229911N➁ ∗
11
2 NC LED Transformer ASLN2➂11DN➁ ASLN21➂11DN➁ ASLN22➂11DN➁ ∗
(1NO-1NC)
Incandescent Transformer ASLN2➂11N➁ ASLN21➂11N➁ ASLN22➂11N➁ ∗
1 NO Without Lamp Full Voltage ASLN29920N➁ ASLN219920N➁ ASLN229920N➁ ∗
20
2 NO LED Transformer ASLN2➂20DN➁ ASLN21➂20DN➁ ASLN22➂20DN➁ ∗
(2NO)
1 NO
Without Lamp Full Voltage ASLN29922N➁ ASLN219922N➁ ASLN229922N➁ ∗
2 NC
22 3 NO
LED Transformer ASLN2➂22DN➁ ASLN21➂22DN➁ ASLN22➂22DN➁ ∗
(2NO-2NC) 4 NC

16: 100/110V AC
A: amber A: amber 156: 115V AC
R: red R: red 26: 200/220V AC
S: blue S: blue 236: 230V AC
46: 400/440V AC
486: 480V AC (incandescent only)
[Example]
• Contact Block Mounting Position • Dimensions

M3.5 Terminal Screws 0.8 to 7.5
Left Right M3 Terminal Screw (including nameplate) 45° 45°
4
2
ø25
ø35
ø40
L R Operator
Position
1 NO
2 NO 5.5 23 40
3 3 NC 63 (2 blocks)
A: 86 (4 blocks) 9 A: Full voltage type
1 B: Transformer type
4 NC B: 97.5 (2 blocks), 120.5 (4 blocks) 28
256 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Illuminated Selector Switches ø30

45° 3-position
C C C C
Code Mounting
Position Type L C R
Without Lamp
1 NO ASLN39920N➁ ASLN319920N➁ ASLN329920N➁ ASLN339920N➁
Full Voltage
20 LED
2 NO ASLN3➂20DN➁ ASLN31➂20DN➁ ASLN32➂20DN➁ ASLN33➂20DN➁
(2NO) Transformer
Incandescent
ASLN3➂20N➁ ASLN31➂20N➁ ASLN32➂20N➁ ASLN33➂20N➁
Transformer
Without Lamp
1 NC ASLN39902N➁ ASLN319902N➁ ASLN329902N➁ ASLN339902N➁
Full Voltage
02 LED
2 NC ASLN3➂02DN➁ ASLN31➂02DN➁ ASLN32➂02DN➁ ASLN33➂02DN➁
(2NC) Transformer
Incandescent
Transformer
1 NO Without Lamp
ASLN39922N➁ ASLN319922N➁ ASLN329922N➁ ASLN339922N➁
2 NO Full Voltage
22 3 NC LED
(2NO-2NC) ASLN3➂22DN➁ ASLN31➂22DN➁ ASLN32➂22DN➁ ASLN33➂22DN➁
4 NC Transformer
Incandescent
Transformer
1 NO Without Lamp
2 NO Full Voltage
40 3 NO LED
(4NO) ASLN3➂40DN➁ ASLN31➂40DN➁ ASLN32➂40DN➁ ASLN33➂40DN➁
4 NO Transformer
Incandescent
Transformer
1 NC Without Lamp
2 NC Full Voltage
04 3 NC LED
(4NC) ASLN3➂04DN➁ ASLN31➂04DN➁ ASLN32➂04DN➁ ASLN33➂04DN➁
4 NC Transformer
Incandescent
Transformer

16: 100/110V AC
R: red R: red 26: 200/220V AC
46: 400/440V AC

Left Center Right M3 Terminal Screw (including nameplate) 45° 45°
4
2
ø25
ø35
ø40
L C R Operator
1 NO Position
2 NO 5.5 23 40
3 63 (2 blocks)
3 NC A: 86 (4 blocks) 9
A: Full Voltage type
1
4 NC B: 97.5 (2 blocks), 120.5 (4 blocks) 28 B: Transformer type
(06/02/17) 257
ø30 ø30 Series Selector Pushbuttons
Ring Operator Type / Lever Operator Type Selector Pushbuttons

Ring/Lever
Ring Lever
Contact Operator Operator ➀ Button
Contact Circuit Block
Shape Color
Code Code
Code
Pushbutton
Mounting Type Normal Type No. Type No.
Push Normal Push
Position
ABN 1 NO
A ABN6111➀ ABN6L111➀
2 NC
11 1 NC
(1NO-1NC)
I ABN6411➀ ABN6L411➀
2 NO
1 NO
G Blocked ABN9111➀ ABN9L111➀
2 NC
20 1 NO
Ring Operator (90˚ 2-position) (2NO)
D ABN7120➀
2 NO
(including namplate) 1 NC
2 NC
B ABN6122➀ ABN6L122➀
ø28
ø35
40
3 NO
6 23 41 25 40 4 NO
Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5 1 NC
M3.5 Terminal Screw (including namplate)
2 NC
C ABN6222➀ ABN6L222➀
3 NO
ø28
ø35
40
4 NO
6 23 23 41 25 40
1 NC B: black
ABN∗L 2 NC G: green
I ABN6422➀ ABN6L422➀
3 NO R: red
4 NO Y: yellow
1 NC
22 2 NC
(2NO-2NC)
D ABN7122➀ ABN7L122➀
3 NO
4 NO
1 NC
Lever Operator (90˚ 2-position)
2 NC
M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5 E ABN7222➀ ABN7L222➀
(including namplate) 3 NO
4 NO
ø35
40
1 NC
50
6 23 41 26 40 2 NC
F ABN7322➀ ABN7L322➀
3 NO
M3.5 Terminal Screw
(including namplate)
4 NO
1 NC
ø35
2 NC
40
H Blocked ABN9122➀ ABN9L122➀

3 NO
50
6 23 23 41 26 40
4 NO
• Ring/Lever (metal): Chrome-plated
Notes
1. Circuit Codes A, B, C, and I: When the ring or lever operator is turned, the button is pushed in.
2. Circuit Codes E and F: The right and left NC contact blocks on circuit code E or F may overlap each other while turning the ring or lever
operator. The NO and NC contact blocks on circuit code F may overlap each other while pressing the button.
3. Circuit Codes G and H: The pushbutton does not operate when the ring or lever operator is turned to the left position.
4. When using the selector pushbutton, do not turn the ring or lever operator with the pushbutton depressed. Otherwise, damage or failure
may be caused.
• Contact Block Mounting Position • Mounting Hole Layout

4
2 Normal Push
50
80
1
2
3 50 80
3
1
4 Ring Operator Lever Operator
258 (06/02/17)
ø30 ARN/ARNS Series Mono-lever Switches
Single lever offers up to four directions of control
Mono-lever switches operate in four directions using a single
lever. Switch contacts are actuated in the direction in which the
lever is pushed, enabling quick and accurate control in any
desired direction. Ideal for machine tools and industrial
machines. The lever action can be maintained or spring-
returned in any combination.
Also available with interlock mechanism to prevent inadvertent
actuation.

Contact Ratings
Contact Block Type BR
IEC 60947-5-1 DC-13 (P600)
Characteristics
DC
Specifications
Double-break slow action
Contact Arrangement Each contact block contains two independent contacts (2NO, 1NO-1NC, or 2NC)
Up to four contact blocks can be mounted
Dielectric Strength Between live and dead parts: 2,500V AC, 1 minute
Mechanical Life 500,000 operations minimum
Electrical Life (Interlocking type: 250,000 operations minimum)
Lever Knob Black
BR Contact Block Control Mechanism

The contact block is made of nylon resin. Each contact block When the operator lever is pushed to about 30° in each
contains two pairs of double-break silver contacts. There are direction from the neutral position, the contact in that direc-
three types as shown in the diagram below and up to four tion activates.The lever can operate in two, three, or four
contact blocks can be mounted in any direction. A wide vari- directions, and combinations of maintained or spring-return
ety of circuits allows diverse combinations of control. from any position are possible.
BR-1E BR-2E BR-3E

(2NO) (1NO-1NC) (2NO)
(06/02/17) 259
ø30 ARN/ARNS Series Mono-lever Switches
Types
Operator Type Position Lever Action Type No. Dimensions (mm)
ARN (Long Lever Type) Maintained ARN2-1010-➃B M3.5 Terminal
2-position Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
(Up-Down)
Spring return ARN2-2020-➃B
30°
ø42
ø22
51
Maintained ARN2-0101-➃B
2-position
30°
(Left-Right)
Spring return ARN2-0202-➃B 6 23
83 51
Maintained ARN4-1111-➃B 1 block: 47, 2 blocks: 70

4-position 3 blocks: 93, 4 blocks: 116
(Up-Down-Left-Right)
Spring return ARN4-2222-➃B Minimum horizontal/vertical mounting centers: 110
ARNS (Short Lever Type) Maintained ARNS2-1010-➃B Panel Thickness
2-position M3.5 Terminal
Screw 0.8 to 6
(Up-Down)
Spring return ARNS2-2020-➃B
30°
ø42
ø22
51
Maintained ARNS2-0101-➃B
2-position
30°
(Left-Right)
Spring return ARNS2-0202-➃B 6 23
63 51
Maintained ARNS4-1111-➃B 1 block: 47, 2 blocks: 70

(Up-Down-Left-Right)
Spring return ARNS4-2222-➃B Minimum horizontal/vertical mounting centers: 70
ARNL (Interlocking Type) Maintained ARNL2-1010-➃B M3.5 Terminal

2-position Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
(Up-Down)
Spring return ARNL2-2020-➃B
0°
ø22 3
ø42
51
Maintained ARNL2-0101-➃B
2-position
30°
(Left-Right) 6 23
Spring return ARNL2-0202-➃B
83 51
Maintained ARNL4-1111-➃B 1 block: 47, 2 blocks: 70

The operator lever is locked only in (Up-Down-Left-Right)
the center position. Spring return ARNL4-2222-➃B Minimum horizontal/vertical mounting centers: 110
• Specify Contact Arrangement from the table below in place of ➃.

• Terminal covers are ordered separately.
• Lever Operator Position • Panel Cut-Out • Mono-Lever with Terminal Cover
Up R0.8 max.
ø3 4.8 +0.2
0
0.5 +
68
31
0.5
0
Right
33 +0.5
0
31 23
Left 64
68
Down
Direction of Lever Operation
When ordering, specify items ➀ to ➄ according to the following
example.
Contact Block Position
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ Contact
[Example] ARN 4 – 1012 – 2 0 0 0 0 2 1 1 – B Block
Terminal No.
Terminal No.
Lever Operation Mode Type

Up Right Down Left
1: Maintained
2: Spring return
➁ No. of ➄ Lever
➃ Contact 0: Blocked
➀ Type Contact ➂ Lever Action Knob
Blocks Arrangement 1 0 1 2
Color
Order of Entry: Order of Entry: 1 NO – – – 2
1 BR-2E
Up→Right→ Up→Right→ 3 – – NC – 4
Down→Left Down→Left 5 – NO ∗ – – 6
1: 1 block 2 BR-1E
ARN 1: Maintained 10: 1NO
2: 2 blocks 7 – – – NO 8
ARNS 2: Spring return 01: 1NC B: black
3: 3 blocks
ARNL 0: Blocked 11: 1NO-1NC 9 NO – – – 10
4: 4 blocks 3 BR-2E
20: 2NO 11 – – NC – 12
02: 2NC
00: Blocked 13 – NC ∗ – – 14
4 BR-3E
15 – – – NC 16
• To calculate the number of contact blocks required, add the number
of NO and NC contacts on each pair of adjoining positions (up + right, ∗: Contacts marked with ∗ do not operate.
right + down, down + left, and left + up). The largest of the four sums
is the number of contact blocks required. Up to four contact blocks can be mounted.
• When UL and CSA markings are required on the mono-lever switch, specify as shown below.
[Example] ARN4-1012-20000211-B- U
260 (06/02/17)
ARN/ARNS Series Mono-lever Switches ø30
Accessories and Maintenance Parts

Shape Specification Type No. Ordering Type No. Package Quantity Description
70
MLO 1
Chrome-plated brass
Nameplate MLO
5
0.
70
(matte surface)
ø3
MLOPN10 10
• Terminal covers are

ordered separately. When
ordering, specify the Type
Terminal Cover ARN-VL2 ARN-VL2 1 No. and the required
quantity.
• Order 2 pieces for each
contact block.
BR-1E BR-1E 1 • 2NO contact
Contact Block
BR-2E BR-2E 1 • 1NO-1NC contact
(BR Type)
BR-3E BR-3E 1 • 2NC contact
• For ARN/ARNS
Bellows ARN-BL ARN-BL 1
(Locking ring not included)
Bellows • For ARNL

ARNL-BL ARNL-BL 1
(Interlocking Type) (Locking ring not included)
Specify a color code in

place of ➀.
Knob ARNB-➀ ARNB-➀ 1
B (black), G (green), R (red)
• For ARN/ARNS
(06/02/17) 261
ø30/ø25 CS Series Cam Switches
76 standard circuits to choose from
• Wide variety of heavy-duty oiltight cam switches
• Operators available up to 12 positions
• Switches made with a double-pole contact block
• Contact blocks rated at 600V, 10A
• Ideal for ammeter/voltmeter applications
• UL listed and CSA approved
(except ACSSO and ACSSK)

Contact Ratings
IEC 60947-5-1 DC-13 (P600)
Characteristics
Operational Voltage 24V 110V 220V 440V
AC AC-12 Control of resistive loads and solid state loads — 10A 6A 2A
Operational 50/60 Hz AC-15 Control of electromagnetic loads (> 72 VA) — 5A 3A 1A
Current DC-12 Control of resistive loads and solid state loads 8A 3A 1A 0.4A
DC
DC-13 Control of electromagnets 5A 1.2A 0.45A 0.2A
Specifications
Double-break slow action contacts
Contact Arrangement Two contacts in one deck
Up to 6 decks available (Spring-return type: Up to 3 decks)
Operation Maintained Spring return
Angle 30°, 45°, 60°, 90° 45°
Operator Positions 2 to 12 2, 3, 4
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ (500V DC megger)
Dielectric Strength 2500V AC, 1 minute (between live and dead parts)
1 to 3 decks: 500,000 operations
Mechanical Life
4 to 6 decks: 200,000 operations
CBS Contact Block

The CBS contact block contains two poles of double-break contacts.
The contacts are operated by a cam designed to perform a required M3.5 Screw Terminal
contact operation. Up to six contact blocks can be mounted on a
maintained-action operator base, and up to three contact blocks on
a spring return operator base.
262 (06/02/17)
CS Series Cam Switches ø30/ø25
Types
➀ Type ➆ Contact
➁ Contact ➄ Spring Name-
➂ Positions ➃ Angle ➅ Handle Arrange-
ø30 Series ø25 Series Block Decks Return plate
ment
ACSNO ACSSO
Y2, S2, P2,

Spring return
F2, 25S2
Maintained: Maintained: Maintained: from right
1 to 6 decks 2 to 12 positions 30°, 45°, 60°, 90° (25S2 is for
Spring return
ACSSO only)
Spring return: Spring return: Spring return: from left
1 to 3 decks 2 to 4 positions 45° only (one speci-
Spring return
fied handle
two-way
supplied) See
page
(Photo: ACSNO with Y2 handle)
272.
ACSNK ACSSK (ordered
sepa-
H2 Handle Key Two standard rately)
(black) Spring return
from right keys are
Maintained: Maintained: Maintained:
supplied.
1 to 6 decks 2 to 8 positions 45°, 90° Spring return See page
from left When the H2 267.
Spring return: Spring return: Spring return:
58
key handle is
1 to 3 decks 2 to 4 positions 45° only Spring return required,
two-way specify H2.
24
Standard Key (2 keys supplied)
UCSQO (Enclosed Type)
Spring return
Maintained: Maintained: Maintained: from right Type CQ
1 to 6 decks 2 to 12 positions 30°, 45°, 60°, 90° Spring return See
Spring return: Spring return: Spring return: from left page
1 to 3 decks 2 to 4 positions 45° only Spring return 272.
two-way
Y2, S2, F2,
(Photo: With Y2 handle) P2
(one speci-
UCSQM (Enclosed Type) fied handle C1007
Indicator supplied) C1008
Left: Green C1009
Right: Red Type
C1010
CQM
Spring return: Spring return: Spring return: Spring return C1018
Left Right 1 to 3 decks 3 positions 45° only two-way C2006 See
C2007 page
C2021 272.
See page
Spring Return 2-way 267.
• For handles and accessories, see page 265.
Dimensions
ACSNO/ACSSO ACSNK/ACSSK • Panel Cut-out
M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6 M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6 R0.8 max. ø5
+0.2
4.8 0
(S2 Handle)
33 +0.5
52
52
52
30
52
0
50
2 9 12 2 9 12
47 12N+9 ∗ 30.7 47 47 12N+9 ∗ 35 47 ø25.5 +0.5
0
∗ Spring Return: 44 ∗ Spring Return: 44 (ACSSO/ACSSK)

Maintained: 42
Maintained: 42
N: Number of Contact Blocks N: Number of Contact Blocks ø30.5 +0.5
0
(ACSNO/ACSNK)
• Minimum horizontal/vertical mounting centers

With P2 handle: 125
With other handles: 70
UCSQO UCSQM • Panel Cut-out

Panel Thickness 46.4 Panel Thickness 7.0 max. 4-M4 Screw
4-ø4.5
46.4 7.0 max. 4-M4 Screw
3
ø1
(Y2 Handle)
64
48
52
64
52
41
(P2 Handle)
50
48 48
2 9 12 2 9 12
M3.5 Terminal
M3.5 Terminal 12N+9 ∗ 7 25 48 Screw 12N+9 31 7 43 70
Screw
70
∗ Spring Return: 31
N: Number of Contact Blocks
Maintained: 29
N: Number of Contact Blocks • Minimum horizontal/vertical mounting centers
With P2 handle: 125
All dimensions in mm. With other handles: 70
(06/02/17) 263
When ordering, specify items ➀ through ➆ as the designation example below.
➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆
Contact Block Spring
Type Positions Angle Handle Circuit No.
Decks Return
➁ ➂ ➃ ➄
➀ ➅ ➆
Decks Code Positions Code Angle Code Return Code
ACSNO 1 deck 1 2 positions 2 30° 3 Spring return RO (Code) For standard contact
ACSNK 2 decks 2 3 positions 3 45° 4 from left Y2, S2, P2, arrangements, use des-
ACSSO 3 decks 3 4 positions 4 60° 6 Spring return OR F2, H2, ignation code on pages
ACSSK 4 decks 4 5 positions 5 90° 9 from right 25S2 267 to 269.
UCSQO 5 decks 5 6 positions 6 (Color) For custom contact
Spring return RR
UCSQM 6 decks 6 7 positions 7 B: Black arrangements, use the
two-way
8 positions 8 Custom Contact
See table
9 positions 9 Arrangement Specifica-
below.
10 positions 10 tion Sheet on page 270.
11 positions 11
12 positions 12
Spring return: Spring return: ACSNK/ACSSK: Spring return code is 25S2 is for
1 to 3 decks only 2 to 4 positions only 45° and 90° only required only for spring ACSSO
Spring return: return types. only.
45° only
• Designation Example • Handle Designation Code

UCSQO - 2 3 4 RR - S2B - C2006 Applicable
Shape Code Color
➀ ➁➂➃ ➄ ➅ ➆ Cam Switch
ø30 Y Handle
1. When a special contact arrangement is required, specify
22
the contact arrangement using the Custom Contact 30
19
Y2
Arrangement Specification Sheet on page 270.
2. A specified handle is attached. 20 ACSNO
UCSQO
3. Accessories such as nameplates and jumpers are sepa- ø30 S Handle
UCSQM
20
rately ordered. 30
S2
4. The key of the key operated cam switch is removable 30
from every position. Specify other key removable configu- 20

rations if required. ø25 S Handle
20
25.6
30 25S2 ACSSO
20
B: black
ø30 P Handle
30
50
P2
40 ACSNO
UCSQO
ø30 F Handle UCSQM
30 ø50 F2
40
Key Handle
18
ACSNK
40 H2
ACSSK
24
• Spring Return Operation

Available combinations of operator positions, angles, and return directions are listed in the table below.
Positions 2-position 3-position 4-position 3-position
From Left From Right From Left From Right Two-way From Left From Right Two-way
2 1 2 2 2 2 3 2
Return Direction 1 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 2 4 1 3
4 1
➂ ➃ ➄ Codes 24RO 24OR 34RO 34OR 34RR 44RO 44OR 34RR

Applicable Cam Switches ACSNO, ACSSO, ACSNK, ACSSK, UCSQO UCSQM
Contact Block Decks 1 to 3 decks
Note: Maintained types do not require spring return code ➄.
264 (06/02/17)
Accessories and Replacement Parts
Ordering Package
Shape Material Type No. Remarks
Type No. Quantity
Jumper
For connecting terminals of
CJ-1 CJ-1PN10 10
adjoining contact blocks
CJ-1 Metal
For connecting terminals of the

CJ-2 CJ-2PN10 10
same contact block
CJ-2
Rubber Boot
For preventing ingress of dust
into the contact blocks
Rubber CR-1 CR-1 1
Not applicable for the UCSQO
and UCSQM
Terminal Cover Supplied with 2 self-

tapping screws
for mounting CS-VL2-13S CS-VL2-13S 1 For 1 to 3 decks of contact blocks
Plastic
CS-VL2-46S CS-VL2-46S 1 For 4 to 6 decks of contact blocks

CS-VL2-13S CS-VL2-46S
Shape Material (Color) Type No. Ordering Type No. Package Quantity
ø30 Y Handle
22
30 Plastic (Black) CSH-YB CSH-YB 1
19
20
ø30 S Handle
20
30
30 Plastic (Black) CSH-SB CSH-SB 1
20
ø25 S Handle 20
25.6
30 Plastic (Black) CSH-25SB CSH-25SB 1
20
ø30 P Handle
30
50 Plastic (Black) CSH-PB CSH-PB 1

40
ø30 F Handle
30 ø50
Plastic (Black) CSH-FB CSH-FB 1
40
Key Handle 18
40 Plastic (Black) CSH-H2B CSH-H2B 1

24
Handle Shaft
Plastic CS-HF2C CS-HF2CPN05 5
Handle Screw
For Y, ø30 S, and ø25 S handles
CS-SCW-M3-12 CS-SCW-M3-12PN10 10
M3 × 12
Handle Screw
For P and F handles
CS-SCW-M3-25 CS-SCW-M3-25PN10 10
M3 × 25
(06/02/17) 265
Installing the Terminal Cover for the CS Minimum Mounting Centers for Installing
series Cam Switches the Terminal Cover
• Complete wiring before installing the terminal cover on the
bottom plate of the contact block.
• The terminal cover has six holes. Of the four round holes
at four corners, use two diagonal pair of holes to install the
terminal cover. Either pair can be used.
(P2 handle: 125 mm)

• Insert the attached self-tapping screws into the pair of
70 mm min.
holes and tighten the screws to a torque of 0.8 to 1.0 N·m.
• For 1 through 3 decks of contact blocks, use terminal cover
CS-VL2-13S.
• For 4 through 6 decks of contact blocks, use terminal cover
CS-VL2-46S.
• The CS-VL2-46S consists of the CS-VL2-13S and a termi-
nal cover for the fourth through sixth decks. Combine the
two parts together as shown. Note that once combined,
the two parts cannot be separated. 100 mm min.
(P2 handle: 125 mm)
Mounting Hole • Although the minimum mounting centers are 100 mm hori-
zontally and 70 mm vertically, determine the mounting cen-
Bottom Plate ters in consideration of convenience of wiring. For the P2
handle, the minimum mounting centers are 125 mm hori-
Self-tapping Screw (attached)
Insert the screws into zontally and vertically.
a diagonal pair of holes.
Mounting Hole CS-VL2-13S
CS-VL2-13S
For 1 through 3 decks of contact blocks (CS-VL2-13S)
For 4 through 6 decks of contact blocks (CS-VL2-46S)
Terminal Cover Dimensions

33 (CS-VL2-13S)
34.5 (CS-VL2-46S)
64.6 (CS-VL2-13S)
66.1 (CS-VL2-46S)
52
9 12
47
2 12N+9 40.5
91.4 (CS-VL2-13S)
7.5 (N: Number of Contact Blocks)
94.4 (CS-VL2-46S)
266 (06/02/17)
Standard Contact Arrangements
• The following table lists 76 standard contact arrangements • Listing Order of the Table
for easy designation of required cam switch operation. The 76 standard contact arrangements are listed in the
• When other contact arrangements are required, specify order of the circuit number.
the number of contact block decks, operator positions, • Same Circuits
angles, and contact operation using the Custom Contact Shown in the following examples, circuits of Fig. 1 and Fig.
Arrangement Specification Sheet on page 270. 2 have the same functions. When ordering, examine the
standard contact arrangements. Your requirements may be
No. of Decks: 2 satisfied simply by changing external wiring of the stan-
Position: 3-position dard contact arrangments.
Angle: 45°
Spring Return Type: Example 1 Example 2
2-way Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Circuit No. 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
2 3 4 RR C2006 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
7 8
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
5 6
3 4
1 2 Terminal No. • Terminal Numbers
1→ 2 ←3
The terminal numbers on the contact blocks correspond
Operator Position with the numbers shown in the chart as shown below.
The arrow shows the
spring return direction.
➅
Symbol Contact Operation ➁ Terminal No.
➄
Contacts closed.
➀ ➃
7 8
Contacts remain closed between two operator posi-
➆ 5 6
tions. 3 4
Overlapping Contacts 1 2
➂ 1 2 Operator Position
Contacts of different decks are both closed at one
point while the handle is turned to the next position.
Terminal No.
Residual Contacts
When the handle is returned to the center, the con-
tacts remain closed. The contacts are opened when
the handle is turned to the opposite direction.
Standard Contact Arrangement Chart

129 C1001 129 C1002 1 2 4 OR C1003 1 2 4 OR C1004 134 C1005
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 1←2 1← 2 1 2 3
134 C1006 1 3 4 RR C1007 1 3 4 RR C1008 1 3 4 RR C1009 1 3 4 RR C1010
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 1→2←3 1→2←3 1→2←3 1→2←3
144 C1011 129 C1013 129 C1014 1 2 4 OR C1015 134 C1016
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 1←2 1 2 3
124 C1017 1 3 4 RR C1018 126 C1019
3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 1→2←3 1 2
229 C2001 229 C2002 234 C2003 234 C2004 234 C2005
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
(06/02/17) 267
2 3 4 RR C2006 2 3 4 RR C2007 244 C2008 244 C2009 249 C2011

7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1→2←3 1→2←3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
(O) (R) (S) (T)
229 C2014 229 C2015 234 C2016 234 C2017 234 C2018
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
234 C2019 234 C2020 2 3 4 RR C2021 244 C2022 233 C2023

7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3 1→2←3 1 2 3 4 1 2 3
233 C2024 243 C2025 253 C2027 236 C2028 236 C2029
7 8 7 8 7 8
7 8 7 8
5 6 5 6 5 6
5 6 5 6
3 4 3 4 3 4
3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 (R) (S) (T)
329 C3001 334 C3002 354 C3003 364 C3004 334 C3005
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12
9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
349 C3008 349 C3009 329 C3010 334 C3011 344 C3012
11 12
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12
9 10
9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10
7 8
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
5 6
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
3 4
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 4
(O) (RS) (ST) (TR) 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4
363 C3013 336 C3014 366 C3015 353 C3016 344 C3017
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12
9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
336 C3018 336 C3019 444 C4001 484 C4002 449 C4003
15 16 15 16 15 16
13 14 13 14 13 14
11 12 11 12
11 12 11 12 11 12
9 10 9 10
9 10 9 10 9 10
7 8 7 8
7 8 7 8 7 8
5 6 5 6
5 6 5 6 5 6
3 4 3 4
3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (O) (R) (S) (T)
424 C4004 429 C4005 429 C4006 449 C4007 434 C4008
15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12
9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3
1 2 1 2 1 2 (O) (R) (S) (T)
268 (06/02/17)
454 C4009 534 C5001 644 C6001 6 12 3 C6002
23 24 23 24
19 20 21 22 21 22
15 16 17 18 19 20 19 20
13 14 15 16 17 18 17 18
11 12 13 14 15 16 15 16
9 10 11 12 13 14 13 14
7 8 9 10 11 12 11 12
5 6 7 8 9 10 9 10
3 4 5 6 7 8 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 3 4
1 2 3 1 2 1 2
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
649 C6003 693 C6004 666 C6005 664 C6006

23 24 23 24 23 24
23 24
21 22 21 22 21 22
21 22
19 20 19 20 19 20
19 20
17 18 17 18 17 18
17 18
15 16 15 16 15 16
15 16
13 14 13 14 13 14
13 14
11 12 11 12 11 12
11 12
9 10 9 10 9 10
9 10
7 8 7 8 7 8
7 8
5 6 5 6 5 6
5 6
3 4 3 4 3 4
3 4
1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2
(O) (R) (S) (T) (RS)(ST)(RT)(RE)(SE)(TE)
4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
Application Examples (Voltmeter and Ammeter Circuits)

1 2 6 C1019 (ammeter switching, 1CT circuit) 2 3 6 C2029 (ammeter switching, 2CT circuit) 2 4 9 C2011 (ammeter switching, 2CT circuit)
CS CS
CS R S T A
R S T
7 8
R S T O R S T A
3 4
A 5 6
7 8
5 6
1 2 CT 3 4 3 4
CT 1 2 1 2
CT
E
E E
2 4 4 C2022 (voltmeter switching, 3PT circuit) 3 3 6 C3019 (ammeter switching, 3CT circuit) 3 4 9 C3008 (voltmeter switching, 2PT circuit)
CS CS
CS R S T R S T A R S T O RS ST TR V
11 12
R S T E
PT 7 8
V 9 10
11 12
PT 9 10
5 6 7 8 7 8
3 4 5 6 5 6
3ø-4W 1 2 3 4 3 4
1 2 1 2
CT
3 4 9 C3009 (voltmeter switching, 3PT circuit) 4 4 9 C4003 (ammeter switching, 3CT circuit) 4 4 9 C4007 (ammeter switching, 2CT circuit)
CS CS CS
R S T E V R S T
15
O R S T
16
A R S T
15
O R S T
16
A
11 12
9 10 13 14 13 14
PT 7 8 11 12 11 12
5 6 9 10 9 10
3 4 7 8 7 8
1 2 5 6 5 6
3ø-4W
3 4 3 4
CT 1 2 CT 1 2
6 4 9 C6003 (ammeter switching, 3CT circuit) E E
CS
R S T
23
O R S T
24
A
21 22
19 20
17 18
15 16
13 14
11 12
9 10
7 8
5 6
3 4
CT 1 2
(06/02/17) 269
Custom Contact Arrangement Specification Sheet
• The preceding pages provide 76 standard contact 2. Specify contact operation at each operator position
arrangements. When other contact arrangements are Indicate the required operation of all contacts at each
required, specify the number of contact block decks, oper- operator position using the following symbols.
ator positions, angles, and contact operation using the
Custom Contact Arrangement Specification Sheet shown Symbol Contact Operation
below. Contacts closed.
• For available number of contact blocks and operator posi-
tions, see the Ordering Information on page 264. Contacts remain closed between two operator posi-
tions.
1. Specify operator positions Overlapping Contacts
Indicate the operator positions starting at the first position. Contacts of different decks are both closed at one
When spring return operation is required, mark an arrow point while the handle is turned to the next position.
between two operator positions to indicate the spring Overlapping contacts are not available for handle
return direction. angles of 30° and 45°.
Residual Contacts
When the handle is returned to the center, the con-
7 tacts remain closed. The contacts are opened when
Deck 2 the handle is turned to the opposite direction.
5
• One deck of contact block contains two poles of contacts
and four terminals. When the handle is made to turn 180°
3 or more, special attention is needed. Since one cam oper-
Deck 1 ates the two poles of contacts on opposite positions, the
1 same contact operation repeats on the other pole of con-
tacts when the handle is turned 180°. When different con-
Angle tact operation is needed for handle angles of 180° or more,
use another deck of contact block.
Positions 1 2 3 4 5
Spring Return
CS Series Cam Switch Custom Contact Arrangement Specification Sheet
Type No.: Quantity:

➀ Type ➁ Decks ➂ Positions ➃ Angle ➄ Spring Return ➅ Handle
Deck Terminal No. Contact Arrangement Chart Terminal No.
23 24
Deck 6
21 22
19 20
Deck 5
17 18
15 16
Deck 4
13 14
11 12
Deck 3
9 10
7 8
Deck 2
5 6
3 4
Deck 1
1 2
Angle
Positions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Spring Return
270 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Accessories and Replacement Parts ø30
Accessories
Terminal Cover N-VL2 N-VL3 N-VL4 APN-PVL APD-PVL Use of termi-

nal covers
increases the
depth by the
dimensions
below.
Terminal Cover
ø30 Series Control Unit
38.4H × 22W 38H × 30.4W 38.4H × 24W 38H × 46W 37H × 44W
Pilot Light
X +5.0 mm
APN, APNE, UPQN, UPQNE
Full Voltage
Pilot Light
X +5.2 mm
APD, APDE
Pilot Light
Transformer
APN, APNE, APD, APDE, DC-DC Converter X +2.7 mm
UPQN, UPQNE
1 contact block
Terminal Cover
X
Pushbutton CB
ABN, ABD, AON, AOD, AVN,

2 contact blocks
ABGD, AJN, ABFD, ATN,
AOFD, UBQN, AVD, UOQN, X
CB
AJD, UWQN, AZD, ABBN, CB 2 pieces
AYD, ABBS (ø25)
+0 mm
3 contact blocks
Selector Switch X
ASN, ASD, ASTN CB CB
2 pieces
CB
Selector Pushbutton
4 contact blocks
ABN, ASBD
X
CB CB
CB CB 2 pieces
Illuminated Pushbutton
ALN, ALD, ALNE, ALDE,
AOLN, AOLD, AOLNE,
AOLDE, ALGN, ALGD, X
ALGNE, ALGDE, AOLGN, Full Voltage +4.5 mm
2 pieces
AOLGDE, ALFN, ALFD,
ALFNE, ALFDE, AOLFN,
AOLFD, AOLFNE, AOLFDE,
AVLN, AVLD, AVLNE, AVLDE,
AJLN, AJLD, AJLNE, AJLDE,
ULQN, UOLQN
Illuminated Selector Switch Transformer

X +1.5 mm
ASLN, ASLD DC-DC Converter
Push-to-Check Pilot Light

APN1∗∗P

When ordering terminal covers, specify the Type No. and the quantity.
(06/02/17) 271
ø30 ø30 Series Accessories and Replacement Parts
Nameplates
Ordering Package
Type Legend Material Type No. Dimensions (mm) Applicable Unit
Type No. Quantity
NA-0 1
Blank NA-0
NA-0PN10 10
Aluminium
40
1.2 mm thick
NA
24.5
White letters on
black background
NA-∗ 1
0.5
ø3
5
7.
R1
With Legend NA-∗ ø30 Control Unit
NA-∗PN10 10
40
NALO 1
Aluminium
30
47.5
NALO Blank 1.2 mm thick NALO
Black
ø3
NALOPN10 10
0
.5
5
7.
R1
70
4
MLO 1
Brass
.5 ARN/ARNS
(chrome-plated)
29.3
0
MLO Blank MLO ø3
1.0 mm thick Mono-Lever
Matte
MLOPN10 10 ø43
Letters should not be
engraved within this line
• With adhesive tapes on

the back
CQ-0 1
Blank CQ-0
CQ-0PN10 10 2-ø3.5
Aluminium
0.5 mm thick UCSQO
CQ
White letters on Cam Switch
black background
CQ-∗ 1
With Legend
(Legend
CQ-∗ ø13 20
Codes 31 64
and 53 only)
CQ-∗PN10 10

the back
CQM-0 1
Blank CQM-0
12
CQM-0PN10 10
Aluminium
5
0.5 mm thick UCSQM

CQM
White letters on Cam Switch
black background
CQM-∗ 1 2-ø3.5
With Legend
ø13
(Legend 40
CQM-∗
Code 31 64
only)
CQM-∗PN10 10
272 (06/02/17)
Nameplates
Ordering Package
Type Legend Material Type No. Dimensions (mm) Applicable Unit
Type No. Quantity
CQN-0 1 the back
Blank CQN-0
CQN-0PN10 10 ACSNO, ACSNK

Aluminium
0.5 mm thick Cam Switches
CQN ø30
.5
White letters on ø30 mm Selector
black background Switches
CQN-∗ 1
With Legend
(Legend
CQN-∗ 64
Codes 31, 35,
and 53 only)
CQN-∗PN10 10

CQS-0 1 the back
Blank CQS-0
ø2
5
.5
CQS-0PN10 10 ACSSO, ACSSK
Aluminium
0.5 mm thick Cam Switches
CQS
White letters on ø25 mm Selector
black background Switches
CQS-∗ 1
With Legend
(Legend Code CQS-∗
53 only) 64
CQS-∗PN10 10
Blank HNAV-0 HNAV-0 1 ø60
Polyamide HN1E ø30 mm

Black letters on series
HNAV ø3
yellow back- 0 Emergency Stop
ground 1.5 1.0 Switches
EMERGENCY HNAV-27 HNAV-27 1 Legend “EMERGENCY STOP”
is indicated outside a ø44mm
circle.
Legends
Code Legend
0 (blank)
1 ON
2 OFF
3 START
4 STOP
31 OFF-ON
35 HAND-AUTO
53 HAND-OFF-AUTO
Shape and Engraving Area Example

Engraving Area Max. No. No. of Letters
2 2 Shape
2 2
36 Height Width of Lines on 1 Line
36
Standard 5 36 1 14
10
Large 10 36 2 14
5
18.5
18.5
• The above example is when the letter is 4 mm tall.
Standard Large
Type NA Type NALO
(06/02/17) 273
Accessories
Ordering Package
Type No. Quantity
Locking Ring Wrench • Used to tighten the locking ring when installing
the ø30 or ø25 switch onto a panel.
0
ø2
6
ø3
ø2 29 ø3
4
Rubber OR-12 OR-12 1 ø
ø46
ø45
ø37
ø25 Series 90 ø30 Series
Lamp Holder Tool • Used to install and remove the LED/incandes-

cent lamps. See page 280.
ø11.6
OR-55
14
59
Contact Rubber Boot • Rubber boot used to prevent oil and dirt from
For momentary 1 layer of contact blocks entering into the contact block.
(2 contact blocks) • Temperature range: –5 to +60°C
• Cannot be used for zinc diecast control units.
18 42
Rubber (nitryl)
OC-99 OC-99 1
(black)
52
44
Contact Rubber Boot • Applicable to AVN3 and AJN3.

For 1 layer of
• Applicable to ø30 diecast zinc pushbuttons and
contact
blocks OC-90 OC-90 1 selector switches.
(2 contact
blocks)
Rubber
38.8
(translucent)
For 2 layers
of contact
blocks OC-290 OC-290 1 42.8 42.4
(4 contact (65.4)
blocks)
Anti-rotation Ring • Used to prevent the operator from turning.

selector switches and selector pushbuttons.
See page 280.
2.8 0.8
.5
ø30
ø3
9
Rubber Mounting Hole Plug • Used to plug unused

ø30mm mounting holes.
ø40
• Gray also available.
5
Rubber Ordering Type No.:

OB-13B OB-13BPN05 5
10
(black) OB-13PN05
ø30
5
ø34
Plastic Mounting Hole Plug • Tightening torque: 1.2 N·m.

ø36
Plastic
5
OBP-11 OBP-11 1
(gray)
24
M30 P1.5 Screw

4
Locking Ring
Metallic Mounting Hole Plug • Tightening torque: 1.2 N·m.

ø36
Metal
5
(diecast) OB-11 OB-11 1

(zinc-plated)
30
M30 P1.5 Screw

4
Locking Ring
274 (06/02/17)
Accessories
Ordering Package
Type No. Quantity
Button Cover for Color Type – – • Metallic bezels cov-
ø28
Extended Pushbuttons ered with a rubber boot
Black OC-11B OC-11B to enhance waterproof
characteristics.
19
Rubber (nitryl) Green OC-11R OC-11R
11
1 • Button is not included.
Red OC-11G OC-11G Applicable to extended ø38
pushbuttons only.
M30 P1.5
Yellow OC-11Y OC-11Y
A
Clear Boot tect pushbuttons where
For flush units are subject to
OC-121 OC-121 1 water splash. Not suit-
pushbuttons
B
able for outdoor use or
where the units are sub-
Rubber ject to oil splash.
(EPDM)
A B
For extended
OC-122 OC-122 1 OC-121 37 16
pushbuttons
OC-122 37 16
Dust-proof Rubber Cover for • Used for ABN4G

Jumbo Mushrooms pushbuttons. Panel Thickness
1.2 to 5.5
Rubber
ø80
(nitryl) OC-4GN OC-4GN 1
black
32
Padlock Cover • Used to protect pushbuttons, illuminated push-

buttons, and selector switches (knob operator).
82.5
Panel Thickness
0.8 to 3.2
R6
Polyarylate
6.5
93
(gasket: nitryl OL-KL1 OL-KL1 1
rubber)
30
70
24
ø3
0 0.
ø5 2
Waterproof Rubber
Key Hole ø8 29.5 Gasket 0.5t
30
Metal Protector • Used to protect flush pushbuttons from inadvert-

ent operation.
• Can be easily attached using the locking ring.
42.5
Metal 16
Mounting Centers
OL-C OL-C 1
(zinc-plated)
50 min.
.5
ø30 1.6
11.5
Locking Attachment • Used to lock an extended pushbutton in the

depressed position.
• Can be easily attached using the locking ring.
30
Metal
OL-H OL-H 1
(zinc-plated)
Locking Plate ø5 hole
9.5
16.5
Mounting Plate
(06/02/17) 275
Maintenance Parts
Ordering Package
Shape Specification Type No. Remarks
Type No. Quantity
Metallic Bezel
Metal
OG-11 OG-11PN02 2
(chrome-plated)
Plastic Bezel
Specify a color code in place of ∗.
Plastic OGP-11∗ OGP-11∗PN02 2 B (black), G (green), R (red), W (white),
Y (yellow)
Clear Plastic Bezel for Flush

Pushbuttons
OGP-13 OGP-13PN02 2
Clear Plastic Bezel for

Extended Pushbuttons
OGP-14 OGP-14PN02 2 • Clear plastic bezel and full shroud.

Clear Plastic • OGP-1411 cannot be used with LED
illumination units and diecast units.
Clear Plastic Bezel for

Illuminated Pushbuttons
OGP-1411 OGP-1411 1
Clear Button Cover
• Used on flush and extended pushbut-

Clear Plastic ABN1B-C ABN1B-CPN05 5 tons to indicate a mark or a symbol
engraved on the marking plate. The
clear button cover holds the marking
plate. The ø30 series marking chip can
Marking Plate only be used on the ABN1 and AON1.
• Specify a color code in place of ∗.
B (black), G (green), R (red), W (white),
Plastic TN-0∗ TN-0∗PN10 10 Y (yellow)
276 (06/02/17)
Maintenance Parts
Mate- Ordering Package
Shape Description Type No. Color
rial Type No. Quantity
Contact Block 1NO contact BS010E BS010E 1 • Push rod color: Green
(BS: Dark gray)
1NC contact BS001E BS001E 1 • Push rod color: Red
EM contact • Push rod color: Black

BS010SE BS010SE 1
(early make)
LB contact • Push rod color: White
BS001SE BS001SE 1
(late break)
Contact Block • Push rod Applicable Units:
1NO contact BST010 BST010 1 color: Green • Pushlock Turn Reset
(BST: Light gray)
• Push Turn Lock
• Push rod • LED Illuminated
1NC contact BST001 BST001 1 color: Red Pushbutton
• LED Illuminated
EM contact • Push rod Selector Switch
BST010S BST010S 1 color: Black • Incandescent Illumi-
(early make)
nated Selector
LB contact • Push rod Switch
BST001S BST001S 1 color: White • All ø30 Diecast Zinc
(late break)
Control Units
Lens A (amber), C (clear), G (green), R (red),
Used for S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
APN106LN-➁ APN106LN-➁PN05 5
APN(E)1 • Use the white (W) lens for pure white
illumination
C (clear), G (green), R (red), S (blue)
Used for UPQN406L-➁ UPQN406L-➁PN05 • Use the clear (C) lens for white illumi-
nation.
UPQNE4 5
Plastic A (amber), Y (yellow)
U(O)LQN∗B UPQN406LD-➁ UPQN406LD-➁PN05 • Use the amber (A) lens for orange
illumination.
Used for ULQN06L-➁ ULQN06L-➁PN05 C (clear), G (green), R (red), S (blue)

UPQN3B 5 A (amber), W (white), Y (yellow)
U(O)LQN UPQN06LD-➁ UPQN06LD-➁PN05 • Use the amber (A) lens for orange
illumination.
Lens ALN2L-➁ ALN2L-➁PN05 5 G (green), R (red), S (blue)
Used for
ALN, AOLN A (amber), W (white), Y (yellow)
(LED) ALN2LD-➁ ALN2LD-➁PN05 5 • Use the white (W) lens for pure white
illumination
Used for ALN06L-➁ ALN06L-➁PN05 5 C (clear), G (green), R (red), S (blue)
ALN, AOLN
(incandescent) Plastic A (amber), W (white)
ALN06LD-➁ ALN06LD-➁PN05 5 • Use the amber (A) lens for orange
(1W) illumination.
Used for ALN08L-➁ ALN08L-➁PN05 5 C (clear), G (green), R (red), S (blue)
ALN, AOLN
A (amber), W (white)
(incandescent)
ALN08LD-➁ ALN08LD-➁PN05 5 • Use the amber (A) lens for orange
(2W) illumination.
Button Flush ABN1B-➀ ABN1B-➀PN05 5 G (green), R (red), Y (yellow)
Above colors are used for ø30 control
Extended ABN2B-➀ ABN2B-➀PN05 5 units (dark colored operator units).
For black, use black buttons from light
Mushroom ABN3B-➀ ABN3B-➀PN02 2 colored operator units.
Plastic
Button Flush ABN1BN-➀ ABN1BN-➀PN05 5 B (black), G (green), R (red), S (blue),
Y (yellow), W (white)
Extended ABN2BN-➀ ABN2BN-➀PN05 5 Above colors are used for ø30 diecast
zinc control units (light colored operator
Mushroom ABN3BN-➀ ABN3BN-➀PN02 2 units).
Button ❶ Mushroom
ABN4B-➀ ABN4B-➀ 1
(ABN4)
❶ ❷ ❷ Mushroom
(ABN4G/ ABN4GB-➀ ABN4GB-➀ 1
ABN4F)
Plastic B (black), G (green), R (red), Y (yellow)
❹ ❸ Square Flush
❸ UBQN1B-➀ UBQN1B-➀PN02 2
(UBQN1)
❹ Square
Extended UBQN2B-➀ UBQN2B-➀PN02 2
(UBQN2)
(06/02/17) 277
Maintenance Parts
Package
Shape Description Material Type No. Ordering Type No. Remarks
Quantity
Lens
For ø40 pushlock turn reset

AVLN3L-R AVLN3L-RPN02 2
pushbuttons
Marking Plate
For UPQN4 Plastic UPQN406N-W UPQN406N-WPN05 5
Spare Key
• Applicable to ABN3K,
ASN∗K Metal ASN-SK-24401 ASN-SK-24401PN02 2 ABN4K, ABN5
Rubber Washer (3.0mm thick)
Rubber OW-12 OW-12PN10 10
Rubber Washer (1.5mm thick)
Rubber OW-11 OW-11PN10 10
Shroud ❶ Half shroud

ABN2G ABN2G 1
(for pushbuttons)
❷ Full shroud
❶ ❷ ABN2F ABN2F 1
(for pushbuttons)
❸ Full shroud
❹ (for mushroom ABN3G ABN3G 1
❸ pushbuttons)
❹ Shallow shroud
(for jumbo mush- ABN4G ABN4G 1
❺ rooms)
❺ Deep shroud Metal
(for jumbo mush- ABN4F ABN4F 1
rooms)
• For incandescent/LED
❻ ❼ ❻ Half shroud ALN1GL ALN1GL 1 illuminated pushbuttons
(for illuminated (E12 base)
pushbuttons) • For LED illuminated
ALN2GL ALN2GL 1 pushbuttons (BA9S base)
• For incandescent/LED
❼ Full shroud ALN1F ALN1F 1 illuminated pushbuttons
(for illuminated (E12 base)
pushbuttons) • For LED illuminated push-
ALN2FL ALN2FL 1 buttons (BA9S base)
Transformer
100/110V AC
(for LED/1W incandescent TWR-016N TWR-016N 1
lamps)
Mounting screws are not
included.
200/220V AC
(for LED/1W incandescent TWR-026N TWR-026N 1
lamps)
278 (06/02/17)
Maintenance Parts
LED Lamps
Operating Current Draw Ordering Illumination Package
Dimensions Type No. Base
Voltage AC DC Type No. Color Code Quantity
17 mA 14 mA Specify a color
LSTD-6➁ code in place of 1
(A, R, W, Y) (A, R, W, Y)
6V AC/DC ±10%
8 mA 5.5 mA
LSTD-6➁ ➁ in the Order-
(G, PW, S) (G, PW, S) LSTD-6➁PN10 ing Type No. 10
Base BA9S/13
A: amber
LSTD-1➁ 1
G: green
ø10
12V AC/DC ±10% 11 mA 10 mA LSTD-1➁ PW: pure white BA9S/13

20.4 LSTD-1➁PN10 R: red 10
S: blue
W: white
LSTD-2➁ 1
Y: yellow
24V AC/DC ±10% 11 mA 10 mA LSTD-2➁
LSTD-2➁PN10 10
17 mA 14 mA Specify a color
LETD-6➁ code in place of 1
(A, R, W, Y) (A, R, W, Y)
Base E12/15 6V AC/DC ±10%
8 mA 5.5 mA
LETD-6➁ ➁ in the Order-
(G, PW, S) (G, PW, S) LETD-6➁PN10 ing Type No. 10
ø12
27 A: amber
LETD-8➁ 1
G: green
12V AC/DC ±10% 7 mA 6.5 mA LETD-8➁ R: red E12/15
LETD-8➁PN10 S: blue 10
W: white
Y: yellow
LETD-2➁ 1
24V AC/DC ±10% 11 mA 10 mA LETD-2➁
LETD-2➁PN10 10
Incandescent Lamps
Rated Operating Package
Dimensions Lamp Ratings Type No. Life
Voltage Quantity
Base BA9S/13 6V AC/DC 1W (6.3V) LS-6
12V AC/DC 1W (18V) LS-8
1
22.5±1.5 18V AC/DC 1W (24V) LS-2
ø11±1
24V AC/DC 1W (30V) LS-3 Approx. 1000 hours minimum

6V AC/DC 2W (6.3V) LE-6 (reference value)
Base E12/15
12V AC/DC 2W (18V) LE-8
ø13±1
1
18V AC/DC 2W (24V) LE-2
34±2
24V AC/DC 2W (30V) LE-3
Transformer
Separate Mounting Type Primary Voltage Secondary Voltage Type No. Applicable Load
For 1W
100/110V AC TWR516
One full voltage type pilot light or illuminated
switch containing LSTD-6➁, LETD-6➁ LED
200/220V AC 5.5V TWR526
lamp (6V AC/DC) or LS-6 incandescent
lamp (6.3 V AC/DC, 1W)
400/440V AC TWR546
For 2W
100/110V AC TWR518
One full voltage type pilot light or illuminated
200/220V AC 15V TWR528 switch containing LE-8 incandescent lamp
(18V AC/DC, 2W)
400/440V AC TWR548
(06/02/17) 279
ø30 ø30 Series Instructions
Safety Precautions
• Turn off the power to the ø30 series control units before • For wiring, use wires of a proper size to meet the voltage
starting installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and and current requirements. Tighten the M3.5 terminal
inspection of the products. Failure to turn power off may screws to a tightening torque of 1.0 to 1.3 N·m. Failure to
cause electrical shocks or fire hazard. tighten terminal screws may cause overheat and fire.
Instructions
Panel Mounting for Square Pushbuttons Panel Thickness and Rubber Washer
and Pilot Lights Adjust the thickness of the rubber washers according to the
1. Tighten the square ring to the operator and position the panel thickness. Also, make sure to include the nameplate
ring correctly. thickness when using a nameplate.
2. Lightly tighten the screw to secure the pilot light onto the Applicable Models Applicable Models
panel. • Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons • Extended Pushbuttons with Half
with Half Shroud (LED) Shroud
• Extended Pushbuttons with Half • Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons
Shroud (Diecast) with Half Shroud (Incandescent)
Recommended tightening • Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons Panel Rubber Washer
torque: 0.15 N·m with Half Shroud (Diecast) Thickness
(mm) 1.5mm 3.0mm
Panel Thickness Rubber Washer
(mm) Supplied 1 piece 1 piece
1.5mm 3.0mm
0.8 1 piece 1 piece
Supplied 1 piece 1 piece
Tightening Torque for Terminal Screws 0.8 to 1.8 – 1 piece
0.8 to 2.3 – 1 piece
2.3 to 4.0 1 piece –
Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 1.0 to 1.3 N·m. 1.8 to 3.5 1 piece –
Applicable Models Applicable Models

• Extended Pushbuttons with Full
Replacement of Lamps • Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons
Shroud
with Full Shroud (Incandescent)
Lamps can be replaced by using the lamp holder tool (OR- • Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons Panel Rubber Washer
Thickness
55) from the front of the panel. with Full Shroud (LED)
(mm) 1.5mm 3.0mm
• Extended Illuminated Pushbuttons
• How to Remove with Full Shroud (Diecast) Supplied 3 pieces 1 piece
To remove, slip the lamp holder tool onto the lamp head • Mushroom Pushbuttons with Full 0.8 to 1.5 3 pieces 1 piece
lightly. Then push slightly, and turn the lamp holder tool Shroud 1.5 to 3.0 2 pieces 1 piece
counterclockwise. Panel Thickness Rubber Washer 3.0 to 4.5 1 piece 1 piece
• How to Install (mm) 1.5mm 3.0mm 4.5 to 6.0 – 1 piece
To install, insert the lamp head into the lamp holder tool. Supplied 2 pieces 1 piece 6.0 to 7.5 1 piece –
Place the pins on the lamp base to the grooves in the lamp 0.8 to 2.0 1 piece 1 piece
Applicable Models
socket. Inset the lamp and turn it clockwise. 2.0 to 3.5 1 piece 1 piece
• Extended Pushbuttons with Full
3.5 to 5.0 – 1 piece Shroud (Diecast)
5.0 to 6.0 (6.5) 1 piece – Panel Rubber Washer
The number in brackets is for mush- Thickness
(mm) 1.5mm 3.0mm
room pushbuttons with full shroud.
Extended illuminated pushbuttons Supplied 2 pieces 1 piece
with full shroud (incandescent) are 0.8 to 2.5 2 pieces 1 piece
5.0 mm maximum.
2.5 to 4.0 1 pieces 1 piece
Applicable Models 4.0 to 5.5 – 1 piece
OR-55
• Toggle Lever Types 5.5 to 6.0 1 piece –
• Knob Push Turn Lock Illuminated
Pushbuttons Applicable Models
Installing the Anti-rotation Ring Rubber Washer • Other Models (Excluding Square
Panel Thickness
(mm) Types)
1.5mm 3.0mm
Anti-rotation rings are used Panel OGL11 Panel Rubber Washer
Supplied 1 piece 1 piece
on selector switches or Thickness
1.5mm 3.0mm
0.8 to 2.0 1 piece 1 piece (mm)
pushbuttons which rotate 2.0 to 3.5 – 1 piece Supplied 2 pieces 1 piece
and used when using no 3.5 to 5.5 (5.0) 1 piece – 0.8 to 3.5 2 pieces 1 piece
nameplates. The number in brackets is for knob 3.5 to 5.0 1 piece 1 piece
Insert a 1.5mm thick rubber push turn lock illuminated pushbut- 5.0 to 6.5 – 1 piece
tons.
washer between the panel 6.5 to 7.5 1 piece –
and the anti-rotation ring as
shown on the right.
Rubber Washer
280 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Instructions ø30
• For the pure white LED, use a white lens. The illumination
2. Transformer type units are recommended for use in color will be dull if a different color is used.
areas subjected to noise.

LED lamps consist of semiconductors. If the applied voltage a surge absorber.
exceeds the rated voltage, LED elements may deteriorate [Protection Example 1] For AC circuit
due to overheat, resulting in significant decrease in lumi-
nance, hue change, or failure of lighting. Also, if an extrane-
LED with
ous noise, transient voltage, or transient current is applied transformer
to the circuit, similar effects may occur. When using LED

C C
lamps, observe the following instructions. LED with Relay Ry LED
transformer LED
• Rated Voltage R coil or
solenoid
R
The LED lamps are rated at 6V, 12V, or 24V AC/DC, and
can be used within ±10% the rated voltage of either AC or C: 0.1 μF
DC.
[Protection Example 2] For DC circuit
• DC Power
1. Switching power supply +
Regulated voltage from switching power supply is best

(Reference values of the diode)
suited. Make sure to use within the rated voltage of the Forward current: More than the Ry coil current
LED lamp. Reverse withstand voltage: Ry coil current × 10
Relay Ry LED Diode
2. Rechargeable battery coil or
solenoid
Note that the battery voltage may exceed the rated volt- –
age of the LED lamp while the battery is being charged
and immediately after the charging is complete. Be sure • Countermeasures against Dim Lighting
to use the LED lamp on a voltage of ±10% the rated volt- 1. Leakage currents through the transistors or a contact
age. protection circuit may cause the LED lamp to illuminate
3. Full-wave rectification dimly even when the output is off.
Since the LED lamp is AC/DC compatible, a diode bridge 2. When the LED lamp is illuminated by a transistor output,
for rectification is not necessary. If the LED lamp is used take the following measure.
on a full-wave rectification current through a diode
bridge, the rectifier diodes will reduce the voltage, result- [Circuit Example]
ing in lower luminance. Connect shunt resistor R in parallel with the LED lamp.
This is not suitable for the power source of LED lamps.
R LED
• Noise
LED elements deteriorate due to extraneous noise, result- Io
ing in significant decrease in luminance, hue change, or fail-
Io: Leakage current when the output is off
ure of lighting. When such effects are anticipated, take a R: Shunt resistor
protection measure shown below, such as RC elements or
(06/02/17) 281
ø30 ø30 Series Diecast Zinc Control Units
Heavy duty switches for tough industrial usage

UL Listing
UL
File No. E68961
EN EN60947-5-1

Contact Ratings
Pushbuttons Contact Block Type BST (ø30 series)
Selector Pushbuttons IEC 60947-5-1 DC-13 (P600)
Characteristics
DC
BST Contact Block (Light Gray)

Single-pole Contact Block Type
• Interlocking Groove
Contact
• M3.5 Terminal Screw 1NO 1NC 1NO (early make) 1NC (late break)
Type BST BST010 BST001 BST010S BST001S
Note: BST contact blocks are not interchangeable with dark gray BS contact
blocks used for ø30 control units.
• Mounting Screw
• Inspection Window • Push Rod
Specifications, ratings, and mounting hole layouts are the same as ø30 control units.
See “ø30 Series Control Units” on page 223.
282 (06/02/17)
ø30 Series Diecast Zinc Control Units ø30

• Black, green, and red colored buttons are included with terminal cover referring to page 271.
flush pushbuttons.
• Full voltage type illuminated units are not supplied with a
Transformer type illuminated units contain an LED or
incandescent lamp.
• Terminal covers, nameplates, and accessories are ordered
separately.
pages.
ø30 Series Diecast Zinc Pushbuttons ø30 Series Diecast Zinc Illuminated
ABD2 11 N R Pushbuttons
Button color code
ALDE 2 16 11 D N R
Lens color code
Contact arrangement code Lamp type
10: 1NO D: LED (Transformer type only)
01: 1NC (blank): Incandescent
11: 1NO-1NC Contact arrangement code
20: 2NO 11: 1NO-1NC 20: 2NO
02: 2NC 02: 2NC 31: 3NO-1NC
22: 2NO-2NC 22: 2NO-2NC 13: 1NO-3NC
40: 4NO 04: 4NC
Note:
• Mushroom pull type AZD3 can have a maximum of two contact 99: Full voltage
blocks. 16/18: Transformer (100/110V AC)
• Mushroom push-pull type AYD31 can have a maximum of two 116/118: Transformer (115V AC)
contact blocks. 126/128: Transformer (120V AC)
ø30 Series Diecast Zinc Pilot Lights 386/388: Transformer (380V AC)
APDE 1 99 D N R 486/488: Transformer (480V AC)
Lens color code Lamp receptacle
Lamp type E: E12 (LETD-6➁ LED or 2W
D: LED (Transformer type only) incandescent lamps)
(blank): Incandescent (blank): BA9S (LSTD-6➁ LED or 1W
Operating voltage code incandescent lamps)
99: Full voltage Note:
• Illuminated pushbuttons cannot have an odd number of contact
blocks, such as 1NO, 1NC, 3NO, 2NO-1NC, 1NO-2NC, and
3NC.
236/238: Transformer (230V AC) • Full voltage type is not supplied with a lamp.
246/248: Transformer (240V AC) • Transformer types contain an LED lamp (LSTD-6➁ or LETD-6➁)
386/388: Transformer (380V AC) or incandescent lamp (LS-6, 1W or LE-8, 2W).
46/48: Transformer (400/440V AC) • LED lamps cannot be used on 480V AC transformers.
486/488: Transformer (480V AC) • Operating voltage codes 18, 118, 128, 28, 238, 248, 388, 48,
Lamp receptacle: and 488 are available for incandescent types only.
E: E12 (LETD-6➁ LED or 2W
incandescent lamps)
(blank): BA9S (LSTD-6➁ LED or 1W
incandescent lamps)
Note:
• Transformer types contain an LED lamp (LSTD-6➁ or LETD-6➁)
or incandescent lamp (LS-6, 1W or LE-8, 2W).
• LED lamps cannot be used on 480V AC transformers.
• Operating voltage codes 18, 118, 128, 28, 238, 248, 388, 48,
and 488 are available for incandescent types only.
(06/02/17) 283
ø30 ø30 Series Diecast Zinc Control Units
ø30 Series Diecast Zinc Selector Switch ø30 Series Diecast Zinc
ASD 2 L 11 N
Illuminated Selector Switch
Contact arrangement code ASLD 2 16 22 D N R
Operator type Lens color code
(blank): Knob Lamp type
L: Lever D: LED (Transformer type only)
Number of positions (blank): Incandescent
99: Full voltage
ø30 Series Diecast Zinc 156: Transformer (115V AC)
ASD 2 K 20 N B 236: Transformer (230V AC)
Key removable position code 256: Transformer (240V AC)
• Maintained 46: Transformer (400/440V AC)
(blank): Removable in all positions 486: Transformer (480V AC)
B: Removable in left only Number of positions
C: Removable in right only Note:
• Spring return from right • Full voltage type is not supplied with a lamp.
(blank): Removable in left only • Transformer type contains an LED lamp (LSTD-6➁) or incandes-
• Spring return from left cent lamp (LS-6).
(blank): Removable in right only • LED lamps cannot be used on 480V AC transformers.
3-position
• Maintained
Number of positions
Note:
284 (06/02/17)
ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Pushbuttons ø30
Flush / Extended / Extended with Half Shroud / Extended with Full Shroud
Type Code
Flush 1NO ABD110N➀
ABD1 1NC ABD101N➀
1NO-1NC ABD111N➀ Black (B), green
Momentary
2NO ABD120N➀ (G), and red (R) M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
buttons are sup-
2NC ABD102N➀ plied with each
ø35
36
2NO-2NC ABD122N➀ unit.
Flush 1NO AOD110N➀ Specify S, Y, or 6 23 40
AOD1 1NC AOD101N➀ W when a blue, 68 (1 to 2 blocks)
yellow, or white 91 (3 to 4 blocks) 9
1NO-1NC AOD111N➀ button is
Maintained
2NO AOD120N➀ required.
2NC AOD102N➀
2NO-2NC AOD122N➀
Extended 1NO ABD210N➀
ABD2 1NC ABD201N➀
1NO-1NC ABD211N➀
Momentary
2NO ABD220N➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
2NC ABD202N➀
ø40
ø25
2NO-2NC ABD222N➀
ø35
Extended 1NO AOD210N➀ 5.5 23 40
AOD2 1NC AOD201N➀ 53 (1 or 2 9
blocks) 14.5
1NO-1NC AOD211N➀ 76 (3 or 4 blocks)
Maintained
2NO AOD220N➀
2NC AOD202N➀
2NO-2NC AOD222N➀
Extended with Half Shroud 1NO ABGD210N➀
ABGD2 1NC ABGD201N➀
1NO-1NC ABGD211N➀ Specify a button
Momentary
2NO ABGD220N➀ color code in M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 3.5
place of ➀ in the
2NC ABGD202N➀ Type No.
ø25
ø35
ø27
ø40
2NO-2NC ABGD222N➀
B: black
Extended with Half Shroud 1NO AOGD210N➀ G: green 5.5 23 40
AOGD2 1NC AOGD201N➀ R: red 49.5 (1 or
2 blocks)
S: blue 20.5
1NO-1NC AOGD211N➀ W: white 72.5 (3 or 4 blocks)
Maintained
2NO AOGD220N➀ Y: yellow
2NC AOGD202N➀
2NO-2NC AOGD222N➀
Extended with Full Shroud 1NO ABFD210N➀
ABFD2 1NC ABFD201N➀
1NO-1NC ABFD211N➀
Momentary
2NO ABFD220N➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
2NC ABFD202N➀
ø28.5
ø35
ø40
ø25
2NO-2NC ABFD222N➀
Extended with Full Shroud 1NO AOFD210N➀ 5.5 23 40
AOFD2 1NC AOFD201N➀ 51.5 (1 or
2 blocks) 17
1NO-1NC AOFD211N➀ 74.5 (3 or 4 blocks)
Maintained
2NO AOFD220N➀
2NC AOFD202N➀
2NO-2NC AOFD222N➀
• Pushbuttons with one or three contact blocks contain a dummy block
(06/02/17) 285
ø30 ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Pushbuttons
Mushroom / Jumbo Mushroom Types

Type Code
Mushroom 1NO ABD310N➀
ABD3
1NC ABD301N➀
1NO-1NC ABD311N➀
Momentary
2NO ABD320N➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
2NC ABD302N➀
ø40
ø40
2NO-2NC ABD322N➀
Mushroom 1NO AOD310N➀ 5.5 23 40
AOD3 53 (1 or 2
1NC AOD301N➀ blocks) 22
1NO-1NC AOD311N➀ 76 (3 or 4 blocks)
Maintained
2NO AOD320N➀
2NC AOD302N➀ B: black
2NO-2NC AOD322N➀ G: green
R: red
Mushroom with Full Shroud 1NO ABGD310N➀ W: white
ABGD3 1NC ABGD301N➀ Y: yellow
1NO-1NC ABGD311N➀
Momentary
2NO ABGD320N➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6.5
2NC ABGD302N➀
ø48
2NO-2NC ABGD322N➀
Mushroom with Full Shroud 1NO AOGD310N➀ 5.5 23
AOGD3 1NC AOGD301N➀
52 (1 or
2 blocks) 23
1NO-1NC AOGD311N➀ 75 (3 or 4 blocks)

Maintained
2NO AOGD320N➀
2NC AOGD302N➀
2NO-2NC AOGD322N➀
Jumbo Mushroom 1NO ABD410N➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
ABD4
1NC ABD401N➀
ø65
1NO-1NC ABD411N➀
Momentary
2NO ABD420N➀ 5.5 23
53 (1 or
2NC ABD402N➀ 2 blocks) 29
76 (3 or 4 blocks)
2NO-2NC ABD422N➀
Jumbo Mushroom with 1NO ABGD410N➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
Shallow Shroud
ABGD4 1NC ABGD401N➀ B: black
DG: dark green
ø75
ø65
1NO-1NC ABGD411N➀ DR: dark red

Momentary
2NO ABGD420N➀ G: green 5.5 23
R: red 53 (1 or
2NC ABGD402N➀ Y: yellow 2 blocks) 29
2NO-2NC ABGD422N➀ 76 (3 or 4 blocks)
Jumbo Mushroom with 1NO ABFD410N➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
Deep Shroud
1NC ABFD401N➀
ABFD4
ø75
1NO-1NC ABFD411N➀
Momentary
2NO ABFD420N➀ 5.5 23
53 (1 or
2NC ABFD402N➀ 2 blocks) 32.5
2NO-2NC ABFD422N➀ 76 (3 or 4 blocks)

• Pushbuttons with one or three contact blocks contain a dummy block
286 (06/02/17)
ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Pushbuttons ø30
Pushlock Turn Reset / Push Turn Lock / Pull / Push-Pull / Pin Lock Types
➀ Button Color
Code
Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset 1NO AVD310N➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
AVD3
1NC AVD301N➀
ø40
36
1NO-1NC AVD311N➀ R: red
2NO AVD320N➀ Y: yellow 5.5 23 40
53 (1 or 2
2NC AVD302N➀ blocks) 24
76 (3 or 4 blocks)
2NO-2NC AVD322N➀
Mushroom Push Turn Lock 1NO AJD310N➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
AJD3 1NC AJD301N➀ H L
B: black
OC
PUS
ø40
36
1NO-1NC AJD311N➀ G: green
2NO AJD320N➀ R: red 5.5 23 40
Y: yellow 53 (1 or 2
2NC AJD302N➀ blocks) 24
76 (3 or 4 blocks)
2NO-2NC AJD322N➀
Mushroom Pull 1NO AZN310N➀
AZD3
1NO-1NC AZN311N➀
2NO AZN320N➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw

2NC AZN302N➀
ø40
36
Mushroom Push-Pull
AYD31 1NO-1NC AYD3111N➀
5.5 23
B: black 40
53 (1 or 2 blocks) 30.5
G: green
2NO AYD3120N➀ R: red
S: blue
Y: yellow
2NC AYD3102N➀
Panel Thickness
Pin Lock 1NO ABD8P10N➀ 0.8 to 7.5
ABD8P 1NC ABD8P01N➀ M3.5 Terminal Screw
1NO-1NC ABD8P11N➀
ø28
ø35
ø40
52
2NO ABD8P20N➀
5.5 23
2NC ABD8P02N➀ 53 (1 or 40
2 blocks) 28.5 49
2NO-2NC ABD8P22N➀ 76 (3 or 4 blocks)
• Specify a button color code in place of ➀ in the Type No. • Contact Operation
• Round bezel (metal): Chrome-plated Pull Switch (Spring Return)
• Pushbuttons with one or three contact blocks contain a dummy AZD3
block. Contact
Normal Pull
• Pushlock Turn Reset: Button is maintained when pressed and is 1NO
reset when turned clockwise. Red buttons only.
1NC
Note: AVD3 pushlock turn reset switches cannot be used as emer-
gency stop switches. When emergency stop switches are 1NO-1NC
required, use the HN1E series emergency stop switches
(ISO 13850 and IEC 60947-5-5 compliant). 2NO
• Push Turn Lock: Button is locked when turned clockwise in the
depressed position and is reset when turned counterclockwise. 2NC
• Pull: Pulling the button operates the contacts. Up to 2 contact
blocks (1 layer) can be mounted on pull switches. Push-Pull Switch (Maintained)
• Push-Pull: Button is maintained in both depressed and reset AYD31
positions. Up to 2 contact blocks (1 layer) can be mounted on Contact
AYD31 push-pull switches. Push Pull
• Pin Lock: Button can be locked in either depressed or reset posi- 1NO-1NC
tion by inserting the pin. Pad lock with a ø5mm pin can also be
used to lock the button. 2NO
2NC
Note: Pull and push-pull switches can have a maximum of two
contact blocks.
(06/02/17) 287
ø30 ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Pilot Lights
Dome Types
Dome
APD1 A: amber LSTD
BA9S APD199N➁ C: clear
APDE1 LS (1W)
G: green
Without Lamp Full Voltage R: red
S: blue
W: white LETD
E12 APDE199N➁
Y: yellow LE (2W)
A: amber
BA9S APD1➂DN➁ G: green LSTD-6➁
PW: pure white
(BA9S only)
LED Transformer
R: red
S: blue
E12 APDE1➂DN➁ W: white LETD-6➁
Y: yellow
BA9S APD1➂N➁ A: amber LS-6 (1W)

C: clear
G: green
R: red
S: blue
E12 APD1➂N➁ W: white LE-8 (2W)

16: 100/110V AC 18: 100/110V AC
116: 115V AC 118: 115V AC
126: 120V AC 128: 120V AC
26: 200/220V AC 28: 200/220V AC
236: 230V AC 238: 230V AC
246: 240V AC 248: 240V AC
386: 380V AC 388: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC 48: 400/440V AC
• Specify a lens/LED color code in place of ➁ in the Type No. Use the white lens (W) for LED pure white illumination.
Dimensions
• Full Voltage Type
M3.5 Terminal Screw
ø35
ø25
ø40
9 40
29.5 21
M3.5 Terminal Screw

ø25
ø35
ø40
9 40
64.5 21
288 (06/02/17)
ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Illuminated Pushbuttons ø30

Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALD29911N➁
ALD2 LSTD
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALD29920N➁
AOLD2 LS (1W)
2NC ALD29902N➁
1NO-1NC ALD2➂11DN➁
Momentary LED Transformer 2NO ALD2➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC ALD2➂02DN➁
1NO-1NC ALD2➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALD2➂20N➁ LS-6
2NC ALD2➂02N➁
BA9S
1NO-1NC AOLD29911N➁
LSTD
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLD29920N➁
LS (1W)
2NC AOLD29902N➁
1NO-1NC AOLD2➂11DN➁
Maintained LED Transformer 2NO AOLD2➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC AOLD2➂02DN➁
1NO-1NC AOLD2➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLD2➂20N➁ LS-6
2NC AOLD2➂02N➁

Specify a lens/LED color code in place of Specify a lens color code in place of ➁ in Specify an operating voltage code in place of ➂ in
➁ in the Type No. the Type No. the Type No.
G: green C: clear 116: 115V AC
PW: pure white G: green 126: 120V AC
R: red R: red 26: 200/220V AC
46: 400/440V AC
Use the white lens (W) for LED pure white 486: 480V AC (incandescent only)
illumination.
• Incandescent illuminated transformer types contain an incandescent lamp (LS-6, rated voltage 6V AC/DC, 1W).
Dimensions
• ALD2/AOLD2 • ALD2/AOLD2
Full Voltage BA9S/Transformer

M3 Terminal Screw M3 Terminal Screw
ø24
ø35
ø24
ø35
ø40
ø40
5.5 23 40 40
9 9
63 (2 blocks) 24 97.5 (2 blocks) 24
(06/02/17) 289
ø30 ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Illuminated Pushbuttons

Round Extended 1NO-1NC ALFD29911N➁
with Full Shroud LSTD
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALFD29920N➁
ALFD2 LS (1W)
2NC ALFD29902N➁
AOLFD2
1NO-1NC ALFD2➂11DN➁
Momentary LED Transformer 2NO ALFD2➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC ALFD2➂02DN➁
1NO-1NC ALFD2➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO ALFD2➂20N➁ LS-6
2NC ALFD2➂02N➁
BA9S
1NO-1NC AOLFD29911N➁
LSTD
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLFD29920N➁
LS (1W)
2NC AOLFD29902N➁
1NO-1NC AOLFD2➂11DN➁
Maintained LED Transformer 2NO AOLFD2➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC AOLFD2➂02DN➁
1NO-1NC AOLFD2➂11N➁
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AOLFD2➂20N➁ LS-6
2NC AOLFD2➂02N➁

Specify a lens/LED color code in place of Specify a lens color code in place of ➁ in Specify an operating voltage code in place of ➂ in
➁ in the Type No. the Type No. the Type No.
G: green C: clear 116: 115V AC
PW: pure white G: green 126: 120V AC
R: red R: red 26: 200/220V AC
46: 400/440V AC
Use the white lens (W) for LED pure white 486: 480V AC (incandescent only)
illumination.
• Incandescent illuminated transformer types contain an incandescent lamp (LS-6, rated voltage 6V AC/DC, 1W)
Dimensions
• ALFD2/AOLFD2 • ALFD2/AOLFD2
Full Voltage Transformer

M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6 M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
ø35
ø30
ø35
ø30
ø40
ø40
5.5 23 40 40
25 96.5 (2 blocks) 25
62 (2 blocks)
290 (06/02/17)
ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Illuminated Pushbuttons ø30
Mushroom (ø40) Illuminated Pushbuttons

ø40 Mushroom 1NO-1NC ALD39911DN➁
ALD3 Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO ALD39920DN➁ LSTD
AOLD3
2NC ALD39902DN➁
Momentary
1NO-1NC ALD3➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO ALD3➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC ALD3➂02DN➁
BA9S
1NO-1NC AOLD39911DN➁
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AOLD39920DN➁ LSTD
2NC AOLD39902DN➁
Maintained
1NO-1NC AOLD3➂11DN➁
LED Transformer 2NO AOLD3➂20DN➁ LSTD-6➁
2NC AOLD3➂02DN➁

LED Illuminated Type LED Transformer BA9S Type
A: amber 16: 100/110V AC

R: red 126: 120V AC
W: white 26: 200/220V AC
246: 240V AC
386: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC
Dimensions
• ALD3/AOLD3 • ALD3/AOLD3
Full Voltage Transformer
M3.5 Terminal Screw

Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5 M3.5 Terminal Screw
M3 Terminal Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
Screw M3 Terminal Screw
ø40
ø40
36
36
5.5 23
40 40
63 (2 blocks) 24 97.5 (2 blocks) 24
(06/02/17) 291
ø30 ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Illuminated Pushbuttons
Mushroom Pushlock Turn Reset Types

Lamp Applicable
Receptacle Lamp
Mushroom Pushlock Turn 1NO-1NC AVLD39911NR
Reset LSTD
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AVLD39920NR
AVLD3 LS (1W)
AVLDE3 2NC AVLD39902NR
1NO-1NC AVLD3➂11DNR
BA9S LED Transformer 2NO AVLD3➂20DNR LSTD-6➁
2NC AVLD3➂02DNR
1NO-1NC AVLD3➂11NR
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AVLD3➂20NR LS-6
2NC AVLD3➂02NR
1NO-1NC AVLDE39911NR
LETD
Without Lamp Full Voltage 2NO AVLDE39920NR
LE (2W)
2NC AVLDE39902NR
1NO-1NC AVLDE3➂11DNR
E12 LED Transformer 2NO AVLDE3➂20DNR LETD-6➁
2NC AVLDE3➂02DNR
1NO-1NC AVLD3➂11NR
Incandescent Transformer 2NO AVLD3➂20NR LE-8
2NC AVLD3➂02NR

16: 100/110V AC 18: 100/110V AC
116: 115V AC 118: 115V AC
126: 120V AC 128: 120V AC
26: 200/220V AC 28: 200/220V AC
236: 230V AC 238: 230V AC
246: 240V AC 248: 240V AC
386: 380V AC 388: 380V AC
46: 400/440V AC 48: 400/440V AC
• Color code: R (red)
• Incandescent illuminated transformer types contain an incandescent lamp (LS-6, rated voltage 6V AC/DC, 1W)
• Note: AVLD3 and AVLDE3 pushlock turn reset switches cannot be used as emergency stop switches. When emergency stop switches are
Dimensions
• AVLD3 • AVLD3
M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5 M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
ø40
ø40
36
36
5.5 23 5.5 23
40 40
63 (2 blocks) 24 97.5 (2 blocks) 24
• AVLDE3 • AVLD3/AVLDE3
M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5 M3.5 Terminal Screw Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5
ø40
ø40
36
36
5.5 23
40 40
77.5 (2 blocks) 20 112 (2 blocks) 20
100.5 (4 blocks) 135 (4 blocks)
292 (06/02/17)
ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Selector Switches ø30
ASD Selector Switches (Knob Operator Type)

Shape ASD
No. of Positions

Contact
from Right from Left
Code L R L R L R
Mounting
(ASD) Position Type L R
90° 2-position
10 1 NO
ASD210N ASD2110N ASD2210N ∗
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
ASD220N ASD2120N ASD2220N ∗ —
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
22 2 NC
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
Contact
from Right from Left Two-way
Code C C C C
Mounting L R L R L R L R
(ASD) Position Type L C R
20 1 NO
ASD320N ASD3120N ASD3220N ASD3320N
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
45° 3-position
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
22 2 NO
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
02 1 NC
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NC
04 2 NC ASD304N ASD3104N ASD3204N ASD3304N
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
• Knob: Black
• Selector switches with one contact block contain a dummy block.
[Example]

Left Center Right Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5

90°
4 2 M3.5 Terminal Screw
45° 45°
L C R Operator
ø40
Position
ø35
1 NO
3 2 NO 5.5 23
1 40
3 NC 53 (1 or 2
blocks) 21
4 NC 76 (4 blocks)
(06/02/17) 293
ø30 ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Selector Switches
ASD Selector Switches (Lever Operator Type)

Shape ASD∗L
No. of Positions

Contact
Code L R L R L R
Mounting
90° 2-position
10 1 NO
ASD2L10N ASD21L10N ASD22L10N ∗
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
ASD2L20N ASD21L20N ASD22L20N ∗ —
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
22 2 NC
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
Contact
from Right from Left Two-way
Code C C C C
Mounting L R L R L R L R
(ASD) Position Type L C R
20 1 NO
ASD3L20N ASD31L20N ASD32L20N ASD33L20N
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
45° 3-position
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
22 2 NO
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
02 1 NC
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NC
04 2 NC ASD3L04N ASD31L04N ASD32L04N ASD33L04N
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
• Lever: Black
• Selector switches with one contact block contain a dummy block.
[Example]

Left Center Right Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5

90°
4 2 M3.5 Terminal Screw
45° 45°
L C R Operator
Position
ø35
ø40
1 NO
3 2 NO 5.5 23
1 3 NC 53 (1 or 2 40
blocks) 21.5
4 NC 76 (4 blocks)
294 (06/02/17)
ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Selector Switches ø30
ASD Key Selector Switches

Shape ASD∗K
No. of Positions

Contact
Code L R L R L R
Mounting
90° 2-position
10 1 NO
ASD2K10N ASD21K10N ASD22K10N ∗
(1NO) 2 Dummy
11 1 NO
(1NO-1NC) 2 NC
20 1 NO
ASD2K20N ASD21K20N ASD22K20N ∗ —
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
22 2 NC
(2NO-2NC) 3 NO
4 NC
Code C C C C
(ASD) Mounting Type L C R
L R L R L R L R
Position
20 1 NO
ASD3K20N ASD31K20N ASD32K20N ASD33K20N
(2NO) 2 NO
1 NO
45° 3-position
40 2 NO
(4NO) 3 NO
4 NO
1 NO
22 2 NO
(2NO-2NC) 3 NC
4 NC
02 1 NC
(2NC) 2 NC
1 NC
04 2 NC ASD3K04N ASD31K04N ASD32K04N ASD33K04N
(4NC) 3 NC
4 NC
• Cylinder: Black
• On the spring-returned types, the keys can be released only from the maintained positions. On the maintained types, the key can be
released from every position. Key retained positions are also available. See page 228.
• Key selector switches are supplied with two standard keys.
• Key selector switches with one contact block contain a dummy block.
[Example]


4 Left Center Right
90°
2 M3.5 Terminal Screw
45° 45°
L C R Operator
ø35
ø40
Position
1 NO
5.5 23 9
3 2 NO
1 53 (1 or 2 16.5 40
3 NC blocks) 38
4 NC 76 (4 blocks)
(06/02/17) 295
ø30 ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Illuminated Selector Pushbuttons

90° 2-position
Shape ASLD (Base BA9S)

Lamp Input Type
Code L R L R L R
Mounting
Position Type L R
1 NO Without Lamp Full Voltage ASLD29911N➁ ASLD219911N➁ ASLD229911N➁ ∗
11 2 NC LED Transformer ASLD2➂11DN➁ ASLD21➂11DN➁ ASLD22➂11DN➁ ∗

(1NO-1NC)
Incandescent Transformer ASLD2➂11N➁ ASLD21➂11N➁ ASLD22➂11N➁ ∗
1 NO Without Lamp Full Voltage ASLD29920N➁ ASLD219920N➁ ASLD229920N➁ ∗
20 2 NO LED Transformer ASLD2➂20DN➁ ASLD21➂20DN➁ ASLD22➂20DN➁ ∗

(2NO)
1 NO
Without Lamp Full Voltage ASLD29922N➁ ASLD219922N➁ ASLD229922N➁ ∗
2 NC
22 3 NO
(2NO-2NC)
LED Transformer ASLD2➂22DN➁ ASLD21➂22DN➁ ASLD22➂22DN➁ ∗
4 NC

16: 100/110V AC
R: red R: red 26: 200/220V AC
46: 400/440V AC
[Example]

Left Right M3 Terminal Screw (including nameplate) 45° 45°
4
2
L R Operator
ø25
ø35
ø40
Position
1 NO
2 NC 5.5 23 40
3 3 NO 63 (2 blocks)
A: 86 (4 blocks) 9
1 A: Full voltage type
296 (06/02/17)
ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Illuminated Selector Pushbuttons ø30

45° 3-position
C C C C
Code Mounting
Position Type L C R
Without Lamp
1 NO ASLD39920N➁ ASLD319920N➁ ASLD329920N➁ ASLD339920N➁
Full Voltage
20 LED
2 NO ASLD3➂20DN➁ ASLD31➂20DN➁ ASLD32➂20DN➁ ASLD33➂20DN➁
(2NO) Transformer
Incandescent
ASLD3➂20N➁ ASLD31➂20N➁ ASLD32➂20N➁ ASLD33➂20N➁
Transformer
Without Lamp
1 NC ASLD39902N➁ ASLD319902N➁ ASLD329902N➁ ASLD339902N➁
Full Voltage
02 LED
2 NC ASLD3➂02DN➁ ASLD31➂02DN➁ ASLD32➂02DN➁ ASLD33➂02DN➁
(2NC) Transformer
Incandescent
Transformer
1 NO Without Lamp
ASLD39922N➁ ASLD319922N➁ ASLD329922N➁ ASLD339922N➁
2 NO Full Voltage
22 3 NC LED
(2NO-2NC) ASLD3➂22DN➁ ASLD31➂22DN➁ ASLD32➂22DN➁ ASLD33➂22DN➁
4 NC Transformer
Incandescent
Transformer
1 NO Without Lamp
2 NO Full Voltage
40 3 NO LED
(4NO) ASLD3➂40DN➁ ASLD31➂40DN➁ ASLD32➂40DN➁ ASLD33➂40DN➁
4 NO Transformer
Incandescent
Transformer
1 NC Without Lamp
2 NC Full Voltage
04 3 NC LED
(4NC) ASLD3➂04DN➁ ASLD31➂04DN➁ ASLD32➂04DN➁ ASLD33➂04DN➁
4 NC Transformer
Incandescent
Transformer

16: 100/110V AC
R: red R: red 26: 200/220V AC
46: 400/440V AC

Left Center Right (including nameplate) 45° 45°
M3 Terminal Screw
4
2
L C R Operator
ø25
ø35
ø40
Position
1 NO
2 NO 5.5 23 40
3 63 (2 blocks)
1 3 NC A: 86 (4 blocks) 9
(06/02/17) 297
ø30 ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Selector Pushbutton Switches
Ring Operator Type / Lever Operator Type Selector Pushbuttons

Ring/Lever
Contact Ring Operator Lever Operator

Contact Circuit Block
Shape Color
Code Code
Pushbutton
Mounting Type No. Type No.
Type Normal Push Normal Push
Position
Ring Operator 1 NO
(90˚ 2-Position) A03 ASBD211N-A03➀ ASBD2L11N-A03➀
11 2 NC
ASBD2 (1NO-1NC) 1 NO
G03 Blocked ASBD211N-G03➀ ASBD2L11N-G03➀
2 NC
1 NO
2 NC
A08 ASBD222N-A08➀ ASBD2L22N-A08➀
3 NO
4 NC
1 NO
2 NO
C10 ASBD222N-C10➀ ASBD2L22N-C10➀
3 NC
4 NC
1 NO B: black
Lever Operator 2 NO G: green
D10 ASBD222N-D10➀ ASBD2L22N-D10➀
(90˚ 2-Position) 3 NC R: red
ASBD2L 4 NC Y: yellow
22
(2NO-2NC) 1 NO
2 NO
E10 ASBD222N-E10➀ ASBD2L22N-E10➀
3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
2 NO
F10 ASBD222N-F10➀ ASBD2L22N-F10➀
3 NC
4 NC
1 NO
2 NO
G10 Blocked ASBD222N-G10➀ ASBD2L22N-G10➀
3 NC
4 NC
• Ring/Lever (Metal): Chrome-plated
Notes :
1. Circuit Code G: The pushbutton does not operate when the ring or lever operator is turned to the right position.
2. Circuit Codes E and F: The right and left NC contact blocks on circuit code E or F may overlap each other while turning the ring or lever
operator. The NO and NC contact blocks on circuit code F may overlap each other while pressing the button.
3. When using the selector pushbutton, do not turn the ring or lever operator with the pushbutton depressed. Otherwise, damage or failure
may be caused.
4. When installing the lever operator, make sure that the lever is not in the horizontal position. Otherwise, shock resistance may be degraded.

4
2 Normal Push
1
2
3
3
1 4
• Dimensions Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5

(including nameplate)
M3.5 Terminal Screw
Ring Operator Lever Operator 37 37
(90˚ 2-position) Panel Thickness 0.8 to 7.5 (90˚ 2-position)
20
M3.5 Terminal Screw (including nameplate)

ø34
ASBD2 ASBD2L
ø28
ø35
ø40
23
50
5.5
R50
53 (1 or 26.5
5.5 23 2 blocks)
53 (2 blocks) 40 76 (3 or 4 blocks)
76 (4 blocks) 25 M3 Setscrew
(The actual screw is
located on the opposite side)
298 (06/02/17)
ø30 Diecast Zinc Series Accessories and Replacement Parts ø30
Accessories (For Diecast Zinc Series Only) For other accessories, see pages 271 to 279.
Ordering Package
Shape Material Type No. Description
Type No. Quantity
Metal Bezel
OG-81 OG-81PN02 2
Chrome-plated • Cannot be used with half-shrouds.
Flush Extended OG-82 OG-82 1

(Octagonal) (Octagonal)
Spare Key
Metal TW-SK-0 TW-SK-0PN02 2 • For key selector switches
Maintenance Parts (For Diecast Zinc Series Only)

Ordering Package
Shape Specification Type No. Description
Type No. Quantity
Button ❸Mushroom
❶ ABN1BN-➀ ABN1BN-➀PN05 5 Specify a color code in place of ➀.
B (black), G (green), R (red), S
(blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
Plastic ❷ ABN2BN-➀ ABN2BN-➀PN05 5
• Above colors are used for ø30
diecast zinc control units (light
❸ ABN3BN-➀ ABN3BN-➀PN02 2 colored operator units).
❶Flush ❷Extended
Dummy
Block • Used for 1NO or 1NC contact
Plastic BST-D BST-DPN10 10 blocks.
• Snaps on to the operator unit.
Selector Operator
❶Knob ❷Lever ❶ ASNHT-➀ ASNHT-➀PN02
Specify a color code in place of ➀.
Plastic 2
B (blue), G (green), R (red)
❷ ASNHL-➀ ASNHL-➀PN02
❸Color Specify a color code in place of ➀.

Insert Color Insert ❸ TW-HC1➀ TW-HC1➀PN05 5 B (black), G (green), R (red), S
(blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
Safety Precautions
• Turn off the power to the ø30 diecast zinc control units before starting installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and starting
installation, removing, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of the products. Failure to turn power off may cause electrical
shocks or fire hazard.
• To avoid a burn on your hand, use the lamp holder tool when replacing lamps.
• For wiring, use wires of a proper size to meet the voltage and current requirements. Tighten the M3.5 terminal screws to a
tightening torque of 1.0 to 1.3 N·m. Failure to tighten terminal screws may cause overheat and fire.
Instructions
Tightening Torque for Terminal Screws Installation of LED Illuminated Units
Tighten the M3.5 terminal screws to a torque of 1.0 to 1.3 • When using full voltage type LED illuminated units, provide
N·m. protection against electrical noise, if necessary. See page
281 for notes on LED illuminated units.
Replacement of Lamps
Lamps can be replaced by using the lamp holder tool (OR-
55) from the front of the panel.
• How to remove
To remove, slip the lamp holder tool onto the lamp head
counterclockwise.
• How to install
To install, insert the lamp head into the lamp holder tool. OR-55
Place the pins on the lamp base to the grooves in the lamp
socket. Inset the lamp and turn it clockwise.
(06/02/17) 299
300 (06/02/17)
ø16mm XA Series
ø22mm XW Series
Emergency Stop Switches
(06/02/17) 301
ø16 XA Series Emergency Stop Switches
The World’s First ø16 mm, 4-contact Emergency Stop Switch.
Compact size - only 27.9 mm deep behind the panel. Reliable “Safe break action.”
• Lead-free, RoHS compliant.
• The depth behind the panel is only 27.9 mm for 1 to 4 con-
tacts, both on illuminated and non-illuminated types.
• IDEC’s original “Safe break action” ensures that the contacts
open when the contact block is detached from the operator.
• 1 to 4NC main contacts and 1NO monitor contact
• Push-to-lock, Pull or Turn-to-reset operator
• RoHS compliant (EU directive 2002/95/EC). Contains no
lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, PBB, or
PBDE.
• Direct opening action mechanism (IEC60947-5-5, 5.2,
IEC60947-5-1, Annex K)
• Safety lock mechanism (IEC60947-5-5, 6.2)
• Degree of protection IP65 (IEC60529)
• Two operator sizes: ø29 and ø40 mm
• Dark red (Munsell 5R4/12) or bright red (Munsell 7.5R4.5/14) Direct Opening Action
colors are available for the operator of non-illuminated emer-
gency stop switches, and gray for stop switch operators.
• UL, c-UL recognized. EN compliant
Specifications
Approval Organization/ IEC60947-5-1, EN60947-5-1
Standard Mark
File No. Applicable Standards IEC60947-5-5 (Note), EN60947-5-5 (Note)
JIS C8201-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14
UL508 Non-illuminated: –25 to +60°C (no freezing)
UL/c-UL File No. E68961 Operating Temperature
CSA C22.2 No. 14 Illuminated: –25 to +55°C (no freezing)
TÜV Product Service Storage Temperature –45 to +80°C

EN60947-5-1 Push to lock: 10.5N
EN60947-5-5 (Note) Operating Force Pull to reset: 10N
European Commission’s Low Turn to reset: 0.16 N·m
Voltage Directive Minimum Force
Required for Direct 60N
CCC Opening Action
GB14048.5
No. 2005010305150899 Minimum Operator
Stroke Required for 4.0 mm
Note: Except for stop switches (operator color: gray). Direct Opening Action
Maximum Operator
4.5 mm
Contact Ratings Stroke
(NC main contacts/NO monitor contact) Contact Resistance 50 mΩ maximum (initial value)
Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 300V (illuminated part: 60V)
Overvoltage Category II
Rated Current (Ith) 5A
Impulse Withstand
Rated Operating Voltage (Ue) 30V 125V 250V 2.5 kV
Voltage
Resistive Load Pollution Degree 3 (inside LED unit: 2)
– 3A 3A
AC (AC-12)
50/60 Hz Operation Frequency 900 operations/hour
Inductive Load
– 1.5A 1.5A Operating extremes: 150 m/s2
Main (AC-15) Shock Resistance
Rated Operating Current
Contacts Resistive Load

2A 0.4A 0.2A Operating extremes: 10 to 500 Hz, amplitude 0.35 mm
(DC-12)
DC acceleration 50 m/s2
Inductive Load Vibration Resistance
1A 0.22A 0.1A Damage limits: 10 to 500 Hz, amplitude 0.35 mm
(DC-13) acceleration 50 m/s2
Resistive Load Mechanical Life 250,000 operations minimum
– 1.2A 0.6A
AC (AC-12)
100,000 operations minimum
50/60 Hz Inductive Load Electrical Life
– 0.6A 0.3A 250,000 operations minimum (24V AC/DC, 100 mA)
Monitor (AC-14)
Degree of Protection IP65 (IEC60529)
Contacts Resistive Load
2A 0.4A 0.2A Short-circuit Protection 250V/10A fuse (Type aM, IEC60269-1/IEC60269-2)
(DC-12)
DC Conditional
Inductive Load 1000A
1A 0.22A 0.1A Short-circuit Current
(DC-13)
Terminal Style Solder terminal, PC board terminal
• Minimum applicable load: 5V AC/DC, 1 mA (reference value)
(Operating area may vary according to the operating conditions and load Recommended
types.) Tightening Torque 0.88 N·m
for Locking Ring
• The rated operating currents are measured at resistive/inductive load types
specified in IEC 60947-5-1. Connectable Wire 1.25 mm2 maximum (AWG16 maximum)
Soldering Conditions 310 to 350°C, 3 seconds maximum
Illumination Ratings Weight ø29 mm type: 23g, ø40 mm type: 28g
Rated Voltage Operating Voltage Rated Current Note: Except for stop switches (operator color: gray).
24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC ±10% 11 mA
302 (06/02/17)
XA Series Emergency Stop Switches ø16
Types
Non-illuminated Solder Terminal / PC Board Terminal Types
Type No.
NC Main NO Monitor Operator
Appearance Terminal Style
Contact Contact Color Code
Solder Terminal PC Board Terminal
ø29mm Operator 1NC — XA1E-BV301➀ XA1E-BV301V➀
2NC — XA1E-BV302➀ XA1E-BV302V➀
1NC 1NO XA1E-BV311➀ XA1E-BV311V➀
3NC 1NO XA1E-BV313➀ XA1E-BV313V➀ R: Dark red
ø40mm Operator 1NC — XA1E-BV401➀ XA1E-BV401V➀ RH: Bright red
• Specify a color code in place of ➀ in the Type No.
• Terminal cover (XA9Z-VL2) is ordered separately.
Illuminated Solder Terminal / PC Board Terminal Types

Type No.
Contact Contact Color
ø29mm Operator 1NC — XA1E-LV301Q4R XA1E-LV301Q4VR
2NC — XA1E-LV302Q4R XA1E-LV302Q4VR
1NC 1NO XA1E-LV311Q4R XA1E-LV311Q4VR
Dark red only
ø40mm Operator 1NC — XA1E-LV401Q4R XA1E-LV401Q4VR
Stop Switches (operator color: gray)

Some mobile teaching pendants are easily detachable from the
system, and stop switches, not emergency stop switches, are
Types
required on such pendants. IDEC’s gray-colored stop switches • Stop Switches
avoid the confusion of emergency stop switches and stop Type No.
switches. NC Main NO Monitor
Stop Switch Terminal Style
Contacts Contacts
1NC — XA1E-BV301N XA1E-BV301VN
1NC 1NO XA1E-BV311N XA1E-BV311VN
• Operator is ø29 mm and gray-colored (code: N).
(06/02/17) 303
Dimensions
• Non-illuminated Type Mounting Panel Thickness: 0.5 to 3.7
27.2
19.8
8.7
Rubber Gasket
Locking Ring
8
9.
0
ø4
ø2
9
ø2
30.4
Terminal Cover
XA9Z-VL2
2.1 25.8 20.6 25.8

29.4 3.1 30.4 ø29mm Operator
30.4 20.6
ø40mm Operator
PC Board Terminal Type Solder Terminal Type
• Illuminated Type Mounting Panel Thickness: 0.5 to 3.7

4.5
19.8
27.2
8.7
Rubber Gasket
Locking Ring
8
0
9.
ø4
ø2
9
ø2
30.4
Terminal Cover
XA9Z-VL2
2.1 25.8 20.6 25.8

29.4 3.1 ø29mm Operator
30.4 30.4 20.6
ø40mm Operator
PC Board Layout (Bottom View) Panel Cut-out

• Non-Illuminated Type • Illuminated Type +0.2
1.7 0
19.8 19.8 ø1
6.2 +0.
0 2
+0.2
8.7 8.7
17.9 0
4.5
les les
ho ho
.2 .2
- ø1 - ø1
10 10
19.8
11.2
19.8
11.2
8.7
8.7
3-ø 3-ø
1.7
1.7
ho ho
les les
6.5 6.5
Mounting Hole Layout LED Unit Internal Circuit
+0.2
ø16.2 0
X Y
ø29mm Operator 40 mm minimum X1 R1 R2 X2
ø40mm Operator 50 mm minimum LED
Y • The values shown above are the minimum
LED chip
dimensions for mounting with other ø16
mm pushbuttons. For other control units of R3 Protection diode
different sizes and styles, determine the
values according to the dimensions, opera-
X tion, and wiring convenience.
304 (06/02/17)
Non-illuminated Type Illuminated Type
• NC main contacts only • With NO monitor contacts • NC main contacts only • With NO monitor contacts
NC main contacts: Terminals 1-2 NC main contacts: Terminals 1-2 NC main contacts: Terminals 1-2 NC main contacts: Terminals 1-2
NO monitor contacts: Terminals 3-4 NO monitor contacts: Terminals 3-4
TOP TOP TOP TOP
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
LED LED
2
1
2
1
Left Right Left Right Left X1 X2 Right Left X1 X2 Right
1
2
1
2
2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3
1NC: Terminals on right 1NC: Terminals on top 1NC: Terminals on right 1NC: Terminals on top
2NC: Terminals on right and left 2NC: Terminals on right and left 2NC: Terminals on right and left 2NC: Terminals on right and left
3NC: Terminals on right, left, and top 3NC: Terminals on right, left, and top
Nameplates
Description Legend Type No. Material Plate Color Legend Color
(blank) HAAV-0
For ø29mm Operator
EMERGENCY STOP HAAV-27
Polyamide Yellow Black
(blank) HAAV4-0
For ø40mm Operator
EMERGENCY STOP HAAV4-27
• For ø29mm Operator • For ø40mm Operator
3.5
ø4 • Panel thickness when using
0 • Panel thickness when using
the nameplate: 0.5 to 2 mm ø6 the nameplate: 0.5 to 2 mm
ø1
6
1.7 0.3 ø1 All dimensions in mm.

6
1.7 0.5
Accessories and Replacement Parts

Ordering Package
Description & Appearance Material Type No. Remarks
Type No. Quantity
Ring Wrench • Used to tighten the locking ring
when installing the XA emer-
Metal gency stop switch onto a panel.
MT-001 MT-001 1
(nickel-plated brass)
• The recommended tightening
torque is 0.88 N·m at maximum.
Locking Ring
Plastic HA9Z-LN HA9Z-LNPN10 10 • Black
Terminal Cover
• White
PBT XA9Z-VL2 XA9Z-VL2PN02 2 • Used for solder terminals.
• Also applicable to the XW series.
LED Unit
For Solder Terminal XA9Z-LED2R XA9Z-LED2R
• Replacement LED unit for illumi-
nated type (for XA series only).
For PC Board Terminal XA9Z-LED2VR XA9Z-LED2VR
1
LED Unit Removal Tool
Stainless Steel MT-101 MT-101 • Used for removing the LED unit.
(06/02/17) 305
Removing the Contact Block Align the small ▲ marking on the edge of the operator base
with the TOP marking on the contact block. Press the con-
First unlock the operator button. While pushing up the white tact block onto the operator and turn the contact block clock-
bayonet ring, using a small screwdriver (width: 2.5 to 3 mm) if wise until the bayonet ring clicks.
necessary, turn the contact block counterclockwise and pull out.
Do not exert excessive force when using a screwdriver,
otherwise the bayonet ring may be damaged. TOP marking
Bayonet Ring ➁ Turn
marking
➀ Press
TOP marking (contact block)
➁ Turn counterclockwise • Notes for Installing the Contact Block

Check that the contact block is securely installed on the opera-
➀ Push tor. When the emergency stop switch is properly assembled, the
bayonet ring is in place as shown below.
• Notes for Removing the Contact Block
1. When the contact block is removed, the monitor contact (NO
contact) is closed.
2. While removing the contact block, do not exert excessive
force, otherwise the switch may be damaged.
Panel Mounting
Remove the locking ring from the operator and check that
the rubber gasket is in place. Insert the operator from panel
front into the panel hole. Face the side with the anti-rotation Removing the LED Unit
protrusion on the operator upward, and tighten the locking
ring. Pull out the LED unit while squeezing the latches on the LED
unit using the LED unit removal tool (MT-101).
Operator Unit
Rubber Gasket Anti-rotation Protrusion

Squeeze the LED
unit on the latches
and pull out.
Locking Ring
TOP side
Latches
To mount the XA emergency stop switches onto a panel,
tighten the locking ring to a tightening torque of 0.88 N·m
maximum using ring wrench MT-001. Do not use pliers. Do
not exert excessive force, otherwise the locking ring may be
damaged.
Installing the Contact Block Installing the LED Unit

First turn the bayonet ring to the unlocked position. Align the to of the LED unit with the TOP marking on the
Bayonet Ring contact block. Push the LED unit into the contact block.
TOP side
Unlocked Locked
306 (06/02/17)
Wiring • Installing Insulation Terminal Cover
2 To install the terminal cover (XA9Z-VL2), align the TOP
1. The applicable wire size is 1.25 mm maximum.
marking on the terminal cover with TOP marking on the con-
2. Solder the terminal at a temperature of 310 to 350°C tact block, and press the terminal cover toward the contact
within 3 seconds using a soldering iron. Sn-Ag-Cu type is block.
recommended when using lead-free solder. When solder- Note: For wiring, insert the wires into the holes in the terminal cover before
ing, do not touch the enabling switch with the soldering soldering.
iron. Also ensure that no tensile force is applied to the ter-
minal. Do not bend the terminal or apply excessive force
to the terminal.
3. Use a non-corrosive rosin flux.
4. Because the terminal spacing is narrow, use protective
tubes or heat shrinkable tubes to avoid burning of wire
coating or short circuit.
• PC Board Terminal Type Contact Bounce
1. When mounting a contact block on a PC board, provide When the button is reset by pulling or turning, the NC main
sufficient rotating space for the PC board when installing contacts will bounce. When pressing the button, the NO
and removing the contact block. monitor contacts will bounce.
2. When mounting an XA emergency stop switch on a PC When designing a control circuit, take the contact bounce
board, make sure that the operator is securely installed. time into consideration (reference value: 20 ms).
• About PC Board and Circuit Design Nameplate
1. Use PC boards made of glass epoxy copper-clad lami- When anti-rotation is not required, remove the projection
nated sheets of 1.6 mm in thickness, with double-sided from the nameplate using pliers.
through hole.
Projection
2. PC boards and circuits must withstand rated voltage and
current, including the instantaneous current and voltage
at switching.
3. The minimum applicable load is 5V AC/DC, 1 mA. This
value may vary according to the operating environment
and load.
4. Within the 2.8∗ mm areas shown in the figure below, ter-
minals touch the PC board, resulting in possible short cir-
cuit on the printed circuit. When designing a PC board Nameplate
pattern, take this possibility into consideration.
19.8
Handling
8.7 Do not expose the switch to excessive shock and vibration,
(0.5) (0.5) 1.6 (PC Board) otherwise the switch may be deformed or damaged, causing
les
malfunction or operation failure.
2.8∗
ho
(0.5)
1 .2
-ø
10
19.8
8.7
2.8∗
(0.5)
Surface for installing

Solder Surface components
Solder Surface

components
2.8∗ 2.8∗
Safety Precautions
• Turn off power to the XA series emergency stop switch • Use wires of the proper size to meet the voltage and cur-
before starting installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, rent requirements, and solder the wires correctly. If solder-
and inspection of the relays. Failure to turn power off may ing is incomplete, the wire may heat during operation,
cause electrical shock or fire hazard. causing fire hazard.
• Use the LED unit removal tool when replacing the LED unit
to avoid burn on your hands.
(06/02/17) 307
ø22 XW Series Emergency Stop Switches
ø22 mm, 4-contact Emergency Stop Switch. Compact size—only 37.1 mm deep behind the panel
(screw terminal type 48.7 mm with terminal cover). Reliable “Safe break action.”
• The depth behind the panel is only 37.1 mm for 1 to 4 contacts (screw
terminal type 48.7 mm with terminal cover).
• The same depth behind the panel for illuminated and non-illuminated
switches.
• IDEC’s original “Safe break action” ensures that the contacts open
when the contact block is detached from the operator.
• 1 to 4NC main contacts and 1 or 2NO monitor contact
• Push-to-lock, Pull or Turn-to-reset operator
• RoHS compliant (EU directive 2002/95/EC). Contains no lead, cad-
mium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, PBB, or PBDE.
• Direct opening action mechanism (IEC60947-5-5, 5.2, IEC60947-5-1,
Annex K)
• Safety lock mechanism (IEC60947-5-5, 6.2)
• Degree of protection IP65 (IEC60529)
• Screw terminal type is finger-safe (IP20).
• Two operator sizes: ø40 and ø60 mm
• Dark red (Munsell 5R4/12) or bright red (Munsell 7.5R4.5/14) colors
are available for the non-illuminated operator.
• Push-ON illumination type available (operator size: ø60) Direct Opening Action
• Connector type available to reduce wiring time and wiring mistakes.
• UL c-UL listed. EN compliant
Standard Mark Approval Organization/ Specifications

File No. IEC60947-5-1, EN60947-5-1
UL/c-UL File No. E68961 Applicable Standards IEC60947-5-5 (Note), EN60947-5-5
(solder terminal, PC board JIS C8201-5-1, UL508, CSA C22.2 No. 14
UL508 terminal types) Non-illuminated: –25 to +60°C (no freezing)
CSA C22.2 No. 14 Operating Temperature
UL/c-UL Listing LED illuminated: –25 to +55°C (no freezing)
(screw terminal type only) Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
TÜV Product Service Push to lock: 32N
EN60947-5-1 Operating Force Pull to reset: 21N
EN60947-5-5 Self-declaration (European Turn to reset: 0.27 N·m
Commission’s Low Voltage Minimum Force
Directive) Required for Direct 80N
CCC Opening Action
GB14048.5 Minimum Operator
No. 2005010305150897
Stroke Required for 4.0 mm
Direct Opening Action
Contact Ratings Maximum Operator
4.5 mm
Stroke
(NC main contacts/NO monitor contact) 50 mΩ maximum (initial value)
Contact Resistance
Screw 250V Connector type: 30 mΩ (Note)
Terminal Type Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
Solder Overvoltage Category II
Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) Terminal Type
300V Impulse Withstand
PC Board 2.5 kV
Terminal Type Voltage
Connector Type 125V Pollution Degree 3 (connector type: 2)
Rated Current (Ith) 5A (connector type: 2.5A) Operation Frequency 900 operations/hour
250V Operating extremes: 150 m/s2
Rated Operating Voltage (Ue) 30V 125V Shock Resistance
(Note 3) Damage limits: 1000 m/s2
Resistive Load 5A Operating extremes: 10 to 500 Hz, amplitude 0.35 mm,
– 3A
(AC-12) (Note 1) acceleration 50 m/s2
AC50/60 Hz Vibration Resistance
Inductive Load 3A Damage limits: 10 to 500 Hz, amplitude 0.35 mm,
– 1.5A acceleration 50 m/s2
Main (AC-15) (Note 2)
Rated Operating Current
Contacts Resistive Load Mechanical Life 250,000 operations minimum

(DC-12) 2A 0.4A 0.2A
DC 100,000 operations minimum
Inductive Load Electrical Life
1A 0.22A 0.1A 250,000 operations minimum (24V AC/DC, 100 mA)
(DC-13)
Degree of Protection IP65 (IEC60529)
Resistive Load
– 1.2A 0.6A Short-circuit Protection 250V/10A fuse (Type aM, IEC60269-1/IEC60269-2)
(AC-12)
AC 50/60 Hz Conditional
Inductive Load 1000A
(AC-14) – 0.6A 0.3A Short-circuit Current
Monitor
Contacts Resistive Load Solder terminal, PC board terminal, M3 screw terminal,
2A 0.4A 0.2A Terminal Style
(DC-12) Connector type
DC
Inductive Load Recommended
1A 0.22A 0.1A
(DC-13) Tightening Torque for 2.0 N·m
• Minimum applicable load: 5V AC/DC, 1 mA (reference value) Locking Ring
(Operating area depends on the operating conditions and load types.) Screw terminal type: 0.75 to 1.25 mm2 (AWG18 to 16)
• The rated operating currents are measured at resistive/inductive load types Solder terminal / PC board terminal types:
Connectable Wire
specified in JIS C8201-5-1. 1.25 mm2 maximum (AWG16 maximum)
Note 1: Solder terminal/PC board terminal types: 3A, Connector type: 2.5A Connector type: 0.3 to 0.85 mm2 (AWG22 to 18)
Note 2: Solder terminal/PC board terminal types: 1.5A Soldering Conditions 310 to 350°C, 3 seconds maximum
Note 3: Except for connector type. Recommended
Tightening Torque for 0.6 to 1.0 N·m
Illumination Ratings Terminal Screw
ø40 mm type: 72g
Rated Voltage Operating Voltage Rated Current Weight
ø60 mm type: 81g
24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC ±10% 15 mA
Note: When connecting the applicable connector to a 1m wire of 0.33 mm2
Note: An LED lamp is built into the contact block and cannot be replaced. (AWG22).
308 (06/02/17)
XW Series Emergency Stop Switches ø22
Non-illuminated Screw Terminal Types
NC Main NO Monitor Type No. Operator
Appearance
Contact Contact IP20 w/Terminal Cover Color Code
ø40mm Operator 1NC — XW1E-BV401MF➀ XW1E-BV401M➀
2NC — XW1E-BV402MF➀ XW1E-BV402M➀
1NC 1NO XW1E-BV411MF➀ XW1E-BV411M➀
2NC 2NO XW1E-BV422MF➀ XW1E-BV422M➀ R: Dark red
ø60mm Operator 1NC — XW1E-BV501MF➀ XW1E-BV501M➀ RH: Bright red
• IP20 types can be connected to solid wires only.
Non-illuminated Solder Terminal/PC Board Terminal Types

Type No.
ø40mm Operator 1NC — XW1E-BV401➀ XW1E-BV401V➀
2NC — XW1E-BV402➀ XW1E-BV402V➀
3NC — XW1E-BV403➀ XW1E-BV403V➀
4NC — XW1E-BV404➀ XW1E-BV404V➀ R: Dark red
1NC 1NO XW1E-BV411➀ XW1E-BV411V➀ RH: Bright red
2NC 1NO XW1E-BV412➀ XW1E-BV412V➀
3NC 1NO XW1E-BV413➀ XW1E-BV413V➀
2NC 2NO XW1E-BV422➀ —
Connector Type
Appearance Type No.
ø40mm Operator
R: Dark red
3NC — XW1E-BV403V➀-BC
RH: Bright red

• Applying for UL/c-UL listing. The switch unit (XW1E-BV) is UL/c-UL listed.
• See page 317 for applicable connectors.
(06/02/17) 309
LED Illuminated Screw Terminal Types

NO Type No.
Illumination Rated NC Main
Appearance Monitor
Type Voltage Contact IP20 w/Terminal Cover
Contact
ø40mm Illuminated Operator 1NC — XW1E-LV401Q4MFR XW1E-LV401Q4MR
2NC — XW1E-LV402Q4MFR XW1E-LV402Q4MR
3NC — XW1E-LV403Q4MFR XW1E-LV403Q4MR
24V 4NC — XW1E-LV404Q4MFR XW1E-LV404Q4MR
LED
AC/DC 1NC 1NO XW1E-LV411Q4MFR XW1E-LV411Q4MR
2NC 1NO XW1E-LV412Q4MFR XW1E-LV412Q4MR
• The operator color is red only.
LED Illuminated Solder Terminal / PC Board Terminal Types

NO Type No.
Appearance Monitor Terminal Style
Type Voltage Contact
Contact Solder Terminal PC Board Terminal
ø40mm Illuminated Operator 1NC — XW1E-LV401Q4R XW1E-LV401Q4VR
2NC — XW1E-LV402Q4R XW1E-LV402Q4VR
3NC — XW1E-LV403Q4R XW1E-LV403Q4VR
24V 4NC — XW1E-LV404Q4R XW1E-LV404Q4VR
LED
AC/DC 1NC 1NO XW1E-LV411Q4R XW1E-LV411Q4VR
2NC 1NO XW1E-LV412Q4R XW1E-LV412Q4VR
3NC 1NO XW1E-LV413Q4R XW1E-LV413Q4VR
2NC 2NO XW1E-LV422Q4R —
Push-ON LED Illuminated Screw Terminal Types

NO Type No.
Appearance Monitor
Type Voltage Contact IP20 w/Terminal Cover
Contact
ø40mm Illuminated Operator
3NC — XW1E-TV403Q4MFR XW1E-TV403Q4MR
24V
LED
AC/DC
2NC 1NO XW1E-TV412Q4MFR XW1E-TV412Q4MR

• Push-ON types is illuminated when the operator is latched, and turns off when reset.
Push-ON LED Illuminated Connector Type

NO
Appearance Monitor Type No.
Type Voltage Contact Contact
ø40mm Illuminated Operator
24V
LED 3NC — XW1E-TV403Q4VR-BC
AC/DC

• Push-ON types is illuminated when the operator is latched, and turns off when reset.
• Applying for UL/c-UL listing. The switch unit (XW1E-TV) is UL/c-UL listed.
See page 317 for applicable connectors.
310 (06/02/17)
Dimensions (Non-Illuminated)
• Screw Terminal Type (IP20)
R0 +0.2
.8 3.2 0
ma
ø2 x.
2.3 +0
0 .4
+0.4
R
24.1 0
Panel Cut-out
M3 Terminal Screw
0
Gasket 0.5
ø6
18.5 20.1
Locking Ring
0
ø4
37
IP20 Protection Cover 48.7 32

XW9Z-VL2MF
32
ø40mm Operator ø60mm Operator
• Screw Terminal Type (w/terminal cover)

R0
.8 +0.2
ma 3.2 0
ø2 x.
2.3 +0
.
0 4
+0.4
0
R
24.1
Panel Cut-out
M3 Terminal Screw
0
Gasket 0.5
ø6
18.5 20.1
0
Locking Ring
ø4
37
Terminal Cover 47.2

XW9Z-VL2M 48.7 32
32
ø40mm Operator ø60mm Operator
• Solder Terminal and PC Board Terminal Types

ø40mm Operator Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6 R0
.8
ma +0.2
x. 3.2 0
ø2
2.3 +0
.
0 4
+0.4
0
R
19.8
24.1
8.7
Panel Cut-out
PC Board Layout
(Bottom View) Terminal Cover Gasket
17.4 20.1 XA9Z-VL2 Locking Ring
19.8
8.7 les
ho 0
. 2 ø4
ø1
8-
33.6
33.6
19.8
11.2
19.8
8.7
8.7
3-ø
1.7
6.5 ho
les
3.1 2.1 35 0.5
39.6 32
(06/02/17) 311
Dimensions (Illuminated)
• Screw Terminal (IP20) LED Illuminated Type • Screw Terminal (w/terminal cover)
ø40mm Operator LED Illuminated Type
ø40mm Operator
Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6 Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6
18.5 20.1 R0
.8
ma +0.2
x. 3.2 0
ø2
2.3 +0
.
0 4
+0.4
0
R
R
24.1
Panel Cut-out
LED Push-ON Type M3 Terminal

Screw M3 Terminal
Gasket 0.5 Screw
18.5 20.1 Gasket 0.5
Locking Ring
Locking Ring
0
ø4
37
37
IP20 Protection Cover Terminal Cover 47.2
XW9Z-VL2MF 48.7 32 XW9Z-VL2M 48.7 32
• Solder Terminal and PC Board Terminal LED Illuminated Types

ø40mm Operator Panel Thickness 0.8 to 6 R0
.8 +0.2
ma 3.2 0
x.
ø2
5.7
2.3 +0
0 .4
+0.4
0
R
19.8
8.7
24.1
PC Board Layout Panel Cut-out
(Bottom View)
19.8 Terminal Cover Gasket
17.4 20.1 XA9Z-VL2 Locking Ring
8.7
5.7 les
ho 0
1 .2 ø4
10-ø
19.8
33.6
19.8
11.2
8.7
8.7
3-ø
1.7
ho
6.5 les
3.1 2.1 35 0.5
39.6 32
Dimensions (Connector Type)

• Non-illuminated / LED Push-ON Types
ø40mm Operator R0
.8 +0.2
ma
x. 3.2 0
ø2
2.3 +0
.
0 4
17.4
+0.2
0
R
24.1
20.1
Panel Cut-out
Connector 15.3 10.7

Applicable Panel Thickness
Connector 0.8 to 6.0
36.1
33.6
For applicable connectors, see page 317.

0
ø4
53.0 31.4
55.5 32 (when unlocked) All dimensions in mm.
312 (06/02/17)
Mounting Hole Layout LED Internal Circuit
+0.4 R
ø22.3 0
X1
X Y LED
Screw Terminal Type 70 mm minimum
Solder/PC Board Terminal Type 50 mm minimum
Y 50 mm 70 mm
Connector Type
minimum minimum X2
• The values shown above are the minimum dimensions for
mounting with other ø22mm pushbuttons. For other control
LED chip
X units of different sizes and styles, determine the values accord-
ing to the dimensions, operation, and wiring convenience. Protection diode

• Screw Terminal Non-illuminated Type • Screw Terminal Illuminated Type
NC main contacts only With 1NO monitor contacts With 2NO monitor contacts NC main contacts only With 1NO monitor contacts With 2NO monitor contacts
NC main contacts: NC main contacts: NC main contacts: NC main contacts: NC main contacts: NC main contacts:
Terminals 1-2 Terminals 1-2 Terminals 1-2 Terminals 1-2 Terminals 1-2 Terminals 1-2
NO monitor contacts: NO monitor contacts: NO monitor contacts: NO monitor contacts:
Terminals 3-4 Terminals 3-4 Terminals 3-4 Terminals 3-4
TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP
∗1 ∗2 ∗1 ∗2 ∗3 ∗4 ∗1 ∗2 ∗1 ∗2 ∗3 ∗4
∗2
∗1
∗2
∗1
∗2
∗1
∗2
∗1
∗2
∗1
∗2
∗1
LED LED LED
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right Left Right
∗1
∗2
∗1
∗2
∗1
∗2
∗1
∗2
∗1
∗2
∗1
∗2
∗2 ∗1 ∗4 ∗3 ∗4 ∗3 X1 ∗2 ∗1 X2 X1 ∗4 ∗3 X2 X1 ∗4 ∗3 X2
1NC: Terminals on right 1NC: Terminals on top 1NC: Terminals on right 1NC: Terminals on top
2NC: Terminals on right 2NC: Terminals on right and left 2NC: Terminals on right 2NC: Terminals on right and left
and left and left
3NC: Terminals on right, 3NC: Terminals on right,
left, and top left, and top
• Screw Terminal Illuminated Push-ON Type Terminal Marking Development

NC main contacts only With 1NO monitor contacts TOP
NC main contacts: NC main contacts: 11 12
Terminals 1-2 Terminals 1-2 • Contact Type
22
41
NO monitor contacts: 1-2: NC main contact
Terminals 3-4 3-4: NO monitor contact Left Right
21
42
TOP TOP • Contact Number (1-4)
∗1 ∗2 ∗3 ∗4 Starting with the contact of TOP side, 34 33
in a counterclockwise direction.
∗2
∗1
∗2
∗1
LED LED (Example: 1NO-3NC contact)

Left Right Left Right
• On solder terminal and PC board terminal types, the contact block
∗1
∗2
∗1
∗2
is marked with contact codes (NC main contact 1-2: black, NO

X1 X2 X1 X2 monitor contact 3-4: blue).
• Solder Terminal / PC Board Terminal Non-illuminated Types • Solder Terminal / PC Board Terminal Illuminated Types
NC main contacts only With 1NO monitor contacts With 2NO monitor contacts NC main contacts only With 1NO monitor contacts With 2NO monitor contacts
NC main contacts: NC main contacts: NC main contacts: NC main contacts: NC main contacts: NC main contacts:
Terminals 1-2 Terminals 1-2 Terminals 1-2 Terminals 1-2 Terminals 1-2 Terminals 1-2
NO monitor contacts: NO monitor contacts: NO monitor contacts: NO monitor contacts:
Terminals 3-4 Terminals 3-4 Terminals 3-4 Terminals 3-4
TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP TOP
1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4
2
LED LED LED

2
Left Right Left Right Left Right Left X1 X2 Right Left X1 X2 Right Left X1 X2 Right
1
2
1
2 1 4 3 4 3 2 1 4 3 4 3
1NC: Terminals on right 1NC: Terminals on top Solder Terminal Type only 1NC: Terminals on right 1NC: Terminals on top Solder Terminal Type only
2NC: Terminals on right 2NC: Terminals on right 2NC: Terminals on right 2NC: Terminals on right
and left and left and left and left
3NC: Terminals on right, 3NC: Terminals on right,
left, and top left, and top
• Connector Type Non-illuminated Type • Connector Type Push-ON Type
1 1 1 1 1 1 X
1
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
B B B B B B B B
Connector Connector
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
A A A A LED A A A A
2 2 2 2 2 2 X
2
(06/02/17) 313
Accessories
Package
Description & Appearance Material Type No. Ordering Type No. Remarks
Quantity
Ring Wrench • Used to tighten the locking ring when installing
the XW emergency stop switch onto a panel.
Metal 8
110 ø2
(nickel-plated brass) MW9Z-T1 MW9Z-T1 1
(weight: approx. 150 g)
Anti-rotation Ring • The anti-rotation ring is used for preventing the

operator from turning.
1.5 TOP
Plastic HW9Z-RL HW9Z-RLPN10 10 ø2
9
ø22
Locking Ring • Black
Plastic HW9Z-LN HW9Z-LNPN05 5
Terminal Cover • White

• Used for solder terminals.
• Also applicable to the XA series.
PBT XA9Z-VL2 XA9Z-VL2PN02 2
Terminal Cover • Black

• Used for screw terminals.
PPE XW9Z-VL2M XW9Z-VL2MPN02 2
IP20 Protection Cover • Black

• Used on terminals for IP20 finger protection.
• Only solid wires can be used.
Polyamide XW9Z-VL2MF XW9Z-VL2MFPN02 2
• The IP20 protection cover cannot be removed
once installed.
Ring Adapter • Yellow panel surface

• Used for installing XW1E emergency stop
switches in ø30mm mounting hole.
• Can be used for XW1E emergency stop
switches only.
• IP65 protection.
1.8
3
ø38
ø5 2.3
ø2
ø2
t (Note 1)
1.5
Rubber on metal base XW9Z-A30E XW9Z-A30EPN02 2

0.5
Adaper Washer ∗ (∗: A or B) Adapter Gasket

Note 1: Adapter washer thickness (t)
A = 1.2 mm
B = 0.8 mm
R0 +0.2
.8 4.8 0
ma
x. (Note 2)
ø3
0.5 +0
0 .5
+0.5
033
Note 2: Panel Cut-out

The recess is for preventing rotation and is not necessary
for this product.
Notes:
• XW emergency stop switches of screw terminal type are provided with a terminal cover.
• All dimensions in mm.
314 (06/02/17)
Nameplate
Package Plate Legend
Description Legend Type No. Ordering Type No. Material
Quantity Color Color
(blank) HWAV-0 HWAV-0
For ø40mm Operator Polyamide
EMERGENCY STOP HWAV-27 HWAV-27
1
(blank) HWAV5-0 HWAV5-0 Yellow Black
PBT
For ø60mm Operator EMERGENCY STOP HWAV5-27 HWAV5-27
EMERGENCY STOP HWAV5F-27 HWAV5F-27PN10 10 PET film sticker
• For ø40mm Operator • For ø60mm Operator • Sticker-type Nameplate

for ø60mm Operator
ERGENC ø6
0
M
ø80 ø80
E
ø2
2
STO P
1.5 0.9
ø2
• Panel thickness when using
ø2
2.
the nameplate: 0.8 to 4.5 mm 2.3 0.6
7
• Panel thickness when using
the nameplate: 0.8 to 4 mm
SEMI-compliant Switch Guards (ø22mm panel cut-out)

• SEMI S2-0200, 12.5.1 compliant • SEMATECH Application Guide for • EMO Sticker
SEMI S2-93, 12.4 compliant
• Type No.: HW9Z-KG1
• Type No.: HW9Z-KG2
• Color: Yellow, Munsell
2.5Y 8/10 • Color: Yellow, Munsell
2.5Y 8/10
• Material: Polyamide (PA6)
• Material: Polyamide (PA6)
• EMO sticker not attached
• EMO sticker attached
• Package quantity: 1
• Package quantity: 1 • Type No.: HW9Z-EMO-NPP
• Color: Yellow (red legend)
Dimensions Dimensions • Package quantity: 10
36.5 ˙
38
ø2
64
2.
48 22
2
ø76.1
80
32
ø90 Gasket
2 Gasket
ø2
Mounting Mounting
TOP Marking TOP Marking
TOP Marking Locking Ring TOP Marking
Locking Ring
Operator Operator
Panel Thickness: 1.2 to 4 Panel Thickness: 1.2 to 4

• The HW9Z-KG1 and HW9Z-KG2 switch guards are applicable for ø40mm operators only.
Caution:
International industrial standards such as European Union Directive, IEC60204-1, and JIS B9960-1 require that emergency stop
switches must be installed in the manner in which the operator can access and operate the switches easily, and prohibit the use of
switch guards. The HW9Z-KG1 and HW9Z-KG2 switch guards are used for the emergency stop switches installed on semiconductor
manufacturing equipment only. Do not use the switch guards for emergency stop switches installed on machine systems such as
machine tool and food processing systems.
(06/02/17) 315
Removing the Contact Block Notes for installing the contact block
Make sure that the bayonet ring is in the locked position.
First unlock the operator button. Grab the bayonet ring ➀
Check that the two projections on the bayonet ring are
and pull back the bayonet ring until the latch pin clicks ➁,
securely in place.
then turn the contact block counterclockwise and pull out ➂.
Latched Unlatched
➂ Turn counterclockwise
Bayonet Ring
Projections
➀ Grab
➀ Grab
➁ Pull Wiring
1. The applicable wire size is 1.25 mm2 maximum.
• Notes for removing the contact block 2. Solder the terminal at a temperature of 310 to 350°C
1. When the contact block is removed, the monitor contact within 3 seconds using a soldering iron. Sn-Ag-Cu type is
(NO contact) is closed. recommended when using lead-free solder. When solder-
ing, do not touch the enabling switch with the soldering
2. While removing the contact block, do not exert excessive
iron. Also ensure that no tensile force is applied to the ter-
force, otherwise the switch may be damaged.
minal. Do not bend the terminal or apply excessive force
3. An LED lamp is built into the contact block for illuminated to the terminal.
pushbuttons. When removing the contact block, pull the
contact block straight to prevent damage to the LED lamp.
If excessive force is exerted, the LED lamp may be dam- 4. Because the terminal spacing is narrow, use protective
aged and fail to light. tubes or heat shrinkable tubes to avoid burning of wire
coating or short circuit.
Panel Mounting • PC Board Terminal Type
Remove the locking ring from the operator and check that 1. When mounting a contact block on a PC board, provide
the rubber gasket is in place. Insert the operator from panel sufficient rotating space for the PC board when installing
front into the panel hole. Face the side without thread on the and removing the contact block.
operator with TOP marking upward, and tighten the locking 2. When mounting an XW emergency stop switch on a PC
ring using ring wrench MW9Z-T1 to a torque of 2.0 N·m board, make sure that the operator is securely installed.
maximum. • About PC Board and Circuit Design
Operator without 1. Use PC boards made of glass epoxy copper-clad lami-
thread
nated sheets of 1.6 mm in thickness, with double-sided
TOP marking
through hole.
2. PC boards and circuits must withstand rated voltage and
Locking Ring
current, including the instantaneous current and voltage
Rubber Gasket at switching.
3. The minimum applicable load is 5V AC/DC, 1 mA. This
value may vary according to the operating environment
• Notes for Panel Mounting and load.
To prevent the XW emergency stop switch from rotating 4. Within the 2.8∗ mm areas shown in the figure below, ter-
when resetting from the latched position, use of an anti-rota- minals touch the PC board, resulting in possible short cir-
tion ring (HW9Z-RL) or a nameplate is recommended. cuit on the printed circuit. When designing a PC board
pattern, take this possibility into consideration.
Installing the Contact Block
19.8
First unlock the operator button. Align the small ▼ marking 8.7
1.6 (PC Board)
on the edge of the operator with the small ▲ marking on the (0.5) (0.5)
ole
s
2.8∗
h
(0.5)
yellow bayonet ring. Hold the contact block, not the bayonet ø1
.2
-
ring. Press the contact block onto the operator and turn the 10
2.8∗
contact block clockwise until the bayonet ring clicks.

19.8
8.7
2.8∗
▼ marking ▲ marking
(0.5)
(0.5) (0.5)
5.7 Solder Surface for installing
Solder Surface Surface components
➁ Turn clockwise
components 2.8∗ 2.8∗
➀ Push
316 (06/02/17)
• Screw Terminal Type To remove the terminal cover, pull out the two latches on the
1. Wire thickness: 0.75 to 1.25 mm2 (AWG18 to 16) top side of the terminal cover. Do not exert excessive force
to the latches, otherwise the latches may break.
Applicable Crimping Terminals Solid Wire
TOP Markings
Ring Terminal Spade Terminal
ø6.0 max.
6.0 max.
ø1.2 max.
3.2 min.
ø3.2 min. Pull out the latches.
4.7 min. 6.2 max.

3.0 max. 4.7 to 5.9
Crimping Terminal
Crimping
Terminal Insulating Tube Insulating Tube
IP20 Protection Terminal Cover
XW9Z-VL2MF
4.7 to 5.9 Wire 4.7 to 5.9 Wire
To install the IP20 protection cover, align the TOP marking
• Be sure to install an insulating tube on the crimping terminal. on the cover with the TOP marking on the contact block, and
press the cover toward the contact block.
2. Tighten the M3 terminal screw to a tightening torque of 0.6 to
1.0 N·m.
• Connector Type (Press)
1. Connector shape TOP Marking
Tyco Electronics, D-2000 series
Part No. 1376009-1 (tab header, board mount)
2. Applicable connectors (to be supplied by user)
• Tyco Electronics, D-2000 series TOP Marking
Part No. 1-1318119-4 (receptacle housing)
• Tyco Electronics, D-2000 series
Part No. 1318107-1 (receptacle contact) Notes:
3. To prepare correct receptacles for the connector type, 1. Once installed, the XW9Z-VL2MF cannot be removed.
read the instruction sheet and catalog of Tyco Electronics 2. The XW9Z-VL2MF cannot be installed after wiring.
and understand the installation and wiring method. 3. With the XW9Z-VL2MF installed, crimping terminals cannot be used.
Use solid wires.
4. Fasten the cable so that the connector is not pulled. 4. Make sure that the XW9Z-VL2MF is securely installed. IP20 cannot
Otherwise the switch may be deformed and damaged, be achieved when installed loosely, and electric shocks may occur.
causing malfunction or operation failure.
Contact Bounce
Installing & Removing Terminal Covers When the button is reset by pulling or turning, the NC main
contacts will bounce. When pressing the button, the NO
• XA9Z-VL2 monitor contacts will bounce.
To install the terminal cover, align the TOP marking on the When designing a control circuit, take the contact bounce
terminal cover with TOP marking on the contact block, and time into consideration (reference value: 20 ms).
press the terminal cover toward the contact block.
LED Illuminated Switches
An LED lamp is built into the contact block and cannot be
replaced.
Installing the Anti-rotation Ring

Note: For wiring, insert the wires into the holes in the terminal cover before
soldering.
HW9Z-RL
Align the side without thread on the operator with TOP mark-
• XW9Z-VL2M ing, the small ▲ marking on the anti-rotation ring, and the
To install the terminal cover, align the TOP marking on the recess on the mounting panel.
terminal cover with the TOP marking on the contact block.
Place the two projections on the bottom side of the contact Without thread ▲ marking on the anti-rotation ring
block into the slots in the terminal cover. Press the terminal
cover toward the contact block.
TOP Marking
TOP Marking
➁ Press the
terminal cover
Anti-rotation Ring (HW9Z-RL)
➀ Place the projections

on the contact bock.
(06/02/17) 317
Installing the Nameplate Handling
Align the side without thread on the operator with TOP mark- Do not expose the switch to excessive shocks and vibra-
ing, the projection on the nameplate, and the recess on the tions, otherwise the switch may be deformed or damaged,
mounting panel. causing malfunction or operation failure.
Nameplate or Switch Guard

When anti-rotation is not required, remove the projection
from the nameplate or switch guard using pliers.
Projections
Nameplate Switch Guard
Safety Precautions
• Turn off power to the XW series emergency stop switch • Use wires of the proper size to meet the voltage and cur-
before starting installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, rent requirements, and solder the wires correctly. If solder-
and inspection of the relays. Failure to turn power off may ing is incomplete, the wire may heat during operation,
cause electrical shock or fire hazard. causing fire hazard.
318 (06/02/17)
HE1B/2B/3B/5B
Enabling Switches
HE1G
Grip Switch
(06/02/17) 319
Types
Enabling Switch
Side Mounting Type
(1-contact) Rectangular Type Rectangular Type
16mm Round Hole Type 16mm Round Hole Type
(6 contacts maximum) (6 contacts maximum)
Top Mounting Type (without rubber boot) (with rubber boot)
(without rubber boot) (with rubber boot)
(1-contact)
HE1B HE2B HE3B
Small and ideal for install- Ideal for 4-finger operation. Rectangular shape
ing in enabling devices. A maximum of 6 contacts can be installed (2 contacts Can be mounted easily in a ø16 mm round hole.
Type and each for 3-position switch, button return monitor and
Appearance button depress monitor)
Monitor Switch Monitor Switch
Degree of
IP40 IP65 IP40 IP65
Protection
IEC / EN 60947-5-1 (DEMKO approval)
Applicable UL508 (UL recognized)
Standards CSA C22. No. 14 (c-UL recognized)
JIS C8201-5-1
Standards
Page 322, 323 324 to 326 327, 328
Enabling Switch Grip Switch

2-contact, ø16mm Round Hole, With Emergency Stop With Momentary
With Monitor Switch
With Rubber Boot Switch Pushbutton Switch
HE5B HE9Z-GSH51 (Note) HE1G
Can be mounted easily on Compact grip switch 2-contact 3-position switch Combination of emer- Combination of 3-position
ø16 mm round hole. housing and monitoring contact. gency stop switch and 3- enabling switch and
position enabling switch. momentary pushbutton
switch (1NO/2NO).
Type and
Appearance
Degree of
IP65 IP66 IP65
Protection
IEC / EN 60947-5-1 IEC / EN60529 IEC / EN 60947-5-1 (BG approval)
(DEMKO approval) UL50 GS-ET-22 (BG approval)
Applicable UL508 (UL recognized) UL508 (UL listed)
Standards CSA C22. No. 14 CSA C22. No. 14 (c-UL listed)
(c-UL recognized) JIS C8201-5-1
JIS C8201-5-1
Standards
Page 329, 330 331 332 to 334
Note: HE9Z-GSH51 is housing only. Install the HE5B enabling switch to use as a grip switch. See page 331 for details.
320
Selection Chart of Enabling Switch and Grip Switch
ISO 12100-2: 2003 IEC 60204-1: 1997 ANSI/ RIA R15.06 ANSI B11.19 SEMI S2-0703
Control mode for setting, 9.2.5.8 4.7.3 Enabling device 12.3.1.1 Enabling devices 20.4 Industrial robots and
teaching, process changeover, When an enabling device The pendant or teaching shall be designed and industrial robot systems
fault-finding, cleaning or main- is provided as a part of a control device shall have constructed to permit lim- should meet the require-
tenance system, it shall be an enabling device using ited and supervised ments of appropriate
4.11.9 designed to allow motion a three position switch, machine motion while national or international
permits operation of the haz- when actuated in one which continuously held in personnel are inside a standards, e.g., ANSI/RIA
ardous elements only by con- position only. In any other a detented position, per- hazard area. R15.06, ISO standards
tinuous actuation of an position motion shall be mits motion. 10218, EN 775.
enabling device, a hold-to-run stopped.
control device or a two-hand
control device;
Style Standards Marks

HE1B-M1N
3-position Panel Top Installation IP40
Switch with
1 Contact
(2 switches
HE1B-M1
are used for
Panel Side Installation
For Installation in Equipment
duplication) IP40
HE2B-M200
IP40
w/o Monitor
Switch
for Position HE2B-M200P∗
Detection
IP65
3-position Installed in Rectangular
Switch with Panel Cut-out
2 Contacts (4-finger operation) HE2B-M211
HE2B-M222
IP40 IEC/EN60947-5-1
w/Monitor UL508
Switch CSA C22.2 No.14
for Position HE2B-M211P∗
Detection HE2B-M222P∗
IP65
HE3B-M2
IP40
For Direct Operation with Hand
Installed in ø16mm
Round Hole (thumb or
3-finger operation) HE3B-M2P∗
IP65
HE5B-M2P∗
Installed in ø16mm
Round Hole (thumb IP65
operation)
HE9Z-GSH51 + HE5B-M2P∗ (HE9Z-GSH51)

w/o Monitor IEC/EN60529
Switch UL50
for Position IP65
(HE5B-M2P∗)
Detection
IEC/EN60947-5-1
UL508
CSA C22.2 No.14
w/Monitor HE1G-21SM
Switch
for Position IP66
Detection
Grip Switch Type
HE1G-20ME
w/Pushbut- IEC/EN60947-5-1
ton Switch UL508
for Emer- IP65
CSA C22.2 No.14
gency Stop GS-ET-22
HE1G-2∗MB
w/Momen-
tary Action
Pushbutton IP65
Switch
(06/02/17) 321
HE1B Enabling Switch
3-position enabling switch to avoid hazards.
Ideal for installing in teach pendants and other enabling devices.
• Ergonomically-designed OFF-ON-OFF.
• Direct opening action mechanism for shifting from position 2 (ON)
to position 3 (OFF) (EN 60947-5-1/IEC 60947-5-1, Annex K).
• The switch does not turn ON while being released from position 3
(OFF when pressed) to position 1 (OFF when released)
(IEC60204-1, 9.2.5.8).
• Reliable performance in compact and lightweight package.
Direct Opening
Action
Types
Mounting Style Contact Configuration Type No. Ordering Type No. Package Quantity
Side Mounting HE1B-M1 HE1B-M1PN10
1 contact (3-position) 10
Top Mounting HE1B-M1N HE1B-M1NPN10
• Minimum applicable load (reference value): 3V AC/DC, 5 mA
Ratings
• Contact Ratings
Rated Voltage (Ue) 30V 125V 250V
Resistive Load (AC-12) — 3A 1.5A
AC 50/60 Hz
Inductive Load (AC-15) — 1.5A 0.75A
Rated Current (Ie)
Resistive Load (DC-12) 2A 0.4A 0.2A
DC
Inductive Load (DC-13) 1A 0.22A 0.1A
Contact Configuration (3-position switch) 1 contact
Specifications
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (DEMKO approval)
UL508 (UL recognized), CSA C22.2, No. 14 (c-UL recognized), JIS C8201-5-1
ISO 12100 / EN 292, IEC 60204-1 / EN 60204-1
Applicable Standards for Use
ISO 11161 / prEN 11161, ISO 10218 / EN 775, ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11.19
Relative Humidity 45 to 85% (no condensation)
Pollution Degree 2
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ minimum
Impulse Withstand Voltage 2.5 kV
Operating Frequency 1,200 operations per hour
Position 1 → 2 → 1: 1,000,000 operations
Mechanical Durability
Position 1 → 2 → 3 → 1: 100,000 operations
Electrical Durability 100,000 operations minimum
Shock Resistance
Damage limits: 16.7 Hz, amplitude 1.5 mm
Terminal Style Solder terminal
Applicable Wire 1 cable, 0.5 mm2 maximum
Solder Terminal Heat Resistance 310 to 350°C, 3 seconds maximum
Terminal Tensile Strength 20N minimum
HE1B-M1: M3 screw / 0.5 to 0.8 N·m
Mounting Screw Recommended Tightening Torque
HE1B-M1N: M2.6 screw / 0.4 to 0.6 N·m
Degree of Protection IP40, except terminals
Conditional Short-circuit Current 50A (250V) (Use 250V/10A fast acting type fuse for short-circuit protection.)
Direct Opening Force 30N minimum (position 2 → 3)
Operator Strength 250N minimum
Weight (approx.) 6g
322 (06/02/17)
Operation Characteristics
Position 1 Position 2 Position 3
Approx. 15N
Operating Force (Reference Value)

(When pressing the center of operator)
Approx. 3N
Travel (mm) 0 1.4±0.3 2.2±0.3 2.7±0.5 5.0
: ON (Closed) Pressing ( )
Releasing ( )
: OFF (Open)
Dimensions
When pressed to
position 3: 2 30 12
13.6 4 7.6
7
5
13
4
2.8
24
4
Solder Terminal 8

• HE1B-M1 (side mounting type) • HE1B-M1N (top mounting type)
Mounting screw: M3 Mounting screw: M2.6
Mounting panel thickness + 5 to 6
Mounting Screw Length:
15 min.
3
.8
M
ø2
9 min.
24±0.5
24±0.2
Mounting Panel
Thickness
Insert the nuts supplied with the switch.
Note: When installed on a mounting panel thicker than 2

mm, the actuator surface is below the panel when
the button is pressed to position 3.
(06/02/17) 323
Multi-contact 3-position enabling switches Ideal for installing in large teach pendants
• Ergonomically-designed OFF-ON-OFF operation.
• Easy recognition of position 1 to 2 transition is made possible by a snap
action switch.
• Sufficient difference in operating force is provided for shifting from posi-
tion 2 to 3.
• Low pressure is required to maintain position 2, allowing for longtime
operation.
• Reliable operation is assured even when the edge of the operator button
is pressed.
• The switch does not turn ON while being released from position 3 (OFF)
to position 1 (OFF) (IEC60204-1, 9.2.5.8).
• Some teach pendants are equipped with two 3-position enabling
switches, and when one switch is pressed to position 3 (OFF), the other
switch must not enable machine operation even when pressed to posi-
tion 2. Enabling of machine operation must resume after both switches
are released. For this purpose, also available are 3-position enabling
switches with monitoring switches for button returned to position 1 and
button pressed to position 3 (monitor switches have direct opening
action mechanism).
• Two contacts are provided in a 3-position enabling switch so that even if
one contact fails due to welding or short-circuit, the other contact can Direct Opening
disable machine operation. Action
• The waterproof rubber boot provides IP65 protection.
Types
Contact Configuration
Package
Type Button Return Button Depress Type No. Ordering Type No.
3-position Switch Monitor Quantity
Switch Monitor Switch
HE2B-M200 1
2 0 0 HE2B-M200
HE2B-M200PN10 10
HE2B-M211 1
Without Rubber Boot 2 1 1 HE2B-M211
HE2B-M211PN10 10
HE2B-M222 1
2 2 2 HE2B-M222
HE2B-M222PN10 10
HE2B-M200P∗ 1
2 0 0 HE2B-M200P∗
Rubber Boot Material: HE2B-M200P∗PN10 10
Silicon Rubber HE2B-M211P∗ 1
Color: 2 1 1 HE2B-M211P∗
Y: yellow HE2B-M211P∗PN10 10
B: black HE2B-M222P∗ 1
2 2 2 HE2B-M222P∗
With HE2B-M222P∗PN10 10
Rubber Boot HE2B-M200PN1 1
2 0 0 HE2B-M200PN1
HE2B-M200PN1PN10 10
Rubber Boot Material: HE2B-M211PN1 1
NBR/PVC Polyblend 2 1 1 HE2B-M211PN1
Color: gray HE2B-M211PN1PN10 10
HE2B-M222PN1 1
2 2 2 HE2B-M222PN1
HE2B-M222PN1PN10 10
Note: Specify rubber boot color code in place of ∗ in the Type No.
• Type No. Development HE2B - M 2 0 0 P ∗

• 3-position Switch • Rubber Boot Material, Color
2: 2 contacts Blank: No rubber boot
• Button Return Monitor Switch Y: Silicon rubber, yellow
0: No switch B: Silicon rubber, black
1: 1 contact N1: NBR/PVC polyblend, gray
2: 2 contacts • Rubber Boot
• Button Depress Monitor Switch Blank: No rubber boot
0: No switch P: With rubber boot
1: 1 contact
2: 2 contacts
Ratings
• Contact Ratings
AC
Inductive Load (AC-15) — 0.7A 0.5A
3-position Switch
Resistive Load (DC-12) 1A 0.2A —
DC
Inductive Load (DC-13) 0.7A 0.1A —
Rated Current (Ie)
Resistive Load (AC-12) — 2A 1A
AC
Button Return Monitor Switch Inductive Load (AC-15) — 1A 0.5A
Button Depress Monitor Switch Resistive Load (DC-12) 2A 0.4A 0.2A
DC
3-position Switch 2 contacts
Contact Configuration Button Return Monitor Switch 0 to 2 contacts
Button Depress Monitor Switch 0 to 2 contacts
324 (06/02/17)
Specifications
IEC 60947-5-1, EN60947-5-1 (DEMKO approval), UL508 (UL recognized)
CSA C22.2, No. 14 (c-UL recognized), JIS C8201-5-1
ISO 12100 / EN 292, IEC 60204-1 / EN 60204-1
ISO11161 / prEN 11161, ISO10218 / EN 775, ANSI / RIA R15.06, ANSI B11.19
–25 to +60°C (no freezing) (without rubber boot, with silicon rubber boot)
–10 to +60°C (no freezing) (with NBR/PVC polyblend rubber boot)
Relative Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
2 (inside panel, terminal side)
Pollution Degree
3 (outside panel, operator side)
Between live and dead metal parts: 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
Insulation Resistance
Between terminals of different poles: 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
Position 1 → 2 → 1: 1,000,000 operations minimum
Position 1 → 2 → 3 → 1: 100,000 operations minimum
Shock Resistance
Solder Terminal Heat Resistance 310 to 350 °C, 3 seconds maximum
Mounting Screw Recommended Tightening Torque 0.5 to 0.8 N·m
IP40 (without rubber boot)
IP65 (with rubber boot)
Direct Opening Force 60N minimum (button return monitor and button depress monitor switches)
Operator Strength 500N minimum (when pressing the entire button surface)
26g (without rubber boot)
Weight (approx.)
30g (with rubber boot)
Approx. 30N
Operating Force (reference value)

(without rubber boot, when pressing
the center of the operator)
Approx. 4N
Travel (mm) 0 1.4±0.3 2.4±0.3 3.0±0.3 3.6±0.5 4.2±0.5 6.0±0.5

When pressing the operator
Between NO1 - C1
Between NO2 - C2
: ON (closed) Between 11 - 12
Between 21 - 22
: OFF (open) Between 31 - 32
Between 41 - 42
When releasing the operator Between NO1 - C1

Between NO2 - C2
Between 11 - 12
Between 21 - 22
Between 31 - 32
Between 41 - 42
Notes:
• When a rubber boot is used, the operating force depends on the operating temperature.
• The operating force to shift the switch from position 2 to position 3 can be changed. For details, contact IDEC.
(06/02/17) 325
IDEC Logo Side IDEC Logo Side IDEC Logo Side
HE2B-M200 HE2B-M211 HE2B-M222
• 3-position switch (note): 2 contacts, terminal nos. between NO1 – C1, NO2 – C2
• Button return monitor switch: 0 to 2 contacts, terminal nos. between 11 – 12, 21 – 22
• Button depress monitor switch: 0 to 2 contacts, terminal nos. between 31 – 32, 41 – 42
Note: Use NO and C terminals for OFF → ON → OFF 3-position switch (NC terminal is not used).
Dimensions
• Without Rubber Boot • With Rubber Boot
M3 nut hole
11.5
19
16
10
90
68
6.5
87
78
14.2 14.8
66.5
5.5
13.5
5
14.2
7
69
5
69
7
• M3 nuts are supplied with the HE2B enabling switch.

Mounting Panel Thickness: 6 max.
2 -ø
3.2
±0.2
70
+0.2
0
±0.2
12.2
78
• Mounting screw: Two M3 screws

• Length of mounting screw: The thickness of mounting panel + 4 to 5 mm
Mounting Screws
Accessories
• Replacement Rubber Boot
Material Color Type No. Ordering Type No. Package Quantity
Y: yellow
Silicon Rubber HE9Z-D2∗ HE9Z-D2∗PN10
B: black 10
NBR/PVC Polyblend Gray HE9Z-D2N1 HE9Z-D2N1PN10
Note: Specify a rubber boot color code in place of ∗ in the Type No.
326 (06/02/17)
Rectangular operator part with ø16 mm mounting for easy installation.
2-contact 3-position enabling switches ideal for installing in small teach pendants.
• Easy recognition of position 1 to 2 transition is made possible by a
snap action switch.
• Sufficient difference in operating force is provided for shifting from
position 2 to position 3.
• Low pressure is required to maintain in position 2 allowing for
longtime operation.
• Reliable operation is assured even when the edge of the operator
button is pressed.
• The switch does not turn ON while being released from position 3
(OFF) to position 1 (OFF) (IEC60204-1, 9.2.5.8).
• Two contacts are provided in a 3-position enabling switch so that
even one contact fails due to welding or short-circuit, the other
contact can disable machine operation.
Types Contact Ratings

Contact Package Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 125V
Type Type No. Ordering Type No.
Configuration Quantity Rated Thermal Current (Ith) 3A
HE3B-M2 1 Rated Voltage (Ue) 30V 125V
Without Rubber Boot HE3B-M2
HE3B-M2PN10 10 Resistive Load (AC-12) — 1A
AC
Rubber Boot Material: HE3B-M2P∗ 1 Rated Current Inductive Load (AC-15) — 0.7A
With Rubber Boot
Silicon Rubber 2 contacts (Ie)

HE3B-M2P∗ Resistive Load (DC-12) 1A 0.2A
Color: (3-position DC
HE3B-M2P∗PN10 10 Inductive Load (DC-13) 0.7A 0.1A
Y: yellow, B: black switch)
Contact Configuration (3-position switch) 2 contacts
Rubber Boot Material: HE3B-M2PN1 1
NBR/PVC Polyblend HE3B-M2PN1 Minimum applicable load (reference value): 3V AC/DC, 5 mA
Color: gray HE3B-M2PN1PN10 10
Note: Specify rubber boot color code in place of ∗ in the Type No.
Specifications
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (DEMKO approval)
UL508 (UL recognized), CSA C22.2, No. 14 (c-UL recognized), JIS C8201-5-1
ISO 12100 / EN 292, IEC 60204-1 / EN 60204-1
Applicable Standards for Use ISO 11161 / prEN 11161, ISO 10218 / EN 775
ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11.19
–25 to +60°C (no freezing) (without rubber boot, with silicon rubber boot)
–10 to +60°C (no freezing) (with NBR/PVC polyblend rubber boot)
Pollution Degree
Between terminals of different poles: 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
Position 1 → 2 → 1: 1,000,000 operations minimum
Position 1 → 2 → 3 → 1: 100,000 operations minimum
Shock Resistance
Locking Ring Recommended Tightening Torque 0.68 to 0.88 N·m
IP40 (without rubber boot)
IP65 (with rubber boot)
Operator Strength 500N minimum (pressing the entire operator surface)
14g (without rubber boot)
Weight (approx.)
18g (with rubber boot)
(06/02/17) 327
Part A: Approx. 56N
Part B Part A Part B: Approx. 14N
Operating Force (reference value)

(Without rubber boot)
(When part A or part B is pressed)
Part A: Approx. 10N

Part B: Approx. 2N
+0.7 +0.7 +0.7 +0.7
Part A 0 0.8 –0.2 1.0 –0.2 1.7 –0.2 1.9 –0.2
Travel (mm) +0.7 +0.7 +0.7 +0.4
Part B 0 2.3 –0.3 3.0 –0.3 4.2 –0.3 5.0 –0.3
When pressing the operator

Between NO1 – C1
: ON (closed)
Between NO2 – C2
: OFF (open)
When releasing the operator
Between NO1 – C1
Between NO2 – C2
Notes:
• When rubber boot is used, operating force depends on the operating temperature.
• The operating force to shift the switch from position 2 to position 3 can be changed. For details, contact IDEC.
Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Mounting Hole Layout

• 3-position switch (Note) • Recommended tightening torque e)
.2
+0 0 ot
2 contacts for locking ring: 0.68 to 0.88 N·m .2
+0 0
(N le)
• Use the locking ring wrench MT- 6.2 .2 .5 Ho
Thickness 0.5 to 4
2 g
Terminal No.: between NO1 and NC1 NC2 Mounting Panel ø1 ø3 pth: ionin
001 for tightening. De osit
C1, between NO2 and C2 (P
NO1 NO2 Note: To maintain waterproof property
Note: Use NO and C terminals for the of the switch, do not drill through 30
3-position switch of OFF → ON C1 C2 the anti-rotation hole in the
→ OFF operation mounting panel. When not pro-
(NC terminal is not used). viding a hole, cut off the anti-
rotation projection from the rub- Anti-rotation Ring
ber boot. When cutting off the
projection, ensure not to make a Locking Ring
hole in the rubber boot.
Dimensions
• Without Rubber Boot • With Rubber Boot
Mounting Panel Thickness: 0.5 to 4 Mounting Panel Thickness: 0.5 to 4
Locking Ring Locking Ring
2.5
2.5
3
3
Anti-rotation Ring Anti-rotation Ring

14.5 Rubber Boot
2 15.5
12.3 22.2
8.5 13 25
ø3 9.5
Solder Terminal R1
Width 2.8 × 0.5t
38.1
39.5
Solder Terminal
(51.2)
Width 2.8 × 0.5t

27.5
24.6
25.5
30
(54)
(34.5)
(33.1)
(39)
55
5 5
11.5
8.5
14.5
13.1
8 15 16 R2 8 15 20.5
R1

Accessories
• Replacement Rubber Boot • Locking Ring Wrench
Package Type No: MT-001
Material Color Type No. Ordering Type No.
Quantity
Material: Metal
Y: yellow
B: black 10
• Specify rubber boot color code in place of ∗ in the Type No.
328 (06/02/17)
Round-shaped operator for ø16 mm mounting hole.
3-position enabling switch with two contacts, ideal for installing in small
teaching pendants.
• Easy recognition of position 1 to 2 transition is made possible by a snap
action switch.
• Sufficient difference in operating force is provided for shifting from posi-
tion 2 to position 3.
• Low pressure is required to maintain position 2, allowing longtime oper-
ation.
• Grip switch housing available.
• The switch does not turn ON when being released from position 3 (OFF
when pressed) to position 1 (OFF when released) (IEC60204-1,
9.2.5.8).
• Two contacts are provided in a 3-position enabling switch so that even if
one contact fails due to welding or short-circuit, the other contact can
disable machine operation.
Types Contact Ratings

Contact Package Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 125V
Configuration Quantity Rated Current (Ith) 3A
Silicon HE5B-M2P∗ 1 Rated Voltage (Ue) 30V 125V
With Rubber Boot
Rubber
HE5B-M2P∗ Resistive Load (AC-12) – 0.5A
Y: yellow
2 contacts HE5B-M2P∗PN10 10 AC
B: black Inductive Load (AC-15) – 0.3A
(3-position Rated Current (Ie)
switch) HE5B-M2PN1 1 Resistive Load (DC-12) 1A –
DC
NBR/PVC HE5B-M2PN1 Inductive Load (DC-13) 0.7A –
HE5B-M2PN1PN10 10
Contact Configuration (3-position switch) 2 contacts
• Specify rubber boot color code in place of ∗ in the Type No. Minimum applicable load (reference): 3V AC/DC, 5mA
Applicable operation area depends on the operating conditions and
load.
Specifications
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (DEMKO approval),UL508 (UL recognized),
CSA C22.2, No. 14 (c-UL recognized), JIS C8201-5-1
ISO 12100 / EN292, IEC 60204-1 / EN 60204-1, ISO 11161 / prEN 11161,
ISO 10218 / EN 775, ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11.19
Silicon rubber boot: –25 to 60°C (no freezing)
NBR/PVC Polyblend rubber boot: –10 to 60°C (no freezing)
Pollution Degree
Between terminals of different pole: 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
Position 1 ➝ 2 ➝ 1: 1,000,000 operations minimum
Position 1 ➝ 2 ➝ 3 ➝ 1: 100,000 operations minimum
Shock Resistance
Damage limits: 5 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm
Applicable Wire 0.5 mm2 maximum per line
Terminal Tensile Strength 20 N minimum
Locking Ring Recommended Tightening Torque 0.29 to 0.49 N·m
Conditional Short-circuit Current 50A (125V) (Use 250V/10A fast acting type fuse for short circuit protection.)
Operator Strength 250N minimum (when pressing the entire operator surface)
Weight (approx.) 9g
(06/02/17) 329
Operating Characteristics
Approx. 12N
Reference Operating Load

When Pressing the Center
of the Button
: ON (Close)
Approx. 3N
: OFF (Open)
–0.3 –0.3 –0.5 –0.5
Operating Stroke (mm) 0 2.3 3.0 3.6 5.0
Pressing Button NO1-C1

NO2-C2
Releasing Button
NO1-C1
NO2-C2
Notes:
• Operating force depends on ambient temperature.
• The operating force to shift the switch from position 2 to position 3 can be changed. For details, consult IDEC.
Terminal Arrangement (Bottom View) Mounting Hole Layout

.2
+0 0
.0
• 3-position switch (Note) • Recommended Tightening Torque ø1
6
2 contacts for Locking Ring: 0.29 to 0.49 N·m

Terminal No.: between NO1 and C1, • Use the MT-001 locking ring
NO2 and C2 wrench for tightening.
Note: For OFF ➝ ON ➝ OFF 3-position
switches, use NO and C terminals
(NC terminal is not used).
Anti-rotation Ring
Locking Ring
Dimensions
With Rubber Boot Panel Thickness 0.5 to 4
Locking Ring
2.5
3
Anti-rotation Ring Rubber Boot
Solder Terminal Width 2.8 × 0.5t

ø20
5
5
8 15 16
Accessories
• Replacement Rubber Boot
• Locking Ring Wrench
Ordering Package
Rubber Boot Material Color Type No. Type No: MT-001
Type No. Quantity
B: black Material: Metal
Y: yellow 10
• Specify rubber boot color code in place of ∗ in the Type No.
330 (06/02/17)
• Grip Switch Housing
HE5B enabling switches can be installed in the HE9Z-GSH51
grip switch housing to be used as 3-position grip switches.
Types
Type No. Ordering Type No. Package Quantity
HE9Z-GSH51 HE9Z-GSH51 1
Specifications
IEC / EN 60529
Applicable Standards UL50
Operating Temperature –25 to 60°C (no freezing)
Relative Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
Storage Temperature –40 to 80°C (no freezing)
Pollution Degree 3
Shock Resistance Damage limits: 500 m/s2
Vibration Resistance Damage limits: 5 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm
Electric Shock Protection Class Class II (when using HE5B-M2P∗)
Applicable Cable Outside diameter ø4.5 to 10 mm
M16 (connector is supplied with the grip switch
Conduit Size housing) Double Insulation
IP65 (with HE5B-M2P∗)

Degree of Protection NEMA type 4X indoor use only
(with HE5B-M2P∗)
Weight (approx.) 65g (grip switch housing only)
Notes:
• The above specifications are for the grip switch housing only. • The HE9Z-GSH51 grip switch housing does not include the
For enabling switch, see the HE5B specifications on page page 329. HE5B enabling switch. The enabling switch must be ordered
separately.
• The following switches can be installed on the grip switch housing to
be used as hand-held switches. • The HE5B enabling switch must be installed and wired to
the HE9Z-GSH51 grip switch housing by the user. For infor-
• AB6M pushbuttons (IP65, except for AB6M-V)
mation on wiring, see the instruction sheet supplied with the
• AS6M selector switches (IP65)
HE9Z-GSH51.
• AS6M key selector switches (IP65)
Dimensions
HE9Z-GSH51 144 (78)
92
39
Connector
Type: SKINTOP BS-M16 × 1.5 (LAPP)
38
HE9Z-GSH51 + HE5B Construction

Head Housing Connector
Locking Ring
HE5B Enabling Switch (not supplied with the grip switch housing)
• Anti-rotation ring is not required when installing the HE5B enabling switch on the HE9Z-GSH51 grip switch housing.
Use the locking ring only.
• Mounting Bracket
Type No: HE9Z-GH1 50 M5 Holes
(2-ø5.3)
20
Plastic Coating
33
81 86 Material: SUS304
Thickness: t = 3.0 mm All dimensions in mm.
(06/02/17) 331
HE1G Grip Switch
Ergonomically designed grip switch with two 3-position enabling switches.
• Direct opening action mechanism for shifting from position 2
(ON) to position 3 (OFF) (EN 60977-5-1/IEC 60947-5-1,
Annex K).
• The switch does not turn ON when being released from posi-
tion 3 (OFF when pressed) to position 1 (OFF when released)
(IEC60204-1, 9.2.5.8).
• Two contacts are provided so that even if one contact fails due
to welding or short-circuit, the other contact can disable
machine operation.
• Emergency stop switch and momentary pushbutton versions
are available.
• Conduit connector supplied.
• HE1G-21SM is IP66 waterproof.
• Can be used for applications required by the ANSI robot stan-
dard.
BG standard in Germany Direct Opening Double

Action Insulation
Types
Contact Configuration Package
Rubber Boot Ordering Type No.
3-position Switch Monitor Switch Pushbutton Quantity
Silicon Rubber / yellow HE1G-21SM
Without
NBR / PVC Polyblend / gray HE1G-21SM-1N
With (1NC)
Silicon Rubber / yellow HE1G-21SMB
Momentary Pushbutton (1NO)
NBR / PVC Polyblend / gray HE1G-21SMB-1N
2 contacts 1
Silicon Rubber / yellow HE1G-20ME
Emergency Stop Switch (2NC)
NBR / PVC Polyblend / gray HE1G-20ME-1N
Without
Silicon Rubber / yellow HE1G-20MB
Momentary Pushbutton (2NO)
NBR / PVC Polyblend / gray HE1G-20MB-1N
Ratings
• Contact Ratings
Rated Insulation Voltage (Ui) 250V (momentary pushbutton switch: 125V)
AC
3-position Switch Inductive Load (AC-15) — 1.5A 0.75A
(terminal No. 1-2, 3-4) Resistive Load (DC-12) 2A 0.4A 0.2A
DC
Resistive Load (AC-12) — 2A 1A
AC
Monitor Switch Inductive Load (AC-15) — 1A 0.5A
(HE1G-21SM, terminal No. 5-6) Resistive Load (DC-12) 2A 0.4A 0.2A
DC
Rated Current (Ie)
Resistive Load (AC-12) — — —
AC
Emergency Stop Switch Inductive Load (AC-15) — — 0.5A
(HE1G-20ME, terminal No. 5-6, 7-8) Resistive Load (DC-12) — — —
DC
Inductive Load (DC-13) — — 0.1A
Resistive Load (AC-12) — 0.5A —
AC
Momentary Pushbutton Switch Inductive Load (AC-15) — 0.3A —
(HE1G-20MB, terminal No. 5-6, 7-8) Resistive Load (DC-12) 1A 0.2A —
DC
Inductive Load (DC-13) 0.7A 0.1A —
3-position Switch 2 contacts
Monitor Switch 0 or 1 contact
Contact Configuration
Emergency Stop Switch 0 or 2 contacts
Momentary Pushbutton Switch 0 to 2 contacts
• Applicable operation area depends on the operating conditions and load.
332 (06/02/17)
HE1G Grip Switch
Specifications
IEC 60947-5-1, EN 60947-5-1 (BG approval), GS-ET-22 (BG approval),
UL508 (UL listed), CSA C22.2, No. 14 (c-UL listed), JIS C8201-5-1
ISO 12100 / EN 292, IEC 60204-1 / EN 60204-1, ISO11161 / prEN11161,
ISO 10218 / EN 775, ANSI/RIA R15.06, ANSI B11.19
Silicon rubber boot: –25 to 60°C (no freezing)
NBR/PVC Polyblend rubber boot: –10 to 60°C (no freezing)
Pollution Degree 3
Between terminals of different pole: 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
Impulse Withstand Voltage 2.5 kV (except for momentary pushbuttons)
Electric Shock Protection Class Class II (IEC 61140)
Position 1 ➝ 2 ➝ 1: 1,000,000 operations minimum
Position 1 ➝ 2 ➝ 3 ➝ 1: 100,000 operations minimum
Shock Resistance
Operating extremes: 5 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm minimum
Damage limits: 16.7 Hz, amplitude 1.5 mm minimum
Applicable Wire 0.14 to 1.5 mm2
Applicable Cable Outside diameter ø7 to 13 mm
Conduit Size M20 (connector is supplied with the grip switch)
Terminal Screw Tightening Torque 0.5 to 0.6 N·m
HE1G-21SM: IP66 (IEC 60529)
HE1G-20ME: IP65 (IEC 60529)
HE1G-20MB: IP65 (IEC 60529)
HE1G-21SMB: IP65 (IEC 60529)
Conditional Short-circuit Current 50A (250V) (Use 250V/10A fast acting type fuse for short circuit protection.)
HE1G-21SM: 210g
Weight (approx.) HE1G-20ME: 250g
HE1G-20MB: 220g
• HE1G-21SM • HE1G-20ME
Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Position 1 Position 2 Position 3
Terminal No. Terminal No.
1–2 Pressing 1–2
Pressing
5–6 3–4
3–4
Releasing 1–2
Releasing 1–2 3–4

5–6 +
3–4 Emergency Stop Switch: 2NC contact (terminal No. 5-6, 7-8)
• HE1G-21SMB Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 • HE1G-20MB Position 1 Position 2 Position 3

Terminal No. Terminal No.
1–2 Pressing 1–2
Pressing
5–6 3–4
3–4
Releasing 1–2
1–2 3–4
Releasing
5–6 +
3–4 Momentary Pushbutton: 2NO contact (terminal No. 5-6, 7-8)
+
Momentary Pushbutton: 1NO contact (terminal No. 7-8)
: contact ON (closed) : contact OFF (open)

Notes:
• 3-position switches operate with direct opening action when shifting from position 2 to position 3.
• For the output of the enabling device, use terminals 1-2 and 3-4.
• The above operation characteristics show when the center of the button is pressed.
(06/02/17) 333
HE1G Grip Switch
Dimensions
• HE1G-21SM • HE1G-21SM • HE1G-20MB / HE1G-21SMB
69 Emergency Stop Switch

47 54
46 58 46 58 Momentary Pushbutton
54 54
24
9
174
174
174
(86)
(86)
(86)
Connector (supplied with grip switch) Connector (supplied with grip switch) Connector (supplied with grip switch)
Type No.: SKINTOP BS-M20 × 1.5 (LAPP) Type No.: SKINTOP BS-M20 × 1.5 (LAPP) Type No.: SKINTOP BS-M20 × 1.5 (LAPP)
Accessories
• Mounting Bracket (for hanging grip switch) • Rubber Boot Kit (replacement)
50 M5 Holes
(2-ø5.3)
20
Plastic Coating
33
81 86 Material: SUS304
Thickness: t = 3.0 mm
Rubber Boot Material Type No.

Silicon Rubber / yellow HE9Z-GBK1
NBR/PVC Polyblend / gray HE9Z-GBK1-1N
Safety Precautions
• Turn off power before starting installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of HE1G grip switches. Failure to
turn power off may cause electric shock or fire hazard.
• Install the HE1G grip switches according to the instructions on page 335 to achieve strength against operating force. Insuffi-
cient strength and excessive force may damage grip switches, resulting in possible electric shock or fire hazard.
• Use wires of the proper size to meet the voltage and current requirements. Solder the terminal properly according to the
instructions on page 335. Improper soldering may cause overheating, resulting in fire hazard.
334 (06/02/17)
Instructions for Enabling Switch and Grip Switch
Instructions
Installation Instructions HE9Z-GSH51 Grip Switch Housing
HE2B Enabling Switch with Rubber Boot • Recommended Tightening Torque
• The ridge on the bottom of rubber boot serves as a seal, and Parts for tightening Torque
waterproof characteristics are attained when the ridge is tightly A Head and body 1.0 ± 0.2 N·m
pressed to the mounting panel. When the mounting panel is bent B Body and connector 3.0 ± 0.3 N·m
and the ridge cannot be pressed to the panel, add a reinforcing
rib to secure the boot to the mounting panel. C Connectors 3.0 ± 0.3 N·m
• The edge of rubber boot may stick out if excessive force is Note: Recommended connector is used for the tightening torque of B and C.
applied on the rubber boot. When such event is anticipated, it is When using another connector, refer to the tightening torque of the connector
recommended to embed the rubber boot in the mounting panel as used.
shown in the figure below. Head Body Connector
Sealing Ridge
B C
A
Rubber boot embedded HE1G Grip Switch
• Wire Length inside the Grip Switch
Terminal No. 1–4 Terminal No. 5–8
Wire length L1, L2 (mm) L1 = 40 mm L2 = 27 mm
Reinforcing Rib
Wire stripping length L3 (mm) L3 = 6 mm
L3 L1 Connector
HE2B/HE3B/HE5B Enabling Switch with Rubber Boot

• When an enabling switch with rubber boot is mounted in a her- L3 L2 Base
metically-sealed control box, a large change in internal air pres-
sure may cause the rubber boot to inflate and deflate, affecting
the performance of the enabling switch. Check periodically to
make sure that the enabling switch operates correctly.
HE3B Enabling Switch with Rubber Boot Terminal No.
• If the mounting panel is deformed, waterproof characteristics of • Applicable Wire Size in Terminal
the enabling switch with rubber boot cannot be achieved. Keep <Direct wiring>
sufficient strength on the mounting panel.
0.14 to 1.5 mm2 (one wire per terminal)
• The rubber boot has a projection for positioning the enabling
switch onto the mounting panel. To maintain waterproof charac- Note: When using stranded wire, make sure that adjoining terminals
teristics of the switch, do not drill through the anti-rotation hole in are not short-circuited by frayed wires. Also, do not solder the
the mounting panel. When not providing the hole, remove the wires to avoid frayed wires.
anti-rotation projection from the rubber boot. When removing the <Ferrules>
projection, ensure not to make a hole in the rubber boot.
Recommended ferrules (Phoenix Contact)
• Secure the flange part when tightening the locking ring so that the
enabling switch does not rotate. When the enabling switch may Type No. Applicable Wire
rotate during operation, it is recommended to embed the switch in AI 0,5-8 WH 0.34 to 0.5 mm2
the mounting panel as shown below. AI 0,75-8 GY 0.5 to 0.75 mm2
Mounting Panel AI 1,0-8 RD 0.75 to 1.0 mm2
Positioning Projection AI 1,5-8 BK 1.0 to 1.5 mm2
Crimping tool: CRIMPFOX UD6
• Recommended Screw Tightening Torque
Anti-rotation Ring
Locking Ring Parts for Tightening Tightening Torque
A Rubber boot and the base
HE5B Enabling Switch with Rubber Boot (M4 screw × 3)
1.2 ± 0.1 N·m
• If the mounting panel is deformed when mounting an enabling B Connector and grip switch 4.0 ± 0.3 N·m
switch with rubber boot, the normal waterproof characteristics C Connector and connector 4.0 ± 0.3 N·m
cannot be assured. Keep sufficient strength on the mounting
panel. D Terminal screw (M3 screw × 8) 0.5 to 0.6 N·m
• Do not press the rubber boot with excessive pressure in an inap- E Do not remove screws —
propriate direction, otherwise the waterproof function can be The torque of screws B and C in the table above are values when
damaged. the recommended connector is used. When using another connec-
tor, refer to the specifications of the connector used.
Wiring Instructions Rubber
Boot Kit
HE1B/HE2B/HE3B/HE5B Enabling Switch
Base
• Applicable wire size: 0.5 mm2 maximum × 1 pc. B C A (M4 Screw × 3)
E
• Solder the terminal at a temperature of 310 to 350°C within 3 sec-
onds using a soldering iron. Sn-Ag-Cu type is recommended
when using lead-free solder. Base
D
• When soldering, take care not to touch the enabling switch with E
Base
the soldering iron. Also ensure that no tensile force is applied to
the terminal. Do not bend the terminal or apply excessive force to
Rubber
the terminal. Boot Kit
• Use non-corrosive liquid rosin as soldering flux.
(06/02/17) 335
Instructions for Enabling Switch and Grip Switch
Instructions
HE2B/HE3B/HE5B Enabling Switch, HE1G Grip Switch HE1B/HE2B/HE3B/HE5B Enabling Switch
• To achieve a high level of safety, connect the two contacts of • 3-position enabling switches output ON signals in position 2.
the 3-position switch to a disparity detection circuit (e.g., Systems must be designed to enable machine operation
safety relay module) (ISO 13849-1, EN 954-1) when the 3-position enabling switch is in position 2 only.
• Because two contacts are designed to operate independently, • For operation of shifting the enabling switch from position 2
pressing the edge of a button turns on one contact earlier (ON) to position 3 (OFF), make sure that no load larger than
than the other contact, causing a delay in operation. To avoid specified is applied to the operator.
this, always press the center of the button. • For a teach pendants’ shape and structure, perform sufficient
risk assessment to prevent unintended operation of 3-position
enabling switches (e.g., when the teach pendant is designed
with a 3-position enabling switch protruding from the teach
pendant, the switch may be initiated unintentionally if the
teach pendant is placed with the side of enabling switch
down).
• Strong force may be applied to a 3-position enabling switch
when pressed to position 3. For teach pendants, provide suffi-
cient strength to the part where 3-position enabling switches
will be installed.
• Read the operating instructions in the catalog or user’s manual to ensure correct
Safety Precautions operation before starting installation, wiring, operation, maintenance, and inspection
of the HE1B/2B/3B/5B enabling switches and HE1G grip switches.
336 (06/02/17)
RJ/SJ
(06/02/17) 337
Compact and rugged power relays. Large switching capacity.
• Compact housing only 12.7-mm wide.
Large contact rating
RJ1S (1-pole): 12A
RJ2S (2-pole): 8A
• Non-polarized LED indicator available. IDEC’s unique light guide
structure enables high visibility of coil status from any direction.
• Excellent electrical and mechanical life.
Electrical life: 200,000 operations (AC load)
Mechanical life: 30 million operations (AC coil)
• Environmentally friendly, RoHS directive compliant (EU directive
2002/95/EC). Contains no lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent
chromium, PBB or PBDE).
• Diode type
Diode reverse withstand voltage: 1000V
• UL recognized, CSA certified, EN compliant.
Standard Mark Certification Organization / File No.
UL508 UL File No. E55996
CSA C22.2 No. 14 1608322 (LR35144)
VDE (REG.-Nr. B312)

Reg.-Nr. B312
EN61810-1
Types
• Plug-in Terminal Type • Coil Voltage Code ∗
1-pole (SPDT) 2-pole (DPDT) Code Rated Coil Voltage
Type
Type No. Code Type No. Code A24 24V AC
A24 A24 A110 110V AC
A110 A110 A120 120V AC
Standard (with LED Indicator) RJ1S-CL-∗ A120 RJ2S-CL-∗ A120
A220 A220 A220 220V AC
A230 A230 A230 230V AC
A240 A240 A240 240V AC
D12 D12
D12 12V DC
Simple (without LED Indicator) RJ1S-C-∗ D24 RJ2S-C-∗ D24
D48 D48 D24 24V DC
D100 D100 D48 48V DC
With diode (DC coil only) (with LED indicator) D100 100-110V DC
RJ1S-CLD-∗ RJ2S-CLD-∗
A1: –, A2: + Note: Specify a coil voltage code
With diode (DC coil only) D12 D12 in place of ∗ in the Type No.
RJ1S-CD-∗ RJ2S-CD-∗
A1: –, A2: + D24 D24
With diode (DC coil only) (with LED indicator) D48 D48
RJ1S-CLD1-∗ D100 RJ2S-CLD1-∗ D100
A1: +, A2: –
With diode (DC coil only)
RJ1S-CD1-∗ RJ2S-CD1-∗
A1: +, A2: –
Contact Ratings
Allowable Contact Power Rated Load
Inductive Allowable Allowable
No. of Minimum Applicable
Contact Resistive Inductive Resistive Load Switching Switching
Poles Voltage Load (Note)
Load Load Load cos ø = 0.3 Current Voltage
L/R = 7 ms
3000VA AC 1875VA AC 250V AC 12A 7.5A
NO
360W DC 180W DC 30V DC 12A 6A 250V AC 5V DC, 100 mA
1 12A
3000VA AC 1875VA AC 250V AC 12A 7.5A 125V DC (reference value)
NC
180W DC 90W DC 30V DC 6A 3A
2000VA AC 1000VA AC 250V AC 8A 4A
NO
240W DC 120W DC 30V DC 8A 4A 250V AC 5V DC, 10 mA
2 8A
2000VA AC 1000VA AC 250V AC 8A 4A 125V DC (reference value)
NC
120W DC 60W DC 30V DC 4A 2A
Note: Measured at operating frequency of 120 operations per minute (failure rate level P, reference value)
338 (06/02/17)
Approved Ratings
UL CSA VDE
AC-15, DC-13
Resistive Resistive Inductive Resistive
Voltage (Note)
RJ1 RJ2 RJ1 RJ2 RJ1 RJ2 RJ1 RJ2 RJ1 RJ2
NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NC NO NO NO NO
250V AC 12A 12A 8A 8A 12A 12A 8A 8A 7.5A 7.5A 4A 4A 12A 8A 6A 3A
30V DC 12A 6A 8A 4A 12A 6A 8A 4A 6A 3A 4A 2A 12A 8A 2.5A 2A
Note: According to the utilization categories of IEC60947-5-1
Coil Ratings
Without LED Indicator With LED Indicator
(against rated values at 20°C)
Coil
Rated Rated Maximum Power
Rated Voltage Voltage Coil Coil Minimum
Current (mA) Current (mA) Dropout Continuous Consumption
Code Resistance (Ω) Resistance (Ω) Pickup
±15% (at 20°C) ±15% (at 20°C) Voltage Applied Voltage
±10% (at 20°C) ±10% (at 20°C) Voltage
50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz (Note)
24V AC A24 43.9 37.5 243 47.5 41.1 243

110V AC A110 9.6 8.2 5270 9.5 8.1 5270
AC 120V AC A120 8.8 7.5 6400 8.7 7.4 6400 80% 30% Approx.
140%
50/60 Hz 220V AC A220 4.8 4.1 21530 4.8 4.1 21530 maximum minimum 0.9 VA (60Hz)
230V AC A230 4.6 3.9 24100 4.6 3.9 24100
240V AC A240 4.3 3.7 25570 4.3 3.7 25570
12V D12 44.2 271 48.0 271
24V D24 22.1 1080 25.7 1080 70% 10% 170% Approx.
DC
48V D48 11.0 4340 10.7 4340 maximum minimum 0.53W
100-110V D100 5.3-5.8 18870 5.2-5.7 18870 160%
Note: Maximum continuous applied voltage is the maximum voltage that can be applied on relay coils.
Specifications
Type RJ1S RJ2S
Number of Poles 1-pole 2-pole
Contact Configuration SPDT DPDT
Contact Material Silver-nickel alloy
Contact Resistance (initial value) (∗1) 50 mΩ maximum
Operate Time (∗2) 15 ms maximum
Release Time (∗2) 10 ms maximum (with diode: 20 ms maximum)
Between contact and coil 5000V AC, 1 minute 5000V AC, 1 minute
Dielectric
Strength Between contacts of the same pole 1000V AC, 1 minute 1000V AC, 1 minute
Between contacts of different poles — 3000V AC, 1 minute
Vibration Operating extremes 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.75 mm
Resistance Damage limits 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.75 mm
Shock Operating extremes NO contact: 200 m/s2, NC contact: 100 m/s2
Resistance Damage limits 1000 m/s2
AC load: 200,000 operations minimum (operation frequency 1800 operations per hour)
Electrical Life (rated load) DC load: 100,000 operations minimum (operation frequency 1800 operations per hour)
Mechanical Life (no load) AC coil: 30,000,000 operations minimum (operation frequency 18,000 operations per hour)
DC coil: 50,000,000 operations minimum (operation frequency 18,000 operations per hour)
Operating Temperature (∗3) –40 to +70°C (no freezing)
Weight (approx.) 19g
Note: Above values are initial values.
∗1: Measured using 5V DC, 1A voltage drop method.
∗2: Measured at the rated voltage (at 20°C), excluding contact bounce time.
∗3: 100% rated voltage.
(06/02/17) 339
Dimensions
• RJ1S Type 27.0 • RJ2S-CL Type
28.0
27.0
6.0
5.0
0.5 0.5 0.5 2.6
le
ho
2.6
le
4.8 4.8
ho
3
×
3
31.1
.2
31.1
×
ø1
.8
ø1
4
2
1
1
12.7
12.7
0.5
2
3
5
5
7
28.8 28.8 All dimensions in mm.
Internal Connection Diagrams

• RJ1S-CL-∗∗ Standard Type (w/LED Indicator) • RJ2S-CL-∗∗ Standard Type (w/LED Indicator)
1 1 1 1
(A1) (A1) (A1) (A1)
2(12) 3(11) 4(14) 2(12) 3(11) 4(14)
2(12) 4(11) 3(14) 2(12) 4(11) 3(14)
5 5 8 8
(A2) (A2) (A2) 7(22) 6(21) 5(24) (A2) 7(22) 6(21) 5(24)
Coil voltage 24V AC/DC and below Coil voltage greater than 24V AC/DC Coil voltage 24V AC/DC and below Coil voltage greater than 24V AC/DC
• RJ1S-C-∗∗ Simple Type • RJ2S-C-∗∗ Simple Type

1 1
(A1) (A1)
2(12) 3(11) 4(14)
2(12) 4(11) 3(14)
5 8
(A2) (A2) 7(22) 6(21) 5(24)
• RJ1S-CLD-∗∗ With Diode (w/LED Indicator) • RJ2S-CLD-∗∗ With Diode (w/LED Indicator)
1 1 1 1
(A1) – (A1) – (A1) – (A1) –
2(12) 3(11) 4(14) 2(12) 3(11) 4(14)
2(12) 4(11) 3(14) 2(12) 4(11) 3(14)
5 + 5 + 8 + 8 +
(A2) (A2) (A2) 7(22) 6(21) 5(24) (A2) 7(22) 6(21) 5(24)
Coil voltage 24V DC and below Coil voltage greater than 24V DC Coil voltage 24V DC and below Coil voltage greater than 24V DC
• RJ1S-CD-∗∗ With Diode • RJ2S-CD-∗∗ With Diode

1 1
(A1) – (A1) –
2(12) 3(11) 4(14)
2(12) 4(11) 3(14)

5 + 8 +
(A2) (A2) 7(22) 6(21) 5(24)
• RJ1S-CLD1-∗∗ With Diode (w/LED Indicator) • RJ2S-CLD1-∗∗ With Diode (w/LED Indicator)
1 1 1 1
(A1) + (A1) + (A1) + (A1) +
2(12) 3(11) 4(14) 2(12) 3(11) 4(14)
2(12) 4(11) 3(14) 2(12) 4(11) 3(14) –
5 – 5 – 8 – 8
(A2) (A2) (A2) 7(22) 6(21) 5(24) (A2) 7(22) 6(21) 5(24)
Coil voltage 24V DC and below Coil Voltage greater than 24V DC Coil voltage 24V DC and below Coil voltage greater than 24V DC
• RJ1S-CD1-∗∗ With Diode • RJ2S-CD1-∗∗ With Diode

1 1
(A1) + (A1) +
2(12) 3(11) 4(14)
2(12) 4(11) 3(14)
5 – 8 –
(A2) (A2) 7(22) 6(21) 5(24)
340 (06/02/17)
Electrical Life Curve
• RJ1 (resistive load) • RJ2 (resistive load)
1000 1000
Life (× 10,000 operations)

250V AC Resistive Load 250V AC Resistive Load

100 (NO contact) 100 (NO contact)
10 30V DC Resistive Load 10 30V DC Resistive Load

(NO Contact) (NO Contact)
1 1
0.1 1 12 0.1 1 8
Load Current (A) Load Current (A)
Maximum Switching Capacity

• RJ1 (resistive load) • RJ2 (resistive load)
AC Resistive (NO Contact)

AC Resistive (NO Contact)
12
Load Current (A)

Load Current (A)
10 10
8
1 1
DC Resistive (NO Contact)

DC Resistive (NO Contact)
0.1 0.1
1 10 100 250 1 10 100 250
Load Voltage (V) Load Voltage (V)
Operating Temperature and Coil Temperature Rise

• RJ1
AC Coil (60 Hz) AC Coil (50 Hz) DC Coil
130 130 130
120 120 120
110 110 110
Temperature Rise (°C)
100 100
100
90 90 90
80 80 80
Load Current 12A × 1 pole Load Current 12A × 1 pole
70 70 70
60 60 60 Load Current 12A × 1 pole
50 50 50
40 40 40
30 No Load Current 30 No Load Current 30
20 20 20
10 10 No Load Current
10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C)
• RJ2
AC Coil (60 Hz) AC Coil (50 Hz) DC Coil
130 130 130
120 120 120
110 110 110

100 100 100
90 90 90
80 80 80
Load Current 8A × 2 poles
70 70 Load Current 8A × 2 poles 70
60 60 60
50 50 50 Load Current 8A × 2 poles
40 40 40
30 No Load Current 30 No Load Current 30
20 20 20 No Load Current
10 10 10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
The above temperature rise curves show characteristics when 100% the rated coil voltage is applied.
The slanted dashed line indicates allowable temperature rise for the coil at different ambient temperatures.
(06/02/17) 341
Instructions
Driving Circuit for Relays the release time of the load becomes slightly longer. Check the
operation using the actual load. Incorrect use of a contact protec-
1. To make sure of correct relay operation, apply rated voltage to the
tion circuit will adversely affect switching characteristics. Four typ-
relay coil.
ical examples of contact protection circuits are shown in the
2. Input voltage for the DC coil: following table:
A complete DC voltage is best for the coil power to make sure of This protection circuit can be used when the
stable relay operation. When using a power supply containing a load impedance is smaller than the RC imped-
ripple voltage, suppress the ripple factor within 5%. When power ance in an AC load power circuit.
Power R: Resistor of approximately the same resis-
is supplied through a rectification circuit, the relay operating char- C R
Ind. Load
tance value as the load
acteristics, such as pickup voltage and dropout voltage, depend C: 0.1 to 1 µF
on the ripple factor. Connect a smoothing capacitor for better
RC
operating characteristics as shown below. This protection circuit can be used for both AC
and DC load power circuits.
Pulsation R: Resistor of approximately the same resis-
C
Power Ind. Load tance value as the load
R
C: 0.1 to 1 µF
Smoothing Emin Emax Emean DC
Capacitor
+ This protection circuit can be used for DC load
R Relay Emax – Emin power circuits. Use a diode with the following
– Ripple Factor (%) × 100% +
Diode
Emean ratings.
Emax = Maximum of pulsating current Power D Ind. Load
Reverse withstand voltage:
Emin = Minimum of pulsating current Power voltage of the load circuit × 10
Emean = DC mean value – Forward current:
More than the load current
3. Operating the relay in synchronism with AC load:
This protection circuit can be used for both AC
If the relay operates in synchronism with the AC power voltage of Varistor and DC load power circuits.
the load, the relay life may be reduced. If this is the case, select a For a best result, when using on a power voltage
Varistor
of 24 to 48V AC/DC, connect a varistor across
relay in consideration of the required reliability for the load. Or, Power Ind. Load
the load. When using on a power voltage of 100
make the relay turn on and off irrespective of the AC power phase to 240V AC/DC, connect a varistor across the
or near the point where the AC phase crosses zero voltage. contacts.
TE
R 3. Do not use a contact protection circuit as shown below:
Load EAC
EAC This protection circuit is very effective in arc suppression
Vin when opening the contacts. But, the capacitor is charged
Vin C
Load while the contacts are opened. When the contacts are
Power closed, the capacitor is discharged through the contacts,
increasing the possibility of contact welding.
4. Leakage current while relay is off:
When driving an element at the same time as the relay operation, This protection circuit is very effective in arc suppression
a special consideration is needed for the circuit design. As shown C when opening the contacts. But, when the contacts are
Load
in the incorrect circuit below, leakage current (Io) flows through Power
closed, a current flows to charge the capacitor, causing
the relay coil while the relay is off. Leakage current causes the contact welding.
coil release failure or adversely affects the vibration resistance
and shock resistance. Design a circuit as shown in the correct Generally, switching a DC inductive load is more difficult than
example. switching a DC resistive load. Using an appropriate arc suppres-
sor, however, will improve the switching characteristics of a DC
Incorrect Correct
inductive load.
R TE R
Io
Other Precautions
1. General notice:
To maintain the initial characteristics, do not drop the relay or
5. Surge suppression for transistor driving circuits: shock the relay.
When the relay coil is turned off, a high-voltage pulse is gener- The relay cover cannot be removed from the base during normal
ated, causing the transistor to deteriorate and sometimes to operation. To maintain the initial characteristics, do not remove
break. Be sure to connect a diode to suppress the counter elec- the relay cover.
tromotive force. Then, the coil release time becomes slightly Use the relay in environments free from condensation, dust, sul-
longer. To shorten the coil release time, connect a Zener diode fur dioxide (SO2), and hydrogen sulfide (H2S).
between the collector and emitter of the transistor. Select a Zener Make sure that the coil voltage does not exceed the applicable
diode with a Zener voltage slightly higher than the power voltage. coil voltage range.
Counter emf
suppressing diode 2. Connecting outputs to electronic circuits:
+ When the output is connected to a load which responds very
R Relay quickly, such as an electronic circuit, contact bouncing causes
–
incorrect operation of the load. Take the following measures into
consideration.
• Connect an integral circuit.
Protection for Relay Contacts • Suppress the pulse voltage due to bouncing within the noise
margin of the load.
1. The contact ratings show maximum values. Make sure that these
values are not exceeded. When an inrush current flows through 3. UL- and CSA-approved ratings may differ from product rated val-
the load, the contact may become welded. If this is the case, con- ues determined by IDEC.
nect a contact protection circuit, such as a current limiting resis- 4. Do not use relays in the vicinity of strong magnetic field, as this
tor. may affect relay operation.
2. Contact protection circuit:
When switching an inductive load, arcing causes carbides to form
on the contacts, resulting in an increased contact resistance. In
consideration of contact reliability, contact life, and noise suppres-
sion, use of a surge absorbing circuit is recommended. Note that
342 (06/02/17)
Slim, space-saving relay sockets.
Release lever allows for easy maintenance in narrow spaces.
• 15.5-mm wide
• Standard screw terminal and finger-safe screw terminal are
available.
• Degree of protection IP20 (finger-safe screw terminal)
• The release lever makes installation and removal of relays inside
small panels simple and quick.
• RoHS compliant (EU directive 2002/95/EC)
• UL recognized, CSA certified, EN compliant.
Standard Mark Approval organization / File No.
UL508 UL File No. E62437
CSA C22.2 No. 14 166730 (LR84913)

EN60999
(Finger-safe screw terminal only)
Types
Type No.
Type
1-pole 2-pole
Standard Screw Terminal SJ1S-05B SJ2S-05B
Finger-safe Screw Terminal SJ1S-07L SJ2S-07L
Note: Release lever is supplied with each socket.
Specifications
Type SJ1S SJ2S
Rated Current 12A 8A
Rated Insulation Voltage 250V AC/DC
Applicable Wire 2 mm2 maximum (14 AWG)
Applicable Crimping Terminal 2 mm2 × 2
Recommended Tightening Torque 0.6 to 1.0 N·m (maximum tightening torque: 1.2 N·m)
Screw Terminal Style M3 slotted Phillips screw
Terminal Strength Wire tensile strength: 50N minimum
Between live and dead metal parts: 2000V AC, 1 minute
Dielectric Strength Between contact and coil: 4000V AC, 1 minute
Between contacts of the same pole: 1000V AC, 1 minute
Resonance: 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.75 mm
Shock Resistance Damage limits: 1000 m/s2
Degree of Protection IP20 (finger-safe screw terminal)
Weight (approx.) 30g 34g
Applicable Crimping Terminals

Standard Screw Terminal Finger-safe Screw Terminal
ø3.2 min.
5.9 max.
5.9 max.
3.2 min.
4.0 max. 5.3 min.

3.2 min.
5.9 max.
4.0 max. 5.3 to 6.5
4.0 max. 5.3 to 6.5 All dimensions in mm.

Note: Ring tongue terminals cannot be used on finger-safe sockets.
(06/02/17) 343
Dimensions
• SJ1S-05B M3 Terminal Screws • SJ2S-05B M3 Teminal Screws
6
15.5
15.5
55.7
55.7
29.7
29.7
4.3 71 ø4 4.3 71 ø4
2
2
5 (A2) 3 (14) (22) (24)
8 7 5 6
(A2) (21)
(A1)
(A1) (11)
1 2 4 1 2 4 3
(12) (11) (12) (14)
(TOP VIEW) (TOP VIEW)
• SJ1S-07L M3 Teminal Screws • SJ2S-07L M3 Terminal Screws
ø5.6 ø5.6
15.5
15.5
55.7
55.7
49.5
49.5
35.5
35.5
29.7
29.7
21.5
21.5
4.3 71 ø3 4.3 71 ø3
2
2
(A2) (21)
5 (A2) 3 (11) 4 8 5 7 6
(14) (24) (22)
(14) (12)
1 (A1) 2 (12) 1 4 2 3
(A1) (11)
(TOP VIEW) (TOP VIEW)
Replacement Parts
Description Appearance Material Type No. Ordering Type No. Package Quantity
Release Lever Plastic (gray) SJ9Z-C1 SJ9Z-C1PN05 5
Accessories
Ordering Package
Description Appearance Material Type No. Note
Type No. Quantity
Aluminum
BAA1000 BAA1000PN10
Weight: Approx. 200 g
Length: 1 m
DIN Rail
Width: 35 mm
Steel
BAP1000 BAP1000PN10
Weight: Approx. 200 g
10
BNL5 BNL5PN10 Used on a DIN rail to
fasten relay sockets.
Metal (zinc plated steel)
Mounting Clip To prevent the sockets
Weight: Approx.15 g from damage, position
BNL6 BNL6PN10 the clip before fastening.
Thickness: 5 mm
Used for adjusting spac-
DIN Rail Spacer Plastic (black) SA-406B SA-406B 1
ing between sockets
mounted on a DIN rail
344 (06/02/17)
Instructions
Installing relays Caution
1. Unlock the release lever by pulling down as shown with arrow When the release lever prevents the socket from being mounted
➀. on the panel directly, remove the release lever as instructed
2. Press relay against the socket as shown with arrow ➁. Make below. Ensure to reinstall the release lever after completing
sure that the relay is firmly in place. panel mounting.
3. Confirm that the relay is securely installed in the socket.
When installed properly, the relay and the socket look as Removing the release lever
shown in ➂. • Pull down the release lever to the
direction shown by the arrow until it
touches the socket. Pull down fur-
ther, and the lever will be detached
from the socket.
Caution
• Make sure that the relay has been
➁ removed from the socket before
removing the release lever. If the release lever is removed
when the relay is installed on the socket, the relay may fall out.
➀ Installing the release lever
Latch is inserted into the The latch is not inserted into 1. Attach part A to part B.
groove on top of the relay. the groove on top of the relay.
2. Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow until part A
runs out of part B.
➂ 3. Rotate the release lever, with the center of rotation at part C
until part A touches the rotation axis.
Correct Incorrect
4. Push the rib of the release lever against the socket.
5. Complete the installation.
1. 2. 3.
Caution
• Ensure that the relay is installed in the socket completely.
When installed loosely, the relay may fall out, resulting in pos-
sible damage to the relay. Rotation Axis
Part B
Removing the relay Part C
Part A
• Pull down the release lever until the relay pops out of the
socket. When removing, prevent the relay from falling out by Rib
lightly pressing the relay as shown below. 5.
4.
Rib
Applicable Screwdriver
• Standard Screw Terminal Type
Phillips: ø6.4 mm maximum
Caution Slotted: Shown at right Diameter:
ø6.0 mm max.
• The release lever is removable. Do not apply excessive force,
otherwise the lever is removed from the socket causing the 0.8 mm max. 6.0 mm max.
relay to fall out. • Finger-safe Screw Terminal Type
• When removing, take care that your finger is not caught Phillips: ø5.5 mm maximum
between the release lever and the socket. Diameter:
Slotted: Shown at right ø5.5 mm max.
Panel mounting 0.8 mm max. 5.5 mm max.
• Insert the anti-rotation projection into the anti-rotation hole.
Mount the socket onto the panel using M3 screws (not pro-
vided). Use a screwdriver with diameter of ø5.5 mm maxi- Safety Precautions
mum.
Mounting Hole Layout • Turn off power to the relay and the socket before starting
(SJ1S-05B, SJ2S-05B) Screw Hole ø5.6 mm installation, removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of
the relays. Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shock
ø3.5 hole 30.0 ±0.1 ø4.2 hole
(or M3 hole) (anti-rotation hole) or fire hazard.
• Observe specifications and rated values, otherwise electrical
shock or fire hazard may be caused.
(SJ1S-07L, SJ2S-07L)
ø3.5 hole 39.5 ±0.1 ø3.2 hole
• Use wires of the proper size to meet the voltage and current
(or M3 hole) (anti-rotation hole) requirements. Tighten the terminal screws on the relay socket
to the proper tightening torque.
Anti-rotation Projection
(06/02/17) 345
346 (06/02/17)
Relays
Sockets
RU/RR/RH/RM/RY
& Latch Relays
(06/02/17) 347
Relay Selection Guide
Category Universal Relay Power Relay
Type RU RR
• DPDT, 10A contact • 4PDT, 6A contact • 4PDT, 3A contact • SPDT, 10A contact
General
• Miniature size • Miniature size • Bifurcated contact type • Heavy duty power relay
Appearance
Pin Terminal — — — —
Type No.
Blade Terminal RU2S RU4S RU42S RR1BA-U
PC Board Terminal RU2V RU4V RU42V —
Contact Configuration DPDT 4PDT 4PDT SPDT
Contact Material Silver alloy Gold-clad silver Gold-clad silver-nickel Silver
20
≈ 10A 10A
10
8
Contact Maximum Capacity (A) 6A
6
4 3A
110V AC, 10A

Rated Load 250V AC, 10A 250V AC, 3A 250V AC, 3A
220V AC, 7.5A
(resistive load) 30V DC, 10A 30V DC, 3A 30V DC, 3A
30V DC, 10A
24, 100 (100-110), 110

24, 100 (100-110), 110 (110-120), 200 (200-220), (110-120), 200 (200-220), 6, 12, 24, 50, 100, 110, 115, 120,
Rated Voltage 220 (220-240)V AC 220 (220-240)V AC 200, 220, 230, 240V AC
6, 12, 24, 48, 110V DC 6, 12, 24, 48, 100, 110V 6, 12, 24, 48, 110V DC
DC
Coil
Power Consumption 1.2 VA (60Hz) 2.5 VA (60Hz)
(approx.) 1W 1.5W
Pickup Voltage
AC: 80% max., DC: 80% max. AC: 80% max., DC: 80% max.
(against rated values)
Dropout Voltage
AC: 30% min., DC: 10% min. AC: 30% min., DC: 15% min.
Contact Resistance ∗1 50 mΩ max. 30 mΩ max.
Operate Time ∗2 20 ms max. 25 ms max.
Release Time ∗2 20 ms max. 25 ms max.
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. (500V DC megger) 100 MΩ min. (500V DC megger)
AC type: 50,000,000 operations min.
Mechanical 50,000,000 operations min. 10,000,000 operations min.
Life DC type: 100,000,000 operations min.
Electrical 100,000 operations min. 200,000 operations min. 100,000 operations min. 200,000 operations min.
Dielectric Between contact and coil 2500V AC, 1 minute 2000V AC, 1 minute
Strength
Between same-pole contacts 1000V AC, 1 minute 1000V AC, 1 minute
Operating Temperature Simple type: –55 to +70°C, Others: –55 to +60°C (no freezing) –25 to +40°C (no freezing)
Operating Humidity 5 to 85% RH (no condensation) 5 to 85% RH (no condensation)
SU2S-11L, SM2S-05A,
SU4S-11L, SY4S-05A, SY4S-05C, SY4S-05D,
DIN rail mount SM2S-05C, SM2S-05D, SR3B-05
SY4S-05DF
SM2S-05DF
Applicable
Sockets
Panel mount SM2S-51 SY4S-51 SR3B-51
PC board mount SM2S-61 SY4S-61 —

Dimensions (H × W × D mm) 35 × 21 × 27.5 47.5 × 36 × 36
Weight (approx.) 35g 82g
Approvals UL, c-UL, TÜV, CE UL, CSA
See Page 354 361
Note: The above table shows initial values.
∗1: Measured using 5V DC, 1A voltage drop method
∗2: Mearured at the rated voltage (25°C)
348 (06/02/17)
Power Relay Power Relay
RR RH
• DPDT, 3PDT; 10A contact • SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT; 10A contact
• Heavy duty power relay • Miniature size
RR3P-U
RR2P-U — — — —
RR3PA-U
RR2BA-U RR3B-U RH1B-U RH2B-U RH3B-U RH4B-U
— — RH1V2-U RH2V2-U RH3V2-U RH4V2-U
DPDT 3PDT SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT
Silver Silver cadmium oxide
10A 10A
110V AC, 10A

220V AC, 7.5A 110V AC/30V DC, 10A 110V AC/30V DC, 10A
30V DC, 10A 220V AC, 7A 220V AC, 7.5A
6, 12, 24, 50, 100-110,

6, 12, 24, 50, 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230, 6, 12, 24, 50, 100, 110, 115,
110-120, 200-220, 6, 12, 24, 50, 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230, 240V AC
240V AC 120, 200, 220, 230, 240V AC
220-240V AC 6, 12, 24, 48, 100, 110V DC
6, 12, 24, 48, 110V DC 6, 12, 24, 48, 100, 110V DC
6, 12, 24, 48, 100-110V DC
2.5 VA (60Hz) 1 VA (60Hz) 1.2 VA (60Hz) 1.7 VA (60Hz) 2 VA (60Hz)

1.5W 0.8W 0.9W 1.5W 1.5W
30 mΩ max. 50 mΩ max.
25 ms max. 20 ms max. 25 ms max.
25 ms max. 20 ms max. 25 ms max.
100 MΩ min. (500V DC megger) 100 MΩ min. (500V DC megger)
10,000,000 operations min. 50,000,000 operations min.
200,000 operations min. 200,000 operations min. 500,000 operations min. 200,000 operations min.
Pin terminal: 1500V AC, 1 minute
2000V AC, 1 minute
Blade terminal: 2000V AC, 1 minute
1000V AC, 1 minute 1000V AC, 1 minute
–25 to +40°C (no freezing) –25 to +50°C (no freezing) –25 to +40°C (no freezing)
5 to 85% RH (no condensation) 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
SR2P-05A, SR2P-06A, SH2B-05A
SR3P-05A, SR3P-06A, SH1B-05A SH3B-05A SH4B-05A
SR2P-05C SH2B-05C
SR3P-05C SH1B-05C SH3B-05C SH4B-05C
SR3B-05 SH2B-05D
SR2P-511, SR2P-70 SR3P-511, SR3P-70
SH1B-51 SH2B-51 SH3B-51 SH4B-51
SR3B-51 SR3B-51
— — SH1B-62 SH2B-62 SH3B-62 SH4B-62
55.5 × 29 × 36 55.5 × 36 × 36 35.6 × 14 × 27.5 35.6 × 21 × 27.5 35.6 × 31 × 27.5 35.6 × 41 × 27.5
90g (pin terminal) 96g (pin terminal) 24g 37g 50g 74g
UL, CSA, TÜV, CE UL, CSA, TÜV, CE
361 365
(06/02/17) 349
Category Miniature Relay Miniature Relay
Type RM RY
• DPDT, 5A contact • DPDT, 4PDT; 3A or 5A contact

General
• Miniature lightweight relay • 1A bifurcated contact also available
Appearance
Pin Terminal —
Type No. Blade Terminal RM2S-U RY2S-U RY4S-U RY22S-U
PC Board Terminal RM2V-U RY2V-U RY4V-U RY22V-U
DPDT
Contact Configuration DPDT DPDT 4PDT
(bifurcated)
Contact Material Silver Gold-clad silver Silver palladium
20
≈
10
8
Contact Maximum Capacity (A)
6 5A 5A
4 3A
2 1A
110V AC, 5A
Rated Load 110V AC/30V DC, 3A 240V AC, 5A 110V AC/30V DC, 1A
220V AC, 5A
(resistive load) 220V AC, 3A 30V DC, 5A 220V AC, 0.8A
30V DC, 5A
DPDT: 6, 12, 24, 50, 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230, 240V AC
6, 12, 24, 50, 100-110, 200-220,
6, 12, 24, 48, 100, 110V DC
Rated Voltage 220-240V AC
4PDT: 6, 12, 24, 50, 100-110, 110-120, 200-220, 220-240V AC
6, 12, 24, 48, 100-110V DC
6, 12, 24, 48, 100-110V DC
Coil Power Consumption 1.2 VA (60Hz) 1 VA (60Hz) 1.2 VA (60Hz) 1 VA (60Hz)

(approx.) 0.9W 0.8W 0.9W 0.8W
Pickup Voltage
Dropout Voltage
Contact Resistance ∗1 30 mΩ max. 50 mΩ max. 100 mΩ max.
Operate Time ∗2 20 ms min. 20 ms min.
Release Time ∗2 20 ms min. 20 ms min.
Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ min. (500V DC megger) 100 MΩ min. (500V DC megger)
Mechanical 50,000,000 operations min. 50,000,000 operations min.
Life • 100,000 operations min.

Electrical 500,000 operations min. 200,000 operations min. • 200,000 operations min. 200,000 operations min.
(220V AC, 3A)
Dielectric Between contact and coil 2000V AC, 1 minute 1500V AC, 1 minute 2000V AC, 1 minute 1500V AC, 1 minute
Strength Between same-pole contacts 1000V AC, 1 minute 1000V AC, 1 minute
Operating Temperature –25 to +50°C (no freezing) –25 to +55°C (no freezing)
Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation) 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
SM2S-05A SM2S-05DF SY4S-05A SY4S-05DF
SY2S-05A SY2S-05A
DIN rail mount SM2S-05C SY4S-05C
SY2S-05C SY2S-05C
SM2S-05D SY4S-05D
Applicable
Sockets Panel mount SM2S-51 SY2S-51 SY4S-51 SY2S-51
SM2S-61 SY4S-61
PC board mount SY2S-61 SY2S-61
SM2S-62 SY4S-62
Dimensions (H × W × D mm) 35.6 × 21 × 27.5 35.6 × 14 × 27.5 35.6 × 21 × 27.5 35.6 × 14 × 27.5
Weight (approx.) 35g 23g 34g 23g
Approvals UL, CSA, TÜV, CE UL, CSA, TÜV, CE
See Page 372 375
Note: The above table shows initial values.
∗2: Mearured at the rated voltage (25°C)
350 (06/02/17)
Latch Relay
RR2KP RH2L RY2KS
• DPDT; 10A contact
• DPDT; 10A contact • DPDT; 3A contact
• Midget power latch relay
• Dual coil latch relay • Dual coil latch relay
• With a mechanical operation indicator
RR2KP-U — —
— RH2LB-U RY2KS-U
— RH2LV2-U —
DPDT DPDT DPDT
Silver Silver cadmium oxide Gold-plated silver
10A 10A
3A
110V AC/10A, 220V AC/7.5A 110V AC/10A, 220V AC/7.5A 110/220V AC, 3A
30V DC, 3A
30V DC/10A, 100V DC/0.5A 30V DC/10A 100V DC, 0.2A
6, 12, 24, 50, 100, 110, 115, 120, 200, 220, 230,
6, 12, 24, 50, 100, 120V AC 6, 12, 24, 50, 100, 120V AC
240V AC
6, 12, 24V DC 6, 12, 24, 48, 100, 110V DC
6, 12, 24, 48, 110V DC
2.2 VA (60Hz) Set coil: 1.2 VA (60Hz), 2W 1.5 VA (60Hz)

1.5W Reset coil: 0.5 VA (60Hz), 0.9W 1.2W
Set voltage: 80% max. Set voltage: 80% max. Set voltage: 80% max.
Reset voltage: 80% max. Reset voltage: 80% max. Reset voltage: 80% max.
30 mΩ max. 50 mΩ max. 50 mΩ max.

Set time: 30 ms max. (AC)
Set time: 20 ms max. Set time: 25 ms max.
20 ms max. (DC)
Reset time: 30 ms max. (AC)
Reset time: 20 ms max. Reset time: 25 ms max.
20 ms max. (DC)
100 MΩ min. (500V DC megger) 100 MΩ min. (500V DC megger) 100 MΩ min. (500V DC megger)
5,000,000 operations min. 10,000,000 operations min. 5,000,000 operations min.
500,000 operations min. 200,000 operations min. 200,000 operations min.
1500V AC, 1 minute 2000V AC, 1 minute 1500V AC, 1 minute

–5 to +40°C (no freezing) –5 to +40°C (no freezing) –5 to +40°C (no freezing)
45 to 85% RH (no condensation) 45 to 85% RH (no condensation) 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
SR3P-05A
SH3B-05A SY4S-05A
SR3P-05C
SH3B-05C SY4S-05C
SR3P-06A
SR3P-511
SH3B-51 SY4S-51
SR3P-70
SY4S-61
— SH3B-62
SY4S-62
80.5 × 36 × 36 35.6 × 31 × 27.5 55.3 × 21 × 27.5
170g 50g 67g
UL, CSA UL, CSA UL, CSA
380 382 384
(06/02/17) 351
Driving Circuit for Relays Protection for Relay Contacts
1. To make sure of correct relay operation, apply rated volt- 1. The contact ratings show maximum values. Make sure
age to the relay coil. that these values are not exceeded. When an inrush cur-
rent flows through the load, the contact may become
2. Input voltage for the DC coil:
welded. If this is the case, connect a contact protection cir-
A complete DC voltage is best for the coil power to make cuit, such as a current limiting resistor.
sure of stable relay operation. When using a power supply
containing a ripple voltage, suppress the ripple factor 2. Contact protection circuit:
within 5%. When power is supplied through a rectification When switching an inductive load, arcing causes carbides
circuit, the relay operating characteristics, such as pickup to form on the contacts, resulting in an increased contact
voltage and dropout voltage, depend on the ripple factor. resistance. In consideration of contact reliability, contact
Connect a smoothing capacitor for better operating char- life, and noise suppression, use of a surge absorbing cir-
acteristics as shown below. cuit is recommended. Note that the release time of the
Pulsation load becomes slightly longer. Check the operation using
Smoothing
capacitor the actual load. Incorrect use of a contact protection circuit
+ will adversely affect switching characteristics. Four typical
R Relay Emin Emax Emean DC
– examples of contact protection circuits are shown in the
Emax – Emin
following table:
Ripple factor (%) = ×100%
Emean This protection circuit can be used
Emax = Maximum of pulsating current when the load impedance is smaller
Emin = Minimum of pulsating current
than the RC impedance in an AC load
Emean = DC mean value
Power Ind. Load
power circuit.
C R R: Resistor of approximately the same
3. Operating the relay in synchronism with AC load:
resistance value as the load
RC
If the relay operates in synchronism with the AC power C: 0.1 to 1 µF

voltage of the load, the relay life may be reduced. If this is
This protection circuit can be used for
the case, select a relay in consideration of the required both AC and DC load power circuits.
reliability for the load. Or, make the relay turn on and off C
R: Resistor of approximately the same
Power Ind. Load
irrespective of the AC power phase or near the point R
resistance value as the load
where the AC phase crosses zero voltage. C: 0.1 to 1 µF
TE This protection circuit can be used for

EAC
R DC load power circuits. Use a diode
Load
+ with the following ratings.
Diode
EAC Vin
Vin Power D Ind. Load Reverse withstand voltage:
–
Power voltage of the load circuit × 10
Forward current:
More than the load current
4. Leakage current while relay is off: This protection circuit can be used for
When driving an element at the same time as the relay both AC and DC load power circuits.
operation, a special consideration is needed for the circuit For a best result, when using on a
Varistor
Varistor power voltage of 24 to 48V AC/DC,

design. As shown in the incorrect circuit below, Leakage Power Ind. Load
connect a varistor across the load.
current (Io) flows through the relay coil while the relay is When using on a power voltage of 100
off. Leakage current causes the coil release failure or to 240V AC/DC, connect a varistor
adversely affects the vibration resistance and shock resis- across the contacts.
tance. Design a circuit as shown in the correct example.
3. Do not use a contact protection circuit as shown below:
Incorrect Correct
This protection circuit is very effective in arc sup-
R TE R pression when opening the contacts. But, the capac-
C itor is charged while the contacts are opened. When
Load the contacts are closed, the capacitor is discharged
Io Power
through the contacts, increasing the possibility of
contact welding.
This protection circuit is very effective in arc sup-

5. Surge suppression for transistor driving circuits: C pression when opening the contacts. But, when the
Load
When the relay coil is turned off, a high-voltage pulse is Power contacts are closed, a current flows to charge the
capacitor, causing contact welding.
generated, causing the transistor to deteriorate and some-
times to break. Be sure to connect a diode to suppress the
counter electromotive force. Then, the coil release time Generally, switching a DC inductive load is more difficult
becomes slightly longer. To shorten the coil release time, than switching a DC resistive load. Using an appropriate
connect a Zener diode between the collector and emitter arc suppressor, however, will improve the switching char-
of the transistor. Select a Zener diode with a Zener voltage acteristics of a DC inductive load.
slightly higher than the power voltage.
Soldering
Counter emf
suppressing diode 1. When soldering the relay terminals, use a soldering iron of
+ 30 to 60W, and quickly complete soldering within approxi-
–
R Relay mately 3 seconds.
352 (06/02/17)
Other Precautions 2. Connecting outputs to electronic circuits:
1. General notice: When the output is connected to a load which responds
• To maintain the initial characteristics, do not drop the relay very quickly, such as an electronic circuit, contact bounc-
or shock the relay. ing causes incorrect operation of the load. Take the follow-
ing measures into consideration.
• The relay cover cannot be removed from the base during
normal operation. To maintain the initial characteristics, do • Connect an integral circuit.
not remove the relay cover. • Suppress the pulse voltage due to bouncing within the
• Use the relay in environments free from condensation of noise margin of the load.
dust, sulfur dioxide (SO2), and hydrogen sulfide (H2S). 3. UL- and CSA-approved ratings may differ from product
• Make sure that the coil voltage does not exceed the appli- rated values determined by IDEC.
cable coil voltage range. 4. Do not use relays in the vicinity of strong magnetic field as
this may affect relay operation.
Safety Precautions
• Turn off the power to the relay before starting installation, Precautions for the RU Relays
removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of the • Before operating the latching lever of the RU relay, turn off
relays. Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shock the power to the RU relay. After checking the circuit, return
or fire hazard. the latching lever to the original position.
• Observe specifications and rated values, otherwise electri- • Do not use the latching lever as a switch. The durability of
cal shock or fire hazard may be caused. the latching lever is a minimum of 100 operations.
• Use wires of the proper size to meet the voltage and cur- • When using DC loads on 4PDT relays, apply a positive
rent requirements. Tighten the terminal screws on the voltage to terminals of neighboring poles and a negative
relay socket to the proper tightening torque. voltage to the other terminals of neighboring poles to pre-
• The surge absorbing element on AC relays with RC or DC vent the possibility of short circuits.
relays with diode is provided to absorb the counter electro- • DC type relays with a diode have a polarity in the coil ter-
motive force generated by the coil. When the relay is sub- minals. Apply the DC voltage to the correct terminals.
ject to an excessive external surge voltage, the surge
absorbing element may be damaged. Add another surge
absorbing provision to the relay to prevent damage.
(06/02/17) 353
RU Series Universal Relays
Full featured universal miniature relays
Designed with environment taken into consideration
• Two terminal styles: plug-in and PCB mount
• Non-polarized LED indicator available on plug-in relays
• No internal wires, lead-free construction
• Cadmium-free contacts
• Mechanical flag indicator available on plug-in relays
• Manual latching lever with color coding for AC or DC coil
• Snap-on yellow marking plate; optional marking plates are
available in four other colors
• Maximum contact ratings: 10A (RU2), 6A (RU4), 3A (RU42)
• UL, CSA, c-UL, EN compliant
Standard Mark Approval Organization / File No.
UL508
UL/c-UL File No. E66043
CSA C22.2 No. 14
CSA C22.2 No. 14 (CSA mark is printed on bifurcated
contact types only)
TÜV Product Service
EN61810-1
Self declaration
(EC Low Voltage Directive)
With Latching Lever
Mechanical Indicator Latching Lever

The contact position can be confirmed Using the latching lever, operation can be
through the file small windows.
Lever in the Latched Position checked without energizing the coil. The latching
lever is color coded for AC and DC coils.
AC coil: Orange
Marking Plate DC coil: Green
Standard yellow marking plate is easily
replaced with optional marking plates in four In Normal Operation
colors for easy identification of relays.
LED Indicator
Non-polarized green LED indicator is
standard provision for plug-in terminal,
Note: Turn off the power to the relay coil when using
latching lever types
the latching lever. After checking the operation,
return the latching lever in the normal position.
Without Latching Lever

AC/DC Color Marking
For identification of AC or DC coils.
AC coil: Yellow Relay Coil Tape Colors
DC coil: Blue Coil Rated Voltage Tape Color
24V AC White
100 to 110V AC Clear
Mechanical Indicator
110 to 120V AC Blue
200 to 220V AC Black
Marking Plate 220 to 240V AC Red
24V DC Green
LED Indicator 6V DC
Non-polarized green LED indicator 12V DC Voltage marking
is standard provision for plug-in
48V DC on yellow tape
terminal types, except for simple
types. 110V DC
AC Coil DC Coil
354 (06/02/17)
Types
• Single Contact Type
Type No.
Termination Latching Lever Type Coil Voltage Code ∗
DPDT 4PDT
A24, A100, A110, A200, A220
Standard RU2S-∗ RU4S-∗
D6, D12, D24, D48, D110
With RC (AC coil only) RU2S-R-∗ RU4S-R-∗ A100, A110, A200, A220
With Latching Lever
With diode (DC coil only) RU2S-D-∗ RU4S-D-∗ D6, D12, D24, D48, D110
RU2S-D1-∗ RU4S-D1-∗ D24
Reverse polarity coil
Plug-in Terminal
A24, A100, A110, A200, A220
(Note 1) Standard RU2S-C-∗ RU4S-C-∗
D6, D12, D24, D48, D110
With RC (AC coil only) RU2S-CR-∗ RU4S-CR-∗ A100, A110, A200, A220
Without Latching Lever With diode (DC coil only) RU2S-CD-∗ RU4S-CD-∗ D6, D12, D24, D48, D110
RU2S-CD1-∗ RU4S-CD1-∗ D24
Simple (Note 2) RU2S-NF-∗ RU4S-NF-∗ A24, A100, A110, A200, A220
PCB Terminal Without Latching Lever Simple (Note 2) RU2V-NF-∗ RU4V-NF-∗ D6, D12, D24, D48, D110
• Bifurcated Contact Type

Type No.
Termination Latching Lever Type Coil Voltage Code ∗
4PDT
A24, A100, A110, A200, A220
Standard RU42S-∗
D6, D12, D24, D48, D100, D110
With RC (AC coil only) RU42S-R-∗ A100, A110, A200, A220
With Latching Lever
With diode (DC coil only) RU42S-D-∗ D6, D12, D24, D48, D100, D110
RU42S-D1-∗ D24
Plug-in Terminal
A24, A100, A110, A200, A220
(Note 1) Standard RU42S-C-∗
D6, D12, D24, D48, D100, D110
With RC (AC coil only) RU42S-CR-∗ A100, A110, A200, A220
Without Latching Lever With diode (DC coil only) RU42S-CD-∗ D6, D12, D24, D48, D100, D110
RU42S-CD1-∗ D24
Simple (Note 2) RU42S-NF-∗ A24, A100, A110, A200, A220
PCB Terminal Without Latching Lever Simple (Note 2) RU42V-NF-∗ D6, D12, D24, D48, D100, D110
Note 1: Plug-in terminal types, except for simple types, have an LED indicator and a mechanical indicator as standard.
Note 2: Simple types do not have an LED indicator, a mechanical indicator, and a latching lever.
Specify a coil voltage code in place of ∗ in the Type No.
Coil Voltage Code ∗ Coil Rating
A24 24V AC
A100 100-110V AC
A110 110-120V AC
A200 200-220V AC
A220 220-240V AC
D6 6V DC
D12 12V DC
D24 24V DC
D48 48V DC
D100 100V DC
D110 110V DC
Accessory
Name Type No. Ordering Type No. Color Code ∗ Package Quantity
Marking Plate RU9Z-P∗ RU9Z-P∗PN10 A (orange), G (green), S (blue), W (white), Y (yellow) 10
Note: Specify a color code in place of the Type No. When ordering, specify the Ordering Type No.
The marking plate can be removed from the relay by inserting a flat screwdriver under the marking plate.
(06/02/17) 355
Coil Ratings
Coil Rated Current (mA) Operating Characteristics (against rated values at 20°C)
±15% (at 20°C) Coil Resistance (Ω)
Rated Voltage (V) Voltage Maximum Continuous Minimum Pickup
±10% (at 20°C) Dropout Voltage
Code 50 Hz 60 Hz Applied Voltage Voltage
24 A24 49.3 42.5 164
100-110 A100 9.2-11.0 7.8-9.0 3,460
AC 110-120 A110 8.4-10.0 7.1-8.2 4,550 110% 80% maximum 30% minimum
(50/60 Hz)
200-220 A200 4.6-5.5 4.0-4.6 14,080
220-240 A220 4.2-5.0 3.6-4.2 18,230
6 D6 155 40
12 D12 80 160
24 D24 44.7 605
DC 110% 80% maximum 10% minimum
48 D48 18 2,560
100 D100 9.7 10,000
110 D110 8.9 12,100
Note 1: The rated current includes the current draw by the LED indicator.
Note 2: Rated voltage 100V DC is available for the bifurcated contact type only.

Continu- Allowable Contact Power Rated Load Type (Contact) RU2 (DPDT) RU4 (4PDT) RU42 (4PDT)
Voltage
Contact ous Resistive Inductive Res. Ind. Silver Silver-nickel
(V) Contact Material Silver alloy
Current Load Load Load Load (gold clad) (gold clad)
250 AC 10A 5A Contact
2500VA AC 1250VA AC 50 mΩ maximum
DPDT 10A Resistance ∗1
300W DC 150W DC 30 DC 10A 5A
Minimum 24V DC, 5 mA 1V DC, 1 mA 1V DC, 0.1 mA
1500VA AC 600VA AC 250 AC 3A 0.8A Applicable Load ∗2 (reference value)
4PDT 6A 180W DC 90W DC 30 DC 3A 1.5A Operate Time ∗3 20 ms maximum
4PDT 750VA AC 200VA AC 250 AC 3A 0.8A Release Time ∗3 20 ms maximum
3A
bifurcated 90W DC 45W DC 30 DC 3A 1.5A Power AC: 1.1 to 1.4VA (50 Hz), 0.9 to 1.2VA (60 Hz)
Consumption DC: 0.9 to 1.0W
Note 1: On 4PDT relays, the maximum allowable total current of neighboring Insulation
two poles is 6A. At the rated load, make sure that the total current of 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
Resistance
neighboring two poles does not exceed 6A (3A + 3A = 6A). Between contact and coil: 2500V AC, 1 minute
Note 2: Inductive load for the rated load — cos ø = 0.3, L/R = 7 ms Between contacts of different poles:
2500V AC,
• UL and c-UL Ratings Dielectric Strength
1 minute
2000V AC, 1 minute
Resistive General Use Horse Power Rating Between contacts of the same pole:
Voltage
RU2 RU4 RU42 RU2 RU4 RU42 RU2 RU4 RU42 1000V AC, 1 minute
250V AC 10A — 3A — 6A — — 1/10HP — Operating Electrical: 1800 operations/h maximum
Frequency Mechanical: 18,000 operations/h maximum
30V DC 10A 6A 3A — — — — — —
Vibration Damage limits: 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm
Resistance Operating extremes: 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm
• CSA Ratings Damage limits: 1000 m/s2
Shock Resistance
Resistive Operating extremes: 150 m/s2
Voltage
RU42 AC: 50,000,000 operations 50,000,000
Mechanical Life
DC: 100,000,000 operations operations
250V AC 3A
Electrical Life ∗4 See table below
30V DC 3A
Operating Simple types: –55 to +70°C (no freezing)
Temperature ∗5 Others: –55 to +60°C (no freezing)
• TÜV Ratings Operating Humidity 5 to 85% RH (no condensation)
Resistive Inductive Weight Approx. 35g
Voltage
RU2 RU4 RU42 RU2 RU4 RU42
250V AC 10A 6A 3A 5A 0.8A 0.8A
30V DC 10A 6A 3A 5A 1.5A 1.5A
∗2: Measured at operating frequency of 120 operations/min (failure rate level
P, reference value)
∗3: Measured at the rated voltage (at 20°C), excluding contact bouncing;
Surge Suppressor Ratings Release time of AC relays with RC: 25 ms maximum
Type Ratings Release time of DC relays with diode: 40 ms maximum
RC series circuit ∗4: Contact Load and Electrical Life (at ambient temperature 20°C)
AC Coil With RC Inductive Load Electrical Life
R: 20 kΩ, C: 0.033 µF Type Voltage Resistive Load (cos ø = 0.3, L/R = 7 ms) (operations minimum)
Diode reverse voltage: 1000V 10A 5A 100,000
DC Coil With Diode 250V AC
Diode forward current: 1A 5A 2.5A 500,000
RU2 10A 5A 100,000
30V DC
5A 2.5A 500,000
110V DC 0.6A 0.4A 100,000
6 2.6A 50,000
250V AC
3A 0.8A 200,000
6A 2.7A 50,000
RU4 30V DC
3A 1.5A 200,000
0.65A 0.33A 50,000
110V DC
0.33A 0.18A 200,000
250V AC 3A 0.8A 100,000
RU42 30V DC 3A 1.5A 100,000
110V DC 0.44A 0.22A 100,000
∗5: Measured at the rated voltage. Simple types include plug-in terminal sim-
ple types and all PCB terminal types.
356 (06/02/17)
RU2 (DPDT Contact)

• Plug-in Terminal Type • PCB Terminal Type
• LED indicator, mechanical flag indica- • Marking plate is a standard provi-
tor, and marking plate are standard sion.
provisions, except on simple types. • Not provided with an LED indica-
• Available with or without a manual tor, mechanical flag indicator, and
latching lever manual latching lever.
• Simple types have a marking plate.
Photo: RU2S-A100 Photo: RU2V-NF-A100
Dimensions
• RU2S • RU2S-C/RU2S-NF • RU2V
Mechanical Indicator Window Mechanical Indicator Window (RU2S-C only) Marking Plate (yellow)
Marking Plate (yellow) Marking Plate (yellow)
Color Marking
Color Marking AC: Yellow
Latching LED Indicator AC: Yellow LED Indicator DC: Blue
Lever (green) (green)
DC: Blue
AC: Orange (RU2S-C only)
DC: Green
Marking Plate
35.0
Marking Plate Marking Plate Removal Slot
35.0
35.0
Removal Slot Removal Slot
0.5
13.2
0.5 0.8
4.0
0.5 2.6
0.5 2.6 2.6
6.4
6.4
ø1.2 × 2.2 Hole ø1.2 × 2.2 Hole

12
14
12
14
21.0
4
8
4
21.0
21.0
13
13
9
1
27.5
27.5 27.5
Mounting Hole Layout s
ole
7.0 1H
Marking plate removal slot is provided only on one side. 8-ø
Insert a flat screwdriver into the slot to remove the marking plate.
13.2
6.4
4.1 12.7
Internal Connection (Bottom View)

• RU2S-∗∗ Standard • RU2S-∗∗R With RC • RU2S-∗∗D With Diode • RU2S-∗∗D1 With Diode
(1)12 (4)42 (1)12 (4)42 (1)12 (4)42 Reverse Polarity Coil
(1)12 (4)42
(5)14 (8)44 (5)14 (8)44 (5)14 (8)44
(9)11 (12)41 (9)11 (12)41 (9)11 (12)41 (5)14 (8)44
(9)11 (12)41
(13)A1 (14)A2 (13)A1 (14)A2 (13)A1 (14)A2
(13)A1 (14)A2
24V AC/DC or less 24V DC or less

24V DC
(1)12 (4)42 (1)12 (4)42
(5)14 (8)44 (5)14 (8)44 • RU2S-NF-∗∗/RU2V-NF-∗∗

(9)11 (12)41 (9)11 (12)41 (1)12 (4)42
(13)A1 (14)A2 (13)A1 (14)A2 (5)14 (8)44

(9)11 (12)41
Over 24V AC/DC Over 24V DC

(13)A1 (14)A2
Blank or C comes in place of ∗ to represent types with or without a latching lever.
(06/02/17) 357
Electrical Life Curves
• RU2 (Resistive Load) • RU2 (Inductive Load)
250V AC 250V AC/30V DC
30V DC 110V DC
110V DC
1000 1000
(× 10,000 operations)
100 100
10 10
AC: cos ø = 0.3
DC: L/R = 7 ms
1 1
0.1 0.5 1 5 10 0.1 0.5 1 5 10
Maximum Switching Current

• RU2
AC resistive
AC inductive
(cos ø = 0.3)
10
5
Load Current (A)
DC resistive
1
DC inductive
0.1 L/R = 7 ms
10 30 100 250 500

Load Voltage (V)
Ambient Temperature vs. Temperature Rise Curves

• RU2 (AC Coil, 50 Hz) • RU2 (AC Coil, 60 Hz) • RU2 (DC Coil)
120 120 120
110 110 110
100 100 100
90 90 90
Load current
80 10A × 2 poles 80 80
Load current Load current
70 70 10A × 2 poles 70 10A × 2 poles
60 60 60
50 50 50
40 Load current 40 40
5A × 2 poles
30 30 Load current 30 Load current
No load current 5A × 2 poles 5A × 2 poles
20 20 20 No load current
No load current
10 10 10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
The above temperature rise curves show the characteristics when 100% the rated coil voltage is applied.
The heat resistance of the coil is 120°C. The slant dashed line indicates the allowable temperature rise for the coil at different ambient temperatures.
358 (06/02/17)
RU4 (4PDT Contact)

• Plug-in Terminal Type • PCB Terminal Type
• LED indicator, mechanical flag indica- • Marking plate is a standard provi-
tor, and marking plate are standard sion.
provisions, except on simple types. • Not provided with an LED indica-
• Available with or without a manual tor, mechanical flag indicator, and
latching lever manual latching lever.
• Simple types have a marking plate.
(RU4)
(RU42)
Photo: RU42S-A100 Photo: RU4V-NF-D24
Dimensions
• RU4S/RU42S • RU4S-C/RU4S-NF • RU4V/RU42V
Mechanical Indicator Window RU42S-C/RU42S-NF Marking Plate (yellow)
Mechanical Indicator Window
Marking Plate (yellow) (RU4S-C/RU42S-C only)
Marking Plate (yellow) Color Marking
AC: Yellow
Latching LED Indicator
DC: Blue
Lever (green) Color Marking
AC: Orange AC: Yellow LED Indicator
(green)
DC: Green DC: Blue
(RU4S-C/
RU42S-C only)
Marking Plate
Marking Plate
35.0
Removal Slot
35.0
Removal Slot
Marking Plate
0.5
35.0
Removal Slot
3-4.4
0.5
4.0
0.8
0.5 2.6
6.4
2.6
0.5
ø1.2 × 2.2 Hole 2.6
6.4
12
14
4
21.0
21.0
11
3
ø1.2 × 2.2 Hole

12
14
4
8
10
2
21.0
11
3
7
13
1
10
2
13
1
27.5
5
27.5
27.5 Mounting Hole Layout les
Ho
7.0 ø1
Marking plate removal slot is provided only on one side. 14-
Insert a flat screwdriver into the slot to remove the marking plate.
13.2
4.4
6.4
4.1 12.7

• RU4S-∗∗/RU42S-∗∗ • RU4S-∗∗R/RU42S-∗∗R • RU4S-∗∗D/RU42S-∗∗D • RU4S-∗∗D1/RU42S-∗∗D1
Standard With RC With Diode With Diode
(1)12 (2)22 (3)32 (4)42 (1)12 (2)22 (3)32 (4)42 (1)12 (2)22 (3)32 (4)42 Reverse Polarity Coil
(1)12 (2)22 (3)32 (4)42
(5)14 (6)24 (7)34 (8)44 (5)14 (6)24 (7)34 (8)44 (5)14 (6)24 (7)34 (8)44
(9)11 (10)21 (11)31 (12)41 (9)11 (10)21 (11)31 (12)41 (9)11 (10)21 (11)31 (12)41 (5)14 (6)24 (7)34 (8)44
(9)11 (10)21 (11)31 (12)41
(13)A1 (14)A2 (13)A1 (14)A2 (13)A1 (14)A2
(13)A1 (14)A2
24V AC/DC or less 24V DC or less

24V DC
(1)12 (2)22 (3)32 (4)42 (1)12 (2)22 (3)32 (4)42
• RU4S-NF-∗∗/RU4V-NF-∗∗
(5)14 (6)24 (7)34 (8)44 (5)14 (6)24 (7)34 (8)44 RU42S-NF-∗∗/RU42V-NF-∗∗
(9)11 (10)21 (11)31 (12)41 (9)11 (10)21 (11)31 (12)41 (1)12 (2)22 (3)32 (4)42
(13)A1 (14)A2 (13)A1 (14)A2 (5)14 (6)24 (7)34 (8)44

(9)11 (10)21 (11)31 (12)41
Over 24V AC/DC Over 24V DC

(13)A1 (14)A2
Blank or C comes in place of ∗ to represent types with or without a latching lever.
(06/02/17) 359
Electrical Life Curves
250V AC 250V AC
30V DC 30V DC
110V DC 110V DC
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
AC: cos ø = 0.3

DC: L/R = 7 ms
1 1
0.1 0.5 1 3 6 0.1 0.5 1 3 6

250V AC 250V AC
30V DC 30V DC
110V DC 110V DC
100 100
10 10
AC: cos ø = 0.3

DC: L/R = 7 ms
1
1 0.02 0.1 0.5
0.02 0.1 0.5 1 3 6
Load Current (A)
Load Current (A)
Maximum Switching Current

• RU4 (Rated Load) • RU4 (Maximum Load) • RU42
AC resistive AC resistive AC resistive
AC inductive AC inductive AC inductive
(cos ø = 0.3) (cos ø = 0.3) (cos ø = 0.3)
6 6 6
3 3 3
Load Current (A)
Load Current (A)

Load Current (A)
1 1 1
DC resistive DC resistive DC resistive
DC inductive DC inductive
0.1 L/R = 7 ms DC inductive 0.1 L/R = 7 ms
0.1 L/R = 7 ms
10 30 100 250 500 10 30 100 250 500 10 30 100 250 500

Load Voltage (V) Load Voltage (V) Load Voltage (V)
Ambient Temperature vs. Temperature Rise Curves

• RU4/RU42 (AC Coil, 50 Hz) • RU4/RU42 (AC Coil, 60 Hz) • RU4/RU42 (DC Coil)
120 120 120
110 110 110
100 100 100

90 90 90
80 80 80
Load current
70 6A × 2 poles 70 70
Load current Load current
60 60 6A × 2 poles 60 6A × 2 poles
50 50 50
40 Load current 40 40
3A × 4 poles
30 30 Load current 30 Load current
No load current 3A × 4 poles 3A × 4 poles
20 20 20 No load current
No load current
10 10 10
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
The above temperature rise curves show the characteristics when 100% the rated coil voltage is applied.
Load current 6A × 2 poles is for the RU4 types only.
The heat resistance of the coil is 120°C. The slant dashed line indicates the allowable temperature rise for the coil at different ambient temperatures.
360 (06/02/17)
RR Series Power Relays
Heavy-duty power type relays
Large capacity 10A — 1, 2, and 3 poles
• Available in pin and blade terminal styles.
• Options include an indicator, check button for test opera-
tion, and side flange.
• DIN rail, surface, and panel mount sockets are available for
a wide variety of mounting applications.
Types
Type No.
Termination Type Coil Voltage Code ∗
SPDT DPDT 3PDT (Note)
Basic – RR2P-U∗ ★ RR3P-U∗ ★ RR3PA-U∗ ★
With Indicator – RR2P-UL∗ ★ RR3P-UL∗ ★ RR3PA-UL∗ ★
Pin Terminal With Check Button – RR2P-UC∗ ★ RR3P-UC∗ ★ RR3PA-UC∗ ★
AC6, AC12, AC24,
With Indicator and AC50, AC100, AC110,
– RR2P-ULC∗ ★ RR3P-ULC∗ ★ RR3PA-ULC∗ ★
Check Button AC115, AC120,
Basic RR1BA-U∗ RR2BA-U∗ RR3B-U∗ – AC200, AC220,
AC230, AC240,
With Indicator RR1BA-UL∗ RR2BA-UL∗ RR3B-UL∗ –
DC6, DC12, DC24,
Blade With Check Button RR1BA-UC∗ RR2BA-UC∗ RR3B-UC∗ –
DC48, DC110
Terminal With Indicator and
RR1BA-ULC∗ RR2BA-ULC∗ RR3B-ULC∗ –
Check Button
Side Flange Type RR1BA-US∗ RR2BA-US∗ RR3B-US∗ –
Note:
Both RR3P and RR3PA are 3PDT relays and have different terminal Ordering Information
arrangements. See Internal Connection on page 363. When ordering, specify the Type No. and coil voltage code.
Type numbers marked with ★ in the table above are UL-recognized,
CSA-certified, and TÜV-approved. Others are UL-recognized and (Example) RR3P-U AC110
CSA-certified. Type No. Coil Voltage Code
Coil Ratings
Rated Current (mA) ±15% at 20°C
Coil Resistance (Ω) (against rated values at 20°C)
Rated Voltage (V)
±10% at 20°C Max. Continuous Minimum
50Hz 60Hz Dropout Voltage
Applied Voltage Pickup Voltage
6 490 420 4.9
12 245 210 18
24 121 105 79
50 58 50 350
AC (50/60Hz)
100 29 25 1,370
110 27 23 1,680 80% 30%
110%
115 25 21.5 1,800 maximum minimum
120 24 20.5 2,100
200 14.5 12.5 5,740
220 13.3 11.5 7,360
230 12.7 11 7,830
240 12.1 10.5 8,330
6 240 25
12 120 100
80% 15%
DC
24 60 400 110%
maximum minimum
48 30 1,600
110 13 8,460
(06/02/17) 361
Contact Ratings • CSA Ratings
Maximum Contact Capacity Voltage Resistive General use
Allowable Contact Power Rated Load 240V AC 10A 7A
Continuous
Current Resistive Inductive Resistive Inductive 120V AC 10A 7.5A
Voltage
Load Load Load Load
100V DC — 0.5A
110V AC 10A 7.5A
1650VA AC 1100VA AC 30V DC 10A 7.5A
10A 220V AC 7.5A 5A
300W DC 150W DC
30V DC 10A 5A • TÜV Ratings
Note: Inductive load for the rated load — cos ø = 0.3, L/R = 7 ms 240V AC 10A
• UL Ratings 30V DC 10A
Horse Power AC: cos ø = 1.0, DC: L/R = 0 ms
Voltage Resistive General use
Raging
240V AC 10A 7A 1/3 HP
120V AC 10A 7.5A 1/4 HP
30V DC 10A 7A —
Specifications
Contact Resistance ∗1 30 mΩ maximum
Minimum Applicable Load 24V DC, 10 mA; 5V DC, 20 mA (reference value)
Operate Time ∗2 25 ms maximum
Release Time ∗2 25 ms maximum
Power Consumption AC: 3 VA (50 Hz), 2.5 VA (60 Hz)
(approx.) DC: 1.5W
Between live and dead parts: 1500V AC, 1 minute
Between contact and coil: 1500V AC, 1 minute
Pin Terminal
Between contacts of different poles: 1500V AC, 1 minute
Dielectric Strength
Between live and dead parts: 2000V AC, 1 minute
Blade Terminal
Electrical: 1800 operations/h maximum
Operating Frequency
Mechanical: 18,000 operations/h maximum
Shock Resistance
Mechanical Life 10,000,000 operations
Electrical Life 200,000 operations (220V AC, 5A)
Operating Temperature ∗3 –25 to +40°C (no freezing)
Weight (approx.) (Basic type) RR2P: 90g, RR3P/RR3PA: 96g, RR1BA/RR2BA/RR3B: 82g

∗2: Measured at the rated voltage (at 20°C), excluding contact bouncing
∗3: For use under different temperature conditions, refer to Continuous Load Current vs. Operating Temperature Curve.
362 (06/02/17)
• Basic Type
RR2P-U RR3P-U RR3PA-U RR1BA-U RR2BA-U RR3B-U • With Check Button
4 5 6 6
5 7 5 7 2 1 3 1 2 3
Front
3 6 4 8 4 8 5 4 6 4 5 6 Pushbutton
3 9 3 9 7 7 9 7 8 9
2 7
(–) (+) 2 10 2 10 A B A B A B
Contacts can be operat-
(–) (+) (–) (+)
(–) (+) (–) (+) (–) (+)
ed by pressing the check
1 8 1 11 1 11 button. Press the button
quickly to prevent arcing.
• With Indicator (-UL type)

Voltage RR2P RR3P RR3PA RR1BA RR2BA RR3B
4 5 6 6 2 1 3 1 2 3
5 7 5 7
5 4 6 4 5 6
3 6 4 8 4 8
7 7 9 7 8 9
3 9 3 9
Below 100V 2 7
A B A B A B
AC/DC (–) (+) 2 10 2 10
(–) (+) (–) (+) (–) (+) (–) (+) (–) (+)
1 8 1 11 1 11
∗ ∗ ∗ ∗
∗ ∗
4 5 6 6 2 1 3 1 2 3
5 7 5 7
5 4 6 4 5 6
3 6 4 8 4 8
100V AC/DC 3 9 3 9
7 7 9 7 8 9
and above 2 7
(–) (+) 2 10 2 10 A B A B A B
(–) (+) (–) (+) (–) (+) (–) (+) (–) (+)
1 8 1 11 1 11
When the relay is energized, the indicator goes on.

∗ The LED protection diode is not contained in relays for below 100V DC.
Characteristics (Reference Data)

• Maximum Switching Capacity • Electrical Life Curve
10.0 AC Load
AC
resistive 1000
5.0
AC
inductive 500
Load Current (A)
DC resistive
1.0
DC inductive 100
110V AC resistive
0.5
50
220V AC resistive
110V AC inductive
20
220V AC inductive
1 5 10 30 50 100 200 300 10

0.1 0.5 1 5 10
Load Voltage (V) Load Current (A)
• Continuous Load Current vs. Operating Temperature Curve

DC Load
(Basic Type, With Check Button, and Side Flange Type)
1000
500
100
30V DC
90 resistive
Operating Temperature (°C)
80
70 100
DC Coil
60 100V DC resistive
50
50
AC Coil
40 100V DC inductive
20
30 30V DC inductive
10
20 0.01 0.05 0.1 0.5 1 5 10
10 Load Current (A)
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Load Current (A)
(06/02/17) 363
Dimensions
RR2P-U/RR2P-UL • Applicable Socket and Hold-down Spring
Total length from panel surface including relay socket
SR2P-05A: 84.5 (87.5) max., SR2P-511: 63 (68) max. Socket Hold-down
Mounting Style Type No. Spring
SR2P-05A
4 5 SR2B-02F1
DIN Rail Mount Socket SR2P-05C
35.6
3 6
SFA-202
2 7 SR2P-06A
1 8
w/Solder
Panel SR2P-511
Terminals
9.9 28.6
Mount SR3P-01F1
Socket w/Wire Wrap
55.5 max. 13 SR2P-70
Dimensions in the ( )
Terminals
(Photo: RR2P-U) include a hold-down spring.
RR3P-U/RR3P-UL/
RR3PA-U/RR3PA-UL • Applicable Socket and Hold-down Spring
SR3P-05A: 84.5 (87.5) max., SR3P-511: 63 (68) max.
Socket Hold-down
6
5 7 SR3P-05A
SR3B-02F1
4 8 DIN Rail Mount Socket SR3P-05C
SFA-202
35.6
3 9 SR3P-06A
2 10 w/Solder
1 11 Panel SR3P-511
Terminals
9.9
Mount SR3P-01F1
35.6 Socket w/Wire Wrap
55.5 max. SR3P-70
13 Terminals
include a hold-down spring.
(Photo: RR3P-U)
RR1BA-U/RR1BA-UL/
RR2BA-U/RR2BA-UL/
4.7
RR3B-U/RR3B-UL
• Applicable Socket and Hold-down Spring
Socket Hold-down
3.0 × ø2.0 oblong hole
SR3B-02F1
Total length from panel surface including relay socket DIN Rail Mount Socket SR3B-05
SFA-202
SR3B-05: 73 (76) max., SR3B-51: 56 (60) max.
Panel Mount Socket SR3B-51 SR3B-02F1
0.5
1 2 3
4 5 6
36
7 8 9
(Photo: RR3B-U)
A B
36
47.5 max. 7.3
RR1BA-US
63.5
RR2BA-US
RR3B-US 7.3 3.0 × ø2.0 oblong hole
2-ø4.5 Mounting Holes

11.1
16.0
4.2
11.1
63.5
4.7
47.5 max. 16.1

73.5
(Photo: RR3B-US)
0.5
1 2 3
4 5 6
36
7 8 9
A B
36
364 (06/02/17)
RH Series Power Relays
SPDT through 4PDT, 10A contacts
Midget power type relays
The RH series are miniature power relays with a large
capacity. The RH relays feature 10A contact capacity as
large as the RR series and the same size as IDEC’s minia-
ture relays. The compact size saves space.
PRODUCT SERVICE
Types
SPDT DPDT
Termination Type
Type No. Coil Voltage Code ∗ Type No. Coil Voltage Code ∗
Basic RH1B-U∗ ★ RH2B-U∗ ★
With Indicator RH1B-UL∗ ★ AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50, RH2B-UL∗ ★ AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50,
AC100, AC110, AC115, AC120, AC100-110, AC110-120,
With Check Button — RH2B-UC∗ ★ AC200-220, AC220-240
AC200, AC220, AC230, AC240
With Indicator and DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
— RH2B-ULC∗ ★ DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
Check Button DC100, DC110 DC100-110
Top Bracket Mounting RH1B-UT∗ ★ RH2B-UT∗ ★
With Diode DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
Plug-in RH1B-UD∗ ★ RH2B-UD∗ ★
(DC coil only) DC100, DC110
Terminal DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
With Indicator and DC100-110
Diode — — RH2B-ULD∗ ★
(DC coil only)
With Resistor and
Capacitor — — RH2B-R∗
(100V AC and over) AC100-110, AC110-120,
AC200-220, AC220-240
With Indicator and RC
— — RH2B-LR∗
(100V AC and over)
AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50,
AC100, AC110, AC115, AC120, AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50,
AC100-110, AC110-120,
Basic RH1V2-U∗ ★ AC200, AC220, AC230, AC240 RH2V2-U∗ ★
AC200-220, AC220-240
PC Board DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
DC100, DC110 DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
Terminal
DC100-110
With Indicator — — RH2V2-UL∗ ★
With Diode DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48, DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
RH1V2-UD∗ ★ RH2V2-UD∗ ★
(DC coil only) DC100, DC110 DC100-110
Type numbers marked with ★ in the table above are UL-recognized, CSA-certified, and TÜV-approved.
When ordering, specify the Type No. and coil voltage code.
(Example) RH2B-U AC100-110

Type No. Coil Voltage Code
(06/02/17) 365
Types
3PDT 4PDT
Termination Type
Basic RH3B-U∗ ★ RH4B-U∗ ★
With Indicator RH3B-UL∗ ★ AC100, AC110, AC115, RH4B-UL∗ ★ AC100, AC110, AC115,
With Check Button RH3B-UC∗ ★ AC120, AC200, AC220, RH4B-UC∗ ★ AC120, AC200, AC220,
AC230, AC240 AC230, AC240
With Indicator and
RH3B-ULC∗ ★ DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48, RH4B-ULC∗ ★ DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
Check Button
Plug-in DC100, DC110 DC100, DC110
Terminal Top Bracket Mounting RH3B-UT∗ ★ RH4B-UT∗ ★
With Diode
RH3B-D∗ RH4B-UD∗ ★
(DC coil only)
DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48, DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
With Indicator and DC100, DC110 DC100, DC110
Diode RH3B-LD∗ RH4B-LD∗
(DC coil only)
Basic RH3V2-U∗ ★ AC100, AC110, AC115, RH4V2-U∗ ★ AC100, AC110, AC115,
AC120, AC200, AC220, AC120, AC200, AC220,
PC Board AC230, AC240 AC230, AC240
Terminal With Indicator RH3V2-UL∗ ★ DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48, RH4V2-UL∗ ★ DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
DC100, DC110 DC100, DC110
With Diode DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48, DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
RH3V2-D∗ RH4V2-UD∗ ★
(DC coil only) DC100, DC110 DC100, DC110
Type numbers marked with ★ in the table above are UL-recognized, CSA-certified, and TÜV-approved.
(Example) RH3B-U AC110

Coil Ratings
Rated Voltage (V) Rated Current (mA) ±15% at 20°C Coil Resistance (Ω) (against rated values at 20°C)
±10% at 20°C
50Hz 60Hz Max. Continuous Min. Pickup Dropout
SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT
SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT Applied Voltage Voltage Voltage
6 6 6 6 170 240 330 387 150 200 280 330 18.8 9.4 6.4 5.4
12 12 12 12 86 121 165 196 75 100 140 165 76.8 39.3 25.3 21.2
24 24 24 24 42 60.5 81 98 37 50 70 83 300 153 103 84.5
50 50 50 50 20.5 28.9 39.5 47 18 24 34 40 1,280 680 460 340
100 100-110 100 100 10.5 10.3-11.8 20 23.5 9 9.1-10.0 17 20 5,220 3,360 1,940 1,560
AC (50/60Hz)
110 — 110 110 9.6 — 18.1 21.6 8.4 — 15.5 18.2 6,950 — 2,200 1,800 80% 30%
110%
115 110-120 115 115 8.9 9.4-10.8 17.1 20.8 7.8 8.0-9.2 14.8 17.5 7,210 4,290 2,620 1,910 maximum minimum
120 — 120 120 8.6 — 16.4 19.5 7.5 — 14.2 16.5 8,100 — 2,770 2,220
200 200-220 200 200 5.6 5.1-5.9 9.8 11.8 4.9 4.3-5.0 8.5 10 21,442 13,690 8,140 6,360
220 — 220 220 4.7 — 8.8 10.7 4.1 — 7.7 9.1 25,892 — 10,800 7,360
230 220-240 230 230 4.7 4.7-5.4 8.5 10.3 4.1 4.0-4.6 7.4 8.7 26,710 18,820 11,500 8,520
240 — 240 240 4.9 — 8.2 9.8 4.3 — 7.1 8.3 26,710 — 12,100 9,120
SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT
6 6 6 6 128 150 240 250 47 40 25 24
12 12 12 12 64 75 120 125 188 160 100 96
80% 10%
DC
24 24 24 24 32 36.9 60 62 750 650 400 388 110%

maximum minimum
48 48 48 48 18 18.5 30 31 2,660 2,600 1,600 1,550
100 100-110 100 100 10 8.2-9.0 14.5 15 10,000 12,250 6,900 6,670
110 — 110 110 8 — 12.8 15 13,800 — 8,600 7,340
366 (06/02/17)
Contact Ratings • UL Ratings
Maximum Contact Capacity Resistive General use Horse Power Rating
Voltage RH1 RH1 RH1
Allowable Contact Power Rated Load RH3 RH4 RH3 RH4 RH3 RH4
Continuous RH2 RH2 RH2

Type Resistive Inductive Voltage Res. Ind.
Current 240V AC 10A 7.5A 7.5A 7A 6.5A 5A 1/3 HP 1/3 HP
Load Load (V) Load Load
110 AC 10A 7A 120V AC 10A 10A 7.5A 7.5A 1/6 HP 1/6 HP
SPDT 10A
1540VA AC 990VA AC
220 AC 7A 4.5A 30V DC 10A 10A 7A

300W DC 210W DC
30 DC 10A 7A 28V DC 10A
110 AC 10A 7.5A
DPDT 1650VA AC 1100VA AC • CSA Ratings
3PDT 10A 220 AC 7.5A 5A
300W DC 225W DC Horse
4PDT 30 DC 10A 7.5A Resistive General use Power
Voltage Rating
Note: Inductive load for the rated load — cos ø = 0.3, L/R = 7 ms
RH1 RH2 RH3 RH4 RH1 RH2 RH3 RH4 RH1, 2, 3
• TÜV Ratings
240V AC 10A 10A 7.5A 7A 7A 7A 5A 1/3 HP

Voltage RH1 RH2 RH3 RH4
10A 120V AC 10A 10A 10A 10A 7.5A 7.5A 7.5A 1/6 HP
240V AC 10A 7.5A 7.5A
30V DC 10A 10A 10A 10A 30V DC 10A 10A 10A 10A 7A 7.5A
AC: cos ø = 1.0, DC: L/R = 0 ms
Specifications
Contact Material Silver cadmium oxide
Contact Resistance ∗1 50 mΩ maximum
Minimum Applicable Load 24V DC, 30 mA; 5V DC, 100 mA (reference value)
SPDT
20 ms maximum
DPDT
Operate Time ∗2
3PDT
25 ms maximum
4PDT
SPDT
20 ms maximum
DPDT
Release Time ∗2
3PDT
25 ms maximum
4PDT
AC: 1.1 VA (50 Hz), 1 VA (60 Hz)
SPDT
DC: 0.8W
AC: 1.4 VA (50 Hz), 1.2 VA (60 Hz)
DPDT
Power Consumption DC: 0.9W
(approx.) AC: 2 VA (50 Hz), 1.7 VA (60 Hz)
3PDT
DC: 1.5W
AC: 2.5 VA (50 Hz), 2 VA (60 Hz)
4PDT
DC: 1.5W
Between live and dead parts: 2000V AC, 1 minute ∗3
SPDT Between contact and coil: 2000V AC, 1 minute
Dielectric Strength Between live and dead parts: 2000V AC, 1 minute
DPDT
3PDT
4PDT
Operating Frequency
Shock Resistance Operating extremes: 200 m/s2 (SPDT, DPDT)
100 m/s2 (3PDT, 4PDT)
Mechanical Life 50,000,000 operations minimum
DPDT 500,000 operations minimum (110V AC, 1A)
Electrical Life SPDT
3PDT 200,000 operations minimum (110V AC, 1A)
4PDT
SPDT –25 to +50°C (no freezing)
Operating DPDT
Temperature ∗4 3PDT –25 to +40°C (no freezing)
4PDT
Weight (approx.) SPDT: 24g, DPDT: 37g, 3PDT: 50g, 4PDT: 74g

∗2: Measured at the rated voltage (at 20°C), excluding contact bouncing
Release time of relays with diode: 40 ms maximum
∗3: Relays with indicator or diode: 1000V AC, 1 minute
∗4: For use under different temperature conditions, refer to Continuous Load Current vs. Operating Temperature Curve. The operating temperature range of
relays with indicator or doide is –25 to +40°C.
(06/02/17) 367
• Basic Type
SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT • With Check Button
Front
1 1 4 1 2 4 1 2 3 4 Pushbutton
5 5 8 5 6 8 5 6 7 8
9 9 12 9 10 12 9 10 11 12 Contacts can be operated by press-
13 14 13( – ) ( + )14
13 ( – ) ( + )14 13( – ) ( + )14 ing the check button. Press the but-
(–) (+)
ton quickly to prevent arcing.
• With Indicator (-L type)

SPDT 3PDT 4PDT DPDT
When the coil is ener-

1 1 2 4 1 4
1 2 3 4 gized, the indicator
5 5 6 8 5 8
5 6 7 8 goes on.
Below 9 Below
9 10 12 9 10 11 12 9 12 ∗ Relays for below
100V 13 14 13 ( – ) ( + )14 24V 13( – ) ( + )14 100V DC do not contain
(–) (+) 13( – ) ( + )14
AC/DC AC/DC a protection diode
(except DPDT).
∗ ∗ ∗
1 1 2 4 1 2 3 4 1 4
5 5 6 8 5 6 7 8 5 8
100V 9
24V
9 10 12 9 10 11 12 9 12
AC/DC AC/DC
13 14 13( – ) ( + )14
and over (–) (+) 13( – ) ( + )14 and over
13( – ) ( + )14
• With Diode (-D type)

SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT This type contains a diode to
absorb the counter emf generated
when the coil is deenergized. The
1 1 4 1 2 4 1 2 3 4 release time is slightly longer.
5 5 6 7 8
Available for DC coil only.
5 8 5 6 8
9 9 12 9 10 12 9 10 11 12 • Diode Characteristics
13 14 Reverse withstand voltage: 1,000V
13( – ) ( + )14 13 ( – ) ( + )14 13( – ) ( + )14
(–) (+) Forward current: 1A
• With Indicator and Diode (-LD type)

DPDT 3PDT 4PDT This type contains an operation
indicator and a sure absorber,
and has the same height as the
1 4 1 2 4 1 2 3 4
basic type.
5 8 5 6 8 5 6 7 8
Below 9 12 Below 9 10 12 9 10 11 12
24V DC 13( – ) ( + )14 100V DC 13( – ) ( + )14 13( – ) ( + )14
1 4 1 2 4 1 2 3 4
5 8 5 6 8 5 6 7 8
24V DC 9 12 100V DC 9 10 12 9 10 11 12
and over 13( – ) ( + )14 and over 13( – ) ( + )14 13( – ) ( + )14
• With Resistor and Capacitor (-R type) • With Indicator and RC (-LR type)
DPDT This type contains an RC circuit to absorb DPDT This type contains an operation indicator and
the surge voltage generated when the coil is a surge absorber. This type is approx. 17 mm
deenergized. This type is approx. 17 mm 1 4
higher than the basic type.
1 4
higher than the basic type. Available for AC coils of 100V and over.
5 8 5 8
Available for AC coils of 100V and over.
9 12 9 12
R: 120Ω
13(–) (+)14 13(–) (+)14
C: 0.033 µF
368 (06/02/17)
• Maximum Switching Capacity
(RH1) (RH2/RH3/RH4)
10.0 10.0
AC resistive AC resistive
5.0 5.0 AC inductive

AC inductive
Load Current (A)
Load Current (A)

DC resistive
DC resistive
1.0 1.0
DC inductive
0.5 DC inductive 0.5
0.1 0.1
1 5 10 50 100 200 300 1 5 10 50 100 200 300
Load Voltage (V) Load Voltage (V)
• Electrical Life Curve

AC Load DC Load
1000 1000
(RH1) 110V AC resistive (RH1)

500 500
30V DC resistive
100 100
50 50
100V DC resistive
30V DC inductive
20 20
220V AC inductive 220V AC resistive
110V AC inductive 100V DC inductive
10 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(RH2) 1000 (RH2) 1000

110V AC resistive
30V DC resistive
500 500
100 100
50 50 100V DC resistive 30V DC

inductive
220V AC inductive 220V AC resistive
110V AC inductive 100V DC inductive
20 20
10 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(RH3/RH4) 1000 (RH3/RH4) 1000
110V AC resistive
500
30V DC inductive
100 100
50 50
20 220V AC inductive 20 100V DC resistive

220V AC resistive 100V DC inductive
110V AC inductive
10 10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(06/02/17) 369
• Continuous Load Current vs. Operating Temperature Curve (Basic Type, With Check Button, and Top Bracket Mounting Type)
(RH1) Note: The rated voltage is (RH2) Note: The rated voltage is (RH3/RH4) Note: The rated voltage is
applied to the coil. applied to the coil. applied to the coil.
100 100 100
90 90 90

80 80 80
DC Coil
70 70 DC Coil 70
60 60 60
50 AC Coil 50 50 AC/DC Coil
40 AC Coil 40
40
30 30 30
20 20 20
10 10 10
0 0 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Load Current (A) Load Current (A) Load Current (A)
Dimensions
RH1B-U/RH1B-UL/RH1B-UD Total length from panel surface including relay socket • Applicable Socket and Hold-down Spring
SH1B-05A: 61.5 (63.5) max., SH1B-51: 39.6 (41.6) max.
Socket Hold-down
include a hold-down spring. Mounting Style Type No. Spring
SY2S-02F1
4.7 DIN Rail Mount SH1B-05A
ø2.6 hole SFA-101
Socket SH1B-05C
SFA-202
1 Panel Mount
5 SH1B-51 SY4S-51F1
Socket
27.5
9
SFA-301
0.5
(Photo: RH1B-U) 13 14
PC Board Mount SFA-302
SH1B-62
Socket
5.4 14
35.6 max. 6.4
PRODUCT SERVICE
RH2B-U/RH2B-UL/RH2B-UD/RH2B-ULD • Applicable Socket and Hold-down Spring

SH2B-05A: 61.5 (63.5) max., SH2B-51: 39.6 (41.6) max. Socket Hold-down
Dimensions in the ( ) Mounting Style Type No. Spring
SY4S-02F1
SH2B-05A
DIN Rail Mount SFA-101
SH2B-05C
SFA-202
4.7
ø2.6 hole Socket

SH2B-05D SFA-502
1 4
5 8
SY4S-51F1
0.5
27.5
9 12 Panel Mount (SY4S-02F1)

SH2B-51
(Photo: RH2B-U)
13 14 Socket SFA-301
SFA-302
35.6 max. 6.4 21 PC Board Mount SY4S-51F1
SH2B-62
Socket (SY4S-02F1)
PRODUCT SERVICE
Note: (SY4S-02F1) is for the relay with check button.
RH3B-U/RH3B-UL/RH3B-D/RH3B-LD Total length from panel surface including relay socket • Applicable Socket and Hold-down Spring
SH3B-05A: 61.5 (63.5) max., SH3B-51: 39.6 (41.6) max.
Socket Hold-down
SH3B-05F1
DIN Rail Mount SH3B-05A
SFA-101
Socket SH3B-05C
SFA-202
ø2.6 hole
4.7
Panel Mount SY4S-51F1

SH3B-51
Socket (SH3B-05F1)
1 2 4
SH3B-62 SFA-302
(Photo: RH3B-U) 5 6 8 Socket
27.5
0.5
9 10 11
13 14 Note: (SH3B-05F1) is for the relay with check button.
PRODUCT SERVICE
35.6 max. 6.4 31
RH4B-U/RH4B-UL/RH4B-UD/RH4B-LD Total length from panel surface including relay socket • Applicable Socket and Hold-down Spring
SH4B-05A: 61.5 (63.5) max., SH4B-51: 39.6 (41.6) max.
Socket Hold-down
Dimensions in the ( ) Spring
include a hold-down spring. Mounting Style Type No.
SH4B-02F1
4.7
SFA-101
Socket SH4B-05C
SFA-202
SH4B-51
ø2.6 hole Socket (SH4B-02F1)
SH4B-62 SFA-302
(Photo: RH4B-U) 1 2 3 4 Socket
5 6 7 8
27.5
Note 1: Use two SY4S-51F1 hold-down springs for the

0.5
9 10 11 12
13 14 SH4B-51 and SH4B-62 sockets.

Note 2: (SH4B-02F1) is for the relay with check button.
PRODUCT SERVICE
35.6 max. 6.4 41
370 (06/02/17)
RH2B-R/RH2B-LR
Total length from panel surface including relay socket • Applicable Socket and Hold-down Spring
SH2B-05A: 78.3 (80.3) max., SH2B-51: 56.4 (58.4) max.
Socket Hold-down
SFA-202
Socket SH2B-05C
ø2.6 hole
0.5
Panel Mount
SH2B-51 SFA-302
1 4
Socket
5 8
Note: Hold-down spring is not available for mounting
27.5
9 12
13 14
the RH2B-R on a PC board mount socket.
4.7
(Photo: RH2B-R) 52.4 max. 6.4 21
RH1B-UT RH2B-UT
4.7
10
ø2.6 hole
0.5
4.7
ø2.6 hole
4.7
0.5
1
5.9 5
1 4
43.2
27.5
38
5.9
5 8
43.2
27.5
38
13 14
9 12
13 14
6.6
7.25
3.5 2 5.4
4.7
14.5 35.6 max. 6.4 3.5 2
21.5 35.6 max. 6.4
PRODUCT SERVICE
PRODUCT SERVICE
RH3B-UT RH4B-UT
10 10
4.7
10
10
10
3.5 ø2.6 hole
4.7
0.5
4.7
2 3.5
0.5
4.7
ø2.6 hole
1 2 4
5.9
43.2
5 6 8
38
28
1 2 3 4
5.9
9 10 12
5 6 7 8
28
38
44
13 14
9 10 11 12
13 14
7.25
7.25
21.5 2
35.6 max. 6.4 28
31.5 35.6 max. 6.4
PRODUCT SERVICE
42 max. 41.5
PRODUCT SERVICE
RH1V2-U/RH1V2-UD
3-ø2.4 holes
2-ø2 holes
1.5
4.7
2
0.5
7.15
1
5
27.5
12.5
9
0.5
(Photo: RH1V2-U) 13 14 6.6
35.6 max. 4.6 14
PRODUCT SERVICE 4.4
RH2V2-U/RH2V2-UL/ 0.5
8-ø2.4 holes
4.7
RH2V2-UD
7.25
0.5
2
0.5
13.15
7.8
1 4
(Photo: RH2V2-U)
27.5
5 8
9 12
5
13 14
10
2
35.6 max. 4.6 21

14.2
PRODUCT SERVICE
(RH2V2-U)
RH3V2-U/RH3V2-UL/ 11-ø2.4 holes 10 10

RH3V2-D
4.7
2
13.15
1 2 4
7.8
27.5
5 6 8
0.5
9 10 11
(Photo: RH3V2-U) 13 14
7.25
0.5 31
PRODUCT SERVICE
(RH3V2-U) 35.6 max. 4.6
RH4V2-U/RH4V2-UL/ 30
RH4V2-UD 14-ø2.4 holes 10

2
4.7
13.15
7.8
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
27.5
0.5
9 10 11 12
(Photo: RH4V2-U) 13 14
7.25
0.5 41
PRODUCT SERVICE (RH4V2-U) 35.6 max. 4.6
(06/02/17) 371
RM Series Miniature Relays
DPDT contacts (5A)
Plug-in and PC board terminal styles
• Compact miniature size saves space
• Options include indicators and check buttons.
Types
Plug-in Terminal PC Board Terminal
Type
AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50,
Basic RM2S-U∗ ★ RM2V-U∗ ★ AC100-110, AC110-120,
AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50,
AC100-110, AC110-120, AC200-220, AC220-240
With Indicator RM2S-UL∗ ★ AC200-220, AC220-240 RM2V-UL∗ ★ DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48, DC100-110
With Check Button RM2S-UC∗ ★ DC100-110 — —
Top Bracket Mounting Type RM2S-UT∗ ★ — —
With Diode
RM2S-UD∗ ★ — —
(DC coil only) DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
With Indicator and Diode DC100-110
RM2S-ULD∗ ★ — —
(DC coil only)
Type numbers marked with ★ in the table above are U

L-recognized, CSA-certified, and TÜV-approved.
(Example) RM2S-U AC100-110

Coil Ratings
Rated Voltage (V)
±10% at 20°C Max. Continuous
50Hz 60Hz Min. Pickup Voltage Dropout Voltage
Applied Voltage
6 240 200 9.4
12 121 100 39.3
AC (50/60Hz)
24 60.5 50 153
50 28.9 24 680 80% 30%
110%
100-110 10.3-11.8 9.1-10.0 3,360 maximum minimum
110-120 9.4-10.8 8.2-9.2 4,290
200-220 5.1-5.9 4.3-5.0 13,690
220-240 4.7-5.4 4.0-4.6 18,820
6 150 40
12 75 160
80% 10%
DC
24 36.9 650 110%

maximum minimum
48 18.5 2,600
100-110 8.2-9.0 12,250
372 (06/02/17)
Maximum Contact Capacity Contact Material Silver
Allowable Contact Power Rated Load Contact Resistance 30 mΩ maximum ∗1
Continuous Minimum Applicable
Current Resistive Inductive Res. Ind. 24V DC, 10 mA; 5V DC, 20 mA (reference value)
Voltage Load
Load Load Load Load
110V AC 5A 2.5A Operate Time 20 ms maximum ∗2
1100VA AC 440VA AC Release Time 20 ms maximum ∗2
5A 220V AC 5A 2A
150W DC 75W DC Power Consumption AC: 1.4 VA (50 Hz), 1.2 VA (60 Hz)
30V DC 5A 2.5A (approx.) DC: 0.9W
Note: Inductive load for the rated load — cos ø = 0.3, L/R = 7 ms Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
• UL Ratings Between live and dead parts:
2000V AC, 1 minute ∗3
Voltage Resistive General use Between contact and coil: 2000V AC, 1 minute
240V AC 5A 2A Dielectric Strength Between contacts of different poles:
2000V AC, 1 minute
120V AC — 2.5A
Between contacts of the same pole:
100V DC 0.4A — 1000V AC, 1 minute
30V DC 5A — Electrical: 1800 operations/h maximum
Operating Frequency
• CSA Ratings Temperature Rise Coil: 85°C maximum, Contact: 65°C maximum
Voltage Resistive General use Damage limits: 10 to 55 Hz, amplitude 0.5 mm
240V AC 5A 2A Vibration Resistance Operating extremes:
120V AC 5A 2.5A
Shock Resistance
100V DC — 0.4A Operating extremes: 200 m/s2
30V DC 5A 2.5A Mechanical Life 50,000,000 operations
Electrical Life 500,000 operations (220V AC, 5A)
• TÜV Ratings Operating Temperature –25 to +45°C (no freezing) ∗4
240V AC 5A Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation)
30V DC 5A Weight (approx.) 35g
AC: cos ø = 1.0, DC: L/R = 0 ms Note: Above values are initial values.
*1: Measured using 5V DC, 1A voltage drop method
*2: Measured at the rated voltage (at 20°C), excluding contact bouncing
Release time of relays with diode: 40 ms maximum
*3: Relays with indicator or diode: 1000V AC, 1 minute
*4: For use under different temperature conditions, refer to Continuous Load
Current vs. Operating Temperature Curve. The operating temperature
range of relays with indicator or doide is –25 to +40°C.

• Maximum Switching Capacity • Electrical Life Curve
AC Load DC Load
5
AC resistive 110V AC resistive
30V DC resistive
220V AC resistive
Load Current (A)
AC
30V DC inductive
Life ( × 10,000 operations)
inductive 1000 1000
1 DC inductive DC 500 500

resistive
0.5
100 100
50 50
100V DC resistive
110V AC inductive
0.1 100V DC inductive
1 5 10 50 100 200 300 220V AC inductive
Load Voltage (V)
10 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5

(Basic Type, With Check Button, and Top Bracket Mounting Type)
Note: The rated voltage is
100 applied to the coil.
90
80
70 DC Coil
60
50
AC Coil
40
30
20
10
0
1 2 3 4 5
Load Current (A)
(06/02/17) 373
• Basic Type • With Diode (-D type)
• With Check Button
This type contains a diode to absorb the counter emf
1 4 generated when the coil is deenergized. The release
Front 1 4
5 8 Pushbutton time is slightly longer.
9 12
5 8
9 12
• Diode Characteristics
13(–) (+)14 Reverse withstand voltage: 1,000V
Contacts can be operated by press-
13(–) (+)14 Forward current: 1A
ing the check button. Press the but-
• With Indicator (-L type) When the coil is energized, • With Indicator and Diode (-LD type)
Below 24V AC/DC 24V AC/DC and over the indicator goes on. Below 24V DC 24V DC and over
∗ The LED protection diode
1 4 is not contained in DPDT re- 1 4 1 4 This type contains an opera-
1 4 tion indicator and a surge ab-
5 8 lays for below 100V DC. 5 8 5 8
5 8 sorber, and has the same
9 12 9 12 9 12
9 12 height as the basic type.
13(–) (+)14 13(–) 14(+)
13(–) (+)14
∗
13(–) (+)14
∗
Dimensions
• Plug-in Type (Solder Terminal)
RM2S-U/RM2S-UL • Applicable Socket and Hold-down Spring
Total length from the panel surface including relay socket. Socket
RM2S-UD/RM2S-ULD SM2S-05A: 61.5 (63.5) max., SM2S-51: 39.6 (41.6) max.
Hold-down
include a hold-down spring. SY4S-02F1
SM2S-05A
SFA-101
SM2S-05C
2.6
DIN Rail Mount SFA-202

2.2 × ø1.2 hole Socket
SM2S-05D
1 4 SFA-502
5 8 SM2S-05DF
27.5
9 12
0.5

13 14
SM2S-51
(Photo: RM2S-U) Socket (SY4S-02F1)
SFA-301
35.6 max. 6.4 21 SM2S-61 SFA-302
PC Board Mount
Socket SY4S-51F1
PRODUCT SERVICE
SM2S-62
(SY4S-02F1)
• PC Board Terminal Type

RM2V-U/RM2V-UL
0.8
0.5
2.6
8-ø1 hole
4.1
1 4
5 8
(Photo: RM2V-U)
27.5
12.7
9 12
0.5
13 14
6.4
7.15
35.6 max. 4 21 13.2
PRODUCT SERVICE
• Top Bracket Mounting Type (Solder Terminal)

RM2S-UT
13.2
2.6
2.2 × ø1.2 hole

4.1
0.5
1 4
5 8
6.3
43.2
27.5
38
9 12
13 14
6.4
3.5 2
21.5 35.6 max. 6.4
PRODUCT SERVICE
374 (06/02/17)
RY Series Miniature Relays
DPDT (3A) and 4PDT (5A) contacts
Bifurcated contacts are also available
The RY series are general purpose miniature relays with a
3A or 5A contact capacity. A wide variety of terminals styles
and coil voltages meet a wide range of applications.
All 4PDT types have arc barriers.
PRODUCT SERVICE
Types
• Plug-in Terminal Type
DPDT 4PDT
Contact Type
Basic RY2S-U∗ ★ RY4S-U∗ ★
With Indicator RY2S-UL∗ ★ AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50, AC100, RY4S-UL∗ ★ AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50,
AC110, AC115, AC120, AC200, AC100-110, AC110-120,
With Check Button — RY4S-UC∗ ★ AC200-220, AC220-240
AC220, AC230, AC240
With Indicator and
— DC6, DC12, D24, DC48, DC100, RY4S-ULC∗ ★ DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
Check Button DC110 DC100-110
Standard Top Bracket Mounting RY2S-UT∗ ★ RY4S-UT∗ ★
RY2S-UD∗ ★ RY4S-UD∗ ★
DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
With Indicator and DC100-110
Diode — — RY4S-ULD∗ ★
(DC coil only)
Basic RY22S-U∗ ★ AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50, AC100, —
With Indicator RY22S-UL∗ ★ AC110, AC115, AC120, AC200, —
AC220, AC230, AC240 —
Bifurcated Top Bracket Mounting RY22S-UT∗ ★ DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48, —
DC100, DC110
RY22S-UD∗ ★ — —

DPDT 4PDT
Contact Type
AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50, AC100, AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50,
Standard RY2V-U∗ ★ RY4V-U∗ ★
AC110, AC115, AC120, AC200, AC100-110, AC110-120,
AC220, AC230, AC240 AC200-220, AC220-240
Standard With Indicator RY2V-UL∗ ★ DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48, RY4V-UL∗ ★ DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48,
DC100, DC110 DC100-110
RY2V-UD∗ ★ — —
AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50, AC100,
Standard RY22V-U∗ ★ —
AC110, AC115, AC120, AC200,
AC220, AC230, AC240 —
Bifurcated With Indicator RY22V-UL∗ ★ DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48, —
DC100, DC110
RY22V-UD∗ ★ — —
Type numbers marked with ★ in the tables above are
UL-recognized, CSA-certified, and TÜV-approved. Ordering Information
(Example) RY4S-U AC100-110

(06/02/17) 375
Coil Ratings
Rated Current (mA) ±15% at 20°C Coil Resistance (Ω) Operation Characteristics (against rated values at 20°C)
Rated Voltage (V)
50Hz 60Hz ±10% at 20°C Max. Continuous
Min. Pickup Voltage Dropout Voltage
DPDT 4PDT DPDT 4PDT DPDT 4PDT DPDT 4PDT Applied Voltage
6 6 170 240 150 200 18.8 9.4
12 12 86 121 75 100 76.8 39.3
24 24 42 60.5 37 50 300 153
50 50 20.5 28.9 18 24 1,280 680
AC (50/60Hz)
100 100-110 10.5 10.3-11.8 9 9.1-10.0 5,220 3,360

110 — 9.6 — 8.4 — 6,950 — 80% 30%
110%
115 110-120 8.9 9.4-10.8 7.8 8.0-9.2 7,210 4,290 maximum minimum
120 — 8.6 — 7.5 — 8,100 —
200 200-220 5.6 5.1-5.9 4.9 4.3-5.0 21,442 13,690
220 — 4.7 — 4.1 — 25,892 —
230 220-240 4.7 4.7-5.4 4.1 4.0-4.6 26,710 18,820
240 — 4.9 — 4.3 — 26,710 —
DPDT 4PDT DPDT 4PDT DPDT 4PDT
6 6 128 150 47 40
12 12 64 75 188 160
80% 10%
DC
24 24 32 36.9 750 650 110%

maximum minimum
48 48 18 18.5 2,660 2,600
100 100-110 10 8.2-9.0 10,000 12,250
110 — 8 — 13,800 —
Contact Ratings
Maximum Contact Capacity
Continuous
Contact Resistive Inductive Resistive Inductive
Current Voltage
Load Load Load Load
Standard 110V AC 3A 1.5A

660 VA AC 176 VA AC
Contact 3A 220V AC 3A 0.8A
90W DC 45W DC
DPDT 30V DC 3A 1.5A
Standard 240V AC 5A 1.2A
1200 VA AC 288 VA AC
Contact 5A
150W DC 60W DC
4PDT 30V DC 5A 2A
Bifurcated 110V AC 1A 0.5A

176 VA AC 88 VA AC
Contact 1A 220V AC 0.8A 0.4A
30W DC 15W DC
DPDT 30V DC 1A 0.5A
Note: Inductive load for the rated load — cos ø = 0.3, L/R = 7 ms
• UL Ratings (Standard Contact) • CSA Ratings (Standard Contact) • TÜV Ratings (Standard Contact)
Resistive General use Resistive General use Voltage DPDT 4PDT
Voltage Voltage
DPDT 4PDT DPDT 4PDT DPDT 4PDT DPDT 4PDT 240V AC 3A 5A
240V AC 3A 5A 0.8A 5A 240V AC 3A 5A 0.8A 5A 30V DC 3A 5A
120V AC — — 1.5A — 120V AC 3A — 1.5A — AC: cos ø = 1.0, DC: L/R = 0 ms
100V DC 0.2A 0.2A 0.2A 0.2A 100V DC — — 0.2A 0.2A
30V DC 3A 5A 3A 5A 30V DC 3A 5A 1.5A 1.5A
• UL Ratings (Bifurcated Contact) • CSA Ratings (Bifurcated Contact)

Voltage Resistive General use Voltage Resistive General use
240V AC 0.8A 0.4A 240V AC 0.8A 0.4A
120V AC 1A 0.5A 120V AC 1A 0.5A
30V DC 1A 0.5A 30V DC 1A —
376 (06/02/17)
Specifications
Standard Contact Bifurcated Contact
Contact Type
DPDT 4PDT DPDT
Contact Material Gold-plated silver Silver-paradium alloy
Contact Resistance ∗1 50 mΩ maximum 100 mΩ minimum
Minimum Applicable Load 24V DC, 5 mA; 5V DC, 10 mA (reference value) 1V DC, 100 µA (reference value)
Operate Time ∗2 20 ms maximum
Release Time ∗2 20 ms maximum
Power Consumption AC: 1.1 VA (50 Hz), 1 VA (60 Hz) AC: 1.4 VA (50 Hz), 1.2 VA (60 Hz) AC: 1.1 VA (50 Hz), 1 VA (60 Hz)
(approx.) DC: 0.8W DC: 0.9W DC: 0.8W
Between live and dead parts: Between live and dead parts: Between live and dead parts:
1500V AC, 1 minute ∗3 2000V AC, 1 minute 1500V AC, 1 minute ∗3
Between contact and coil: Between contact and coil: Between contact and coil:
Dielectric Strength
Between contacts of different poles: Between contacts of different poles: Between contacts of different poles:
Between contacts of the same pole: Between contacts of the same pole: Between contacts of the same pole:
Operating Frequency
Shock Resistance
Operating extremes: 100 m/s2 (DPDT), 200 m/s2 (4PDT)
Mechanical Life 50,000,000 operations
100,000 operations (220V AC, 5A)
Electrical Life 200,000 operations (220V AC, 3A) 200,000 operations (110V AC, 1A)
200,000 operations (220V AC, 3A)
Operating Temperature ∗4 –25 to +55°C (no freezing) –25 to +55°C (no freezing) ∗5 –25 to +55°C (no freezing)
Weight (approx.) 23g 34g 23g

∗1: Measured using 5V DC, 1A voltage drop method ∗4: For use under different temperature conditions, refer to Continuous Load
∗2: Measured at the rated voltage (at 20°C), excluding contact bouncing Current vs. Operating Temperature Curve.
Release time of relays with diode: 40 ms maximum The operating temperature range of relays with indicator or diode is –25
to +40°C.
∗3: Relays with indicator or diode: 1000V AC, 1 minute
∗5: When the total current of 4 contacts is less than 15A, the operating tem-
perature range is –25 to +70°C.

• Maximum Switching Capacity
(RY22)
(RY2) (RY4) AC resistive
AC inductive 1
AC
5 resistive
5
0.5
3
Load Current (A)
AC resistive 3 AC
Load Current (A)
inductive
Load Current (A)
DC resistive
2
AC
inductive DC resistive DC inductive
1 1
DC inductive DC resistive 0.1
0.5 0.5
DC inductive
0.05
0.3
0.2
0.1
1 5 10 50 100 200 300 1 10 20 30 50 100 200 300
0.01
Load Voltage (V) Load Voltage (V) 1 5 10 50 100 200 300
Load Voltage (V)
(Basic Type, With Check Button, and Top Bracket Mounting Type)
(RY2) Note: The rated voltage is (RY4) 100 Note: The rated voltage is
100
applied to the coil. applied to the coil.
90 90
80 80
DC Coil DC Coil
70 70
60 60
50 AC Coil 50 AC Coil
40 40
30 30
20 20
10 10
0 0
1 2 3 1 2 3
(06/02/17) 377
AC Load (RY22)
(RY2) (RY4)
1000
500
Life ( × 10,000 operations)

1000 1000

110V AC resistive 500 110V AC resistive
500
220V AC resistive
240V AC resistive 220V AC resistive
200
200
100
110V AC inductive
100
100
240V AC inductive 220V AC inductive
50
50
50
20 20 20
110V AC inductive
10 220V AC inductive 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 10
0 1 2 3 1
DC Load (RY22)
(RY2) (RY4) 1000
30V DC resistive

1000 30V DC inductive 1000

500 500
30V DC inductive
200
200 30V DC resistive 100
100 100
30V DC inductive 50
50
50
20 20 20
100V DC resistive 100V DC resistive
100V DC inductive 100V DC inductive
10 10 10
0 5 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 1

• Basic Type • With Check Button • With Indicator and Diode (-LD type)
DPDT 4PDT This type contains an operation indicator and a surge
Front absorber, and has the same height as the basic type.
Pushbutton
1 4 1 2 3 4 4PDT
5 8 5 6 7 8
9 12 9 10 11 12 Contacts can be operated by press- Below 1 2 3 4
ing the check button. Press the but- 24V DC
13 ( – ) ( + )14 13 ( – ) ( + )14 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13(–) (+)14
• With Indicator (-L type)
DPDT 4PDT
When the relay is energized,
Below 1 4 Below 1 2 3 4 the indicator goes on. 24V DC 1 2 3 4
100V 24V
AC/DC
5 8
AC/DC
5 6 7 8
∗ The LED protection diode is and 5 6 7 8
9 12 9 10 11 12 not contained in DPDT relays over 9 10 11 12
13(–) (+)14 13(–) (+)14 for below 100V DC.
13(–) (+)14
∗
100V 1 4 24V 1 2 3 4
AC/DC 5 8 AC/DC 5 6 7 8
and 9 12 and 9 10 11 12
over 13(–) (+)14
over
13(–) (+)14
• With Diode (-D type)

DPDT 4PDT
This type contains a diode to absorb the counter
1 4 1 2 3 4 emf generated when the coil is deenergized.
5 8 5 6 7 8 The release time is slightly longer.
9 12 9 10 11 12 • Diode Characteristics
13(–) (+)14 13(–) (+)14 Reverse withstand voltage: 1,000V
Forward current: 1A
378 (06/02/17)
Dimensions
• Plug-in Terminal Type
RY2S-U/RY2S-UL RY22S-U/RY22S-UL Total length from panel surface including relay socket • Applicable Socket and Hold-down Spring
SY2S-05A: 61.5 (63.5) max., SY2S-51: 39.6 (41.6) max.
RY2S-UD RY22S-UD Socket
3 × ø1.2 oblong hole
Hold-down
SY2S-02F1
DIN Rail Mount SY2S-05A
2.6
SFA-101
Socket SY2S-05C
1
5
4
8
SFA-202
27.5
0.5
9 12
Panel Mount
SY2S-51 SY4S-51F1
13 14
Socket
(Photo: RY2S-U) (Photo: RY22S-U) SFA-301
35.6 max. 5.4 14 SY2S-61
Socket
PRODUCT SERVICE PRODUCT SERVICE
RY4S-U/RY4S-UL/RY4S-UD/RY4S-ULD • Applicable Socket and Hold-down Spring

Socket Hold-down
Total length from the panel surface including relay socket
SY4S-05A: 61.5 (63.5) max., SY4S-51: 39.6 (41.6) max. Mounting Style Type No. Spring
2.2 × ø1.2 oblong hole Dimensions in the ( ) SY4S-02F1
include a hold-down spring. SY4S-05A
SFA-101
DIN Rail Mount SY4S-05C
SFA-202
Socket
SY4S-05D
2.6
SFA-502
(Photo: RY4S-U) SY4S-05DF
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 Panel Mount SY4S-51F1
SY4S-51
27.5
Socket (SY4S-02F1)
0.5
9 10 11 12
PRODUCT SERVICE
13 14
SFA-301
SY4S-61 SFA-302
PC Board Mount
35.6 max. 6.4 21
Socket SY4S-51F1
SY4S-62
(SY4S-02F1)

RY2V-U/RY2V-UL/RY2V-UD RY22V-U/RY22V-UL/RY22V-UD 0.5
2.6
0.8
8-ø1 holes
4.1
1 4
7.15
5 8
27.5
12.7
0.5
9 12
6.4
13 14
(Photo: RY2V-U) (Photo: RY22V-U)
35.6 max. 4 14 4.4

PRODUCT SERVICE PRODUCT SERVICE
0.5
RY4V-U/RY4V-UL
0.8
14-ø1 holes 6.6

2.6
4.1
1 2 3 4
7.15
5 6 7 8
(Photo: RY4V-U)
27.5
0.5
12.7
9 10 11 12
6.4
13 14
PRODUCT SERVICE
35.6 max. 4 21 4.4 4.4

4.4
• Top Bracket Mounting Type (Plug-in Terminal)

RY2S-UT RY22S-UT
4.4
2.6
3 × ø1.2 oblong hole

4.1
0.5
1 4
5 8
6.3
43.2
27.5
38
9 12
13 14
6.4
3.5 2
PRODUCT SERVICE PRODUCT SERVICE 14.5 35.6 max. 5.4
2.6
RY4S-UT
4.4
4.4
4.4

0.5
4.1
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
6.3
43.2
27.5
38
9 10 11 12
13 14
6.4
PRODUCT SERVICE
3.5 2
21.5 35.6 max. 6.4

(06/02/17) 379
RR2KP Series Latch Relays
Self-maintained Latch Relays
DPDT — 10A contact capacity
The RR2KP series latch relays have a self-holding function
using permanent magnets in the magnetic circuit. Applying a
voltage on the set (or reset) coil operates the armature and
retains the contacts in that position until the opposite coil is
energized, hence the latch relays are ideal for memory and
flip-flop circuit applications.
• Enhanced self-holding functions, and vibration and shock
resistance.
• The self-holding mechanism is not subject to wear unlike
mechanical latch relays.
• Recognized by UL and certified by CSA.
Types
Terminal Type Type No. Coil Voltage Code ∗ Ordering Information
Style
AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50, AC100, When ordering, specify the Type No. and
Basic RR2KP-U∗ coil voltage code.
Pin AC110, AC115, AC120, AC200,
Terminal AC220, AC230, AC240 (Example) RR2KP-U AC110
With Check Button RR2KP-UC∗
DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48, DC110
Coil Ratings
Rated Voltage (V)
±10% at 20°C Maximum Continuous
50Hz 60Hz Set and Reset Voltage
Applied Voltage
6 467 429 3.5
12 200 184 23.8
24 100 92 95
50 48 44 400
AC (50/60Hz)
100 24 22 1,600
110 23 21 1,900 80%
110%
115 23 21 2,200 maximum
120 24 22 2,200
200 12 11 6,400
220 10.9 10 7,740
230 11.1 10.2 9,190
240 11.5 10.6 9,190
6 240 25
12 120 100
80%
DC
24 60 400 110%
maximum
48 30 1,600
110 13.8 7,960
Contact Ratings
Maximum Contact Capacity
• UL Ratings
Voltage Resistive General Use Motor Load
Switching Continuous 240V AC 10A 7A 1/3 HP
Voltage Current Resistive Inductive Res. Ind.
Voltage 120V AC 10A 7.5A 1/4 HP
Load Load Load Load
110V AC 10A 7.5A 30V DC 10A 7A —
250V AC 1650 VA AC 1100 VA AC 220V AC 7.5A 5A
125V DC
10A
300W DC 225W DC
• CSA Ratings
30V DC 10A 7.5A
Voltage Resistive General Use Motor Load
100V DC 0.5A 0.3A
240V AC 10A 7A 1/3 HP
Note: Inductive load for rated load — cos ø = 0.3, L/R = 7 ms 120V AC 10A 7.5A 1/4 HP
100V DC Å| 0.5A —
30V DC 10A 7.5A —
380 (06/02/17)
RR2KP Series Latch Relays
Specifications Dimensions
SR3P-05A: 105 (108.5) max., SR3P-511: 87.5 (92) max.
Operate Time 25 ms maximum (at the rated voltage)
Power Consumption AC: 2.4 VA (50 Hz), 2.2 VA (60 Hz) 6
(approx.) DC: 1.5W 5 7
4 8
36
3 9
Between live and dead parts:
2 10
1,500V AC, 1 minute 1 11
Between contact and coil:

1,500V AC, 1 minute
Dielectric Strength 80.5 max. 36
Between contacts of different poles:
1,500V AC, 1 minute
Between contacts of the same pole:
1,000V AC, 1 minute
Electrical: 1800 operations/h maximum All dimensions in mm.
Operating Frequency
Temperature Rise Coil: 85°C maximum, Contact: 65°C maximum • Applicable Socket and Hold-down Spring
0 to 60 m/s2 (maximum frequency: 55 Hz), Socket
Vibration Resistance Hold-down
Frequency: 5 to 55 Hz, Amplitude: 0.5 mm
Shock Resistance 100 m/s2minimum
Mechanical Life 5,000,000 operations minimum SR3P-05A
DIN Rail Mount Socket SR3P-05C SR3P-06F3
Electrical Life 500,000 operations minimum (110V AC, 10A) SR3P-06A
Panel Mount w/Solder Terminals SR3P-511
Operating Humidity 45 to 85% RH (no condensation) SR3P-511F3
Socket w/Wire Wrap Terminals SR3P-70

AC Load DC Load
5000 5000
110V AC resistive
220V AC resistive 30V DC resistive

1000 110V AC inductive 1000
30V DC inductive
500 500
220V AC inductive
100 100
50 50 100V DC resistive
100V DC inductive
10 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

6(+)
5 7
4 8
RESET
3 9
(–) SET
(–) 2 10 (+)
1 11
(06/02/17) 381
RH2L Series Latch Relays
Midget Power Latch Relays
The RH2L series latch relays have a self-holding function by
residual magnetism generated by a special magnetic mate-
rial. The large 10A contact capacity equivalent to the RH and
RR series is provided in a miniature relay package as small
as the IDEC’s RH3 type.
• With a mechanical operation indicator to show the set/reset
status.
• Power saving operation by pulse inputs eliminates the need
of continuous control voltage. RH2LB-U RH2LV2-U
(Plug-in Terminal) (PC Board Terminal)
• Available with plug-in or PC board mount terminals.
• All basic types are recognized by UL and certified by CSA.
Types When ordering, specify the Type No. and
coil voltage code.
Terminal Style Type No. Coil Voltage Code ∗
Plug-in Terminal RH2LB-U∗ AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50, AC100, AC120 (Example) RH2LB-U AC120
PC Board Terminal RH2LV2-U∗ DC6, DC12, DC24 Type No. Coil Voltage Code
Coil Ratings
Set Coil Reset Coil Operation Characteristics
Rated Voltage Rated Current (mA) Rated Current (mA) (against rated values at 20°C)
(V) ±15% at 20°C Coil Resistance (Ω) ±15% at 20°C Coil Resistance (Ω)
Maximum Continuous
±10% at 20°C ±10% at 20°C Set and Reset Voltage
50Hz 60Hz 50Hz 60Hz Applied Voltage
6 227 220 — 68.7 68 —
AC (50/60Hz)
12 103 100 — 34.2 34 —

24 51.2 50 — 17.1 17 — 80%
110%
50 24.7 24 — 10.4 10.3 — maximum
100 12.3 12 — 4.6 4.6 —
120 10.3 10 — 4.2 4.2 —
6 333 18 150 40
80%
DC
12 167 72 75 160 110%

maximum
24 83 288 37.5 640

Maximum Contact Capacity Contact Material Silver cadmium oxide
Allowable Contact Power Rated Load Contact Resistance 50 mΩ maximum (initial value)
Switching Continuous
Voltage Current Resistive Inductive Res. Ind. 30 ms maximum (AC)
Voltage Set Time
Load Load Load Load 20 ms maximum (DC) (at the rated voltage)
110V AC 10A 7.5A 30 ms maximum (AC)
250V AC 1650 VA AC 1100VA AC Reset Time
10A 220V AC 7.5A 5A 20 ms maximum (DC) (at the rated voltage)
125V DC 300W DC 225W DC
30V DC 10A 7.5A Power Consumption Set coil: 1.2 VA (AC), 2W (DC)
(approx.) Reset coil: 0.5 VA (AC), 0.9W (DC)
Note: Inductive load for rated load — cos ø = 0.3, L/R = 7 ms Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
• UL Ratings Between live and dead parts:
2,000V AC, 1 minute
Voltage Resistive General Use Motor Load Between contact and coil:
240V AC 7.5A 6.5A 1/3 HP 2,000V AC, 1 minute
Dielectric Strength
120V AC 10A 7.5A 1/6 HP Between contacts of different poles:
1,500V AC, 1 minute
30V DC 10A — — Between contacts of the same pole:
1,000V AC, 1 minute
• CSA Ratings Electrical: 1800 operations/h maximum
Voltage Resistive General Use Motor Load Operating Frequency
240V AC 7.5A 5A 1/3 HP 0 to 60 m/s2 (maximum frequency: 55 Hz),
120V AC 10A 7.5A 1/6 HP Frequency: 5 to 55 Hz, Amplitude: 0.5 mm
30V DC 10A 7.5A — Shock Resistance 100 m/s2 minimum
382 (06/02/17)
RH2L Series Latch Relays
Operation Indicator Instructions
1. Do not use the RH2L relays in environments where mag-
Operation Indicator netic particles and dust are present in large quantities or
external magnetic field is strong, or in the vicinity of large-
current circuits.
The red flag appears when
the contacts are set.
2. Do not use the RH2L relays in circuits whose power
source contains heavy surges.
3. When two or more RH2L relays are mounted in a row, sep-
arate the relays by 6 mm or more.
4. Do not energize the set and reset coils at the same time.
5. Because of the polarity of the coil, connect the DC input
Internal Connection (Bottom View) voltage to correct terminals of the DC coil type.
1 2 4
5 6 8
9( – ) 10 (+)12
13( – ) SET (+)14
RESET
Dimensions
• RH2LB (Plug-in Terminal)
SH3B-05A: 61.5 (63.5) max., SH3B-51: 39.6 (41.6) max.
4.7
ø2.6 hole
1 4
27.5
5 6 8
0.5
9 10 11
13 14
35.6 max. 6.4 31
• RH2LV2 (PC Board Terminal)
10-ø2.4 holes 10 10
4.7
2
13.15
1 4
7.8
27.5
5 6 8
0.5
9 10 11
13 14
7.25
0.5 31
35.6 max. 4.6

Socket
Hold-down Spring
Mounting Style Type No.
SH3B-05F1
SH3B-05A
DIN Rail Mount Socket SFA-101
SH3B-05C
SFA-202
Panel Mount Socket SH3B-51 SY4S-51F1
SFA-301
PC Board Mount Socket SH3B-62 SFA-302
For details about sockets and hold-down springs, see page 386.
(06/02/17) 383
RY2KS Series Latch Relays
Self-maintained Latch Relays
The RY2KS series latch relays have a self-holding function
using permanent magnets in the magnetic circuit. Applying a
voltage on the set (or reset) coil operates the armature and
retains the contacts in that position until the opposite coil is
energized, hence the latch relays are ideal for memory and
flip-flop circuit applications.
• Mountable in the same space as other miniature relays
using the same sockets.
• Recognized by UL and certified by CSA.
Types
Terminal Type Type No. Coil Voltage Code ∗ Ordering Information
Style
AC6, AC12, AC24, AC50, When ordering, specify the Type No. and
Basic RY2KS-U∗ coil voltage code.
Plug-in AC100, AC120
Terminal DC6, DC12, DC24, DC48, (Example) RY2KS-U AC120
With Check Button RY2KS-UC∗
DC100, DC110 Type No. Coil Voltage Code
Coil Ratings
Rated Voltage (V)
±10% at 20°C Maximum Continuous
50Hz 60Hz Set and Reset Voltage
Applied Voltage
6 260 250 6.3
AC (50/60Hz)
12 120 115 30.3

24 58 56 132 80%
110%
50 27 26 606 maximum
100 13.5 13 2,630
120 11.2 10.8 3,840
6 200 30
12 100 120
24 50 480 80%
DC
110%
48 25 1,920 maximum
100 12 8,330
110 11 10,000

Maximum Contact Capacity Contact Material Gold-plated silver
Allowable Contact Power Rated Load Contact Resistance 50 mΩ maximum (initial value)
Switching Continuous Set Time 25 ms maximum (at the rated voltage)
Voltage Current Resistive Inductive Res. Ind.
Voltage
Load Load Load Load Reset Time 25 ms maximum (at the rated voltage)
110V AC 3A 1.5A Power Consumption AC: 1.6 VA (50 Hz), 1.5 VA (60 Hz)
(approx.) DC: 1.2W
250V AC 660VA AC 176VA AC 220V AC 3A 0.8A
3A Insulation Resistance 100 MΩ minimum (500V DC megger)
125V DC 90W DC 45W DC 30V DC 3A 1.5
Between live and dead parts:
100V DC 0.2A 0.12A 1,500V AC, 1 minute
Note: Inductive load for rated load — cos ø = 0.3, L/R = 7 ms Between contact and coil:
1,000V AC, 1 minute
Dielectric Strength
• UL Ratings Between contacts of different poles:
1,000V AC, 1 minute
Voltage Resistive General Use Between contacts of the same pole:
240V AC 3A 0.8A 700V AC, 1 minute
120V AC 3A 1.5A Electrical: 1800 operations/h maximum
Operating Frequency
30V DC 3A —
Temperature Rise Coil: 85°C maximum, Contact: 65°C maximum
• CSA Ratings 0 to 60 m/s2 (maximum frequency: 55 Hz),
Frequency: 5 to 55 Hz, Amplitude: 0.5 mm
Voltage Resistive General Use
Shock Resistance 200 m/s2 minimum
240V AC 3A 0.8A
120V AC 3A 1.5A Electrical Life 200,000 operations minimum
100V DC — 0.2A Operating Temperature –5 to +40°C (no freezing)
30V DC 3A 1.5A Weight (approx.) 67g
384 (06/02/17)
RY2KS Series Latch Relays
AC Load DC Load
5000 5000
30V DC resistive

1000 1000 30V DC inductive

110V AC resistive
500 500
220V AC resistive
100 100
50 50
110V AC inductive 100V DC resistive

10 220V AC inductive 10 100V DC inductive
0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3
1 4
5 8
9( – ) 10 11 ( + )12
13( – ) SET ( + )14
RESET
Dimensions
Total length from the panel surface including relay socket

SY4S-05A: 81.3 (83.3) max., SY4S-51: 59.3 (62.3) max.
2.6
1 4
5 8
27.5
0.5
9 10 11 12
13 14
55.3 max. 6.4 21

Socket
Hold-down Spring
Mounting Style Type No.
SY4S-05A
DIN Rail Mount Socket SFA-202
SY4S-05C
Panel Mount Socket SY4S-51 SY4S-51F3
(SY4S-02F3)
SY4S-61 SFA-302
PC Board Mount Socket
SY4S-51F3
SY4S-62
(SY4S-02F3)
Notes:
1. For the relays with check button, use the parenthesized hold-
down springs shown in the above table. When the spring is
used, sockets cannot be mounted closely side by side.
2. Leaf springs come in pairs.
3. Use the hold-down springs in environments where the relays are
subject to vibrations or shocks.
For details about sockets and hold-down springs, see page 386.
(06/02/17) 385
Relay Sockets
Socket Selection Guide
Rated Insulation
Mounting No. of Terminal Screw
Series Type No. Type Color Approvals Voltage/ Applicable Relay, etc. Page
Style Poles Applicable Wire
Rated Current
SR2P-05A Standard Black —
M3.5
SR2P-05C Finger-safe 2 Gray UL, CSA, TÜV 250V, 10A RR2P, GT3 (8-pin), GT5P
2 mm2 max.
SR2P-06A Standard Black — 389
SR SR3P-05A Standard Black —
RR3P, RR3PA, RR2KP,
SR3P-05C Finger-safe 3 Gray M3.5 UL, CSA, TÜV
250V, 10A GT3 (11-pin)
SR3P-06A Standard Black 2 mm2 max. —
SR3B-05A Standard 3 Black — RR1BA, RR2BA, RR3B
SH1B-05A Standard Black M3.5 — 250V, 10A 390
1 (coil terminal: M3) RH1B
SH1B-05C Finger-safe Gray 2 mm2 max. UL, CSA, TÜV (coil terminal: 7A)
SH2B-05A Standard Black —

SH2B-05C Finger-safe 2 Gray UL, CSA, TÜV RH2B
SH
SH2B-05D Slim Black —
M3.5
SH3B-05A Standard Black — 250V, 10A 391
3 2 mm2 max. RH3B, RH2LB
SH3B-05C Finger-safe Gray UL, CSA, TÜV
DIN Rail SH4B-05A Standard Black —
Mount 4 RH4B
SH4B-05C Finger-safe Gray UL, CSA, TÜV
SM2S-05A Standard Black — 250V, 7A
M3
2 250V, 7A 392
SM2S-05C Finger-safe Gray 2 mm max. UL, CSA, TÜV RM2S, RU2S, GT5Y-2
SM 2 (UL, TÜV: 10A)
SM2S-05D Slim M3, 1.25 mm2 —
Black 250V, 10A
SM2S-05DF Finger-safe (2 mm2 max.) UL RM2S, RU2S 392
SY2S-05A Standard Black —
2 RY2S, RY22S
SY2S-05C Finger-safe Gray M3 UL, CSA, TÜV
2 250V, 7A
SY4S-05A Standard Black 2 mm max. — 393
SY RY4S, RY2KS, RU4S,
SY4S-05C Finger-safe Gray UL, CSA, TÜV
4 RU42S, GT5Y-U
SY4S-05D Slim M3, 1.25 mm2 — 250V, 6A
Black
SY4S-05DF Finger-safe (2 mm2 max.) UL 250V, 10A RU4S, RU42S, RY4S 393
Solid wire:
SU2S-11L Spring-clamp 2 250V, 10A RU2S, RM2S, GT5Y-2
0.2 to 1.5 mm2
SU Gray UL, CSA, CE
Stranded wire: RU4S, RU42S, RY4S,
SU4S-11L Spring-clamp 4 250V, 6A
0.2 to 1.25 mm2 GT5Y-4 394
SR2P-511 Solder — UL, CSA
2 RR2P, GT3 (8-pin), GT5P
SR2P-70 Wire-wrap — —
SR SR3P-511 Solder Black — UL, CSA 250V, 10A
RR3P, RR3PA, RR2KP,
SR3P-70 Wire-wrap 3 — —
SR3B-51 Solder — UL, CSA RR1BA, RR2BA, RR3B
250V, 10A
SH1B-51 1 — UL, CSA RH1B 395
Panel (coil terminal: 7A)
Mount SH SH2B-51 Solder 2 Black — UL, CSA RH2B
SH3B-51 3 — UL, CSA 250V, 10A RH3B, RH2LB
SH4B-51 4 — UL, CSA RH4B
SM SM2S-51 Solder 2 — UL, CSA 250V, 10A RM2S, RU2S, GT5Y-2
SY2S-51 2 — UL, CSA 250V, 7A RY2S, RY22S 396
Black
SY Solder RY4S, RY2KS, RU4S,
SY4S-51 4 — UL, CSA 250V, 7A (Note)
RU42S, GT5Y-U
250V, 10A
SH1B-62 1 — UL, CSA RH1B
(coil terminal: 7A)
SH SH2B-62 PC board 2 Black — UL, CSA RH2B
397
SH3B-62 3 — UL, CSA 250V, 10A RH3B, RH2LB
PC Board SH4B-62 4 — UL, CSA RH4B
Mount SM2S-61 — UL, CSA RM2S, RU2S, GT5Y-2
SM PC board 2 Black 250V, 10A
SM2S-62 — UL, CSA RM2S, RU2S
SY2S-61 2 — UL, CSA 250V, 7A RY2S, RY22S
398
SY SY4S-61 PC board Black — UL, CSA 250V, 7A (Note) RY4S, RY2KS, RU4S,
4
SY4S-62 — UL, CSA 250V, 7A RU42S, GT5Y-U
Note: When using only 2 poles of the 4-pole sockets SY4S-51 and SY4S-61, the UL rated current is 10A.
• Terminal Screw Tightening Torque for DIN Rail Mount Sockets

Socket Series Terminal Screw Tightening Torque Socket Series Terminal Screw Tightening Torque
SR 1.0 to 1.3 N·m SM 0.6 to 1.0 N·m
SH 1.0 to 1.3 N·m SY 0.6 to 1.0 N·m
386 (06/02/17)
Relay Sockets Series Latch Relays
Sockets and Applicable Hold-down Springs
• DIN Rail Mount Sockets • Panel Mount Sockets and PC Board Mount Sockets
Socket Applicable Relays and Hold-down Spring Socket Applicable Relays and Hold-down Spring
Type No. Timers Wire Spring Leaf Spring Type No. Timers Wire Spring Leaf Spring
SR2P-05A RR2P SR2B-02F1 — RR2P SR3P-01F1 —
SR2P-05C GT5P — SFA-203 SR2P-511
GT3 (8-pin) — SFA-402
SR2P-70
RR2P SR2B-02F1 SFA-202 GT5P — SFA-302
SR2P-06A
GT3 (8-pin), GT5P — SFA-202 RR3P, RR3PA SR3P-01F1 —
RR3P, RR3PA SR3B-02F1 — SR3P-511
SR3P-05A RR2KP SR3P-511F3 —
RR2KP SR3P-06F3 — SR3P-70
SR3P-05C GT3 (11-pin) — SFA-402
GT3 (11-pin) — SFA-203
SR3B-51 RR1BA, RR2BA, RR3B SR3B-02F1 —
RR3P, RR3PA SR3B-02F1 SFA-202
SH1B-51 SFA-301
SR3P-06A RR2KP SR3P-06F3 — RH1B SY4S-51F1
SH1B-62 SFA-302
GT3 (11-pin) — SFA-202
SY4S-51F1 SFA-301
SR3B-05 RR1BA, RR2BA, RR3B SR3B-02F1 SFA-202 RH2B
SH2B-51 (SY4S-02F1) SFA-302
SH1B-05A SFA-101 RH2B-R — SFA-302
RH1B SY2S-02F1
SH1B-05C SFA-202
SY4S-51F1
SFA-101 SH2B-62 RH2B —
SH2B-05A RH2B SY4S-02F1 (SY4S-02F1)
SFA-202
SH2B-05C SH3B-51 SY4S-51F1 SFA-301
RH2B-R — SFA-202 RH3B, RH2LB
SH3B-62 (SH3B-05F1) SFA-302
RH2B — SFA-502
SH2B-05D SH4B-51 SY4S-51F1 × 2 SFA-301
RH2B-R — SFA-511 RH4B
SH4B-62 (SH4B-02F1) SFA-302
SH3B-05A SFA-101 SY4S-51F1 SFA-301
RH3B, RH2LB SH3B-05F1 RM2S, RU2S
SH3B-05C SFA-202 SM2S-51 (SY4S-02F1) SFA-302
SH4B-05A SFA-101 SM2S-61
RH4B SH4B-02F1 GT5Y-2 — SFA-302
SH4B-05C SFA-202
SY4S-51F1
SFA-101 SM2S-62 RM2S, RU2S —
SM2S-05A RM2S, RU2S SY4S-02F1 (SY4S-02F1)
SFA-202
SM2S-05C SY2S-51 SFA-301
GT5Y-2 — SFA-202 RY2S, RY22S SY4S-51F1
SY2S-61 SFA-302
SM2S-05D RM2S, RU2S — SFA-502
SY4S-51F1 SFA-301
SM2S-05DF GT5Y-2 — SFA-511 RY4S, RU4S, RU42S
(SY4S-02F1) SFA-302
SY2S-05A SFA-101 SY4S-51
RY2S, RY22S SY2S-02F1 SY4S-51F3
SY2S-05C SFA-202 SY4S-61 RY2KS SFA-302
(SY4S-02F3)
SFA-101
SY4S-05A RY4S, RU4S, RU42S SY4S-02F1 GT5Y-4 — SFA-302
SFA-202
SY4S-05C SY4S-51F1
RY2KS, GT5Y-4 — SFA-202 RY4S, RU4S, RU42S —
(SY4S-02F1)
RY4S, RU4S, RU42S — SFA-502 SY4S-62
SY4S-05D SY4S-51F3
RY2KS, GT5Y-4 — SFA-511 RY2KS —
(SY4S-02F3)
RY4S, RU4S, RU42S — SFA-502
SY4S-05DF Note 1: When mounting relays with check button on panel mount or PC board
GT5Y-4 — SFA-511 mount sockets, use hold-down springs shown in ( ). Hold-down
SFA-101 springs for relays with check button are not available for SR2P-511,
RU2S, RM2S —
SU2S-11L SFA-202 SR2P-70, SR3P-511, and SR3P-70.
GT5Y-2 — SFA-202 Note 2: For close mounting of panel mount or PC board mount sockets, use
SFA-101 wire springs or SFA-302 leaf springs.
RU4S, RU42S, RY4S — Note 3: SM2S-62 and SY4S-62 sockets cannot be used on GT5Y-2 and
SU4S-11L SFA-202
GT5Y-4 — SFA-202 GY5Y-4 timers.
• Hold-down Springs
Package
Quantity
SR2B-02F1 SR2B-02F1PN10
SR3B-02F1 SR3B-02F1PN10
SR3P-01F1 SR3P-01F1PN10 SR2B-02F1 SR3B-02F1 SR3P-01F1 SR3P-06F3 SR3P-511F3
SR3P-06F3 SR3P-06F3PN10
SR3P-511F3 SR3P-511F3PN10
Wire SH3B-05F1 SH3B-05F1PN10
10
Spring SH4B-02F1 SH4B-02F1PN10
SY2S-02F1 SY2S-02F1PN10
SY4S-02F1 SY4S-02F1PN10 SH3B-05F1 SH4B-02F1 SY4S-02F1 SY2S-02F1 SY4S-02F3
SFA-101 SFA-101PN20
SFA-202 SFA-202PN20 SY4S-51F1 SY4S-51F3 SFA-101 SFA-202 SFA-203
SFA-203 SFA-203PN20
Leaf SFA-301 SFA-301PN20 20
Spring SFA-302 SFA-302PN20 (10 pairs)
SFA-402 SFA-402PN20
SFA-502 SFA-502PN20
SFA-511 SFA-511PN20 SFA-301 SFA-302 SFA-402 SFA-502 SFA-511
(06/02/17) 387
Relay Sockets
Accessories for Sockets
Ordering Package
Name Appearance Specifications Type No. Remarks
Type No. Quantity
Aluminum
BAA1000 BAA1000PN10 10
Weight: Approx. 200g Length: 1m
DIN Rail
Steel Width: 35 mm
BAP1000 BAP1000PN10 10
Weight: Approx. 320g
BNL5 BNL5PN10 10
Zinc-plated steel Used on a DIN rail to fasten
Mounting Clip
Weight: Approx. 15g relay sockets
BNL6 BNL6PN10 10
Thickness: 5 mm
DIN Rail Used for adjusting spacing
Plastic (black) SA-406B SA-406B 1
Spacer between sockets mounted
on a DIN rail
End Spacer SA-203B SA-203B 1

Used for mounting DIN rail
Plastic (black) mount sockets directly on a
Intermediate panel surface
SA-204B SA-204B 1
Spacer
• Accessories for SU Sockets

Ordering Package
Name Appearance Specifications Type No. Remarks
Type No. Quantity
Used for wiring spring-clamp

Screwdriver 75 Weight: Approx. 20g BC1S-SD0 BC1S-SD0 1
2.5
145
terminals on the SU sockets
Used for interconnecting

Brass jumper relay coil terminals on a
with ABS sheath
Jumper SU9Z-J5 SU9Z-J5PN10 10 maximum of five SU sockets;
Rated current: 3A
Weight: Approx. 3g can be cut to required
lengths
• Accessories for SM2S-05DF and SY4S-05DF

SM9Z-JF2 SM9Z-JF2PN10
relay coil terminals on
SM2S-05DF sockets; can be
SM9Z-JF5 SM9Z-JF5PN10 cut to required length.
No. of sockets:
SM9Z-JF2: 2
SM9Z-JF8 SM9Z-JF8PN10 SM9Z-JF5: 5
Jumper 10 SM9Z-JF8: 8
SY9Z-JF2 SY9Z-JF2PN10
relay coil terminals on
SY4S-05DF sockets; can be
SY9Z-JF5 SY9Z-JF5PN10 cut to required length
SY9Z-JF2: 2
SY9Z-JF8 SY9Z-JF8PN10 SY9Z-JF5: 5
SY9Z-JF8: 8
Specify a color code in place

Compatible with RU of ∗ in the Ordeirng Type No.
Marking Plate RU9Z-P∗ RU9Z-P∗PN10 10
relays. A (orange), G (green), S
Marking (blue), W (white), Y (yellow)
Plates
388 (06/02/17)
Relay Sockets
DIN Rail Mount Sockets
SR Series
• SR2P-05A When using
36 DIN Rail
BAA/BAP: 32
8 M3.5 Terminal (BAA/BAP) Terminal Arrangement
Screw
2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes 5 4
(or M4 Tapped Holes) 6 3
ø25
52
33
29 7 2
8 1
4.4 max. 5 min.
ø4.2 hole (Top View)
16.5
3
29 20
7.9 max.
28.5
ø3.6 min.
• SR2P-05C When using

36
BAA/BAP: 33.5 DIN Rail
7
(BAA/BAP)
ø5 (or M4 Tapped Holes) 5 4
6 3
58
29
ø4.2 hole 7 2
8 1
(Top View)
Ring type crimping
21.5 terminals cannot be used.
29
2.2
PRODUCT SERVICE 30
• SR2P-06A 40 When using

8 BAA/BAP: 25.5 DIN Rail
(BAA/BAP) Terminal Arrangement
M3.5 Terminal
2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes 6 5 4 3
Screw
(or M4 Tapped Holes)
ø25
60
33
4.9 max. 5 min. 7 8 1 2

ø4.2 hole
33 (Top View)
18
1
22 7.9 max.
ø3.6 min.
• SR3P-05A When using

42
BAA/BAP: 32 DIN Rail
8 M3.5 Terminal (BAA/BAP Types)
Screw Terminal Arrangement
2-ø4.2 Mounting Hole 7 6 5
ø27
52
33
34 9 3
10 11 1 2
4.4 max. 5 min.
ø4.2 hole (Top View)
34 16.5
20
3
7.9 max.
28.5
ø3.6 min.
• SR3P-05C 42 When using

BAA/BAP: 33.5
7 DIN Rail
(BAA/BAP)
5
ø
7 6 5
58
ø4.2 hole 34 9 3
10 11 1 2
(Top View)
34 21.5 Ring type crimping

2.2
PRODUCT SERVICE
30 terminals cannot be used.
(06/02/17) 389
Relay Sockets
• SR3P-06A 59 When using
8 M3.5 Terminal (BAA/BAP)
2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes 8 7 6 5 4
ø27
60
33
ø4.2 hole 4.9 max. 5 min.

9 10 11 1 2 3
18 (Top View)
33
1
22 7.9 max.
ø3.6 min.
• SR3B-05 When using

36
BAA/BAP: 28.5 DIN Rail Terminal Arrangement
8 M3.5 Terminal (BAA/BAP)
Screw 6 5 4
2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes 3 2 1
4.2 (or M4 Tapped Holes)
37
76
56
B A
4.4 max. 5.5 min. 9 8 7
(Top View)
PRODUCT SERVICE 7.9 max.
37 14.5 ø3.6 min.
2
43 25
SH Series
• SH1B-05A When using
17 BAA/BAP: 28.5
8 18 DIN Rail Terminal Arrangement
M3.5 Terminal
(BAA/BAP)
Screw 2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes
5
1
4.2
67
47
16
M3 Terminal 5.5 min. 4.8 min. 14 13
Screw 9
4.4 max. 4 max.
(Top View)
16 14.5 ø3.6 min. ø3.2 min.
2.5
20 25
7.9 max. 5.9 max.
(For terminals 1, 5, and 9) (For terminals 13 and 14)
• SH1B-05C
When using
17 BAA/BAP: 33
M3.5 Terminal
7 25
Screw DIN Rail Terminal Arrangement
(BAA/BAP)
ø5 5
2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes 1
4.2
48
69
16
M3 Terminal
14 13
Screw
9
Ring type crimping
16 18.7 (Top View)
PRODUCT SERVICE
terminals cannot be used.
1.7
20 29.5

22 BAA/BAP: 28.5
8 M3.5 Terminal 18 DIN Rail
Screw
4.2
4 1
67
47
26
4.4 max. 5.5 min. 14 13

12 9
26 14.5 (Top View)

7.9 max.
2.5
30 25 ø3.6 min.
390 (06/02/17)
Relay Sockets
• SH2B-05C
When using
22 BAA/BAP: 33
7 M3.5 Terminal 25 DIN Rail
Screw (BAA/BAP) Terminal Arrangement
ø5 2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes 8 5

4.2
49
69
26
14 13
12 9
PRODUCT SERVICE
18.7 Ring type crimping (Top View)
26
1.7
30 29.5
• SH2B-05D When using

28 M3.5 Terminal BAA/BAP: 34.5 DIN Rail
6.7 Screw (BAA/BAP) 2-M3 or M4
19.5 (or 4.5 Mounting Holes)
4 1
8 5
4.3 max. 5.8 min.

68
78
57
68
6
12 9
6.6 max.
14 13
ø3.6 min.
19
4.5 8 (Top View)
19 30

32 BAA/BAP: 28.5
8 18 DIN Rail
M3.5 Terminal Terminal Arrangement
(BAA/BAP)
Screw
2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes 8 6 5
4.2
(or M4 Tapped Holes) 4 2 1

67
47
36
4.4 max. 5.5 min. 14 13

12 10 9
(Top View)
36 14.5
7.9 max.
2.5
40 25 ø3.6 min.
• SH3B-05C When using

32
M3.5 Terminal BAA/BAP: 33
7 Screw DIN Rail
25 Terminal Arrangement
(BAA/BAP)
8 6 5
ø5 2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes
4 2 1
4.2
49
69
36
14 13
12 10 9
Ring type crimping (Top View)

36 18.7
PRODUCT SERVICE
1.7
40 29.5

42 BAA/BAP: 28.5
8 18 DIN Rail
M3.5 Terminal Terminal Arrangement
(BAA/BAP)
Screw
8 7 6 5
4.2
4 3 2 1
67
47
46
4.4 max. 5.5 min. 14 13

12 11 10 9
(Top View)
46 14.5
7.9 max.
2.5
50 25 ø3.6 min.
(06/02/17) 391
Relay Sockets
• SH4B-05C When using
42 BAA/BAP: 33
7 25
DIN Rail
ø5 2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes 8 7 6 5

(or M4 Tapped Holes) 4 3 2 1
4.2
49
69
46
14 13
12 11 10 9
PRODUCT SERVICE Ring type crimping (Top View)

46 18.7 terminals cannot be used.
1.7
50 29.5
SM Series
• SM2S-05A When using
30 BAA/BAP: 28.5
0.7
6 18
DIN Rail
M3 Terminal (BAA/BAP) Terminal Arrangement
Screw

62
45
26
14 13
4.2
4 max. 4.8 min.

12 9
18.5 (Top View)

26 25 5.9 max.
3
ø3.2 min.
• SM2S-05C 30 When using

6 (BAA/BAP)
M3 Terminal 25
ø5.5 18 (or M4 Tapped Holes) 8 5
4 1
4.2
64
46
26
14 13
12 9
Ring type crimping
terminals cannot be used. (Top View)
26 18.2
1.6
PRODUCT SERVICE
29
• SM2S-05D When using

22 BAA/BAP: 33.5 2-M3 or M4
DIN Rail Terminal
6 M3 Terminal 18.4 (or 4.5 Mounting Holes) Arrangement
(BAA/BAP)
Screw
4 1
8 5
3.7 max. 5.3 min.
69.5
59
59
52
5.9 max.
ø3.2 min. 12 9
14 13
5
15
4.5 6 (Top View)
15 30
• SM2S-05DF 22 35.3 2-M3, M4, or Terminal

7 21.1 ø4.5 Holes Arrangement
6 4
1 ø5.6 4.0 max. 5.3 to 7.0 4 1
8 5
59 ±0.3
69.5
M3 Terminal
59
Screw
3.2 min.
5.9 max.
12 9
15±0.2 14 13
5
(Top View)
5
4.5 6
15 30
392 (06/02/17)
Relay Sockets
SY Series
• SY2S-05A 17
When using
BAA/BAP: 28.5
6
18 DIN Rail
M3 Terminal (BAA/BAP) Terminal Arrangement
Screw
4 1
62
45
16
4.2
4 max. 4.8 min. 14 13
12 9
16 14.5 (Top View)

5.9 max.
20 25
2
ø3.2 min.
• SY2S-05C When using

17.2 BAA/BAP: 32.5
M3 Terminal
6 Screw DIN Rail
25 Terminal Arrangement
(BAA/BAP) 2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes
8 5
ø5 4 1
4.2
16
64
46
14 13
12 9
16 18.2
1.6
29
2
PRODUCT SERVICE 20
• SY4S-05A 30 When using

BAA/BAP: 28.5
0.7
6
DIN Rail
M3 Terminal 18 (BAA/BAP) Terminal Arrangement
Screw 2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes
8 7 6 5
4 3 2 1
62
45
26
4 max. 4.8 min.

4.2
14 13
12 11 10 9
18.5 (Top View)

5.9 max.
26 25
3
ø3.2 min.
• SY4S-05C When using

30 BAA/BAP: 32.5
6 M3 Terminal DIN Rail
25
Screw (BAA/BAP) Terminal Arrangement
2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes 8 7 6 5
ø5.5 18
(or M4 Tapped Holes) 4 3 2 1
4.2
46
64
26
14 13
12 11 10 9
26 18.2
1.6
29
2
PRODUCT SERVICE
• SY4S-05D When using

29 BAA/BAP: 33.5
2-M3 or M4
18.4 DIN Rail Terminal
6 (or 4.5 Mounting Holes)
M3 Terminal (BAA/BAP) Arrangement
Screw
3 2 1
8 7 6 5
3.7 max. 5.3 min.

69.5
59
52
59
5.9 max.
12 11 10 9
ø3.2 min.
4 14 13
5
4.5 22
6 (Top View)
22 30
• SY4S-05DF 29 35.3
2-M3, M4, or
7 21.1 ø4.5 Holes Terminal
6 4 Arrangement
ø5.6
3 2 1
4.0 max. 5.3 to 7.0 8 7 6 5

59 ±0.3
69.5
M3 Terminal
59
Screw
3.2 min.
5.9 max.
12 11 10 9
22 ±0.2 4 14 13
5
5
4.5 6 (Top View)

22 30
(06/02/17) 393
Relay Sockets
SU Series
• SU2S-11L 31
12 11 10 9
8 7 6 5
2-ø3.2
24.0 Mounting Holes 4 3 2 1
80
37.5
28.8
14 13
32 Ring type crimping

4.4 (Top View)
• SU4S-11L 31
12 11 10 9
8 7 6 5
2-ø3.2
24.0 Mounting Holes 4 3 2 1
80
37.5
28.8
14 13
32 Ring type crimping (Top View)

4.4
Panel Mount Sockets

SR Series
• SR2P-511
Surfarface

Panel

6
4 5
0
ø29
3 6
38
38
50
ø3
2 7
1 8
(Bottom View)
34 2.5 10 11
2.5
• SR2P-70
Surfarface

Panel
4.2
(or M3 Tapped Holes
6
4 5
0
ø29
3 6
38
38
50
ø3
2 7
1 8
(Bottom View)
34 2.5 10 17.5
2.5
• SR3P-511
Surfarface

4.2
Panel

6
5 6 7
0
ø29
4 8
38
38
50
ø3
3 9
2 10
1 11
(Bottom View)
34 2.5 10 11
2.5
394 (06/02/17)
Relay Sockets
• SR3P-70
Surfarface
Panel
6
5 6 7
0
ø29
4 8
38
38
50
ø3
3 9
2 10
1 11
(Bottom View)
34 2.5 10 17.5
2.5
• SR3B-51
35.5∗ 2-ø4.2 Mounting Holes
38 7.5 11 max. Terminal Arrangement (M4 Tapped Holes)
6.75 22
11.5 min.
1 2 3
0.3
32.5
51.5
4 5 6
32
35
43
43
7 8 9
A B
22 3 6.5
(Bottom View)
(Tolerance ±0.3)
3.5 ∗ When two or more sockets are

PRODUCT SERVICE 35 mounted side by side:
L = 38 (N – 1) + 35.5
N: No. of sockets mounted
SH Series
• SH1B-51 Panel Thickness: [18 (N–1) + 12.4] +0.5
0
1 to 2 Terminal Arrangement
1 25.6 +0.2
0
5
25.4
31
9
13 14
0.3
18 3 (Bottom View) N: No. of sockets mounted

5.4 min.∗
11
18.7
3.5 ∗ 10.4 min. when using hold-down springs

2.4
12.2
• SH2B-51 Panel Thickness: [27 (N–1) + 21.4]

+0.5
0
1 to 2
1 4
+0.2
0
5 8
25.4
25.6
31
9 12
13 14
0.3

5.4 min.∗
11
18.7
∗ 10.4 min. when using hold-down springs

3.5
21.2

0
1 to 2
+0.2
1 2 4
0
5 6 8
25.6
25.4
31
9 10 12
13 14
0.3

5.4 min.∗
11
18.7

30.2
(06/02/17) 395
Relay Sockets
0
1 to 2
1 2 3 4
+0.2
0
5 6 7 8
25.4
25.6
31
9 10 11 12
13 14
0.3
45 3 N: No. of sockets mounted
(Bottom View)
5.4 min.∗
11
18.7
3.5
39.2
SM Series
• SM2S-51 Panel Thickness:
1 to 2 [27 (N–1) + 21.4] +0.5
0
25.6 +0.2
1 4
0
5 8
25.4
31
9 12
13 14
0.3
27 3 N: No. of sockets mounted
5.4 min.∗
(Bottom View)
11
18.7

21.2
SY Series
• SY2S-51 Panel Thickness: [18(N–1)+12.4] +0.5
0
1 to 2
+0.2
1 4
0
25.4
5 8
31
25.6
9 12
13 14
0.3

5.4 min.∗
11
18.7
2.4 ∗ 10.4 min. when husing hold-down springs
12.2
• SY4S-51 Panel Thickness: [27 (N–1) + 21.4] + 0.5

0
1 to 2
1 2 3 4
+0.2
0
5 6 7 8
25.4
31
25.6
9 10 11 12
13 14
0.3

5.4 min.∗
11
18.7

2.4
21.2
396 (06/02/17)
Relay Sockets
PC Board Mount Sockets
SH Series
• SH1B-62
Terminal Arrangement 3-ø2.4 holes 6.8 18 min.
6.95
1 4.4
5
4.7
25.4
31
9
13 14
11.85
0.3
18 3 (Bottom View)
5.95
11
31 min.∗
2-ø2 holes
15
2
1.5 (Tolerance ±0.1)
∗ 36 min. when using
12.2 hold-down springs
• SH2B-62
Terminal Arrangement 2.85 21.5 min.
1 4 15.5
5.65
5 8
25.4
10
29
4.7
9 12
13 14
0.3
3 (Bottom View)
29 min.∗ 12.5
21.2
11
6.6
15 8-ø2.4 holes
2
∗ 34 min. when using (Tolerance ±0.1)
hold-down springs
• SH3B-62
Terminal Arrangement 36 min.
7.35 21.3
1 2 4
5 6 8 10 10
25.4
4.7
31
9 10 12
13 14
0.3
6.65
12.5
36 3 (Bottom View)
11
6.6
31 min.∗
15
11-ø2.4 holes
2
30.2 ∗ 36 min. when using (Tolerance ±0.1)
hold-down springs
• SH4B-62
Terminal Arrangement 6.85 45 min.
1 2 3 4 31.3
6.65
5 6 7 8
25.4
10 10 10
4.7
31
9 10 11 12
13 14
0.3
45 3 (Bottom View)
12.5
11
31 min.∗
6.6
15
14-ø2.4 holes
2
39.2 ∗ 36 min. when using
hold-down springs (Tolerance ±0.1)
SM Series
• SM2S-61
Terminal Arrangement 13.2 13.8 min.
4.1
1 4
10.4
5 8
25.4
31
9 12
9
16.8
13 14
0.3
27 3 (Bottom View)
14.2 min.∗
11
9-ø2 holes
15
1.4
∗ 19.2 min. when using (Tolerance ±0.1)

1.5
hold-down springs
21.2
(06/02/17) 397
Relay Sockets
• SM2S-62 13.2 8.2 min.∗∗
4.1
1 4
10.4
9
5 8
16.8
0.3
29
9 12
13 14
1.4
21.2 3 (Bottom View)
9-ø2 holes
11
12.2 min.∗
15
(Tolerance ±0.1)
1.5 ∗ 17.2 min. when using a hold-down spring.

∗∗ 13.2 min. when using a hold-down spring for
the relay with check button.
SY Series
• SY2S-61 13.6 min.
4.4
10.4
4.1
1 4
5 8
25.4
9
14.2 min.∗ 16.8
31
9 12
13 14
0.3
18 3 (Bottom View)
11 8-ø2 holes
15
1.5 hold-down springs
12.2
• SY4S-61 13.2 13.8 min.

8.8
10.4 4.4
4.1
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
25.4
9
31
16.8
9 10 1112
13 14
14.2 min.∗
0.3
27 3 (Bottom View)
11
15-ø2 holes
15
1.4

1.5
hold-down springs
21.2
• SY4S-62 13.2 8.2 min.∗∗

8.8
4.4
4.1
1 2 3 4
10.4
5 6 7 8
16.8
0.3
29
9 10 1112
13 14
1.4
21.2 3 (Bottom View)

11 15-ø2 holes
12.2 min.∗
15
(Tolerance ±0.1)
1.5 ∗ 17.2 min. when using a hold-down spring.

∗∗ 13.2 min. when using a hold-down spring for
the relay with check button
398 (06/02/17)
Relay Sockets
Accessories
DIN Rails
Material Type No. Ordering Type No. Package Quantity
Aluminum BAA1000 BAA1000PN10 10
Steel BAP1000 BAP1000PN10 10
BAA/BAP
BAA BAP 12.5 12.5 1.7
5.5
BAA:31
BAP:27
The BAA is a 35-mm-wide DIN rail made of dura-
35
25
ble extruded aluminum.
The BAP is a 35-mm-wide DIN rail made of rust 7.5
proof sheet steel.
Mounting Clip
Application Example of Mounting Clip and DIN Rail Spacer
9-mm wide
Use DIN rail spacers for adding space between adjoining sockets to
prevent miswiring and identify wiring groups.
BNL5
9-mm wide
BNL6
10 mm 5 mm 10 mm
Use of the BNL5 or BNL6 mounting clip is recom- Two spacers Two spacers Two spacers
mended at the both ends of the socket row mount-
ed on the DIN rail to prevent the sockets from
moving sideways.
Type No. Ordering Type No. Package Quantity Installation of Mounting Clip and DIN Rail Spacer
BNL5 BNL5PN10 10
DIN Rail
BNL6 BNL6PN10 10 (BAA/BAP)
DIN Rail Spacer
Mounting Clip
BNL5 Spacer
Spacers of 5-mm thick are designed to provide SA-406B
spacing between DIN rail mount sockets when
mounted on 35-mm wide DIN rails. The spacers
snap on and off the rail like sockets.
Type No. Package Quantity Color
SA-406B 1 Black
(06/02/17) 399
Relay Sockets
Surface Mounting of DIN Rail Mount Socket
• End Spacer Collective Mounting
Single Mounting For saving the need for screw tightening and drilling

SA-203B 1 Black
• Intermediate Spacer

SA-204B 1 Black SA-203B
SA-204B
SA-203B
The end spacer and intermediate spacer are used

for mounting DIN rail mount sockets on panel sur-
faces. In collective mounting using these spacers,
screws can be eliminated at every other socket.
Mounting centers are the same in single mounting M4 Screw
and collective mounting. 18 mm Plain Washer
Note: DIN rail mount sockets can also mount directly on panel Hold-down Spring
surfaces without using these spacers, then the mounting 5 mm
centers are different from when using spacers.
Socket A (mm)
SR3B-05A 44
ø4.2 Mounting Holes SH1B-05A 21
or M4 Tapped Holes
SH2B-05A 31
SH3B-05A 41
A A A SH4B-05A 51
SM2S-05A 31
SY2S-05A 21
SY4S-05A 31
Collective Mounting of Panel Mount Sockets

The SY, SM, and SH series panel mount sockets
are designed to mount in panel cut-outs collective- A (Total width of the sockets mounted)
W = A – 5.6 +0
ly. These sockets can be mounted in the same –0.5
panel cut-out due to the standardized size.

• Mounting into Panel Cut-out
To mount, insert the sockets with mounting springs
facing top and bottom edges of the panel cut-out.
SY2S-51 SY4S-51 SM2S-51 SH1B-51 SY4S-51
Push the mounting spring using a screwdriver until SY4S-51 SY2S-51 SH1B-51 SH2B-51
the mounting spring clicks into the panel.
Panel cut-out width W = 18 + 27 + 27 + 18 + 27 + 18 + 18 + 27 + 27 – 5.6
+0
= 201.4 –0.5
Push Panel
• Socket Width
Spring Socket Width
SH1B-51 18 mm
SH2B-51 27 mm
SH3B-51 36 mm
SH4B-51 45 mm
SM2S-51 27 mm
SY2S-51 18 mm
SY4S-51 27 mm
400 (06/02/17)
Relay Sockets
SU Series Sockets: General Instructions For photos and dimensions, see page 394.
Parts Description Wiring Instructions

Wire Port for Terminal No. 10
COM Wire Ports
Terminals
Screwdriver Ports Two wire ports are
Wire Ports provided for each terminal.
NO Wire Port
Terminals Screwdriver Ports
NC Wire Ports Screwdriver Port Wire Port for
Terminals Screwdriver Ports Terminal No. 9
➃
➀ Correct Incorrect
➁ ➄ Direction of Screwdriver Tip
➅
➂ 1. Insert the optional screwdriver (BC1S-SD0) or an applica-
Wire Ports
ble screwdriver into the square-shaped port as shown, un-
Coil til the screw-driver tip
Terminals Screwdriver Ports
touches the bottom of
the spring.
Clamp Marking Plate
➀➁➄➅ : Spring slots for SFA-101 leaf springs 2. Push in the screwdriver until it touches the bottom of the
➁➂➃➄ : Spring slots for SFA-202 leaf springs port. The wire port is now open, and the screwdriver is
held in place. The
Applicable Wires screwdriver will not
Wire Size
come off even if you
release your hand.
Stranded Wire 0.2 to 1.25 mm2 or AWG24 to16
Solid Wire 0.2 to 1.5 mm2 or AWG24 to16
3. While the screwdriver is retained in the port, insert the wire
Wire Insulation Diameter ø3.15 mm maximum or ferrule into the round-shaped wire port. Each wire port
can accommodate one wire or ferrule. When connecting
• Strip the wire insulation 9 to 10 mm from the end.
two wires to one ter-
9 to 10 mm minal, use the adjoin-
ing port of the same
terminal.
• In applications using ferrules for stranded wires, choose 4. Pull out the screwdriver. The connection is now complete.
the ferrule listed in the table below. Make sure that an insu-
lation sheath is applied when using the ferrules. When
using stranded wires without ferrules, make sure that the
core wires have not been loosened.
Applicable Ferrules • When using thin wires with insulation diameter of ø1.6 mm
or less, do not insert the wire too deeply where the insula-
Applicable Wire
tion inserts into the spring clamp opening. Make sure that
(stranded) Type No. Manufacturer the wire insulation is stripped 9 to 10 mm and the wire is
mm2 AWG inserted to the bottom.
0.25 24 AI 0.25-12BU Wire Port Bottom
— 22 AI 0.34-8TQ
Phoenix Contact
AI 0.5-8WH
0.5 20
AI 0.5-10WH
Incorrect Correct
Applicable Screwdriver
• Do not twist the screwdriver
• For wiring, use the optional screwdriver (BC1S-SD0) or the inserted into the screwdriver
following applicable screwdriver. port in the socket, otherwise
the socket may break.
(06/02/17) 401
Relay Sockets
Marking Plate • Installing the SU9Z-J5 Jumper on Two, Three, or Four
Write markings on the SU sockets using an oil-based marker, SU Sockets
or glue printed mylar on the marking surface. The size of the As shown below, slide the jumper in the sheath so that the
printed mylar can be 8 × 9 mm maximum. jumper aligns with the center of the sheath.
Sheath
Marking Surface
8.0 8.0
Jumper off Center Jumper Jumper on Center
9.0
With the sheath properly installed on the jumper, cut the

Marking Plate Maximum Size of Position of Printed Mylar sheath and jumper at the points shown below, using cutting
Printed Mylar on the Marking Surface pliers. Referring to the drawing on the below right, make sure
that the sheath and jumper are cut within the cutting area.
• Installing the Marking Plate Dispose of unused portions according to local waste disposal
Because of its removable structure, the marking plate may requirements.
have fallen from the socket or become loose in delivery. Make
sure that the marking plate is securely installed before start- Y Z Sheath
Jumper
ing operation. The marking plate protects the conductive por- X
Sheath
tion of the socket, located under the marking plate, by
preventing metal fragments or pieces of wire from dropping
Cutting Area C Cutting Area D
inside. Should any such fragments enter the socket, they may
cause fire hazard, damage, or malfunction. A B CD Cutting Area in Detail
Marking Plate For Connecting Jumper Quantity Cutting Area Discard

2 sockets 2 A, C Y
2 sockets 1
A, B X
3 sockets 1
4 sockets 1 D Z
After cutting the jumper and sheath, slide the jumper as

No Marking Plate Loose Fit Installed Securely shown below, so that the ends of the jumper are not exposed.
Cut Surface
SU9Z-J5 Jumper for SU2S-11L and SU4S-11L
The SU9Z-J5 is used to install five sockets. When installing
less than five sockets, cut the jumper according to the instruc-
tions described below. • Jumper Wiring to Six or More SU Sockets
The SU9Z-J5 is for coil terminals only. To jumper wire six or more SU sockets, connect five sockets
• SU9Z-J5 Jumper Specifications using whole jumpers and the remaining sockets using a cut
Rated Current 3A jumper. Then connect the two terminals on adjoining sockets
Conductor Nickel-plated brass using an applicable wire (see table below).
Material
Sheath ABS resin Proper Wire
• Installing the SU9Z-J5 Jumper
Loosen the marking plate on the socket.
Making sure that the SU9Z-J5 jumper is correctly aligned, in-
sert the blades into the ports in the groove of the SU socket.
Jumper Wiring of Terminal 14 between Adjoining Sockets

Jumper Port
Jumper Port for Terminal 13
for Terminal 14 Wire Size
Blade Stranded Wire 0.2 to 1.25 mm2
Solid Wire 0.2 to 1.5 mm2
AWG 24 to 16
Note 1: Use a wire with cable insulation diameter of ø3.15 mm max-
Jumper Groove Jumper imum.
Note 2: Strip the cable insulation 9 to 10 mm from the end.
Correct Incorrect
Safety Precautions
Turn off the power to the SU9Z-J5 jumper before starting in-
Insertion Direction
stallation, removal, wiring, maintenance, or inspection of the
Press down the marking plate to jumper, failure to turn power off may cause an electrical
secure the jumper. The jumper shock or fire hazard.
installation is now complete.
To avoid a short circuit due to incorrect wiring, confirm which
terminals are connected to the jumper before starting wiring.
402 (06/02/17)
Relay Sockets
DF Finger-safe Sockets: Operating Instructions For photos and dimensions, see pages 392 and 393.
Hold-down Springs
Installation Removal
Insert hold-down springs into the grooves as shown below. Make sure Remove hold-down springs by lifting them up while depressing the
that the small projections on the springs are facing outward. small projections on the hold-down springs.
Hold-down Springs
Press the projection.
Hold-down
Spring Grooves
Press the projection.
SM2S-05DF SY4S-05DF
SM2S-05DF SY4S-05DF
Using GT5Y-2 Timers and SM2S-05DF Sockets
When installing two or more GT5Y-2 timers on SM2S-05DF sockets in close mounting
proximity as shown below, take the derating curve into consideration.
Up Derating Curve
5A
Switching Current
SM2S-05DF Socket
2.5A
40°C 50°C
Ambient Temperature
Safety Precautions
• Turn off power to the socket before starting installation, proper tightening torque. Do not tighten more than the
removal, wiring, maintenance, and inspection of the relays. maximum torque. Also, do not leave the terminal screws
Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shock or fire tightened loosely, otherwise overheating may result in fire
hazard. hazard.
• Do not touch the terminals while power is applied, other- • Observe specifications and rated values, otherwise electri-
wise electrical shock or fire hazard may result. cal shock or fire hazard may be caused.
• Use wires of the proper size to meet voltage and current
requirements. Tighten terminal screws on the socket to the
(06/02/17) 403
Specifications and other descriptions in this catalog are subject to change without notice.
7-31, Nishi-Miyahara 1-Chome, Yodogawa-ku, Osaka 532-8550, Japan
Tel: +81-6-6398-2571, Fax: +81-6-6392-9731
E-mail: products@idec.co.jp
IDEC CORPORATION (USA) IDEC ELEKTROTECHNIK GmbH IDEC IZUMI (H.K.) CO., LTD.
1175 Elko Drive, Sunnyvale, CA 94089-2209, USA Wendenstrasse 331, D-20537 Hamburg, Germany Unit 1505-07, DCH Commercial Centre No. 25,
Tel: +1-408-747-0550 / (800) 262-IDEC (4332) Tel: +49-40-25 30 54 10, Fax: +49-40-25 30 54 24 Westlands Road, Quarry Bay, Hong Kong
Fax: +1-408-744-9055 / (800) 635-6246 E-mail: service@idec.de Tel: +852-2803-8989, Fax: +852-2565-0171
E-mail: opencontact@idec.com IDEC (SHANGHAI) CORPORATION E-mail: info@hk.idec.com
IDEC CANADA LIMITED Room 608-609, 6F, Gangtai Plaza, No. 700, IDEC TAIWAN CORPORATION
Unit 22-151, Brunel Road Mississauga, Ontario, Yan'an East Road, Shanghai 200001, P.R.C. 8F-1, No. 79, Hsin Tai Wu Road, Sec. 1,
L4Z 1X3, Canada Tel: +86-21-5353-1000, Fax: +86-21-5353-1263 Hsi-Chih, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: +1-905-890-8561, Toll Free: (888) 317-4332 E-mail: idec@cn.idec.com Tel: +886-2-2698-3929, Fax: +866-2-2698-3931
Fax: +1-905-890-8562 IDEC (SHANGHAI) CORPORATION E-mail: service@idectwn.com.tw
E-mail: sales@ca.idec.com Beijing Office IDEC IZUMI ASIA PTE. LTD.
IDEC AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. Unit 1002, No. 10 Kuntai Building, Zhaowai Dajie, No. 31, Tannery Lane #05-01, Dragon Land
2/3 Macro Court, Rowville, Victoria 3178, Australia Zhao Yang District, Beijing, 100020, P.R.C. Building, Singapore 347788
Tel: +61-3-9763-3244, Toll Free: 1800-68-4332 Tel: +86-10-6599-5541, Fax: +86-10-6599-5540 Tel: +65-6746-1155, Fax: +65-6844-5995
Fax: +61-3-9763-3255 E-mail: info@sg.idec.com
IDEC (SHENZHEN) CORPORATION
E-mail: sales@au.idec.com Unit AB-3B2, Tian Xiang Building, Tian’an Cyber Park,
IDEC ELECTRONICS LIMITED Fu Tian District, Shenzen, Guang Dong 518040, P.R.C.
Unit 2, Beechwood, Chineham Business Park, Tel: +86-755-8356-2977, Fax: +86-755-8536-2944
Basingstoke, Hampshire RG24 8WA, UK
Tel: +44-1256-321000, Fax: +44-1256-327755
www.idec.com E-mail: sales@uk.idec.com (06/02/17)
Cat. No. EP1116-0 MARCH 2006 17DNP PRINTED IN JAPAN

EP1116-0 ControlUnits Relays 060217

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EP1116-0 ControlUnits Relays 060217

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Control Units &

New Company Logo

In November 2005, IDEC celebrated its 60th anniversary.

The corporate shoulder phrase:

We will reinforce our cooperative

ø22mm LW Series Control Units

ø22mm HW Series Control Units

ø22mm YW Series Control Units

ø22mm TW Series Control Units

Page 177 Page 319

ø30mm Series Control Units RJ Series Slim Power Relays

ø16mm XA Series / ø22mm XW Series RU/RR/RH/RM/RY Relays

Add Style to Your Panel

LW Series Flush Silhouette Control Units

L6/A6 Series Flush Silhouette Bezels

Save The new contact block design greatly

Self-Retained Locking Lever

The innovative plastic locking lever is self-

Raked Surface Rolling Action

(1) Normal State (2) Rolling (3) Fully Depressed

Safe Break Action

New Safety Products

Emergency Stop Switch

(hazardous) standby to turn off (safe)

Normal Operator Stroke Latched Normal Operator Stroke Latched

IEC60947-5-5, 5.2, IEC60947-5-1, Annex K

Easy Operation Variety

Unlatching by pulling Unlatching by turning

Two Button Colors

Bright Red Dark Red

What is an enabling switch?

HG2S CC Pendant HE1G Grip Switch

Two HE1B Enabling

HE9Z-GSH51 Grip Switch Housing

Disparity detection of two contacts

• ANSI B11.19, 12.3.1.3

RJ Series Slim Power Relays

• Large Switching Capacity Black:

• IDEC’s Unique Light Guide Structure

• Standard Screw Terminal Type

• Finger-safe Screw Terminal Type (IP20)

By combining with the RU series relays, the

CSA 166730 (LR21451)

Specifications and Ratings

Contact Ratings Specifications

Mounting Hole Layout Ordering Information

Note: Mounting centers should be determined to ensure easy

Flush Bezel (Round Metal Bezel) – Non-Illuminated

PC Board Terminal Tab Terminal

Screw Terminal PC Board Terminal Solder/Tab Terminal

Note: SPDT has C, NO, and NC only in the

• For PC board dimensions, see page 21.

Flush Bezel (Round / Square Black Plastic Bezel) – Non-Illuminated

PC Board Drilling Layout

Switch Switch Switch

Pay attention to the pattern of the PC board as the

LED 12V AC/DC ±10% LW6MP-13➁ LW6MP-1C03V➁ LW6MP-13M➁

24V AC/DC ±10% LW6MP-14➁ LW6MP-1C04V➁ LW6MP-14M➁

LED 12V AC/DC ±10% LW6MP-23➁ LW6MP-2C03V➁ LW6MP-23M➁

24V AC/DC ±10% LW6MP-24➁ LW6MP-2C04V➁ LW6MP-24M➁

LED 12V AC/DC ±10% LW6P-13➁ LW6P-1C03V➁ LW6P-13M➁

24V AC/DC ±10% LW6P-24➁ LW6P-2C04V➁ LW6P-24M➁

LED 12V AC/DC ±10% LW7P-13➁ LW7P-1C03V➁ LW7P-13M➁

24V AC/DC ±10% LW7P-14➁ LW7P-1C04V➁ LW7P-14M➁